JP7044130B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. In addition to the design, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device. As a result, the displayed contents were diversified to improve the interest.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886

However, there is a need for further improvement in interest .

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, and a determination condition. The discriminating means capable of discriminating the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment, the display means for dynamically displaying the discriminating information for showing the discriminating result by the discriminating means, and the display means thereof. When the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed, it is stored in the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied. A symbol display means for displaying a symbol corresponding to each of the above information on the display means, and a pre-execution of discrimination based on the information before the determination condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied. The symbol display when the specific condition determination means for determining the establishment of the specific condition and the specific condition determination means determine the establishment of the specific condition based on the determination result of the determination means and the prior determination means. It has a variable display means for varying the display mode of the symbol displayed by the means, and as a background mode of the identification information displayed on the display means, a first background mode in which the symbol is displayed and the said. The background mode determining means for determining a background mode for determining one background aspect from a plurality of said background embodiments including at least a second background aspect in which a symbol is not displayed, and the background mode determining means determined by the background mode determining means. The background mode display means for displaying the background mode corresponding to the background mode on the display means, and the second background mode display means in a state where the display mode of the symbol is variably displayed by the variable display means. A specific mode display means capable of displaying a specific mode capable of identifying information about the symbol that has been variably displayed when the background mode is variably displayed, and a second background in which the symbol is not displayed. It has a means capable of displaying an identification mode in which a player can identify the number of information stored in the storage means during a period in which the mode is displayed, and the specific mode is variable. The expectation degree information for showing the expectation degree that the identification information corresponding to the said symbol displayed in the above is displayed in the mode for showing the specific determination result is displayed in an identifiable manner. Is made possible .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the above-mentioned based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. A discriminating means capable of discriminating the information stored in the storage means, a display means for dynamically displaying the discriminating information for showing the discriminating result by the discriminating means, and the discriminating result specific to the display means. When the identification information based on the above is displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied. A symbol display means for displaying the corresponding symbols on the display means, a pre-discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the information before the discrimination condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied, and a pre-discrimination means thereof. When the specific condition determination means for determining the establishment of the specific condition and the specific condition determination means determine the establishment of the specific condition based on the result of the determination by the prior determination means, the symbol display means displays the display. It has a variable display means for varying the display mode of the symbol, and as a background mode of the identification information displayed on the display means, a first background mode in which the symbol is displayed and the symbol are not displayed. Corresponds to the background mode determining means for determining the background mode for determining one background aspect from the plurality of background embodiments including at least the second background aspect, and the background mode determined by the background mode determining means. In a state where the background aspect display means for displaying the background aspect on the display means and the variable display means display the symbol display mode in a variable manner, the background aspect display means can change the background aspect to the second background aspect. A specific mode display means capable of displaying a specific mode capable of identifying information about the symbol that has been variably displayed, and a second background mode in which the symbol is not displayed are displayed. It has a means capable of displaying an identification mode in which a player can identify the number of information stored in the storage means during a period of time, and the specific mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is made possible to display the expectation degree information for showing the expectation degree that the identification information corresponding to the symbol is displayed in the mode for showing the specific said discrimination result in the discriminable mode. There is .

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a regulation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a roller member. (A) is a side view of the regulation unit, (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the regulation unit in the XXc-XXc line of FIG. 20 (b). It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the 1st position. (A) is an enlarged view of the vertical displacement unit in the XXII section of FIG. 21, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. 22 (a). (A) to (c) are partially enlarged front views of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the line XXIVa-XXIVa of FIG. 23 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 23 (b). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the line XXIVc-XXIVc of FIG. 23 (c). It is an exploded front perspective view of a decorative member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a decorative member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotating unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating unit. (A) is a top view of the rotating unit, (b) is a front view of the rotating unit in the XXIXb direction view of FIG. 29 (a), and (c) is a front view of the rotating unit of FIG. 29 (a). It is sectional drawing of the rotating unit in a line. (A) is a top view of the intermediate member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member in the line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. 30 (a). (A) is a front view of the front cover, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front cover in the line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 31 (a). (A) is a top view of the reflector, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the reflector in the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a). (A) is a top view of the rotating unit, and FIG. 33 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating unit in line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb of (a). (A) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the rotating unit in the XXXIV part of FIG. 33 (b). (A) and (b) are front views of the rotating unit. (A) and (b) are top views of the rotating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a center frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a center frame. (A) is a front view of the center frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame in the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame in the XLa-XLa line of FIG. 39 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame in the XLb-XLb line of FIG. 39 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of a rotating unit and a center frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting device. It is a partially enlarged front view of a sorting device. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the XLIV-XLIV line of FIG. 43. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device in the XLVa-XLVa line of FIG. 43, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device in the XLVb-XLVb line of FIG. 45 (a), and FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device on the XLVc-XLVc line of FIG. 43, and FIG. 45D is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device on the XLVd-XLVd line of FIG. 45. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a sorting device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a sorting device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a light emitting decoration unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the regulation unit in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a side view of the regulation unit, (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the regulation unit in the XLIXc-XLIXc line of FIG. 49 (b). (A) to (c) are sectional views of the vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front view of a sorting device. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device on the line LIIIa-LIIIa of FIG. 52, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device on the line LIIIb-LIIIb of FIG. 52 (b). (A) and (b) are sectional views of a sorting apparatus. (A) is a front view of the sorting device in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a sectional view of the sorting device in the LVb-LVb line of FIG. 55 (a), and FIG. 55 (c) is a sectional view of the sorting device. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in b) LVc-LVc line. It is sectional drawing of the center frame 600 as a modification. It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation of the rotation unit in the 1st control example schematically. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the lighting mode by a rotating unit in 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of 8 hold effect in 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the special pressing effect of 8 hold effect in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the sub-display area when the eight hold effect in the 1st control example is executed. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the sub-display area when the eight hold effect in the 1st control example is executed. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the first control example. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol jackpot random number table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the jackpot type selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a random number table per ordinary symbol in the first control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table in the first control example. Is. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the non-normal table in the 1st control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the press notice selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic showing the contents of the rear switching table in the first control example schematically. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special rear switching table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic showing the contents of the continuous notice lottery table in the first control example schematically. It is a figure, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect upper limit number of times table in the 1st control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the display control device in 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the drawing list in the 1st control example schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation execution determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 1 variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 2 variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the time setting process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the control process at the time of pressing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special notification sound setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pressing effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the touch sensor control process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the rotation display operation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the lighting setting update process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed this command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot-related command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special back setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead effect selection process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is the execution by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous notice command processing to be performed. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing to be performed. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the various image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the operation of the rotation unit in the modification of the 1st control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the modification of the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the rotation display operation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the lighting start processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the lighting setting update process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a reel effect executed during a jackpot game in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a reel effect executed during a jackpot game in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the prize information storage area when the continuous short reach effect in the 2nd control example is executed. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode when the continuous short reach effect in the 2nd control example is executed. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of ROM of the main control device in 2nd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the short reel effect selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the long reel effect selection table. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the reel effect setting process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot-related command process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the opening effect setting process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special back surface setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 2nd control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the reel effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which showed the transition effect command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the giving effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect mode of the hold notice effect executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect mode of the hold notice effect executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the hold notice execution determination table in the 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the work RAM of the display control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hold notice setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop command reception process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern command processing 3 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 3rd control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the hold notice command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which showed the back image change command process 3. It is a flowchart which showed the back surface D transition processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the back surface D end time processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the various image setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification of the rotation unit schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification of the rotation unit schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification of the rotation unit schematically. It is a schematic diagram which showed the flow of the continuous short reach effect in 4th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode of the continuous short reach effect in the 4th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode of the continuous short reach effect in the 4th control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hit continuous short reach effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous short reach effect setting process for disengagement executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the hold notice effect in the 1st modification of the 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the special hold notice effect in the 2nd modification of the 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the special hold notice effect in the 2nd modification of the 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the reel effect in the 1st modification of the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification of the rotation unit schematically.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 47, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. It is provided with an inner frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, entrances 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15. 5 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 4 and the lock of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 8 is arranged on the back surface side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

Below the window portion 5c, a ball lending operation portion 40 is arranged. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and general inserts. It is configured by assembling a ball opening 63, a second ball opening 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, a distribution device 700, etc., and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general entry port 63, the second entry opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the opening 710a of the distribution device 700 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. , It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like. Further, as will be described in detail later, inside the distribution device 700, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter and a right second ball entry port 640r are provided. The ball that has entered the opening 710a is distributed by the distribution device 700 to either the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r (see FIG. 43).

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B depend on whether the ball has won the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, or the right side second ball entry port 640r. It is configured to be used properly. Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while the ball is the second ball opening 640 or the right second ball. When a prize is won in the mouth 640r, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot (big hit A, C), a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot (big hit B), or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when any of the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, and the right side second ball entry port 640r wins a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variable jackpot (big hit A), 15R normal jackpot (big hit B), and 2R probability variable jackpot (big hit C) are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probabilistic jackpot" (big hit A) is a probabilistic jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "2R probabilistic jackpot" (big hit C) is. It is a probabilistic jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of two rounds. On the other hand, in the "15R normal jackpot" (big hit B), after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). It's a big hit.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win a prize in the second entrance 640. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the time-saving state (during the time-saving) in the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the hit probability of the second symbol increases and the second entry port It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win in 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second entrance 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened more than in the normal state. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time. At least one of the number of times to do may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is used. It may be changed so that only the hit probability is increased as compared with the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general entry openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a prize (starting prize) of any one of the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, and the right side second ball entry port 640r, and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are used. The third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays the fluctuation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the above, and the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variablely display the second symbol is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 600 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 600.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device lights the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) alternately every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is predetermined. It is configured to be in operation (open) for a period of time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 640 during the probability change and the time reduction.

It should be noted that the second entrance 640 during the probability change or the time reduction can be achieved by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit to increase the probability of hitting during the probability change or the time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the areas on both sides of the variable display device unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a distribution device 700 in which a sphere can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins (wins) through the opening 710a with respect to this distribution device 700, the ball that has entered is distributed to either the first entry port 64 or the right second entry port 640r. Be done. When the ball wins (balls) in the first ball slot 64, the first ball slot switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball slot switch is turned on. As a result, a big hit lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A. Further, when the ball wins the right second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on as in the case of the right second entrance 640r. Then, a big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) due to the turning on of the second entrance switch, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

On the other hand, a second ball entry port 640 in which the ball can win is arranged below the front view of the sorting device 700. When a ball wins a prize in the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by the on of the second entrance switch. A big hit lottery is made by the device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first entry slot 64, the second entry opening 640, and the right second entry opening 640r are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. ing. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640, and the right side first. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in 2 entrances 640r is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. A different number of prize balls is paid out when a ball wins a prize and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the right second entrance 640r, for example, a ball wins in the first entrance 64. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is awarded to the second entrance 640 and the right second entrance 640r may be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). The state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win a prize in the second entrance 640 than in the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entrance 640. Therefore, the ball basically moves to the opening 710a. A big hit lottery is executed by entering a ball and distributing the entered ball to the first entry port 64 or the right second entry opening 640r.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through either the left or right through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second entry port 640 Since it is easy to win a prize, the ball that has entered the opening 710a is distributed to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640r on the right side, and to the second entrance 640. The jackpot lottery that accompanies entering the ball will also be easier to execute. Therefore, since there are more chances of big hit lottery than during normal times, it is advantageous for the player as compared with normal times.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the way you do it. Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower side of the sorting device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of any of the first entry slot 64, the second entry slot 640, and the right side second entry slot 640r becomes a jackpot, the predetermined time (variation). After the lapse of time), the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the jackpot, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The occurrence of a jackpot is shown. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning openings 65a are not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower side of the front view of the distribution device 700. For example, it may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the entry ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, 640r are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. To. The first out port 71 is arranged below the distribution device 700.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used for main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a touch sensor 290, an RTC292, a firing sensor 293, and a rotation unit 500 (including a drive motor 457 and an LED 532). The frame button 22 and the like are connected to each other.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the time measured by the RTC292 composed of a known real-time clock, and when a specific time zone (00 minutes to 3 minutes 03 minutes) is reached, the time is concerned. During the band, a rear image change command including information for changing the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 to a special stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. While this special stage is set, the stage is not changed even if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed). By changing to a special stage at a specific time zone, it is possible to change to a special stage all at once at a specific time zone in a hall or the like where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed side by side. It is possible to execute a unified display effect.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operating unit 200.

In FIG. 7, the displacement members 430 arranged at the left and right ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 are displaced to the retracted positions, and in FIG. 8, the displacements arranged at the left and right ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 are displaced. The states in which the members 430 are displaced to the overhanging positions are shown in the drawings.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the back case 300, a vertical displacement unit 400 is vertically displaced above the rear case 300, and a light emitting decoration is provided below. Each unit 800 is arranged.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, and the wall portions 301 and 302 respectively. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A front-view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

The vertical displacement unit 400 includes a rear base 420 formed in a substantially rectangular front view arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and a displacement member 430 and a decorative member displaceably arranged on the rear base 420. A retracting position for retracting the displacement member 430 and the decorative member 450 above the rear case 300 and an overhang extending to the front side of the opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case. It can be displaced from position (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the decorative member 450 is provided with a rotating unit 500, and by rotating the rotating unit 500 and causing the LED of the irradiation unit 530 arranged in the rotating unit 500 to emit light, a pattern is produced by an afterimage of light. And symbols can be displayed. The details of such a structure will be described later.

The light emitting decoration unit 800 mainly includes a base body 810 and a light emitting device 820 arranged on the front side of the base body 810, and emits light from a plurality of LEDs 821 arranged inside the light emitting device 820. By changing the mode (for example, the number of LEDs 821 to be irradiated), the effect of light emission is performed. The details will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 47, detailed configurations of the vertical displacement unit 400, the rotation unit 500, the center frame 600, the distribution device 700, and the light emitting decoration unit 800 will be described. First, the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 24.

First, the overall configuration of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 14. 9 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400. 11 and 13 are front perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 12 and 14 are rear perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400.

As shown in FIGS. 9 to 14, the vertical displacement unit 400 includes a front base 410 having a substantially L-shaped front view, a back base 420 superposed on the back side of the front base 410, and a front side of the front base 410. The drive motor 441 arranged in the above, the displacement member 430 rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441, and the displacement member 430 connected to one end side of the displacement member 430 in the vertical direction (up and down in FIG. 9) with the displacement of the displacement member 430. The decorative member 450 displaced in the direction), the front cover 460 disposed in front of one end side of the front base 410, and the decorative member disposed in the gap between the front cover 460 and the front base 410 facing each other. A guide rod P1 for guiding the sliding of the decorative member 450, a side wall member 470 arranged at the left-right end of the decorative member 450 to regulate the displacement of the decorative member 450, and a rotation restriction arranged on the front side of the front base 410. It is mainly provided with a member 480 and is formed.

In the vertical displacement unit 400, all the members except the decorative member 450 are arranged symmetrically in a pair, and the decorative member 450 is interposed between the pair of facing members. Further, the detailed description of the members arranged in a pair will explain only the members arranged on the left side of the front view (left side of FIG. 9), and the members arranged on the right side of the front view (right side of FIG. 9) will be described. , The same reference numerals as those on the left side of the front view will be attached, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The front base 410 is formed from a plate-like body having a substantially L-shape in front view, and has a first piece 410X forming a long side of a substantially L-shape and a first piece 410X forming a short side of a substantially L-shape. It is formed mainly with two pieces 410Y.

The first piece 410X is arranged so that its extension direction is parallel to the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 9). Further, the first piece 410X has an upright portion 412 standing on the front side of the outer end portion (left end portion) in the left-right direction, an upper concave groove 413 recessed in an arc shape in the upper portion, and a cross section in the lower portion. It is mainly provided with a lower concave groove 414 formed in an arc shape.

The upright portion 412 is a wall that comes into contact with the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450, which will be described later, to regulate the rearward displacement of the decorative member 450, and extends from the upper part to the lower part of the left edge portion of the first piece 410X. It is formed.

The upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414 are grooves in which the guide rod P1 described later is internally fitted, and are recessed in a semicircular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. Further, the upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414 are formed so that the axes formed in a semicircular arc shape are located on the same straight line, and the lower concave groove 414 is formed from the upper end portion of the upper concave groove 413. The distance between the opposite ends to the lower end of the guide rod P1 is set to be larger than the axial dimension of the guide rod P1. As a result, both ends of the guide rod P1 can be internally fitted into the upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414.

The second piece 410Y is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in front view, and has an opening 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the center thereof, an engaging portion 415 protruding to the back side, and a shaft support portion 416 protruding in a cylindrical shape on the back side. Formed mainly in preparation.

The opening 411 is an opening for inserting the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 attached to the front side of the front base 410 to the back side of the front base 410, and is a transmission gear fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor 441. The inner diameter is formed larger than the outer diameter of 442. As a result, when the drive motor 441 fails due to deterioration or the like, the drive motor 441 can be removed from the front base 410, and the transmission gear 442 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 400 through the opening 411. As a result, after the transmission gear 442 is attached to the shaft portion of the new drive motor 441, the transmission gear 442 can be arranged by inserting the opening 411. Therefore, the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 can be arranged with the front base 410 and the rear base 420. Compared to the case where the drive motor 441 is arranged in the front base 410 while being inserted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443 in the state of being arranged between the facing surfaces, the drive motor 441 can be easily performed and the man-hours for parts replacement are reduced. be able to. Further, in this case, since the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443 can be reliably fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor 441, the reliability when the parts are replaced can be improved.

The engaging portion 415 is a protrusion for locking one end of the torsion spring SP1 described later, and protrudes from the back surface side of the second piece 410Y, and the protruding tip thereof bends toward the center side in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400. It is formed into a substantially L-shaped cross section. As a result, the rotation of the torsion spring SP1 around the axis can be regulated by the protruding portion toward the back surface side, and the displacement of the torsion spring SP1 toward the back surface side can be regulated by the bending portion at the tip end.

The shaft support portion 416 is a cylindrical rod member made of a metal material, and one end side thereof is fitted to the back surface side of the front base 410.

The drive motor 441 is a motor that applies a driving force to the vertical displacement unit 400, and is arranged on the front base 410 as described above, and is a transmission gear 442 arranged between the front base 410 and the rear base 420. , 443 can transmit the driving force.

As described above, the transmission gear 442 is a gear in which a shaft hole is fitted onto the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 and is connected to the drive motor 441, and is arranged in mesh with the transmission gear 443.

The transmission gear 443 is a gear whose shaft hole is rotatably arranged between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 with the protrusion 417 of the front base 410 fitted therein, and is transmitted as described above. It is arranged in a state of being in mesh with the gear 442. Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor 441 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 443 via the transmission gear 442.

Further, the transmission gear 443 includes a protrusion 443a protruding from the side surface on the back surface side. The protrusion 443a is a rod member made of a metal material and formed in a cylindrical shape, and is arranged on the outer peripheral edge portion of the transmission gear 443. Therefore, when a driving force is applied to the drive motor 441 and the transmission gear 443 is rotated as described above, the protrusion 443a is displaced in an arc shape centered on the axis of the transmission gear 443.

The back base 420 is a plate member formed in an outer shape substantially the same as the front view shape of the second piece 410Y of the front base 410, and includes an upright portion 421 standing on the front side at the outer edge portion.

The upright portion 421 is a wall for forming a gap between the front base 410 and the back base 420 facing each other, and the upright distance is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are combined. It is set to a large size and is arranged in a state where the front end face is in contact with the back side of the front base 410. As a result, a gap for arranging the transmission gears 442 and 443 and the displacement member 430 described later can be formed between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 facing each other.

The displacement member 430 is formed in a substantially L-shape in front view, and its outer edge portion is formed in a substantially box shape protruding toward the back surface side. Further, the displacement member 430 has a through hole 433 formed through the bent portion in a circular shape in the front-rear direction, a decorative side sliding hole 432 formed through the bent portion in the front-rear direction on one side of the long side, and a short side. A drive-side sliding hole 431 formed through the other side in the front-rear direction and a displacement-side engaging portion 434 protruding from the protrusion of the outer edge portion on one side of the long side are mainly provided.

The through hole 433 is a hole into which the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support portion 416. Therefore, after the through hole 433 is inserted through the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410, the front base 410 and the back base 420 are combined so that the displacement member 430 can be displaced with respect to the front base 410. Can be arranged in.

The drive-side sliding hole 431 is a long hole through which the protrusion 443a of the transmission gear 443 is inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 443a. Further, the drive side sliding hole 431 is formed in the longitudinal direction in the same direction as the extension direction (longitudinal direction) on the short side of the displacement member 430, and as described above, the transmission gear 443 is the driving force of the drive motor 441. When rotated by, the protrusion 443a of the transmission gear 443 slides inside the drive-side sliding hole 431 with the displacement, thereby rotating the displacement member 430 around the through hole 433. That is, by driving the drive motor 441, the displacement member 430 can be displaced around the through hole 433.

The decorative side sliding hole 432 is an elongated hole arranged in the decorative member 450 described later and through which a support portion 452a formed in a columnar shape is inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is the outer diameter of the support portion 452a. Is formed larger than. Further, the decorative side sliding hole 432 is formed in the longitudinal direction in the same direction as the extending direction (longitudinal direction) on the long side of the displacement member 430. As described above, the decorative side sliding hole 432 has an arcuate displacement locus centered on the through hole 433 when the displacement member 430 is rotated around the through hole 433.

The displacement side engaging portion 434 is a protrusion that engages the other end side of the torsion spring SP1 described later, and is formed so as to project from the inner peripheral surface of the outer edge portion projecting from the back surface side of the displacement member 430. Further, the displacement side engaging portion 434 is formed on the side surface inside the bending of the displacement member 430 bent in a substantially L shape in the front view. As a result, the displacement side engaging portion 434 can engage the other end side of the torsion spring SP1 with the inside of the displacement member 430 on the back surface side.

The torsion spring SP1 has its twisted portion arranged around the through hole 433 of the displacement member 430 (shaft support 416 of the front base 410) and rotates counterclockwise (vertical displacement unit) around the rotation axis of the displacement member 430. The displacement member 430 constituting the right side of the front view of the 400 is subjected to an urging force (rotating to the right in the front view) around its axis of rotation. It is engaged with the displacement side engaging portion 434 of 430, respectively. As a result, the displacement member 430 rotates counterclockwise with respect to the front base 410 around the axis of the through hole 433 (the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410) (the displacement member 430 constituting the right side of the vertical displacement unit 400 in front view rotates clockwise). ) Is always urged in the direction of.

As described above, the decorative member 450 is a member interposed between the pair of vertical displacement units 400 configured as a pair on the left and right, and the front base is arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction. It is set to be the same as the distance dimension between the outer ends of the 410 in the left-right direction.

The decorative member 450 is formed in a front view U-shape with the lower side open, and has a front base 452 constituting the central portion thereof, sliding portions 451 connected to both ends of the front base 452 in the left-right direction, and a front base. It is mainly provided with a back surface base 453 that covers the back surface of the 452, and a rotation unit 500 that is rotatably arranged on the front side of the front base 452.

The front base 452 is formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in front view, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section in which the upper and lower end faces are bent toward the back side. The front base 452 includes a support portion 452a projecting from the back surface side, an engaging portion 452b projecting from both ends in the left-right direction to the front side, and a contact surface 452h smoothly formed on the front side of both ends in the left-right direction. It is mainly provided with an inclined surface 452g formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452h.

As described above, the support portion 452a is a rod member inserted into the decorative side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430, and is formed into a cylindrical rod-shaped body. As a result, the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the motor 441, and when the decorative side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 433, it is inserted into the decorative side sliding hole 432. The support portion 452a is displaced with the displacement of the decorative side sliding hole 432. As a result, the decorative member 450 can be displaced by displacing the support portion 452a.

The engaging portion 452b is a protrusion to which the other end of the urging spring SP2, which will be described later, is engaged, and is projected in a hook shape from the front side of both end portions of the front base 452.

The contact surface 452h is a smooth surface that comes into contact with the roller 492a of the regulation unit 490 described later, and is formed on a smooth surface on which the roller 492a can roll. The inclined surface 452g is a surface that inclines downward from the front side to the back side toward the lower end portion of the contact surface 452h. As a result, the regulation unit 490, which will be described later, and the decorative member 450 can be easily brought into contact with each other. A detailed description of the contact between the regulation unit 490 and the decorative member 450 will be described later.

The sliding portion 451 is a rod-shaped body having a rectangular cross section extending in the vertical direction, and is arranged so as to be connected to both left and right ends of the front base 452. Further, the sliding portion 451 includes a through hole 451a opened in the vertical direction. The through hole 451a is an opening through which the guide rod P1 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1.

As a result, the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the drive motor 441, and when the decorative member 450 is displaced as described above, the direction of the displacement is changed by the sliding portions 451 arranged at both ends of the front base 452. Be regulated. As a result, the decorative member 450 is displaced along the axial direction (vertical direction) of the guide rod P1. That is, the decorative member 450 can be slid and displaced in the vertical direction by applying a driving force from the driving motor 441.

The back base 453 is a plate member that is covered on the back side of the front base 452 at a substantially central position in the left-right direction, and the size of the outer shape in the front view is formed to be substantially the same as the central portion of the front base 452. Thereby, the gears 454 to 456 can be rotatably arranged in the internal space of the front base 452 and the back base 453. Further, a drive motor 457 that outputs a rotation drive force and a control signal to the rotation unit 500 is attached to the back surface of the rear base 453. A detailed description of the gears 454 to 456 and the drive motor 457 will be described later.

The front cover 460 is a member that is arranged to face the front side of the first piece 410X of the front base 410 and covers the front of the first piece 410X, and is abbreviated as the outer shape of the first piece 410X in front view. It is formed in the same shape. The front cover 460 is provided with an erection wall 461 that stands on the back side from the outer edge thereof, and is formed in a box shape that the back side is open.

The erection wall 461 includes an upper groove forming member 462 projecting upward from the side surface forming the upper side, and a lower groove forming member 463 projecting downward from the side surface forming the lower side.

The upper groove forming member 462 is formed at a position facing the upper concave groove 413 of the front base 410, and a concave groove 462a recessed in a semicircular shape is formed on the back surface side. On the other hand, the lower groove forming member 463 is formed at a position facing the lower concave groove 414 of the front base 410, and a concave groove 463a recessed in a semicircular shape is formed on the back surface side.

The concave grooves 462a and 463a are grooves in which the guide rod P1 is internally fitted, and are recessed in a semicircular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. Further, in the concave grooves 462a and 463a, the axes recessed in a semicircular arc shape are formed on the same straight line, and the distance between the upper end portion of the concave groove 462a and the lower end portion of the concave groove 463a is increased. It is set larger than the axial dimension of the guide rod P1. As a result, both ends of the guide rod P1 can be internally fitted into the concave grooves 462a and 463a.

Therefore, when the front cover 460 is arranged in front of the front base 410, the guide rod P may be sandwiched between the upper concave groove 413 and the concave groove 462a and the lower concave groove 414 and the concave groove 463a. The guide rod P1 can be arranged on the front base 410 in a state in which the guide rod P1 cannot be dropped. As a result, the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 through which the guide rod P1 is inserted can be held so as not to fall off with respect to the front base 410.

Further, the distance dimension between the vertical facing wall 461 of the front cover 460 formed on the lateral side of the vertical displacement unit 400 and the standing portion 412 formed on the first piece 410X of the front base 410 in the front-rear direction. Is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the thickness dimension of the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction, and the outer end portion of the sliding portion 451 in the left-right direction is arranged between the facing portions thereof. As a result, as described above, when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the front-rear direction.

The side wall member 470 is a member arranged at both ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 on the central side in the left-right direction, and is formed of a substantially L-shaped plate-shaped body bent toward the back side in a side view. Further, a wall surface that bends outward in the left-right direction is formed on the front end surface of the side wall member 470, and a regulation unit 490 described later is attached to the wall surface.

Further, the side wall member 470 is patterned on the side surface on the center side in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 9) with respect to the vertical displacement unit 400 by unevenness, color, or the like, so that the player can use the center frame 86 of the game board 13 ( The pattern of the side wall member 470 is visibly arranged through the central opening (see FIG. 2). As a result, the vertical displacement unit 400 (for example, the front cover 460) arranged outside the side wall member 470 in the left-right direction can be made invisible to the player.

The rotation restricting member 480 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and a ring-shaped roller 481 having an axis in the front-rear direction on the back surface side is rotatably attached. Further, the rotation restricting member 480 is formed so that its outer shape is substantially half of the outer shape of the second piece 410Y of the front base 410 in the front view, and is arranged in front of the front base 410 with a predetermined gap.

The rotation restricting member 480 is a member that returns the rotation unit 500, which will be described later, to the initial position, and the initial position of the rotation unit 500 can be defined by the roller 481 and the upper surface base 510 coming into contact with each other.

The urging spring SP2 is a coil spring that connects the front base 410 and the decorative member 450 to urge the decorative member 450 upward, and one end thereof is engaged with the engaging portion 418 of the front base 410. The end is engaged with the engaging portion 412b of the decorative member 450. As a result, the decorative member 450 is always urged upward with respect to the front base 410. Therefore, when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position due to the displacement described later, the decorative member 450 can be easily displaced to the second position. Further, the urging spring SP2 is bent at the central portion along the outer peripheral surface of the roller 419. As a result, the length of the urging spring SP2 can be secured and the urging force can be suppressed from increasing too much.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17.

15 to 17 (a) are front views of the vertical displacement unit 400, FIG. 15 (a) is in a state of being arranged in the ascending position, and FIG. 16 (a) is between the ascending position and the descending position. 17 (a) corresponds to the state of being arranged in the descending position, respectively.

15 (b) corresponds to FIG. 15 (a), FIG. 16 (b) corresponds to FIG. 16 (a), and FIG. 17 (b) corresponds to the rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in FIG. 17 (a). .. In addition, in FIG. 15 (b), FIG. 16 (b) and FIG. 17 (b), a state in which the back base 420 is removed is shown for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in a state where the vertical displacement unit 400 is arranged in an ascending position (hereinafter, this state is referred to as a “second position”), the displacement member 430 is one of them. The side (the long side on which the decorative side sliding hole 432 is formed) is swung upward, and the decorative member 450 is positioned at the uppermost position. The support portion 452a of the decorative member 450 is located inside the decorative side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 and close to the radial outer end from the axis of the through hole 433.

Further, in this state, the rotation direction of one side of the displacement member 430 (the short side on which the drive side sliding hole 431 is formed) is substantially the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a. Match. That is, a state in which the extending direction of the drive-side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 and the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a are orthogonal to each other (the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are dead points). Is formed). Therefore, the displacement member 430 cannot rotate around the through hole 433, and the weight of the decorative member 450 connected to the displacement member 430 can prevent the displacement member 430 from being rotationally displaced.

From the states shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, when the pair of drive motors 441 are rotationally driven and each transmission gear 443 is rotated, the protrusion 443a of the transmission gear 443 is displaced from the displacement member 430. The drive-side sliding hole 431 is slid to push down the left and right displacement members 430, respectively.

As a result, the left and right displacement members 430 are rotated around the axis of the through hole 433, and the decorative member 450 is displaced downward as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B. From this state, when each transmission gear 443 is further rotated by the rotational drive of the pair of drive motors 441, the left and right displacement members 430 are further pushed downward, and FIGS. 17 (a) and 17 (b) show. As shown, the decorative member 450 is arranged in a descending position (hereinafter, this state is referred to as a "first position").

As shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, when the vertical displacement unit 400 is arranged at the first position, the left and right displacement members 430 are formed on one side (driving side sliding hole 431). The decorative member 450 is located at the lowermost position and is projected to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) by the posture in which the decorative member 450 is swung downward. ..

Further, in this case (when the vertical displacement unit 400 is arranged in the descending position), the decorative side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 is inclined downward toward the central portion in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400, and the through hole 433. The side surface of the support portion 452a of the decorative member 450 is brought into contact with the end portion on the outer side in the radial direction. As a result, the weight of the decorative member 450 can exert a force that displaces in the direction of gravity and a force in the direction from the left-right direction to the center portion of the vertical displacement unit 400 on the support portion 452a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the vertical and horizontal directions due to the displacement operation of the rotating unit 500 of the decorative member 450, which will be described later.

Further, the rotation direction of the other side of the displacement member 430 (the short side on which the drive side sliding hole 431 is formed) substantially coincides with the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a. That is, a state in which the extending direction of the drive-side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 and the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a are orthogonal to each other (the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are dead points). Is formed). Therefore, the displacement member 430 cannot rotate about the through hole 433, and when the decorative member 450 rattles in the vertical direction due to the displacement operation of the rotation unit 500 described later, the displacement member 450 is displaced due to the rattling. It is possible to prevent the member 430 from being displaced. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the decorative member 450.

Further, the regulation unit 490 is arranged in front of both ends of the decorative member 450. Thereby, the displacement of the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction can be regulated. A detailed description of the regulation unit 490 will be described later.

Next, the regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 24.

First, the overall configuration of the regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20. FIG. 18 is an exploded front perspective view of the regulation unit 490, and FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the roller member 492. 20 (a) is a side view of the regulation unit 490, FIG. 20 (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit 490, and FIG. 20 (c) is the line XXc-XXc of FIG. 20 (b). It is sectional drawing of the regulation unit 490.

As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the regulation unit 490 includes a case member 491 formed in a box shape having an opening on the back surface side, a roller member 492 disposed inside the case member 491, and a case member 491. It is mainly provided with an outer edge member 493 disposed on an open (opening side) outer edge.

The case member 491 has a projecting portion 491a projecting from the side surface on the front side, a notch portion 491b notched on both side surfaces in the left-right direction in a semicircular shape, and a bulge from the inner side surface facing the opening to the back surface side. It is mainly provided with a bulging portion 491c and a bulging portion 491c.

The projecting portion 491a is a protrusion for fastening the case member 491 to the side wall member 470 described above, and a fastening hole is formed on the front side, and a screw is fastened to the fastening hole from the front side via the side wall member 470. By doing so, the regulation unit 490 can be arranged on the side wall member 470.

The notch portion 491b is formed by being cut out in a semicircular shape by arranging two in the vertical direction on both side surfaces of the case member 491 in the left-right direction. The notch portion 491b is a notch for inserting the collar 492c of the roller member 492 inside, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the collar 492c of the roller member 492.

The bulging portion 491c is formed so as to bulge from the lower side than the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 20C) of the side surface (back surface of the front wall) facing the open side of the case member 491. Further, the bulging portion 491c is provided with a predetermined gap between the bulging portion 491c and the roller 492a of the roller member 492.

The roller member 492 is pivotally supported by a roller 492a formed from an elastic member in an annular shape in a vertical cross-sectional view, a shaft portion 492b inserted inside the roller 492a, and both sides of the roller 492a. A pair of collars 492c arranged in the above and a pair of retaining rings E1 fitted to the shaft portion 492b outside the collar 492c.

The shaft portion 492b is a member inserted through the inner circumference of the roller 492a, is formed in a cylindrical shape substantially the same as the inner diameter of the inner circumference of the roller 492a, and has an axial dimension between the left and right side surfaces of the case member 491. It is set larger than the width dimension of. Further, recesses 492b1 recessed in the axial direction are formed at both ends of the shaft portion 492b in the axial direction. The recess 492b1 is formed over the entire circumference of the shaft portion 492b, and the outer diameter in the axial direction is formed to be smaller than the inner diameter of the retaining ring E1 described later.

The collar 492c is formed in a ring shape in front view and a substantially stepped cross section, and is formed of a small diameter cylinder portion 492c1 and a large diameter cylinder portion 492c2 having an outer diameter larger than that of the small diameter cylinder portion 492c1. Further, the inner diameter of the collar 492c (the inner diameter of the small diameter cylinder portion 492c1 and the large diameter cylinder portion 492c2) is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 492b, and the shaft portion 492b can be inserted therein.

The small diameter cylinder portion 492c1 is a portion that is internally fitted into the notch portion 491b of the case member 491, and as described above, the outer diameter of the small diameter cylinder portion 492c1 is formed to be larger than the inner diameter of the notch portion 491b of the case member 491. Will be done.

The large-diameter tubular portion 492c2 is a member for restricting displacement in the left-right direction when the roller member 492 is arranged on the case member 491, and the outer diameter of the large-diameter tubular portion 492c2 is a notch of the case member 491. It is set larger than the inner diameter of the portion 491b. Further, the distance dimension between the axially outer side surfaces of the pair of large-diameter tubular portions 492c2 arranged at both ends in the axial direction of the roller 492a is larger than the distance dimension between the left and right side surfaces inside the opening of the case member 491. Is also formed small.

The retaining ring E1 is an E ring (E-shaped retaining ring), and the opening portion is widened in the recess 492b1 of the shaft portion 492b and fitted around the recess 492b1. That is, the inner diameter of the inner circumference of the retaining ring E1 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the recess 492b1.

The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, after the retaining ring E1 is externally fitted in the recess 492b1 on one end side of the shaft portion 492b, the small diameter tubular portion 492c1 is fitted on one side (the side on which the retaining ring E1 is externally fitted) from the other end to the collar 492c of 1. ), The shaft portion 492b is inserted. Next, after the roller 492a is inserted through the shaft portion 492b from the other end, the shaft portion is in a state where the collar 492c of 1 is directed to the large diameter cylinder portion 492c2 to one side (the side on which the retaining ring E1 is fitted). It is inserted through 492b. After that, the retaining ring E1 of 1 is externally fitted in the recess 492b1 on the other side of the shaft portion 492b.

As a result, the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c pivotally supported by the shaft portion 492b between the pair of retaining rings E1 facing each other are restricted from being displaced in the left-right direction by the retaining ring E1. As a result, the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c can be prevented from coming off from the shaft portion 492b.

The outer edge member 493 is a member that is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame-like body in front view and is arranged on the back surface side (open side) of the case member 491. The outer edge member 493 is formed so that the shape of the inner circumference in the front view is substantially the same as the shape of the inner circumference of the opening in the back view of the case member 491. Further, on the side surface of the outer edge member 493 on the front side (case member 491 side), an upright portion 493a standing on the front side is formed around the inner edge portion.

The upright portion 493a is formed with a recessed portion 493a1 recessed on the back surface side. The recessed portion 493a1 is formed at a position facing the notch portion 491b of the case member 491. Therefore, the roller member 492 can be arranged in the case member 491 by sandwiching the collar 492c of the roller member 492 between the notched portion 491b of the case member 491 and the recessed portion 493a1 facing each other.

The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, two collars 492c arranged at both ends in the axial direction of the roller member 492 are vertically and vertically arranged in the cutout portion 491b of the case member 491 so as to pivotally support the collar 492c. Next, the outer edge member 493 is fastened and fixed to the case member 491 from the back surface side of the case member 491 with the standing portion 493a side facing the front side (facing the case member 491 side). As a result, the roller member 492 can be rotatably arranged with respect to the case member 491 and can be prevented from falling from the case member 491.

Next, the operation of the regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24.

FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400 at the first position. 22 (a) is an enlarged view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the XXII section of FIG. 21, and FIG. 22 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. 22 (a). .. In FIG. 22A, the outer shapes of the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are shown by broken lines.

23 (a) to 23 (c) are partially enlarged front views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 24 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the line XXIVa-XXIVa of FIG. 23 (a). 24 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 23 (b), and FIG. 24 (c) is a vertical view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the line XXIVc-XXIVc of FIG. 23 (c). It is sectional drawing of the displacement unit 400. It should be noted that FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (c) show the transition state of the vertical displacement unit 400, and the outer shapes of the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are shown by broken lines.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the vertical displacement unit 400 is located at the first position, the decorative member 450 is positioned below. In this case, as described above, both ends of the decorative member 450 are located on the back side of the regulatory unit 490.

In this case, when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position and the rotation unit 500 described later is rotated, the decorative member 450 may rattle with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement thereof. Therefore, there is a method in which an engaging means for engaging the decorative member 450 and the front base 410 is provided to suppress rattling. The engaging means includes an engaging member arranged on one of the decorative member 450 or the front base 410 and urged by the urging means, and the decorative member 450 or the front base while being formed to be engageable with the engaging member. It is provided with an engaged member disposed on the other side of the 410, and the engaging member resists the urging force of the urging means by utilizing the displacement (displacement toward the first position) of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410. When the decorative member 450 is placed in the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the urging force of the urging means to engage with the engaged member. As a result, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the front base 410 is restricted by the engagement of the engaging means, and the rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

However, in such a conventional engaging means, in order to put the engaging means in the engaged state (the main body member is arranged at the first position), the engaging member is placed against the urging force of the urging means. Not only does it need to be retracted, but it also resists the urging force of the urging means when disengaging the engaging means (displaces the decorative member 450 from the first position to the second position). Therefore, it is necessary to retract the engaging member, and there is a problem that the driving force required for displacementing the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 of the decorative member 450 is in contact with the roller 492a of the regulation unit 490, so that the relative displacement of the front base 410 is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500.

In this case, since the displacement direction when the decorative member 450 is arranged in the first position and the rotation direction of the roller member 492 of the regulation unit 490 are set substantially parallel, when the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position. Since the roller member 492 of the regulation unit 490 can be rotated according to the displacement, the driving force required to displace the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be suppressed.

Further, since the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body that can be elastically deformed as described above, when the roller 492a of the regulation unit 490 comes into contact with the contact surface 452h of the front base 452, the outer circumference of the roller 492a is formed. The surface side can be elastically deformed to facilitate holding the roller 492a on the front base 452. As a result, the roller 492a can be made difficult to rotate, and rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be suppressed.

The elastic body is preferably a viscoelastic body exemplified by rubber, urethane, or the like. In this case, due to the vibration damping effect, it is possible to perform a vibration damping function or a vibration insulation function that damps and insulates the vibration input from the decorative member 450 to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500, and the front base. This is because it is possible to suppress wear and failure of various devices arranged on the 410 side and loosening of the fastening portion. In particular, when the rotating unit 500 is periodically displaced (for example, when it is rotated at a relatively high speed to function as a versa writer), vibrations with relatively small amplitude and high frequency are generated from the decorative member 450. Since it is input to the front base 410, it is particularly effective to adopt a viscoelastic body.

Further, when the decorative member 450 and the regulation unit 490 (roller 492a) come into contact with each other, the roller 492a is elastically deformed, so that the product accuracy and the assembly error of the vertical displacement unit 400 can be absorbed. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the accuracy when molding the part, and the manufacturing cost of the part can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the product can be reduced.

Further, since the collision sound when the decorative member 450 and the regulation unit 490 (roller 492a) come into contact with each other can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the roller 492a, it is possible to prevent the player from hearing the sound when the decorative member 450 is displaced. It is possible to prevent the player from losing the interest of the player. Further, since the rotation axis direction of the roller 492a is orthogonal to the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, the roller 492a can be rotated with the displacement of the decorative member 450, and the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a are in contact with each other. It is possible to suppress the sound of rubbing each other's members when they are in contact with each other and displaced. That is, if the protrusions are brought into contact with the displacement members to assist the displacement members in stopping or to suppress rattling, the members rub against each other when the displacement members are displaced with the protrusions in contact with each other. Sound is generated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are brought into contact with each other, the roller 492a can be rotated along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, so that the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 can be rotated. Can be suppressed from rubbing, and the sound of rubbing between the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a can be suppressed.

Further, since the regulation of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 is possible by the regulation unit 490 of the side wall member 470 fastened and fixed to the front base 410, the regulation unit 490 which is relatively heavy is arranged in the decoration member 450. Since it is not necessary, the weight of the decorative member 450 can be reduced to suppress the driving force required for the displacement of the decorative member 450, and when the decorative member 450 is suppressed from rattling with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500. Since the decorative member 450, which is a vibration source, can be reduced in weight, rattling can be easily suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, the contact mode between the decorative member 450 and the regulation unit 490 when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 24 (a), when the decorative member 450 is located above the regulation unit 490, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a is in contact with the decorative member 450 and the case member 491. Arranged without contact.

From the state shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 24 (a), the decorative member 450 is displaced downward, and as shown in FIGS. 23 (b) and 24 (b), the lower end surface of the decorative member 450 is a case. When the member 491 is displaced to a position in the vertical direction substantially the same as the intermediate position in the vertical direction, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a arranged above the regulation unit 490 and the front surface of the decorative member 450 come into contact with each other. It is said that it is in a state of being displaced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling back and forth and left and right.

That is, the roller 492a arranged on the upper side is extruded by the decorative member 450, rotated while being displaced in the radial direction, and abuts on the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 24B). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the front-rear direction. Further, since the roller 492a can rotate in one direction around the axis of the shaft portion 492b and cannot rotate in the direction in which the decorative member 450 moves left and right, it suppresses the decorative member 450 from rattling in the left and right direction. be able to.

On the other hand, since the roller 492a is rotatable around the axis of the shaft portion 492b, the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction at the first position even when the roller 492a and the rotating unit 500 are in contact with each other. Can be made to.

Further, as described above, since the inclined surface 452g is formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452h of the front base 452, the inclined surface 452g is used when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position. The roller 492a can be guided to the front side of the contact surface 452h. This makes it possible to suppress the driving force required when arranging the decorative member 450 in the first position.

From the state shown in FIGS. 23 (b) and 24 (b), when the decorative member 450 is further displaced downward and positioned at the first position, the outer peripheral surface of the two rollers 492 a arranged in the regulation unit 490. And the front surface of the decorative member 450 can be brought into contact with each other.

Here, if the rattling of the decorative member 450 that is displaced up and down is suppressed by the rotating body (roller 492a) that rotates along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, the rotating body (roller 492a) suppresses the rattling. It is difficult to regulate along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450 so that the decorative member 450 is not displaced with respect to rattling in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the rotation direction of the other side of the displacement member 430 (the short side on which the drive side sliding hole 431 is formed) is the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a. Since the direction of the straight line connecting the two is substantially the same, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the vertical direction at the first position. That is, in the present embodiment, the regulation unit 490 can allow only the displacement in the vertical direction that displaces the displacement of the decorative member 450 to the first position, and in the second position, the transmission gear 443 and the displacement member 430 By forming the dead center, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the vertical direction. As a result, since the relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be regulated, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed.

Further, the rollers 492a arranged below the rollers 492a arranged side by side in the vertical direction are in contact with not only the decorative member 450 but also the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491.

That is, when the roller 492a arranged on the lower side comes into contact with the decorative member 450, the rubber component of the roller 492a is pushed out (elastically deformed) to the front side (right side in FIG. 24C). As a result, the outer peripheral surface on the front side is brought into contact with the side surface of the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, and the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. be able to. This makes it difficult for the roller 492a to rotate by increasing the resistance when the roller 492a rotates around the shaft portion 492b. Therefore, the resistance when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction can be increased. As a result, since the relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be regulated, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed.

Here, as a mode in which the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a is placed in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 24C). It is also conceivable to displace the roller 492a between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. A structure that allows displacement in the direction is required.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the roller 492a is formed from an elastic body, and the elastic deformation thereof is used to place the roller 492a between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. Since it can be sandwiched between the rollers and 492a, it is not necessary to form the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a so that it can be displaced in the radial direction, and the shaft portion 492b can be formed as a shaft fixed to the front base 410. As a result, the structure can be simplified to improve durability and reduce product cost.

Further, since the roller 492a is elastically displaced and sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the roller 492a is sandwiched between the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 with respect to the front base 410 of the decorative member 450 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500. When the roller 492a is sandwiched between the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 due to rattling, the elastic recovery force of the roller 492a is utilized to form the decorative member 450 and the case member 491. The roller 492a can be easily held by the bulging portion 491c more firmly. As a result, the roller 492a can be made difficult to rotate, and the relative rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be suppressed. Therefore, the rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the displacement resistance can be increased as the decorative member 450 is displaced from the upper end to the lower end position, when the decorative member 450 is stopped at the first position, the stop operation causes damage to other parts. It can be suppressed.

That is, in the present embodiment, since the rotating unit is provided in the central portion of the decorative member 450, when the component is displaced in the direction of gravity and stopped, in addition to the weight of the decorative member 450, the kinetic energy at the time of displacement is applied to each component. As it works, parts are easily damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the displacement is made to the first position, the stopping operation can be assisted, so that the stopping operation in a direction more easily damaged can be assisted. As a result, damage to the parts can be effectively suppressed, and the reliability of the product can be improved.

Further, since two rollers 492a are arranged vertically along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, the contact surfaces 452h of the decorative member 450 are brought into contact with each other at two locations at predetermined intervals. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decorative member 450 from tilting, and it is possible to suppress the rattling of the rotating unit 500 with respect to the upper surface base 510. As a result, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be effectively suppressed.

Further, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500, which will be described later, is set to be substantially the same as the contact surface 452h (that is, the surface on which the roller 492a is abutted) of the front base 452. That is, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is arranged in parallel with the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the roller 492a. As a result, the front base of the decorative member 450 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 is suppressed while suppressing the driving force required when the decorative member 450 is arranged in the first position and when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the first position to the second position. The rattling of 410 can be effectively suppressed.

More specifically, since the displacement form of the rotating unit 500 is rotation, the decorative member 450 rotates due to the aging movement of the rotating unit 500 (the movement in which the rotation axis of the rotating unit 500 swings like a circle). It is vibrated in a mode in which the rotation plane of the unit 500 is tilted. Therefore, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is substantially parallel to the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500, so that the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (that is, the roller 492a) can be formed. The surface to be abutted) can be pressed against the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a from a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the roller 492a. As a result, when the decorative member 450 is arranged in the first position and when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the first position to the second position, the roller 492a is rotated to suppress the driving force required for the displacement of the decorative member 450. At the same time, the contact of the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 with the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a can effectively suppress the rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement (rotation) of the rotating unit 500. ..

Next, the rotating unit 500 arranged in the decorative member 450 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 36.

First, with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26, the overall configuration of the decorative member 450 will be described in detail. FIG. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the decorative member 450, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the decorative member 450.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the decorative member 450 includes gears 454 to 456 arranged between the front base 452 and the back base 453 facing each other, and a drive motor attached to the back side of the back base 453. It is mainly provided with 457 and a signal transmission mechanism 458 attached to the back surface side of the front base 452.

The front base 452 is formed with a recess 452c recessed on the back side in the center thereof. The recess 452c is recessed in an annular shape in the front view, and an insertion hole 452f formed through the shaft portion in the front-rear direction and openings 452d and 452e opened in the left-right direction on the side surfaces of both ends in the left-right direction are formed. To.

The rear base 453 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped body with a front view smaller than the front view shape of the front base 452, and has an opening 453b that opens in the front-rear direction at the center and a circular shape in the front-rear direction on the right side of the front view. It is mainly provided with an insertion hole 453a to be opened and shaft support portions 453c and 453d protruding in a cylindrical shape on the front side.

The insertion hole 453a is an opening through which the shaft portion of the drive motor 457, which will be described later, is inserted, and is opened at a position facing the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion of the drive motor 457. It is opened in a circular shape. The opening 453b is an opening through which the signal transmission mechanism 458 described later is inserted, and is formed in an internal hole shape larger than the front view shape of the signal transmission mechanism 458.

The shaft support portions 453c and 453d are shaft portions that are inserted into the shaft portions of gears 455 and 456, which will be described later, and are set in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of each gear 455 and 456.

The drive motor 457 is a motor in which an encoder for position detection is incorporated, and can detect the rotation angle and the rotation speed of the motor. The drive motor 457 is attached to the back surface of the rear base 453 as described above, the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 is inserted into the insertion hole 453a of the rear base 453, and screws, bolts, etc. are inserted from the front side of the rear base 453. It is fastened and fixed with.

The gear 454 is meshed with the gear 455 and is fixedly arranged to the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 through which the insertion hole 453a of the rear base 453 is inserted. Further, the gear 454 is formed to have a smaller thickness in the front-rear direction than the space between the rear base 453 and the front base 452, and when the rear base 453 is arranged on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 are arranged. Can rotate without contacting the sides of the. When the driving force of rotation is applied from the drive motor 457, the gear 454 is rotated, and the driving force of rotation can be transmitted to the gear 455 meshed with the gear 454.

The gear 455 is meshed with the rear base 571 (see FIG. 26) of the rotation unit 500 described later, and the shaft hole is inserted through the shaft support portion 453c whose shaft hole protrudes forward of the rear base 453 and rotates about the shaft support portion 453c. Arranged as possible. Further, the gear 455 is formed to have a smaller thickness in the front-rear direction than the space between the rear base 453 and the front base 452, and when the rear base 453 is arranged on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 are arranged. Can rotate without contacting the sides of the. When the driving force for rotation is applied from the drive motor 457, the driving force for rotation is transmitted from the gear 454 to the gear 455, and the rear base 571 is rotated. As a result, the rotation unit 500 is rotated.

A part of the gear 455 is inserted through the first opening 452d of the front base 452 and is arranged, and is meshed with the back base 571 of the rotation unit 500 arranged in front of the front base 452.

A gear 456 is meshed with the rear base 571 of the rotating unit 500. The gear 456 is a member having a protrusion for detecting an initial position (reference position) projecting from its side surface (axial end surface), and its shaft hole is fitted onto the shaft support portion 453d of the rear base 453 to the rear surface. It is arranged on the base 453. A part of the gear 456 is inserted into the second opening 452e and meshed with the back base 571. Further, the gear 456 is formed to have a smaller thickness in the front-rear direction than the space between the rear base 453 and the front base 452, and when the rear base 453 is arranged on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 are arranged. Can rotate without contacting the sides of the. When the driving force for rotation is applied from the drive motor 457 and the gear 454, the gear 455, and the rotation unit 500 (rear base 571) are rotated, the driving force for rotation is transmitted from the rear base 571 to rotate the gear 456. .. As a result, the initial position of the rotating unit 500 can be detected.

In this case, the number of gear teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear 456 and the number of gear teeth of the gear 571a1 engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the rear base 571 of the rotating unit 500 are set to be the same. Therefore, the gear 456 can be rotated once for each rotation of the rotation unit 500. This makes it possible to easily perform initial position detection (reference position).

The signal transmission mechanism 458 is a slip ring that transmits electric power and a signal to the irradiation unit 530 of the rotating rotation unit 500, and is configured so that the shaft portion 458a protruding from the front can rotate. Further, the shaft portion 458a is formed in a substantially D-shaped cross section, and a passage is opened inside the shaft portion 458a, and electrical wiring is inserted into the passage.

When the signal transmission mechanism 458 is attached to the rear side of the front base 452 by inserting the opening 453b of the rear base 453, the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 is inserted into the shaft portion 458a. At the same time, the front base 452 is projected from the front.

Next, the overall configuration of the rotating unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29. 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating unit 500, and FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating unit 500. 29 (a) is a top view of the rotating unit 500, FIG. 29 (b) is a front view of the rotating unit 500 in the XXIXb direction view of FIG. 29 (a), and FIG. 29 (c) is a view. It is sectional drawing of the rotation unit 500 in the XXIXc-XXIXc line of 29 (a). It should be noted that the description of the rotation unit 500 shall be described in the state at the initial position (reference position).

As shown in FIGS. 27 to 29, the rotating unit 500 includes an upper surface base 510 forming an upper side surface, a lower surface base 520 forming a lower side surface, and an irradiation unit 530 arranged below the upper surface base 510. An intermediate member 540 arranged below the irradiation unit 530, a reflector 560 arranged below the intermediate member 540, a front cover 550 arranged in front of the reflector 560, and an upper surface thereof. It is mainly provided with a rotation transmission unit 570 arranged on the back surface side of the base 510 and the lower surface base 520.

The rotation transmission unit 570 is a unit for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 457 to the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, and is a rear base 571 arranged on the back side and a front base 572 arranged on the front side. A bearing BR sandwiched between the front base 572 and the rear base 571 facing each other, and a fastening member 573 disposed inside the bearing BR are mainly provided.

The back surface base 571 is formed in a front view ring shape, and a bulging portion 571a that bulges in a back view ring shape is formed from the inner peripheral edge portion to the back side. A gear 571a1 is engraved on the outer side surface of the bulging portion 571a. The gear 571a1 is meshed with the gear 455 as described above. As a result, by applying the driving force to the driving motor 457, the driving force for rotation is transmitted to the rear base 571 (gear 571a1) via the gears 454 and 455, and the rotation unit 500 is rotated.

The front base 572 is formed in a front view annular shape, and has an outer standing portion 572a erected from the outer peripheral edge portion and an inner standing portion 572b erected from the inner peripheral circular portion in a front view U shape. And.

The outer standing portion 572a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the front surface of the rear base 571 and the back surface of the front base 57 2 and sandwiching the bearing BR and the fastening member 573 between the facing portions thereof. The height is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension in the axial direction of the BR, and the inner shape is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the bearing BR.

Further, the side surface of the outer standing portion 572a on the standing tip side is in contact with the front surface of the back base 571, and screws inserted from the back side of the back base 571 are fastened and fixed. As a result, the back base 571 and the front base 572 are fastened and fixed.

The inner standing portion 572b is a member that suppresses twisting of the wiring connecting the inside of the rotation unit 500 and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 when the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 described above is rotated. It is erected in a substantially U-shape in the rear view, and its inner shape is formed to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer shape of the front view shape of the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458.

Therefore, when the rotating unit 500 is arranged on the front base 452, the inner standing portion 572b can be externally fitted to the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458. Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, the flat portions of the inner vertical portion 572b and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 mesh with each other, and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be rotated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring connecting the rotating unit 500 and the signal transmission mechanism 458 from being twisted.

The bearing BR is a member that suppresses transmission of the rotation to the front base 452 when the rotation unit 500 is rotated with respect to the front base 452, and is a ring-shaped metal member having different inner and outer diameters. Is combined, and a spherical or cylindrical metal body is fitted between the two members.

The outer diameter of the bearing BR is set to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572. Thereby, the bearing BR can be fixedly arranged to the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572. In this case, the inner diameter of the back base 571 is set smaller than the outer diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, when the bearing BR is sandwiched between the front base 572 and the rear base 571, the bearing BR is prevented from being disengaged from the rotation transmission unit 570.

The fastening member 573 is a member that fastens the rotary unit 500 to the front base 452. The fastening member 573 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and includes a protruding wall portion 573a protruding from the outer peripheral surface on the front side.

The outer diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the bearing BR. On the other hand, the inner diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the inner standing portion 572b of the front base 572. As a result, the fastening member 573 is arranged in the rotation transmission unit 570 in such a manner that the outer edge portion thereof is fitted inside the inner edge portion of the bearing BR and the inner standing portion 572b of the front base is inserted through the inner edge portion. ..

The protrusion 573a is a protruding portion for suppressing the fastening member 573 from being removed from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570, and is formed so as to project over the entire circumference from the outer peripheral surface of the fastening member 573 with a constant protruding dimension. The outer diameter dimension is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, by fitting the fastening member 573 inwardly into the bearing BR from the front side of the bearing BR, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 573 from being removed from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570.

More specifically, by fitting the fastening member 573 inwardly into the bearing BR from the front of the bearing BR, it is possible to regulate the movement of the fastening member 573 to the rear with respect to the bearing BR. On the other hand, in the movement of the fastening member 573 to the front side, the bearing BR is arranged between the front base 57 2 and the back surface base 571, so that the front side surface of the fastening member 573 and the back surface side of the front base 572 are arranged. It is regulated by being in contact with the side surface of the. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 573 from coming off from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570.

Further, since the fastening member 573 on which the bearing BR is fitted is fastened to the front base 452, it is possible to suppress the transmission of the rotational motion when the rotation unit 500 is rotated to the front base 452.

That is, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, only the annular metal body arranged on the outside of the bearing BR is rotated, and the rotation is performed on the annular metal body arranged on the inside. By making it non-transmission, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the fastening member 573. As a result, the rotating unit 500 can be rotated with respect to the decorative member 450.

The upper surface base 510 is formed in an arc shape that curves toward the back side (upper side in FIG. 29 (a)) when viewed from the upper surface, and its leading edge portion curves downward (inward side of the paper surface in FIG. 29 (a)). It is formed in a curved shape. Further, the upper surface base 510 includes a decorative portion 511 that bulges in a semicircular shape in the front view in the central portion in the left-right direction (FIG. 29 (b) left-right direction), and a blower hole 512 that penetrates in the vertical direction (plate pressure direction). , A pressing portion 513 protruding in a cylindrical shape is mainly provided on the lower side.

The decorative portion 511 is a portion to be fastened to the upper side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570 described above, and a fastening hole to be fastened to the front base 572 is formed on the back side, and when viewed from the front. The radius of the semicircular shape is formed larger than the radius of the outer diameter of the front base 572. As a result, it can be fastened to the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, and the upper side of the front base 572 can be made invisible when viewed from the front.

The blower hole 512 is a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction (FIG. 29 (c) vertical direction), and is formed in a long hole shape that is longly opened in the front-rear direction (FIG. 29 (a) vertical direction). Further, a plurality of blower holes 512 are formed in the left-right direction along the arc shape of the upper surface base 510.

When the upper surface base 510 is combined with the lower surface base 520, the pressing portion 513 forms a gap between the irradiation unit 530 sandwiched between the upper surface base 510 and the upper surface base 510, and regulates the movement of the irradiation unit 530. The protrusion height is set to the height up to the side surface on the upper surface side of the irradiation unit 530 (see FIG. 29 (c)). Further, a plurality of pressing portions 513 are formed so as to protrude from the edge portion on the back surface side of the upper surface base 510.

The lower surface base 520 is formed in substantially the same shape as the upper surface base 510, and is arranged symmetrically with the upper surface base 510 about the axis of the rotation transmission unit 570. Since the decorative portion 521 and the blower hole 522 formed on the lower surface base have the same shape as the decorative portion 511 and the blower hole 512 formed on the upper surface base 510, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative portion 521 of the lower surface base 520 is a portion to be fastened to the lower side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, and is fastened to the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570 to be fastened to the front base when viewed from the front. The lower side of the 572 can be made invisible. Therefore, by combining the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, the player can visually observe the mechanism for rotating the rotating unit 500, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

The irradiation unit 530 is mainly provided with a substrate member 531 and an LED 532 arranged on the lower surface side of the substrate member 531.

The substrate member 531 is formed of a plate-like body having an outer shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller than the top view of the upper surface base 510. Thereby, when the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are arranged in combination in the vertical direction, the substrate member 531 can be made invisible from the vertical direction.

Further, the substrate member 531 is formed with a through hole 531a penetrating in the vertical direction at the edge portion on the front side. The through hole 531a is a member that suppresses the arrangement of the substrate member 531 from being displaced, and a detailed description thereof will be described later. The wiring of the shaft portion 458b of the signal transmission mechanism 458 described above is connected to the substrate member 531. This makes it possible to irradiate light from the LED 532, which will be described later, via an IC or a capacitor incorporated in the substrate member 531.

The LED 532 is formed as a surface mount type LED, and the outer shape (outer shape of the cavity molded from resin ceramic) in front view is formed into a rectangular shape, and the irradiation surface (epoxy or silicon enclosed in the cavity) to irradiate light is formed. The surface of the encapsulating resin such as) is formed in a circular shape in the front view. Further, the LED 532 is arranged on the lower surface side of the substrate member 531 and a plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction along the shape of the arc on the upper surface of the substrate member 531. As a result, the LED 532 can irradiate the reflector 560, which will be described later, with light.

The intermediate member 540 is formed of a plate-like body whose outer shape in top view is substantially the same as the top view shape of the top base 510. Thereby, when the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are arranged in combination in the vertical direction, the intermediate member 540 can be arranged between the facing surfaces thereof.

The front cover 550 is formed of a transparent light-transmitting material and is formed in an arc shape in a top view. Further, the front cover 550 is arranged on the intermediate member 540 side.

The outer surface of the reflector 560 is decorated with silver (plating), and the outer shape of the top view is formed from a plate-like body substantially the same as the top view shape of the top base 510. Further, the reflector 560 includes a recessed portion 564 whose front side surface is notched rearward.

The recessed portion 564 is arranged so that the front surface of the front cover 550 is placed at substantially the same position as the front surface of the upper surface base 510, the lower surface base 520, and the intermediate member 540 by inserting the above-mentioned front cover 550 into the notched portion thereof. Can be set. That is, the width dimension of the front cover 550 in the front-rear direction is set to the distance dimension from the front surface of the recessed portion 564 of the reflector 560 to the front surface of the upper surface base 510, the lower surface base 520, and the intermediate member 540. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front cover 550 from being disposed so as to protrude from the rotating unit 500. As a result, the rotating unit 500 can be assembled as an integrated unit with less unevenness, and when the rotating unit 500 is visually recognized, the outer shape of each part is difficult to understand, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a detailed description of the intermediate member 540 will be given. 30 (a) is a top view of the intermediate member 540, and FIG. 30 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the intermediate member 540 in the line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. 30 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B, the intermediate member 540 has a first outer edge portion that stands upward from the outer edge portion (direction in which the upper surface base 510 is arranged) when viewed from above. The 541 and the second outer edge portion 542, the irradiation hole 543 formed through the irradiation hole 543 in the vertical direction, the irradiation control portion 544 projecting from the periphery of the irradiation hole 543, and the projecting projecting from the front edge portion. A portion 545 and a groove portion 546 recessed in the outer peripheral edge portion of the irradiation restricting portion 544 are mainly provided.

The first outer edge portion 541 is formed on the outer edge portion on the front side of the intermediate member 540. The inner diameter dimension of the curved shape on the front side (lower side in FIG. 30A) of the first outer edge portion 541 is abbreviated as the outer diameter dimension of the curved shape on the front side in the top view of the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530. Set to the same. Further, the vertical dimension of the first outer edge portion 541 is set to be larger than the thickness dimension (vertical dimension) of the substrate member 531. Therefore, when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the irradiation unit 530 can be shielded by the first outer edge portion 541 to make it invisible from the front side.

The second outer edge portion 542 is formed on the outer edge portion on the back surface side of the intermediate member 540. The shape of the second outer edge portion 542 on the back surface side (upper side in FIG. 30A) is formed to be substantially the same as the shape on the back surface side of the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 in the top view. Further, the vertical dimension of the second outer edge portion 542 is set lower than that of the first outer edge portion 541. Therefore, when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the lower side surface of the irradiation unit 530 is arranged so as to be in contact with the erected tip surface of the second outer edge portion 542. Therefore, the introduced outside air can be smoothly discharged to the back surface.

The irradiation hole 543 is a hole for individually dividing the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 532 arranged in the irradiation unit 530, and is opened at a position facing the LED 532 arranged in the irradiation unit 530. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the light of the adjacent LEDs 532 from illuminating another range. Further, the inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, and their mutual axes are arranged coaxially. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently incident on the reflecting portion 563 of the reflector plate 560, which will be described later, via the irradiation hole 543.

Further, the irradiation hole 543 has a large inner diameter formed from the upper surface side (LED532 side) toward the lower surface side. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently incident on the reflecting portion 563 of the reflector plate 560 via the irradiation hole 543.

The irradiation control unit 544 is provided so as to project around the irradiation hole 543 described above. As a result, the gap between the LED 532 and the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 facing each other can be reduced, so that the light of the LED 532 can be easily incident on the irradiation hole 543 and can be suppressed from leaking to the outside of the irradiation hole 543. As a result, the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

Further, the protruding dimension of the irradiation restricting portion 544 is set to be substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the second outer edge portion 542, and when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the protruding tip surface of the irradiation regulating portion 544 and the irradiation unit 530 It comes into contact with the LED 532. As a result, it is possible to suppress the light of the adjacent LED from being incident on the irradiation hole 543, so that the outer diameter of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be clarified. Further, since the inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, the area of the irradiation control portion 544 that abuts on the LED 532 can be secured, so that the light of each LED 532 can be emitted. It is possible to suppress leakage to the outside of the irradiation hole 543. As a result, the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

Further, since the irradiation control unit 544 is connected to the adjacent irradiation control unit 544 and the outer peripheral surfaces of each other, the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 can be increased. In this case, the outer peripheral surface of the irradiation control unit 544 is formed in a circular shape, and the adjacent irradiation control unit 544 and the outer peripheral surfaces of each other are connected to each other. That is, since the group in which a plurality of irradiation control portions 544 are connected to each other has an uneven outer shape (a shape in which a plurality of outwardly convex arcs are continuous), a space (surface area) is secured and the heat dissipation effect is enhanced. At the same time, the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 can be increased by utilizing the unevenness of the outer shape.

The protrusion 545 is a protrusion that restricts the irradiation unit 530 from moving back and forth and left and right, and is formed at a position where the irradiation unit 500 is inserted into the through hole 531a of the substrate member 531 when the rotation unit 500 is assembled. Further, the projecting portion 545 is formed in a shape in which cylinders having different outer diameter shapes are combined vertically, and has a large diameter portion 545a on the base side and a small diameter portion 545b on the tip side having a smaller diameter than the large diameter portion 545a. Formed from.

The large-diameter portion 545a is a protrusion for forming a predetermined gap between the intermediate member 540 and the substrate member 531 when the irradiation unit 530 is arranged on the intermediate member 540, and penetrates the substrate member 531. The outer diameter is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the hole 531a, and the protruding dimension thereof is set to be substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the second outer edge portion 542.

Thereby, when the irradiation unit 530 is arranged on the intermediate member 540, the facing distance between the intermediate member 540 on the front side and the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined. On the other hand, the facing distance between the intermediate member 540 on the back surface side and the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined by the second outer edge portion 542. Further, since the protruding distance of the large diameter portion 545a and the standing distance of the second outer edge portion 542 are set to be substantially the same, the vertical side surface of the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is used as the vertical side surface of the intermediate member 540. On the other hand, it can be arranged in parallel.

The small diameter portion 545b is a protrusion for positioning the irradiation unit 530 with respect to the intermediate member 540 when the irradiation unit 530 is arranged on the intermediate member 540, and is abbreviated as the inner diameter of the through hole 531a of the substrate member 531. The outer diameter is set to the same or slightly smaller. Therefore, when arranging the irradiation unit 530 on the intermediate member 540, the through hole 531a of the substrate member 531 is externally fitted in the small diameter portion 545b of the intermediate member 540, so that the irradiation unit 530 for the intermediate member 540 is moved in the front-back and left-right directions. Can specify the movement of.

The groove portion 546 is a groove that extends along the base of the irradiation control portion 544 and is recessed in a U-shaped cross section. Since the area where the side surface of the intermediate member 540 and the outside air come into contact with each other increases due to the recessed portion of the groove portion 546, the heat dissipation of the intermediate member 540 is improved. Further, the heat dissipation effect can be enhanced while ensuring the rigidity of the intermediate member 540. That is, by forming the groove-shaped groove portion 546 extending along the base portion of the irradiation control portion 544, the region recessed in the intermediate member 540 is minimized, and the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 is ensured. By the operation of the LED 532, the space can be expanded with respect to the portion where the generated heat is particularly concentrated, and the heat dissipation effect can be enhanced.

The groove width of the groove portion 546 is set to be smaller than the distance dimension from the outer peripheral edge portion of the irradiation control portion 544 to the irradiation hole 543, and the recessed depth of the groove portion 546 is larger than half the plate thickness of the intermediate member 540. Set small.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a detailed description of the front cover 550 will be given. 31 (a) is a front view of the front cover 550, and FIG. 31 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front cover 550 in the XXXIb-XXXIb line of FIG. 31 (a). In addition, in FIG. 31 (b), the diffusion part 551 is schematically shown.

As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), the front cover 550 has a diffusion portion 551 on the inner edge side (upper side of FIG. 31 (b)) of the lower side (left side of FIG. 31 (b)). Formed in preparation.

The diffusing portion 551 is a portion that has been roughened, and the light emitted to the diffusing portion 551 can be diffusely reflected by the rough surface and diffused. The rough surface processing is a processing mode in which irregularities are formed on the surface.

Next, the reflector 560 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 32. 32 (a) is a top view of the reflector 560, and FIG. 32 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the reflector 560 in the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a). In addition, in FIG. 32 (b), the reflection part 563 is schematically shown.

As shown in FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b), the reflector 560 is surrounded by a partition wall 561 erected on the upper surface side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 32 (a)) and the partition wall 561. It is mainly provided with a reflection portion 563 formed on the upper surface of the region and an erection wall 562 erected along the edge portion on the back surface side.

The partition wall 561 is erected in a U-shape with the front side (lower side in FIG. 32 (a) open) when viewed from above, and a plurality of partition walls 561 are erected in the left-right direction along the front edge of the reflector 560. Individuals are formed side by side. Further, the adjacent standing walls 562 are combined (also used) with the wall portions extending in the front direction to form one wall portion. As a result, the space for arranging the partition walls 561 in parallel can be reduced. As a result, the number of partition walls 561 that can be formed can be maximized.

The reflective portion 563 is formed by roughening the upper surface of the region surrounded between the front edge portion of the reflector 560 and the partition wall 561 by laser processing or the like in the top view. Further, the reflecting portion 563 is connected to the horizontal portion 563a formed from the side surfaces parallel to the upper surface and the lower surface of the reflecting plate 560, and the thickness of the reflecting plate 560 increases as it is connected to the horizontal portion 563a and separated from the horizontal portion 563a. It is mainly provided with an inclined surface 563b inclined in a direction.

The horizontal portion 563a is formed on a side surface parallel to the upper surface and the lower surface of the reflector 560, other than the front edge portion. That is, the horizontal portion 563a (reflection portion 563) is not formed on the edge portion on the front side, and the rough surface is not processed. As a result, the reflective portion 563 can be formed by holding the front edge portion of the reflector 560. As a result, it is not necessary to separately form a holding portion for rough surface processing on the reflector 560, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The inclined surface 563b is a portion that mainly reflects the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 arranged on the upper surface side to the front side, and is inclined 45 degrees to the front side with respect to the irradiation surface of the LED 532. Formed on the surface.

Further, the connecting position between the horizontal portion 563a and the inclined surface 563b is set to a position where the connecting straight line passes through the axis of the irradiation surface of the LED 532. As a result, among the light emitted from the LED 532, the light emitted toward the back surface side can be effectively reflected to the front surface side by the inclined surface 563b. On the other hand, among the light emitted from the LED 532, the light emitted to the front side can be reflected to the front side by the horizontal portion 563a.

As described above, the erection wall 562 is erected along the edge on the back surface side of the reflector 560, and the erection height thereof is set to be the same as the erection height of the partition wall 561. .. Thereby, when the rotating unit 500 is assembled (the intermediate member 540 is arranged on the upper part of the reflector 560), a space can be formed between the vertical wall 562 and the partition wall 561. That is, an air layer can be formed between the reflector 560 and the intermediate member 540. As a result, it is possible to suppress the storage of heat inside the reflector 560 and the intermediate member 540, the rotating unit 500 stores heat, and the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 arranged in the rotating unit 500 It is possible to prevent damage.

As described above, the configured rotary unit 500 is assembled as follows. First, the fastening member 573 is internally fitted to the inner circle portion of the bearing BR from the front side, and the inner circle portion of the fastening member 573 is externally fitted to the inner standing portion 572b of the front base 572. After integrating the front base 572, the bearing BR, and the fastening member 573, the rear base 571 is arranged on the back side thereof, and the front base 572 and the rear base 571 are fastened to assemble the rotation transmission unit 570 as a unit.

In the front portion of the rotation unit 500 (the portion excluding the rotation transmission unit 570), the lower surface base 520 is arranged under the reflector 560, and the lower surface base 520 and the reflector 560 are fastened to each other. After the lower surface base 520 and the reflector 560 are fastened and fixed, the intermediate member 540 is overlapped on the upper surface side of the reflector 560 with the front cover 550 sandwiched on the front side. The irradiation unit 530 is arranged on the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 in a state where the through hole 531a is fitted onto the small diameter portion 545b of the projecting portion 545 of the intermediate member 540. In this state, by arranging the upper surface base 510 from above and fastening it to the intermediate member 540, the front portion of the rotation unit 500 (the portion excluding the rotation transmission unit 570) is assembled as a unit.

Next, the rotation unit 500 is assembled as one unit by arranging the rotation transmission unit 570 behind the front portion of the rotation unit 500 and fastening the rotation unit 500 and the rotation transmission unit 570.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. 33 (a) is a top view of the rotating unit 500, and FIG. 33 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating unit 500 in the line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb of FIG. 33 (a). (A) and (b) of FIG. 34 are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the rotating unit 500 in the XXXIV portion of FIG. 33 (b).

Note that FIG. 33A shows a state in which the upper surface base 510 and the irradiation unit 530 are removed from the rotating unit 500. Further, in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), the light emitted from the LED 532 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b), below the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540, a reflection portion 563 surrounded by a partition wall 561 and partitioned as a region 1 is arranged. .. As described above, since each LED 532 is arranged on the upper side of each irradiation hole 543, the light emitted from each LED 532 can be irradiated to the reflecting portion 563 at a different position. That is, since the light emitted from each LED 532 can be emitted in a state of being partitioned by each reflecting portion 563, the division of the light of each LED 532 can be clarified. As a result, since the light emitted from each LED 532 can be emitted only from the corresponding reflecting unit 563, the outer shape of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be clarified.

Further, since a structure for incident the light of the LED 532 onto the reflecting portion 563 of the corresponding reflecting plate 560 via the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540 is formed from the two members of the reflecting plate 560 and the intermediate member 540, such a structure. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the body is composed of one member. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the light radiated from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the inclined surface 563b of the reflector 560 is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b, and the front side (lower side of FIG. 34 (a)). It is reflected on the side), passes through the front cover 550, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. That is, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be emitted to the front (front side) of the rotating unit 500. Therefore, even when the posture of the substrate member 531 is such that the surface on which the LED 532 is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500, the light (blinking) of the LED 532 is visually recognized by the player, and an afterimage is displayed by the afterimage effect. be able to.

Further, the inclined surface 563b of the reflector 560 can efficiently emit the light emitted from the LED 532 to the player side. Therefore, stronger light can be emitted to the front side of the rotating unit 500. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

Among the light emitted from the LED 532 to the inclined surface 563b of the reflecting portion 563, there is light that is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b and reflected on the opposite surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflector 560. .. The light reflected on the opposing surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflector 560 is reflected again by the surfaces (opposing surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflector 560) to irradiate the front cover 550.

In this case, as described above, since the intermediate member 540 is formed in white, which has a lower light absorption rate than black, the light reflected by the intermediate member 540 can be easily reflected again. On the other hand, as described above, the reflector 560 is decorated with silver on the outer surface, so that the light reflected by the reflector 560 can be easily reflected again.

Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 532 to the reflecting unit 563 can be diffusely reflected by the rough surface and emitted to the front side (to the player side) of the rotating unit 500 in a state of being evenly dispersed. That is, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the opening of the reflecting portion 563 from being visually recognized in a state of being biased toward a part of the opening.

As shown in FIG. 34 (b), the light radiated from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the horizontal portion 563a of the reflector 560 is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the horizontal portion 563a, and the front side (lower side of FIG. 34 (b)). Reflected on the side). Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be passed through the front cover 550 and emitted to the front side.

Since the rough surface of the horizontal portion 563a is not formed on the front side end portion of the reflector 560, it is possible to easily emit light toward the front side (player side) of the rotating unit 500. , It is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect. That is, when the end portion of the inner surface of the reflector 560 on the front side of the rotating unit 500 is roughened, light is diffusely reflected on the rough surface and the front side of the rotating unit 500 (player side). ) Is reduced, the front end of the reflector 560 is not formed, and at least the smooth surface is flatter than the rough surface processed by the reflector 563, so that it is diffusely reflected. Can be suppressed to increase the light toward the front side (player side) of the rotating unit 500.

Further, the partition wall 561 has a front side (recessed portion 564) formed at an end portion on the front side of the horizontal portion 563a (a portion where the rough surface processing of the reflective portion 563 is not formed (smooth surface)). Since the shape is tapered toward the end of the horizontal portion (side), the cross-sectional area of the inner surface of the non-formed portion of the horizontal portion 563a becomes larger toward the front end of the rotating unit 500. It is enlarged (increased in diameter). Therefore, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotating unit 500 can be expanded. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting area can be expanded more than the area of the light emitting surface of the LED 532. Therefore, the LED 532 can be miniaturized.

Further, since the front side of the reflector 560 (rotating unit 500) is formed so as to be curved toward the back side toward the end centering on the center portion (rotation axis) in the left-right direction, the front side (concave) of the reflector 560 is formed. The end portion of the end portion (the side on which the notch 564 is formed) is radially separated from the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500, so that the front side (recessed portion 564) in each region partitioned by the partition wall 561 is formed. The length dimension of the end of the side) is increased. As a result, the visible brightness (brightness of light) of each of the plurality of reflecting portions 563 can be made uniform.

That is, in the rotating unit 500, the displacement speed (peripheral speed) becomes faster as it goes outward in the radial direction from the rotating shaft (rotation center). Therefore, when the LEDs 532 arranged in a row emit light with the same brightness, the rotating shaft The light of the LED 532 that is closer to is seen to have a higher brightness (brighter) than the light of the LED 532 that is farther from the axis of rotation (outward in the radial direction).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front side (recess) in each region partitioned by the partition wall 561 so that the end portion on the front side of the reflector 560 is radially separated from the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500. Since the length dimension of the end portion (the side on which the portion 564 is formed) is increased, the reflection portion 563 (LED532) that is radially outwardly separated from the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500 is more diffusely reflected by the rough surface. (That is, the proportion of light directly visible to the player from the LED 532 is reduced) so that the light can be visually recognized as high-brightness light. As a result, it is possible to suppress the difference in brightness seen by the eyes at the arrangement position in the radial direction and make the brightness (brightness of light) uniform.

Further, since the length dimension of the horizontal portion 563a of the reflector 560 in the direction parallel to the axial direction of the rotating unit 500 is increased in the radial direction from the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500, the number of reflecting portions 563 is increased. The brightness (brightness of light) that can be visually recognized can be made uniform.

The light emitted to the front cover 550 can be diffused in the traveling direction by the diffusing portion 551 formed on the inner peripheral surface of the front cover 550. That is, the rough surface of the diffuser portion 551 of the front cover 550 allows the traveling direction of the light applied to the diffuser portion 551 to be bent in a plurality of different directions. As a result, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotating unit 500 can be expanded. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting area can be expanded more than the area of the light emitting surface of the LED 532. Therefore, the LED 532 can be miniaturized.

Further, if the light of the LED 532 is directly visually recognized by the player (without transmitting the member of the light transmitting material), the light of the LED 532 has a high directivity to the front, so that the player is dazzled. I was afraid to feel it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the surface for diffusely reflecting the light emitted from the LED 532 is formed at two locations of the reflector 560 and the front cover 550, the directivity of the light emitted from the LED 532 can be weakened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the irradiated light and feeling dazzling.

Here, there is known a device having a plurality of light emitting means (LED 532) and blinking the light emitting means according to a rotation position to display by an afterimage effect. However, in the conventional light emitting means, the posture of the substrate (board member 531) is such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the axis of rotation (that is, the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is directed to the front side (player side). Since the posture is parallel to the plane of rotation), the outer shape in front view (viewing in the direction of the axis of rotation) becomes large. Therefore, there is a problem that the visibility of the back side of the rotation unit 500 is impaired when the rotation of the rotation display device (rotation unit 500) is stopped.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation unit 500 has a top surface base in such a posture that the substrate member 531 in which a plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged in a row has a surface on which the LED 532 is mounted substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500. Since it is arranged between the 510 and the lower surface base 520, the outer shapes of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 in the front view (rotational axis direction view) can be suppressed. As a result, the visibility of the back surface side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 can be improved when the rotation of the rotation unit 500 is stopped.

Next, the rotation of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36.

35 (a) and 35 (b) are front views of the rotating unit 500. 36 (a) and 36 (b) are top views of the rotating unit 500.

In FIGS. 35 (a) to 36 (b), the flow of air generated by the rotating unit 500 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and the reference numeral of the air flow K is given. Further, the ventilation holes 512 and 522 of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are shown by broken lines.

Further, in the present embodiment, only the explanation when the rotating unit 500 is rotated to the left in the front view is described, and when the rotating unit 500 is rotated to the right in the front view, the flow of the airflow K is only reversed around the rotation axis of the rotating unit 500. Since there is, the explanation is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b), when the rotating unit 500 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 457 described above, the rotation causes external air to enter through the air blow holes 512 and 522. Airflow K is generated inside the rotating unit 500.

In this case, since the air blow holes 512 and 522 are opened in the tangential direction with respect to the rotation direction of the rotation unit 500, when the rotation unit 500 rotates, the rotation unit 500 is opened through the air blow holes 512 and 522. It is possible to easily allow external air to enter the inside of the rotating unit 500.

More specifically, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated to the left in the front view, the air holes 512 of the upper surface base 510 formed on the right side of the front view and the air holes of the lower surface base 520 formed on the left side of the front view at the initial position. The 522 is displaced in the direction of taking in (inserting) air into the air vents 512 and 522. As a result, when the rotating unit 500 rotates, the air outside the rotating unit 500 can easily enter the inside of the rotating unit 500. Therefore, it is possible to cool the heat generated when the LED 532 operates.

Since the air holes 512 of the upper surface base 510 and the air holes 522 of the lower surface base 520 are formed to be point-symmetrical with respect to the rotation axis, when the rotation unit 500 rotates to the right in the front view, it rotates at the initial position. The air holes 512 of the upper surface base 510 formed on the left side of the front view of the unit 500 and the air holes 522 of the lower surface base 520 formed on the right side of the front view make it easy to take in external air into the rotating unit 500. That is, even when the rotating unit 500 is rotated to the right, the same effect as in the above-mentioned case (when the rotating unit 500 is rotated to the left side in the front view) is obtained.

Here, if a substrate (board member 531) on which an LED (LED 532) is mounted is arranged inside a rotating body (rotating unit 500) and the rotating body is rotationally driven, the LED emits light. If the heat generated when the IC / capacitor operates cannot be sufficiently cooled, the LED soldered to the board and the solder of the IC / capacitor that controls the LED may melt, resulting in poor contact.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the blower holes 512 and 522 are opened in the tangential direction with respect to the rotation direction of the rotation unit 500, so that the outside air is taken into the inside of the rotation unit 500 by the rotation of the rotation unit 500. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to cool the heat generated when the LED operates.

The air taken into the inside of the rotating unit 500 from the blower holes 512 and 522 mainly collides with the irradiation unit 530 or the reflector 560 and is dispersed. The airflow K dispersed on the back side of the rotating unit 500 (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 35A) is distributed to the outside of the rotating unit 500 from the opening (gap between facing each other) on the back side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. It is blown and released into the atmosphere.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36 (a), the airflow K dispersed on the front side (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 35 (a)) of the rotating unit 500 is radially from the rotation axis due to the centrifugal force of the rotation of the rotating unit 500. It is blown to the outside, blown to the outside of the rotating unit 500, and released into the atmosphere (see FIG. 35 (a)).

That is, since the shape of the rotating unit 500 in which the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are combined is formed into a container-like shape in which the back surface side is open, the outside air taken in from the blower holes 512 and 522 is efficiently taken from the back surface side. Therefore, the heat generation can be cooled when the LED 532 operates. Further, by exhausting from the back surface side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 in this way, it is possible to prevent the exhaust from affecting the ball flowing down the game area (or rolling the stage).

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 have a long front view (that is, a rotation axis direction view) rectangular shape along the diameter direction in the rotation plane of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. Since it is formed, the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 is used to move the air inside the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 to the longitudinal end side (diameter outward during rotation). It can be made to flow and exhausted from the back side. Therefore, with the flow of such air, outside air can be taken into the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 from the back surface side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570.

That is, since the rotation speed is low in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, the efficiency of taking in outside air from the ventilation holes 512 and 522 on the side wall is poor (or cannot be taken in), but air circulation using centrifugal force (rotation transmission unit 570). The outside air is taken in from the back side in the vicinity, and the taken-in outside air is flowed to the end side in the longitudinal direction (diametrically outward during rotation) by centrifugal force, and the flow of air exhausted from the back side on the radial outer side). Can be formed. As a result, the heat generated when the LED 532 operates can be cooled. In particular, cooling of the LED 532 disposed in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 can be achieved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36B, when the air inside the rotating unit 500 is pushed outward in the radial direction by the rotation of the rotating unit 500, the internal pressure on the center side of the rotating unit 500 decreases, so that the rotating unit External air is taken in from the gap on the back surface side between the rotation transmission unit 570 of 500 and the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. As a result, cooling of the LED 532 arranged in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 can be more reliably achieved.

In this case, the front wall forming the front side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (the front edge portion of the upper surface base 510 is downward (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 29 (a)) (the front edge portion of the lower surface base 520 is upward)). The curved portion) has a shape parallel to the rotation plane of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (that is, the shape in the direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 is a rectangular parallelepiped shape). , Since the angle of the part where the air flowed to the end in the longitudinal direction (outward in the radial direction during rotation) due to centrifugal force changes direction toward the back side is approximately a right angle, a vortex is likely to be formed in such a part. .. Therefore, the air flow is obstructed and smooth exhaust from the back surface side becomes difficult.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (the front edge portion of the upper surface base 510 is downward (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 29 (a)) (the front edge portion of the lower surface base 520 is upward)). Since the shape of the curved part) is formed from the central part in the left-right direction to the outward side, the air that is gradually flowed to the end side in the longitudinal direction (outward in the radial direction during rotation) due to centrifugal force is gradually applied. In addition to being able to flow to the back side, the angle of the part where the air flowed to the longitudinal end (diametrically outward) turns toward the back side can be made larger than a substantially right angle, so at such a part The formation of vortices can be suppressed and the air flow can be smoothed. Therefore, exhaust from the back side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, cooling of the LED 532 arranged in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 can be more reliably achieved.

Further, the distance dimension between the facing surfaces of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 on the back surface side (dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 35A) is such that the distance dimension on the back surface side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 is on the end side in the longitudinal direction. Since it is made larger than the distance dimension on the back side, the air inside the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 flows to the end side in the longitudinal direction (outward in the radial direction during rotation) by utilizing the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation. By making it exhaust from the back side on the outer side in the radial direction, it is possible to efficiently take in the outside air when taking in the outside air from the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570.

Further, since the open portion on the back surface side (the inner circumference of the decorative portion 511 of the upper surface base 510 and the decorative portion 521 of the lower surface base 520) in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 is formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotation axis, the upper surface base 510 And, with the rotation of the lower surface base 520, it is possible to suppress the disturbance of the outside air on the back surface side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 (flow in the rotation direction is formed). As a result, the outside air can be efficiently taken in from the back surface side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570.

Further, since the outer peripheral surface of the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572 is formed in a shape that narrows from the back side to the front side, the rotating unit 500 is formed in the decorative portion 511 of the upper surface base 510 and the decorative portion of the lower surface base 520. It is possible to suppress the generation of a vortex in the airflow K when air is taken in from the gap between the 521 and the rotation transmission unit 570. Therefore, the flow of the airflow K flowing through the central portion in the left-right direction of the rotation unit 500 can be smoothed, and when the outside air is taken in from the back surface side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, the intake can be efficiently performed. ..

Next, the center frame 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41.

First, the overall configuration of the center frame 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame 600.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the center frame 600 includes a frame body 610 formed in a front view annular shape, and a center cover 620 arranged so as to cover the inner peripheral portion of the frame body 610. It is mainly provided with a sensor 630 attached to the frame body 610.

The frame body 610 has a stage 611 projecting from the lower portion of the inner peripheral edge portion in front view toward the center cover 620 side (rear side), a wall portion 612 projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral side surface, and a back surface side. A fastening hole 613 that is recessed in a circular shape toward the front side at the edge of the sensor 630 and an opening 614 that opens in front of the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 arranged on the back side. To.

Further, the frame body 610 is a member that is arranged in the central portion of the game board 13 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) and is visible to the player via the glass 8. Patterns and pictures are drawn on the front side.

The stage 611 is formed by bending from the inner edge portion on the lower side of the frame body 610 to the back surface side, and the first concave portion 611a is formed on the upper surface thereof at the end portion on the front side and the second concave portion is formed on the end portion on the back surface side. Each of the installation portions 611b is recessed.

The stage 611 rolls the ball on its upper surface, and drops the ball from the upper surface of the stage 611 using the inclination of either the first recessed portion 611a or the second recessed portion 612b to distribute the ball. It is possible to form a state in which a ball can easily win a prize in the opening 710a of the device 700. Therefore, since it is possible to form a plurality of flow paths of the ball flowing down the game area, it is possible to give the player an interest.

The first recessed portion 611a is a groove for dropping a ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611 onto the front side (front side of the base plate 60) of the game board 13, and is a recessed depth toward the front side. Is deeply formed. The second recessed portion 611b is a groove for throwing a ball into an opening formed in the back surface portion at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 611, and the recessed depth is formed deeper toward the back surface side.

The wall portion 612 is a portion that is positioned in the front-rear direction with respect to the base plate 60 when the assembled center frame 600 is arranged on the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), and is located in the center portion of the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction. It is formed in an outer shape larger than the inner shape of the opening that is formed through in the direction. As a result, when the center frame 600 is inserted into the opening of the base plate 60 from the front side, the side surface on the back side of the wall portion 612 comes into contact with the side surface on the front side of the base plate 60 with respect to the base plate 60. The center frame 600 can be positioned.

A plurality of fastening holes 613 are recessed on the back surface side of the frame body 610, and are formed at positions facing the through holes 623a of the center cover 620, which will be described later. The opening 614 is an opening for irradiating the front side with the sensor light emitted from the sensor 630 described later, and is formed at a position facing the irradiation surface 631 to which the sensor light of the sensor 630 is irradiated.

The center cover 620 is formed of a resin material that is a light-transmitting material, is formed in a substantially circular shape in front view, and is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the frame body 610. The cover member 621 and the left and right edges of the cover member 621 are provided. It is mainly provided with a side wall portion 622 erected on the front side from the side, and a mounting portion 623 projecting outward from the erected tip surface of the side wall portion 622 and the lower edge portion of the cover member 621. The cover.

The cover member 621 is formed into a plate-like body having a constant thickness that curves toward the back side (the front side becomes a convex curved surface) from the upper center in the left-right direction toward the outside in the front view. The upper peripheral edge of the central portion in the left-right direction (hereinafter referred to as "first portion 621a") is formed so as to be located in front of the peripheral edges of both left and right ends and the lower end (hereinafter referred to as "second portion").

Since the cover member 621 is formed of a plate-like body having a constant thickness, it is possible to suppress the action as a convex lens and ensure the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back surface side.

Further, since the cover member 621 is formed of a plate-like body having a constant thickness, the cover member 621 faces the third symbol display device 81 by the amount that the central portion in the left-right direction curves toward the front side in the front view. A space can be formed between them. As a result, it is possible to secure a space in which the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 described above is displaced and produced.

The side wall portion 622 is a wall portion so that the center cover 620 can be attached to the frame body 610, and since the cover member 621 is curved to the back surface side as described above, the back surface of the frame body 610 and the center cover are correspondingly formed. Where the distance between the front surface of the 620 and the front surface increases, the side wall portion 622 can reduce (eliminate) the distance between the back surface of the frame body 610 and the front surface of the center cover 620.

That is, the erecting dimension of the side wall portion 622 on the front side is set to the distance dimension between the back surface of the frame body 610 and the front surface of the center cover 620 when the center cover 620 is arranged on the frame body 610. As a result, when the frame body 610 and the center cover 620 are combined, it is possible to prevent the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 from protruding too much toward the front side of the frame body 610.

The mounting portion 623 is a protruding portion for mounting the center cover 620 on the frame body 610, and a plurality of through holes 623a formed through in the front-rear direction are formed. As described above, a fastening hole 613 is formed in the back surface of the frame body 610 at a position facing the through hole 623a, and a screw or the like (not shown) is inserted through the through hole 623a and fastened to the fastening hole 613. As a result, the frame body 610 and the center cover 620 are fastened and fixed.

The sensor 630 is a motion sensor for detecting the movement of the player, and is a light emitting unit that irradiates light such as infrared rays and a light receiving unit that receives the reflected light reflected by the object. The irradiation surface 631 having the above is provided.

The sensor 630 is arranged at a height of about 2/3 from the bottom when the frame body 610 is divided into three equal parts in the vertical direction, and is arranged on the right side of the frame body 610. Further, the sensor 630 is arranged in a state where the irradiation surface 631 is tilted toward the center front side of the center frame 600. As a result, the light emitted from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 is emitted from the central portion on the front side of the game board 13 to the player side via the glass 8.

Next, the sensor light emitted from the sensor 630 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40.

39 (a) is a front view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 39 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 in the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line of FIG. 39 (a). 40 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 in the XLa-XLa line of FIG. 39 (a), and FIG. 40 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 in the XLb-XLb line of FIG. 39 (a). It is a figure.

In FIGS. 39 (a) and 40 (b), the irradiation region of the light of the sensor 630 irradiated in front of the center frame 600 is shown by a two-dot chain line, and is shown as the irradiation regions R1 and R2. Further, in FIG. 39 (b), the sensor 630 is illustrated by a broken line. Further, in FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (b), the light emitted from the sensor 630 and the sensor 630 is shown by a two-dot chain line and arranged in front of the center frame 600 (front of the game board 13). The glass 8 to be formed is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the sensor 630 is arranged in front of the second portion 621b of the cover member 621. As a result, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine through (transmitted) through the cover member 621, and the light emitted from the sensor 630 is blocked by the cover member 621. It can be suppressed. Further, in the sensor 630, a decorative portion of the frame body 610 is arranged on the front side. This makes it difficult for the sensor 630 to be visually recognized from the player side (front side).

The light emitted from the sensor 630 irradiates the glass 8 directly from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 and irradiates the region of the irradiation region R1 emitted from the front side of the glass 8 and the front surface of the cover member 621 of the center cover 620. The light is reflected and emitted to the region of the irradiation region R2 emitted from the front side of the glass 8.

Here, in the game machine in which the motion sensor (sensor 630) is arranged in the game machine and the movement of the player on the front side of the liquid crystal device (third symbol display device 81) is detected, the motion sensor is exposed. There was a problem that it spoiled the interest.

Therefore, the sensor 630 is arranged on the back side of the decorative member (frame body 610). In this case, if the sensor 630 is retracted from the inner edge side (opening 614 of the frame body 610) of the decorative member to the inner side (outside), it can be made more difficult to see, but the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion (irradiation surface 631) are frontal. It becomes difficult to point toward, and the detection range becomes narrow. On the other hand, if the sensor 630 is positioned close to the inner edge side of the decorative member (the opening of the frame body 610), the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion can be easily directed to the front, so that the detection range can be widened in the front-rear direction. It becomes easier to see. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor 630.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a part of the light emitted from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 is applied to the cover member 621 of the center cover 620, so that the curved shape of the cover member 621 causes the front side ( It is reflected on the player side). As a result, the sensor 630 can be retracted to the back of the opening 614 of the frame body 610 so that it is difficult for the player to see the sensor 630, and a range in which the object can be detected can be secured. Since the cover member 621 is made of a light-transmitting material, the visibility of the design displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be ensured.

Further, since the front side of the cover member 621 is a convex curved surface, when the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected on the front surface of the cover member 621, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) is located near the sensor 630. On the other hand, at a position far from the sensor 630, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) can be made a blunt angle, and the range in which an object can be detected can be easily expanded accordingly.

Further, the light irradiated to the irradiation region R2 (light reflected by the cover member 621) is reflected on the cover member 621 side when the object is irradiated and reflected. In this case, the traveling direction of the reflected light differs depending on the surface shape of the reflecting object, but the traveling of the light reflected in different directions by reflecting the light reflected in a plurality of directions on the front surface of the cover member 621. The direction can be the traveling direction toward the sensor 630 side. That is, by increasing the amount of light reflected on the sensor 630 side, it is possible to reliably perform the light receiving detection operation of the sensor 630.

The first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is located on the front side of the wall portion 612 of the frame body 610, and the second portion 621b is located on the back side of the wall portion 612 of the frame body 610 (FIG. 39 (FIG. 39). b) See). That is, the first portion 621a is arranged at a position substantially identical to the back surface of the base plate 60 or on the front side of the back surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), and the second portion 621b is the back surface of the base plate 60. It is arranged at a position closer to the back side.

As a result, it is possible to secure the distance dimension between the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 and the third symbol display device 81 facing each other in the upper part of the center frame 600. As a result, the dimensions in the front-rear direction when the decorative member 450 of the above-mentioned vertical displacement unit 400 is displaced in the vertical direction can be secured, and the decorative member 450 can be displaced. Further, the curvature of the cover member 621 can be increased in the limited space between the space behind the displacement of the decorative member 450 and the space in the front where the glass 8 is arranged.

Further, since the first portion 621a is arranged at a position substantially the same as the back surface of the base plate 60 or on the front side of the back surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 (see FIG. 2). The rotation unit 500) can be more reliably suppressed from interfering with the first portion 621a, and the displacement member can be increased in size accordingly.

Further, since the second portion 621b is arranged at a position on the back side of the back surface of the base plate 60, the curvature of the cover member 621 can be increased, and the front side of the cover member 621 is used as a light reflecting surface. It can be done easily. That is, it is possible to secure a range in which an object can be detected while arranging the sensor 630 on the back side to make it difficult for the player to see.

Further, since the first portion 621a is located above the cover member 621, in the store where the gaming machine 10 is installed, the illumination of the fluorescent lamp of the store is reflected by the cover member 621 to be reflected on the front side (player side). It is possible to suppress the irradiation to.

That is, if the upper portion of the cover member 621 is curved toward the back side, the light of the fluorescent lamp of the store irradiated from diagonally above is easily reflected to the front side, and the front surface of the cover member 621 is formed. Since the normal direction is formed as a curved surface pointing downward at least in the horizontal direction, the light incident on the front surface of the cover member 621 can be reflected downward. That is, when light from a fluorescent lamp or other gaming machine installed on the ceiling in the store is incident on the front surface of the cover member 621, it is possible to suppress the light from being reflected toward the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzling and the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 from deteriorating.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the relationship between the center frame 600 and the rotating unit 500 of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described.

41 (a) and 41 (b) are cross-sectional views of the rotating unit 500 and the center frame 600. Note that, in FIG. 41 (a), the initial position (reference position) (position in which the extension direction is oriented horizontally) of the rotating unit 500 is shown, and in FIG. 41 (b), the rotating unit 500 is centered on its rotation axis. The mode rotated by 90 degrees is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 is displaced to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) and the back side of the center frame 600. When located in, a predetermined gap is formed between the rotating unit 500 of the decorative member 450 and the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 facing each other. As a result, the rotation unit 500 can rotate without colliding with the cover member 621.

In this case, if the rotating member (rotating unit 500) rotates in front of the third symbol display device 81, a wind flow is generated by the rotation of the rotating member, and the ball flowing down due to the influence of the wind is generated. There was a problem that it would move.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the rotating unit 500 is located above the stage 611 on which the ball rolls, the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611 is easily affected by the wind due to the rotation of the rotating unit 500.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the mounting portion 623 connected from the second portion 621b of the cover member 621 is fastened to the fastening hole 613 recessed under the stage 611 of the frame body 610 (that is,). Since the lower end portion of the center cover 620 is connected to the lower end portion of the frame body 610), the flow-down region of the sphere and the displacement region of the rotating unit 500 can be separated. Therefore, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be blocked by the cover member 621 (second portion 621b). As a result, it is possible to suppress the influence of the flow of the sphere by the action of the wind. Further, even if a wind is generated by the rotation of the rotating unit 500 and dust or dust is blown off by the wind, it can be blocked by the second portion 621b (cover member 621), so that the blown dust or dust is a sensor. It is possible to prevent the detection accuracy from deteriorating due to soaring on the light emitting / receiving route.

Here, it has been conventionally known that a back wall is erected on the stage 611 of the center frame 600 so that the ball rolling on the stage 611 does not fall to the back side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating unit 500 wraps around from the standing tip on the back side erected from the stage 611 to the front side, or the glass 8 on the front side of the game board 13. It is folded back at and affects the ball rolling on the stage 611. On the other hand, in order to prevent the influence of the wind on the sphere rolling on the stage 611, the back wall is curved to the front side so as to cover the circumference of the sphere of the stage (that is, a closed passage is formed). ), Since it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611, the interest of the player is impaired.

On the other hand, since the second portion 621b of the cover member 621 is connected to the range including the stage 611 of the frame body 610, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 is generated by the second portion 621b (cover member 621). Can be blocked by. As a result, since it is not necessary to cover the periphery of the stage 611, the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611 can be easily seen by the player, and the flow of the ball can be suppressed from being affected by the action of the wind.

Here, if the displacement region in which the displacement member (vertical displacement unit 400) is displaced and the flow-down region in which the ball flows down are partitioned by a partition plate (center cover 620), the back surface arranged on the back surface side of the game board 13 Since many members that generate heat such as the third symbol display device 81 and the drive motor 441 that drives the vertical displacement unit 400 are arranged in the case 300, the heat is inside the displacement region (the back side of the gaming board 13). ), There is a problem that the board for controlling the gaming machine 1 and the third symbol display device 81 are damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is not connected to the frame body 610, but is arranged between the inner peripheral edge of the frame body 610 and the inner peripheral edge of the frame body 610 at a predetermined interval. The back side and the front side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621 can be communicated with each other through a predetermined interval. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated from the vertical displacement unit 400 from being trapped on the back surface side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621. As a result, cold air on the front side (than the rear side) of the game board 13 can be sent to the back side of the game board 13, so that the board for controlling the game machine 1 and the third symbol display device 81 are damaged. Can be suppressed.

Further, since a predetermined distance between the first portion 621a and the inner peripheral edge of the frame body 610 is formed in the upper part of the center frame 600, warmed air is passed through the predetermined distance to the front side of the game board 13. Can be easily flushed. That is, since the warmed air on the back side of the game board 13 is raised by the heat, it moves toward the front side from a predetermined distance between the first portion 621a formed above and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610. It can be easily washed away. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from being trapped on the back surface side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621.

In this case, when the rotating unit 500 is rotated to generate wind, the wind comes out from a predetermined distance between the first portion 621a and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 and flows down in front of the game board 13. May affect the ball.

On the other hand, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be flowed toward the upper region of the game region (the region above the opening of the game board 13), and the action of the wind causes the sphere. It is possible to suppress the influence of the flow of water. That is, the ball flowing down the upper region of the gaming region is an initial ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a and flowed into the gaming region, and its speed is relatively high. Therefore, for example, the stage of the center frame 600. Compared to a ball rolling on 611, it is less susceptible to wind. In other words, the wind can flow toward the area where the ball is not easily affected by the wind. Therefore, the rotation speed of the rotating member can be increased by that amount, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Next, the sorting device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 46.

First, the overall configuration of the sorting device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. 42 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting device 700, and FIG. 43 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 700. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 700 on the XLIV-XLIV line of FIG. 43. 45 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 in the XLVa-XLVa line of FIG. 43, and FIG. 45 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 in the XLVb-XLVb line of FIG. 45 (a). 45 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 in the XLVc-XLVc line of FIG. 43, and FIG. 45 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 in the XLVd-XLVd line of FIG. 45. Is.

In FIG. 43, the inner peripheral surface of the distribution member 760, the seesaw member 762, the first ball entry port 64, the right side second ball entry port 640r, and the outer shape of the recovery hole 752 are shown by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 45 (d), the path of the sphere discharged from the opening 744 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 42 to 45, the distribution device 700 is arranged on the lower side of the center frame 600 of the game board 13 and on the front side (front side of the paper in FIG. 43) with respect to the base plate 60. It is mainly provided with a front side forming portion 710 and a back side forming portion 720 arranged on the back side (back side of the paper in FIG. 43) with respect to the base plate 60.

The front side forming portion 710 is mainly provided with a winning member 730 attached to the front side of the base plate 60 and a bending member 740 arranged on the front side of the winning member 730.

The back surface side forming portion 720 is formed mainly including an intermediate member 750 attached to the back surface side of the base plate 60 and a distribution member 760 arranged on the back surface side of the intermediate member 750. ..

The winning member 730 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and has the above-mentioned opening 710a located at the upper center in the left-right direction, the electric accessory 640a located below the opening 710a, and the electric accessory 640a thereof. It is mainly provided with a through hole 731 located on both sides in the left-right direction and formed through in the front-rear direction, and a lower insertion hole 732 located below the through hole 731 and formed through in the front-rear direction. ..

The through hole 731 is a member through which the upper protruding portion 741 of the bending member 740 described later is inserted, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view that opens slightly larger than the outer shape in the rear view of the upper protruding portion 741. .. Further, on the lower surface of the through hole 731, a protruding wall 731a is formed so as to project upward from the back surface to the front surface.

The projecting wall 731a has two symmetrical center lines in the left-right direction of the through hole 731 in the front view, and the projecting distance is set to be smaller from the back surface side to the front surface side. Therefore, the sphere that passes (rolls) through the inside of the through hole 731 by the intermediate member 750 and the distribution member 760, which will be described later, is guided to the center position in the left-right direction of the two projecting walls 731a, and is guided from the back side to the front. Rolled toward the side.

The lower insertion hole 732 is a hole that communicates with the recovery hole 752 of the intermediate member 750 arranged on the back surface side, and is formed at a position facing the recovery hole 752 of the intermediate member 750. Further, the lower insertion hole 732 is opened in a substantially D-shaped front view in which the lower surface side is curved, and the first protruding portion 732a protruding downward from the upper surface at the center position in the left-right direction in the front view, and protruding upward from the lower surface. A second protruding portion 732b is provided.

The first protruding portion 732a is formed to have a larger protruding distance from the front side (right side in FIG. 45 (a)) to the back side (left side in FIG. 45 (a)). The second protruding portion 732b is formed so that the protruding distance becomes smaller from the front side to the back side. Further, the distance dimension between the first protruding portion 732a and the second protruding portion 732b facing each other is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter dimension of the sphere. Therefore, when the ball passes through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732, the ball can be rolled to the back side by inclining the second protrusion 732b from the front side to the back side. On the other hand, when the ball bounces in the vertical direction when the lower insertion hole 732 is inserted, the first protrusion 732a can suppress the upward displacement.

A sensor SE for detecting the passage of a sphere is arranged on the back surface of the lower insertion hole 732. The sensor SE is a member that is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view and has a through hole having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere on the side surface thereof, and the sphere passes through the inside of the through hole to form a sphere. Can detect the passage of. The sensor SE is arranged so that the axis of the through hole is positioned coaxially with the arc axis on the lower surface side of the lower insertion hole 732. As a result, the opening direction of the through hole can be slightly inclined downward toward the back surface side, so that it is possible to prevent the ball passing through the inside of the through hole of the sensor SE from staying inside the through hole.

The bending member 740 is a member arranged on the front side of the through hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 described above, and is a substantially center position in the left-right direction of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) in the front view. Are arranged symmetrically, and the outer shape thereof is formed symmetrically.

Further, the bending member 740 is arranged at a position where a gap having a size through which the ball can pass is formed between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2) forming the game area in the front view. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the gaming area below the bending member 740 from being sandwiched between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 and staying in the gaming area.

The bending member 740 is formed of a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular front view, and has an upper protruding portion 741 protruding from the back surface thereof, a lower protruding portion 743 protruding from below the upper protruding portion 741, and an upper protruding portion 741. And an opening 744 formed between the opposite sides of the lower protrusion 743.

The upper protruding portion 741 is formed in a substantially U-shape with the lower side open in the rear view, and its outer shape is set to be slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Thereby, when the bending member 740 is arranged in the winning member 730, the upper protruding portion 741 can be inserted into the through hole 731 and arranged. Therefore, when the bending member 740 is arranged on the winning member 730, the upper protruding portion 741 can be inserted and positioned, so that the assembling process can be simplified.

Further, since the upper protruding portion 741 is formed in a substantially U shape in which the lower side is open in the rear view, the ball is passed through the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 and rolled toward the bending member 740. A connecting portion between the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is not formed on the rolling surface (lower surface) on which the winning member 730 rolls. Therefore, since the rolling of the sphere can be made constant, it is possible to prevent the sphere from stopping inside the through hole 731. That is, when a connecting portion between the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is formed on the rolling surface of the sphere, resistance increases when the sphere rolls on the connecting portion, and the sphere bounces at a step. By eliminating the connecting portion on the rolling surface of the ball, the rolling of the ball can be stabilized and the ball can be prevented from being clogged.

Further, in this case, even if the upper protruding portion 741 is formed in the shape of an annulus in the rear view and the sphere is passed through the inside of the annulus, the winning member 730 and the bending member are similarly formed on the rolling surface on which the sphere rolls. Although the connecting portion with the 740 is not formed, the manufacturing cost increases because the component shape of the bending member 740 becomes complicated due to the formation of the upper protruding portion 741 in an annular shape. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the upper protruding portion 741 has a substantially U-shaped rear view, the shape of the component can be simplified and the increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The lower protrusion 743 is formed on the lower side of the upper protrusion 741 and is formed in a substantially U-shaped rear view in which the upper side is open. That is, when viewed from the rear, the open portions of the upper protruding portion 741 and the lower protruding portion 743 are formed so as to face each other in the vertical direction.

The lower protrusion 743 is a path for throwing a ball thrown from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 side to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 (hereinafter, "second throwing path KR2"). It is a member for forming (referred to as), and is formed at a position facing the lower insertion hole 732 in the front-rear direction.

The protrusion distance of the lower protrusion 743 to the back surface side is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere. Further, the bending member 740 is arranged on the winning member 730 in a state where the protruding tip surface of the lower protruding portion 743 is in contact with the winning member 730. Therefore, the distance dimension between the facing of the bending member 740 and the winning member 730 is made larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the ball is thrown in the vertical direction between the facing of the bending member 740 and the winning member 730 (hereinafter referred to as a ball throwing path). A "first throw path KR1") is formed.

The bending member 740 is formed with a guide portion 742 that protrudes from the upper inner surface of the upper protruding portion 741 to the lower inner surface of the lower protruding portion 743. The guide portion 742 is projected in a substantially U-shape with the back side open in the side view.

The guide portion 742 is a protruding wall that throws a ball thrown from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 (first throwing path KR1) in the vertical direction and then throws the ball into the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. The vertical height of the lower inner edge portion is formed to be slightly smaller than the height of the lower inner edge portion of the lower insertion hole 732 arranged on the back surface.

The guide portion 742 is formed symmetrically with two left-right center lines in the front view of the through hole 731 arranged on the back surface side. As a result, since the two guide portions 742 are brought into contact with each other and guided (folded back to the back side), it is possible to prevent the ball from being displaced in the left-right direction.

It should be noted that the protruding tip surfaces of the guide portions 742 arranged side by side are formed so as to be inclined toward the base portion side as they approach the surfaces facing each other (see FIG. 45 (b)). As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the ball that comes into contact with the two guide portions 742 and is guided (folded back to the back side) from being displaced in the left-right direction.

The upper projecting portion 741 is formed with a side wall 741a projecting inward on the left and right side surfaces in rear view. A plurality (three in this embodiment) of the side wall 741a are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. As a result, when the ball thrown inside the upper protrusion 741 rolls in the left-right direction in a normal state, the ball can be brought into contact with the tip surface of the side wall 741a to stabilize the thrown ball. On the other hand, when two spheres flow continuously inside the upper protrusion 741 and the sphere flowing behind collides with the sphere flowing ahead, the front sphere enters between each side wall 741a, so that the left and right spheres enter between the side walls 741a. It is possible to secure a distance to escape in the direction and prevent the ball from being clogged inside the upper protrusion 741. That is, the side wall 741a can stabilize the ball thrown inside the upper protrusion 741.

The opening 744 is a predetermined gap formed between the upper protrusion 741 and the lower protrusion 743 facing each other, and is formed on both sides in the left-right direction in the rear view. Further, the opening 744 is formed in a substantially U shape in which the back surface side is open in the side view.

The upper end of the opening 744 is set to substantially the same vertical height as the lower surface of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730, and the height of the lower end is substantially intermediate in the vertical direction of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. Is set to the height of. As a result, when the ball is continuously thrown inside the bending member 740, it is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged inside the bending member 740 by letting the previous ball escape to the opening 744. That is, the opening 744 is formed by opening on the left-right side surface of the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2.

The distribution member 760 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and is formed in a box-like body having an open front side. Further, the distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially center position in the left-right direction in the front view, and is formed so as to be inclined downward from the substantially center position in the left-right direction toward the outside in the left-right direction. Further, both ends of the distribution member 760 in the left-right direction are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.

The distribution member 760 has a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that incline downward from the center position in the left-right direction in the front view toward both left and right sides, a seesaw member 762 arranged at the center of the inclined surfaces 761 of each other, and an upper part of the seesaw member 762. It is formed mainly provided with a throwing port 763 formed in.

The ball throwing port 763 is a member for forming an opening on the front side of the distribution member 760, and is formed at a position facing the opening 710a of the winning member 730. As a result, when the distribution member 760 is arranged in the intermediary member 750 described later, a space A can be formed between the ball throwing port 763 and the intermediary member 750 facing each other.

The space A is formed in a space larger than the outer diameter of the sphere (that is, a bending space through which the sphere can pass), and the opening 710a of the winning member 730 is formed through a through hole formed in the base plate 60. It is connected to the internal space (see FIG. 44). As a result, the ball that wins the prize in the opening 710a can be thrown into the space A, and the inside of the space A can be thrown.

The seesaw member 762 is formed in an annular shape, and has three protrusions 762a projecting outward from the outer edge thereof at a distance of 90 degrees around the axis, and a shaft inserted inside the annular shape. It is formed with a portion 762b.

The shaft portion 762b is a shaft support portion for rotating the seesaw member 762 around the shaft, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is inserted into the inside of the annulus of the seesaw member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the intermediate member 750 and the distribution member 760, so that the seesaw member 762 is rotatably arranged around the shaft portion 762b.

The protrusion 762a is a protrusion for alternately distributing the sphere to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 one by one when the sphere is thrown from the above-mentioned space A, and is the direction and the left and right where the tip of the protrusion 762a in the central portion is located. The ball is thrown to the opposite side of the direction. That is, the ball thrown from the space A can be thrown in the left-right direction by the protrusion 762a in the central portion. The protrusions 762a projecting from both ends regulate the displacement of the seesaw member 762 and displace the direction in which the tip of the protrusion 762a in the center is located due to the weight applied when the ball passes (rotate the seesaw member 762). The seesaw member 762 is restricted from rotating when the tip surface of the protrusion 762a and the inclined surface 761 come into contact with each other. On the other hand, when the sphere is guided by the protrusion 762a in the center of the protrusion 762a that is not in contact with the inclined surface 761, the guided sphere collides with the protrusion 762a and is pushed downward. As a result, the protrusion 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the tip of the protrusion 762a displaced downward comes into contact with the inclined surface 761 to regulate the displacement.

The inclined surface 761 is a rolling surface of a path (hereinafter referred to as “third throwing path KR3”) in which a ball distributed to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 described above is rolled and thrown, and is a rolling surface of the distribution member 760. It is formed by inclining downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the balls distributed to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 760 are rolled on the inclined surface 761 and thrown (rolled) to the descending end of the inclined surface 761.

The lower end of the inclined surface 761 is formed so as to be inclined in a direction closer to the interposing member 750 so that the side surface on the back surface side increases in thickness forward toward the end. As a result, the ball that has been rolled on the inclined surface 761 and thrown to the end thereof is placed in the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port of the interposition member 750 arranged in front of the distribution member 760. The ball can be thrown to 640r. More specifically, the ball distributed to the left side in the front view by the seesaw member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) to the first entry port 64. On the other hand, the ball distributed to the right side in the front view by the seesaw member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) to the second entry port 640r on the right side.

The interposition member 750 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and has the above-mentioned variable winning device 65 in the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view, and the first ball opening 64 penetrating in the front-rear direction on the left side. Mainly provided with a right second entry port 640r penetrating in the front-rear direction on the right side, these first entry openings 64, and a collection hole 752 opened below the right second entry opening 640r. Is formed.

The first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r are each formed on the front side of the left and right end portions of the distribution member 760 and on the back side of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Therefore, the space at both left and right ends of the distribution member 760 and the internal space of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 are connected via the first ball entry port 64 and the right side second ball entry port 640r. Therefore, a path for passing a ball rolling on the upper portion of the inclined surface 761 of the distribution member 760 described above to the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 through the first ball entry port 64 and a second ball entry port on the right side. It is possible to pass through 640r and form a path for throwing a ball into the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 (hereinafter, both are referred to as "fourth throwing path KR4").

As described above, the recovery hole 752 is an opening formed on the back surface side of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. That is, the recovery hole 752 is connected to the back surface side of the sensor SE, and a ball passing through the sensor SE is sent to the opening of the recovery hole 752. The collection hole 752 is connected to a device for circulating balls installed in a store, and the balls collected in the collection holes 752 are circulated by the circulation device and re-launched from the ball launching unit 112a as game balls. ..

The sorting device 700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. The ball entering from the opening 710a is thrown to the sorting member 760 and is thrown to the third throwing path KR3 in either the left-right direction by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760. When the ball thrown through the third throwing path KR3 in the left direction is thrown to the end of the third throwing path KR3, the ball is inside the first entry port 64 of the interposition member 750 arranged on the front side. The ball is thrown to the fourth throwing path KR4. On the other hand, when the ball thrown through the third throwing path KR3 in the left direction is thrown to the end of the third throwing path KR3, the right second entry port 640r of the interposition member 750 arranged on the front side The ball is thrown to the fourth throwing path KR4 inside. The ball thrown through the fourth throwing path KR4 is thrown to the first throwing path KR1 on the back side of the bending member 740. The ball thrown through the first throwing path KR1 is guided by the lower protrusion 743 of the bending member 740 and thrown into the second throwing path KR2. The ball thrown through the second throwing path KR2 passes through the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730, passes through the inside of the sensor SE, and then is thrown into the recovery hole 752 of the intermediate member 3750.

Here, as described above, the through holes 731 and the lower insertion holes 732 of the winning member 730 are formed on both the left and right sides of the electric accessory 640a, and the bending members 740 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, so that a pair of bendings is performed. The electric accessory 640a is located between the lower protrusions 743 of the member 740.

In this case, if the angle of the downward inclination of the third throwing path KR3 is small (the inclined surface is gentle), the flow velocity of the ball becomes low, and the ball is likely to be clogged in the lower protrusion 743. On the other hand, when the angle of the downward inclination of the third throwing path KR3 is large (the downward inclination is steep), the flow speed of the ball can be increased and the ball clogging in the lower insertion hole 732 can be less likely to occur. The space in the height direction (vertical direction) required for arranging the third throwing path KR3 (distribution member 760) becomes large, which makes it difficult to dispose the electric accessory 640a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the opening 744 is formed on the side wall of the lower protrusion 743, it is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged in the lower protrusion 743. The angle of the downward slope of the can be made small (the downward slope can be made gentle). As a result, the space in the height direction required for the arrangement of the third throwing path KR3 (distribution member 760) can be suppressed, and the electric accessory 640a can be arranged. That is, the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the electric accessory 640a is not possible with the conventional product, and as described above, it is possible for the first time by forming an opening 744 on the side wall of the lower protrusion 743. Is.

Here, in the present embodiment, an opening is formed (center frame 600 is arranged) in the center of the game board 13, and the third symbol display device 81 is visually recognized by the player through the opening. In recent years, with the demand for larger size of the third symbol display device 81, the central opening of the game board 13 (the inner peripheral edge of the frame body 610 of the center frame 600) has also become larger, so that the lower part of the central opening of the game board 13 has been increased. The space between the edge and the lower edge of the gaming area (lower inner edge of the inner rail 61) is narrowed. Therefore, in the conventional product, the member corresponding to the third throwing path KR3 and the electric accessory 640a can be arranged in the space between the lower edge portion of the central opening of the game board 13 and the lower edge portion of the game area. It was difficult.

That is, as described above, when the angle of the downward inclination of the third throwing path KR3 is small (the downward inclination is gentle), the flow velocity of the ball becomes low, and the ball is likely to be clogged in the lower protrusion 743. Become. On the other hand, when the angle of the downward inclination of the third throwing path KR3 is large (the downward inclination is steep), the flow velocity of the ball can be increased and the ball clogging in the lower protrusion 743 can be less likely to occur. The space in the height direction required for arranging the third throwing path KR3 is increased, which makes it difficult to dispose the electric accessory 640a. Further, since the arrangement position of the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) in the vertical direction is lowered (lowered), the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) and the lower edge portion (inner rail 61) of the game area are lowered. It becomes difficult to secure a gap through which the ball can pass, and it is necessary to provide first out openings 71 on both sides of the lower protrusion 743 (bending member 740).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, by forming an opening in the side wall of the lower protrusion 743, it is possible to prevent ball clogging in the lower protrusion 743. 3 The angle of the downward inclination of the throwing path KR3 can be made small (the downward inclination can be made gentle). As a result, the arrangement position of the lower protrusion 743 (bending member 740) in the height direction (vertical direction) can be raised (raised), so that the lower protrusion 743 (bending member 740) and the gaming area can be raised. It is possible to secure a gap through which the ball can pass between the lower edge portion of the inner rail 61 and the lower inner edge portion of the inner rail 61. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the first out openings 71 on both sides of the lower protrusion 743 (bending member 740).

That is, in the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the electric accessory 640a, the arrangement in which a gap through which the ball can pass is formed between the lower protrusion 743 (bending member 740) and the lower edge portion of the game area is a conventional product. This is not possible, and as described above, it is possible for the first time by forming an opening in the side wall of the lower protrusion 743.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the throwing of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 740 will be described. FIG. 46 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 46 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13. Note that FIG. 46 (a) corresponds to FIG. 45 (a), and FIG. 46 (b) corresponds to FIG. 45 (b).

As shown in FIG. 46, when two balls are thrown from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 in such a manner that there is almost no gap (that is, the two balls are connected in a row), the previous (preceding) ball is thrown. A part of the ball is thrown to the back side while entering the opening 744, and is guided to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730.

Here, if a passage having a cross-sectional area slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sphere is formed and the passage is bent, the two spheres are in a state where there is almost no gap in the passage (two spheres are connected in a row). ) When the ball is thrown, the ball that follows the ball that follows the ball that follows the ball that follows the ball, and the ball that follows the ball that follows the ball presses against the side wall. rice field.

On the other hand, in the present application, since the opening 744 is formed in the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2, when a plurality of balls are connected and pass through the lower protrusion 743, the opening 744 is formed. Even if the ball following the preceding ball catches up, it is difficult to press the preceding ball against the side wall, and it is possible to easily continue the rolling of both. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

Further, since the opening 744 is formed at a position where the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2 are tolerant, it is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged at the bent portion where the ball is easily clogged. That is, in the region where the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2 intersect, the ball flowing down (falling) on the first throwing path KR1 changes direction and turns toward the extension direction of the second throwing path KR2. It is the position where the movement starts, and it is easy for the ball that follows the ball that precedes it to catch up. Therefore, when the ball that follows the preceding ball presses against the side wall, both cannot roll and the ball is likely to be clogged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the opening 744 is formed at a position where the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2 intersect, so that even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, it precedes. It is possible to make it difficult for the spheres to escape between the facing portions of the opening 744 (a part of the preceding sphere is accommodated in the opening 744) and to be pressed against the side wall, so that the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the height of the lower end of the opening 744 is set to the height of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 at a substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction, so that the first throwing path KR1 is dropped (flowed down). When the sphere reaches the bottom wall of the second throwing path KR2 (lower protrusion 743), the sphere can be easily received in the opening. Therefore, even when the trailing ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball can be released between the facing spaces of the openings 744 to make it difficult to press against the side wall, and it is possible to easily continue the rolling of both. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

Further, the lower protrusion 743 is formed in a substantially U shape in the side view, and the height of the lower end of the opening 744 is installed at a position separated from the bottom wall of the lower protrusion 743 by a predetermined distance. A side wall can be left (formed) between the lower end of the opening 744 and the second throw path KR2 (lower protrusion 743). Therefore, even if an opening is formed to a size that allows the ball to pass through, the ball unnecessarily flows out from the bending member 740 to the outside (the game area on the front side of the game board 13). Can be suppressed.

In this case, when the size of the opening 744 is such that the ball cannot pass through, it is usually possible to use the opening 744 to make it difficult to press the preceding ball against the side wall, but the exception is the rear. A form is formed in which the traveling ball presses the preceding ball against the center of the opening 744, and the preceding ball may be fitted (fitted) into the opening 744. In this case, the rolling of the trailing ball is hindered by the ball fitted in the opening 744, and the ball is clogged.

On the other hand, since the opening 744 is opened larger than the outer shape of the sphere (formed to a size that allows the sphere to pass through), a form is formed in which the following sphere pushes the preceding sphere against the center of the opening 744. Even if this is done, the preceding ball can be discharged from the opening 744 to the outside of the bending member 740 (the game area on the front side of the game board 13), and the preceding ball is internally fitted (fitted) into the opening 744. You can avoid that. As a result, the rolling of the following ball can be continued, so that the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

Further, in this way, the opening 744 is formed in a size that allows the ball to pass through, and the opening 744 is arranged on the front side (that is, the game area) of the game board 13 to flow down the game area. The sphere can flow from the opening 744 into the bending member 740. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, when a sensor for detecting a winning ball is arranged downstream of the lower protrusion 743, in addition to the ball flowing into the bending member 740 from the upstream of the lower protrusion 743, the bending member is bent from the opening 744. The ball that has flowed into the 740 can also be detected as a winning ball. In particular, in this case, since the opening 744 (the region where the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2 intersect) is arranged on the front side of the game board 13, it flows into the bending member 740 from the opening 744. The ball to be played can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, from this point as well, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the region where the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2 are tolerated, a lower portion of the guide portion 742 (that is, a portion curved and downwardly inclined toward the recovery hole 752) is arranged. As a result, when the ball flowing down (falling) on the first throwing path KR1 changes direction and starts rolling toward the extension direction of the second throwing path KR2, the ball is tilted downward by the guide portion 742. Can be swiftly turned using. This makes it easier to roll the leading ball before the trailing ball catches up, and the trailing ball causes the ball to move toward the back side (along the extension direction of the second throwing path KR2). Since it can be suppressed from being pressed against the side wall on the back surface side when rolling, it is possible to easily continue the rolling of both. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

Further, since the opening 744 is formed at a position on the front side (game area side) of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), ball clogging occurs at the bent portion of the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2. At that time, the store operator can access the opening 744 from the front side by opening the glass 8. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work of clearing the ball clogging.

Furthermore, when dust or dirt collects at the bent portion of the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2, the store operator opens the glass 8 to access the opening 744 from the front side. The bent portion can be cleaned through the opening 744. Therefore, it is possible to improve the cleanability when cleaning the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2.

Next, the light emitting decoration unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 800.

As shown in FIG. 47, the light emitting decoration unit 800 is provided on the front side of the horizontally long rectangular base body 810 in front view arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300 and the base body 810. It mainly includes a light emitting device 820 to be arranged, and a cover member 830 which is covered on the front surface of the light emitting device 820 and is made of a light transmissive material.

On the front side of the light emitting device 820, a plurality of light emitting bodies (LED821) are dispersedly arranged over the entire surface. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 821 is emitted from the entire surface of the cover member 830 toward the front side of the gaming machine.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the regulation unit 2490 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the regulation unit 2490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is an exploded front perspective view of the regulation unit 2490 according to the second embodiment. 49 (a) is a side view of the regulation unit 2490, FIG. 49 (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit 2490, and FIG. 49 (c) is the XLIXc-XLIXc line of FIG. 49 (b). It is sectional drawing of the regulation unit 2490.

As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, in the regulation unit 2490 according to the second embodiment, the roller member 492 is pivotally supported by the rotating member 2494, and the position of the roller member 492 can be adjusted by the rotation of the rotating member 2494. To.

The regulation unit 2490 is formed between the case member 2491 formed in a box shape, the outer edge member 2493 disposed on the outer edge portion of the case member 2491 on the open side, and the case member 2491 and the outer edge member 2493 facing each other. It is mainly provided with a rotating member 2494 that is sandwiched and rotatably supported, and a roller member 492 that is pivotally supported by the rotating member 2494.

The case member 2491 is formed in a box shape with an opening on the back surface side, and has a larger width dimension in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 49B) than the case member 491 in the first embodiment. Further, the case member 2491 is mainly provided with a projecting portion 491a projecting from the side surface on the front side and a notch portion 2491b notched on both side surfaces in the left-right direction in a semicircular shape.

The cutout portion 2491b is formed by being cut out in a semicircular shape at a substantially central position in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 49 (b)) of both side surfaces in the left-right direction (FIG. 49 (b) left-right direction) of the case member 2491. To. The notch 2491b is a notch for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494 to be described later, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the rotating member 2494.

The outer edge member 2493 is a member that is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame-like body in front view and is arranged on the back surface side (open side) of the case member 2491. The inner edge member 2493 is formed in a shape substantially the same as the opening of the case member 2491. Further, on the side surface of the outer edge member 2493 on the front side (case member 491 side), an upright portion 2493a standing on the front side is formed around the inner edge portion.

The upright portion 2493a is formed with a recessed portion 2493a1 recessed on the back surface side. The recessed portion 2493a1 is formed at a position facing the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2492. Therefore, by sandwiching the rotating member 2494, which will be described later, between the notched portion 2491b of the case member 2491 and the recessed portion 2493a1 facing each other, the rotating member 2494 can be arranged on the case member 2491 in a rotatable state.

The rotating member 2494 is formed from a plate-like body having an oval shape in a side view, and the longitudinal dimension is set to be smaller than the vertical dimension of the inner portion of the case member 2491. The rotating member 2494 has a shaft portion 2494b that projects in a cylindrical shape outward in the left-right direction with respect to the case member 2491 in the central portion in the longitudinal direction, and a shaft support hole 2494a that is formed through both sides of the shaft portion 2494b. It is formed with a regulating portion 2494c that bulges radially outward from the protruding tip portion of the portion 2494b.

The shaft portion 2494b is projected longer than the plate thickness of the case member 2491 formed in the box-shaped body, and a restricting portion 2494c that bulges in the radial direction is formed at the protruding tip portion thereof. As a result, the rotating member 2494 can be rotated with respect to the case member 2491 by internally fitting the shaft portion 2494b into the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491 and disposing the recessed portion 2493a1 of the outer edge member 2493 from the back surface side. The rotating member 2494 can be restricted from being displaced in the left-right direction with respect to the case member 2491 by the restricting portion 2494c.

The shaft support hole 2494a is an opening through which the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 is inserted, and is opened in a circular shape, and the inner diameter thereof is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 492b. As a result, the roller member 492 can be rotated by inserting the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 with the retaining ring E1 removed into the shaft support hole 2494a and then fitting the retaining ring E1 to the shaft portion 492b. Can be arranged on the rotating member 2494.

The regulation unit 2490 configured as described above is assembled as follows.

First, the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 is inserted into the shaft support hole 2494a of the rotating member 2494 arranged in a pair, and the roller member 492 is pivotally supported by the rotating member 2494. As a result, two roller members 492 can be arranged side by side in a pair of rotating members 2494 facing each other.

Next, a torsion spring (not shown) is disposed on the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494, and the outer edge member 2493 is disposed from the back surface side after being internally fitted into the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491 to rotate. The member 2494 can be rotatably arranged around the shaft portion 2494b with respect to the case member 2491. Thereby, by rotationally displacing the rotating member 2494, the position of the roller member 492 arranged on the rotating member 2494 can be displaced. Further, a state in which the roller member 492 arranged on the upper side of the roller member 492 arranged side by side is urged to the front side (left side in FIG. 49 (c)) by the torsion spring arranged on the shaft portion 2494b. Can be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the contact mode between the decorative member 450 and the regulation unit 2490 when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position will be described. 50 (a) to 50 (c) are cross-sectional views of the vertical displacement unit 400. Note that FIG. 50 (a) corresponds to FIG. 24 (a), FIG. 50 corresponds to FIG. 24 (b), and FIG. 21 (c) corresponds to FIG. 18 (c).

As shown in FIG. 50 (a), when the decorative member 450 is located above the regulation unit 2490, the rotating member 2494 is provided by a torsion spring (not shown) arranged on the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494. Is rotated, and the roller member 492 disposed above the roller member 492 disposed below is positioned on the front side.

As a result, the decorative member 450 is displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 21 (a), and the lower end surface of the decorative member 450 shown in FIG. 50 (b) is substantially the same as the vertically intermediate position of the case member 2491. The pressure at which the roller 492a of the roller member 492 disposed on the upper side abuts on the decorative member 450 and suppresses the decorative member 450 when displaced to the vertical position is higher than that of the regulation unit 2490 of the first embodiment. Can be made smaller. In this case, the rotating member 2494 is in contact with a protrusion (not shown) formed inside the case member 2491, and the roller member 492 arranged on the upper side is not displaced to the front side (rotating member 2494). The upper side does not rotate and displace toward the front side).

Therefore, when the decorative member 450 is further displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 21 (b) and is displaced to the first position shown in FIG. 50 (c), a driving force is applied to the decorative member 450. It is possible to suppress an increase in energy consumption of the drive motor 441.

Further, when the decorative member 450 shown in FIG. 50 (c) is displaced to the first position, the roller 492a arranged on the lower side comes into contact with the decorative member 450. As a result, the lower roller member 492 is pressed toward the back side and displaced toward the back side, and the upper roller 492a is displaced toward the front side. As a result, the pressing force of the roller 492a disposed on the upper side with respect to the decorative member 450 can be increased. As a result, when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position, the decorative member 450 can be firmly held by the pressing force of the roller members 492 arranged above and below. On the other hand, when the decorative member 450 is positioned in the middle of displacement, the pressing force acting on the decorative member 450 can be reduced so that the decorative member 450 is easily displaced. That is, the pressing force applied to the decorative member 450 from the regulation unit 2490 can be changed according to the displacement of the decorative member 450.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the distribution device 700 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. The same parts as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the distribution device 3700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. FIG. 51 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting device 3700 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 3700. 53 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 3700 on the line LIIIa-LIIIa of FIG. 52, and FIG. 53 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 3700 on the line LIIIb-LIIIb of FIG. 52 (b). ..

As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, in the distribution device 3700 according to the third embodiment, the opening of the second ball entry port 640 is connected to the distribution device 3700.

The distribution device 3700 is arranged below the center frame 600 of the game board 13, and is arranged on the front side forming portion 3710 arranged on the front side with respect to the base plate 60 and on the back side with respect to the base plate 60. It is mainly provided with a front side forming portion 3710 to be formed.

The front side forming portion 3710 is mainly provided with a winning member 3730 attached to the base plate 60 and a bending member 3740 arranged on the front side of the winning member 3730.

The back surface side forming portion 3720 is located below the intermediary member 3750 attached to the base plate 60, the distribution member 760 arranged on the back surface side of the intermediary member 3750, and the intermediary member 760. It is mainly provided with a second throwing path 3770 arranged on the back side of the 3750.

The winning member 3730 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and has the above-mentioned opening 710a in the upper center in the left-right direction, the electric accessory 640a in the lower side of the opening 710a, and the electric accessory 640a on both sides in the left-right direction. A through hole 731 formed through the front-rear direction, a second through hole 3733 formed through the through hole 731 in the front-rear direction, and a lower portion formed through the second through hole 3733 in the front-rear direction. It is mainly provided with a side insertion hole 732.

The second through hole 3733 is an opening through which a sphere passes, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view, which opens slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. Further, the second through hole 3733 is formed at a position below the second entry port 640, and a second projecting wall 3733a is formed on the lower surface so as to be visible from the back side to the front side and protrude upward. To.

The second projecting wall 3733a has two symmetrical center lines in the left-right direction of the second through hole 3733 in the front view, and the protrusion distance is set to be smaller from the back surface side to the front surface side. Therefore, when the ball passes through the inside of the second through hole 3733 by the interposing member 3750 and the second throwing path described later, the ball can be guided to the center position in the left-right direction of the two second projecting walls 3733a. , Can be rolled from the back side to the front side.

The bending member 3740 is a member arranged on the front side of the through hole 731, the second through hole 3733, and the lower insertion hole 732 of the above-mentioned winning member 3730, and is a member arranged on the left and right sides of the above-mentioned second entry port 640. The pair of external shapes are formed symmetrically.

The bending member 3740 is formed of a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular front view, and has an upper protruding portion 741 protruding from the back surface side thereof, an intermediate protruding portion 3745 protruding from below the upper protruding portion 741, and an intermediate protruding portion thereof. It is formed with a lower protrusion 743 that protrudes from below the 3745.

The intermediate projecting portion 3745 is a wall portion formed long in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 53B) in the rear view, and is formed at positions on both the left and right sides of the second through hole 3733, and the upper side surface thereof is the first. 2 The through hole 3733 is formed at substantially the same height as the intermediate position in the vertical direction. On the other hand, the lower side surface of the intermediate protrusion 3745 is formed so as to be located below the bottom surface of the second through hole 3733.

Further, a second opening 3746 having a predetermined gap is formed between the intermediate protrusion 3745 and the upper protrusion 741. On the other hand, an opening 744 having a predetermined gap is formed between the intermediate protrusion 3745 and the lower protrusion 743.

The second opening 3746 opens in a substantially U-shape that opens on the back side of the side view, and its inner shape is formed larger than the outer shape of the sphere. That is, the second opening 3746 is set to a size that allows the ball to pass through. A detailed description of the second opening 3746 will be described later.

The second throwing path 3770 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and the front side is opened to form a substantially box shape having a constant thickness. The second throwing path 3770 is a throwing path for throwing a ball entering the inside of the second entry port 640 into the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730, and is arranged on the back side of the intermediate member 3750. And, a throwing path for throwing a ball can be formed between the inside of the second throwing path 3770 and the interposing member 3750.

Further, the second throwing path 3770 is arranged so that the left end portion is located on the back side of the second entry opening 640 of the winning member 3730 in the front view, and the right end portion is the second penetration of the winning member 3730. It is arranged so as to be located on the back side of the hole 3733. That is, the second throwing path 3770 is arranged on the intermediate member 3750 so that the left end portion in the front view is located above the right end portion and is tilted downward toward the right end portion.

Further, in the second throwing path 3770, the left end portion in the front view is connected to the second entry port 640, and the right end portion is connected to the second connecting hole 3753 of the interposing member 3750. As a result, the ball that has entered the inside of the second throwing port 640 is thrown into the inside of the second throwing path 3770, and then rolls inside the second throwing path 3770 from the left end portion to the right end portion. The ball is thrown into the second connecting hole 3753 of the intermediate member 3750.

The interposition member 3750 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and is located on the left and right sides of the above-mentioned variable winning device 65 and the variable winning device 65 at the lower center in the left-right direction, and is formed through the first entry in the front-rear direction. The ball opening 64, the right second entry port 640r, the recovery hole 752 located below the first entry port 64 and the right second entry port 640r and formed through in the front-rear direction, and the second right entry port. It is formed with a second connecting hole 3753 located between the ball entry port 640r and the recovery hole 752 and formed through in the front-rear direction.

The second connecting hole 3753 is formed through a substantially rectangular shape in front view, the inner shape thereof is set to be larger than the outer shape of the sphere, and the second connecting hole 3753 is formed at a position on the back surface side of the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 730. .. As a result, the ball rolled inside the second throwing path 3770 described above passes through the inside of the second connecting hole 3753 and is thrown into the second through hole 3733 of the interposing member 750.

The distribution device 3700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. The balls entering from the opening 710a are thrown to the sorting member 760 and alternately thrown to the inclined surface 761 in either the left-right direction by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760. When the ball rolling on the inclined surface 761 is thrown to the end of the inclined surface 761, the first ball entry port 64 of the interposition member 3750 arranged on the front side or the second ball entry port 640r on the right side It passes through the inside and is thrown to the back side of the bending member 740. The ball thrown to the back side of the bending member 740, 3740 is guided along the protruding tip surface of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 740, 3740 and falls downward, and at the same time, the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 3730 After passing through the inside and passing through the inside of the sensor SE, the ball is thrown into the recovery hole 752 of the interposing member 3750.

The ball entering from the second ball entry port 640 is thrown into the second throwing path 3770, and is thrown inside the second throwing path 3770 from the left end portion to the right end portion. The ball thrown to the right end of the second throwing path 3770 passed through the inside of the second connecting hole 3753 of the interposing member 3750 arranged on the front side and passed through the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730. Later, it is guided along the protruding tip surface of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 3740 and falls downward, and after passing through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 3730 and passing through the inside of the sensor SE, it is inserted. The ball is thrown into the recovery hole 752 of the setting member 3750.

Therefore, in the distribution device 3700, the ball entering from the second entry port 640 can be detected by the sensor SE arranged on the right side of the front view of the winning member 3730, so that the ball can be sent to the throwing passage from the second entry port 640. There is no need to newly dispose the sensor SE. That is, since the sensor SE that detects the ball entering through the opening 710a can also serve as the sensor SE that detects the ball entering the second entry port 640, the cost of the product can be suppressed accordingly. ..

Next, the second opening 3746 of the bending member 3740 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. (A) and (b) of FIG. 54 are cross-sectional views of the sorting device 3700. Note that FIG. 54 (a) corresponds to FIG. 53 (a), and FIG. 54 (b) corresponds to FIG. 53 (b).

As shown in FIG. 54, a ball enters and is thrown from the opening 710a and thrown to the back surface side of the bending member 3740, and a ball enters and is thrown from the second entry port 640 and is thrown to the back surface of the bending member 3740. If the ball thrown to the side is thrown to the back side of the bending member 3740 at substantially the same timing, the balls on the back side of the bending member 740 may come into contact with each other and the ball may be clogged.

That is, a ball thrown from the second entry port 640 and thrown from the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730 to the bending member 3740 (hereinafter referred to as "lower ball") is thrown from the opening 710a. Then, the ball is thrown from the through hole 731 of the winning member 3730 to the back surface side of the bending member 3740, collides with a ball falling from the upper side to the lower side of the bending member 3740 (hereinafter referred to as "upper ball"), and at the same time. If it gets caught in the front end of the second through hole 3733, it may become stuck and the ball may be clogged.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, since the second opening 3746 is formed in the bending member 3740, the upper sphere is discharged from the second opening 3746 or escaped between the facing portions of the second opening 3746 to allow the lower sphere to escape. It is possible to eliminate the equilibrium state between the ball and the ball on the upper side and prevent the ball from being clogged in the throwing path of the bending member 3740.

That is, when the upper sphere rides on the lower sphere and the balanced state is formed, the second opening 3746 is formed on the side surface in the left-right direction in which the upper sphere is located, and the upper spheres are connected to each other. Since it leans to either the left or right due to the spherical shape, the upper sphere is sent to the inside of the second opening 3744 on either the left or right. This makes it possible to eliminate the equilibrium between the lower sphere and the upper sphere. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged in the throwing path of the bent member 3740.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the distribution device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55. The same parts as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 (a) is a front view of the sorting device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 4700 in the LVb-LVb line of FIG. 55 (a). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 4700 in the LVc-LVc line of FIG. 55 (b). In FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (c), the passage path through which the sphere passes is schematically illustrated by a broken line.

As shown in FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (c), in the distribution device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment, the winning opening is located on the outer and lower side of the opening 744 of the bending member 740 in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 55 (a)). 4063 is disposed.

The winning opening 4063 is an opening through which a ball flowing down the game area can pass through, and is arranged on the front side of the game board 13. The winning opening 4063 is connected to the third connecting hole 4752a of the interposing member 4750 whose back surface side will be described later, and the ball entering the inside of the winning opening 4063 is guided to the third communication hole 54752a.

The recovery hole 752 of the intermediate member 4750 is formed by bending downward at the tip of the second throwing path KR2, and a path through which the ball passes and is thrown downward (sixth throwing path KR6) is formed. To. That is, the sixth throwing path KR6 and the second throwing path KR2 are connected.

A third connecting hole 4752a projecting from both left and right sides is formed in the sixth throwing path KR6, and a sensor SE for detecting the passage of a ball is arranged in a lower portion of the third connecting hole 4752a.

The third connecting hole 4752a is connected to the open portion on the back side of the winning opening 4063. As a result, the ball that has entered the winning opening 4063 is thrown into the inside of the third connecting hole 4752a and is thrown into the sixth throwing path.

Further, on the passage of the third connecting hole 4752a, a sensor SE2 different from the sensor SE disposed in the sixth throwing path KR6 is arranged. This makes it possible to detect a sphere that has entered the inside of the third connecting hole 4752a.

As a result, the ball discharged from the opening 744 of the bending member 740 can be made to win a prize in the winning opening 4063. That is, not only the ball guided to the bending member 740 passes through the sensor SE, but also the ball flows out from the opening 744 to the game area, and the outflowing ball enters the winning opening 4063 and presses the sensor SE2. It is possible to form a passing form and add interest to the game.

The winning opening 4063 may be arranged at a position where all the balls that have flowed out from the opening 744 into the game area can be received, or a part of the winning opening 4063 may be arranged depending on the state of the balls that have flowed out from the opening 744 into the game area. The spheres may be accepted and some spheres may be arranged in an unacceptable position.

Further, since the opening 744 is formed in the connecting portion between the first throwing passage KR1 and the second throwing passage KR2, the first throwing path KR1 is formed by discharging the ball that is likely to cause ball clogging from the opening to the game area. It is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged in the connecting portion between the ball and the second throwing path KR2.

Further, since the bending member 740 in which the winning opening 4063 and the opening 744 are formed is arranged on the front side of the game board 13, the player can visually recognize the mode in which the ball is paid out from the opening 744 and enters the winning opening 4063. It can be done, and it can be easily given to the player as a hobby.

Since the third connecting hole 4752a is connected above the sensor SE arranged in the sixth throwing path KR6, the ball entering from the winning opening 4063 only passes through the sensor SE2 arranged in the third connecting hole 4752a. Instead, it passes through the sensor SE arranged in the sixth throwing path KR6. Therefore, since the sensor 2 can be passed by the ball entering from the winning opening 4063, the player can be given a hobby.

Further, since the balls thrown to the bending member 740 are distributed to the left and right for each ball by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760, the balls are continuous at the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2. It is possible to suppress the throwing of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged in the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In the first embodiment, the case where the sensor 630 of 1 is arranged in the center frame 600 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, two sensors 630 may be arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line in the left-right direction of the center frame 600. Three or more sensors 630 may be arranged.

In the first embodiment, the case where the sensor 630 is arranged on the frame body 610 of the center frame 600 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sensor 630 may be arranged on the front cover 460 of the vertical displacement unit 400. In this case, since the irradiation range of the sensor 630 can be widened, the detection area of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

In the first embodiment, the case where the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 is formed as a curved surface having a convex front surface has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be bent in a substantially V-shaped cross section at the central portion on the front side. Further, it may be formed as a convex curved surface on the back surface side. Alternatively, a curved surface may be partially formed. At least, it is sufficient that the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected by the cover member 630 and the object in front of the game board 13 can be detected.

In the first embodiment, the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 has a role of making the player visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side, and a case where the light emitted from the sensor 630 is used in combination. Although described above, the region is not necessarily limited to this, and the region of the cover member 621 is a region of a region where the player can visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 and a region where the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected. The area may be divided into. This modification will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 as a modification. The same parts as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, FIG. 56 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 40 (b), and only the cross-sectional view of the center cover 620 is schematically shown. Further, in FIG. 56, the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back surface side of the center frame 600 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIG. 56, the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 has a second region R2 at both ends in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 56) and a center side (third symbol display device) of the second region R2 at both ends thereof. A first region R1 is provided on the front side of 81).

The first region R1 is a region that makes the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back surface side of the cover member 621 visible to the player, and is formed of a relatively high-transparency light-transmitting material amount. The second region R2 is a region in which the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected on the front side (player side) of the gaming machine 10. Since the boundary position between the first region R1 and the second region R2 may be visible to the player located on the front side of the gaming machine 10, it is abbreviated as the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 in the front view. The same position is preferred. Further, in this modification, the sensors 630 will be described at both left and right ends for ease of understanding.

In this case, for example, a member having a high reflectance such as silver count may be coated on the back surface side or the front surface side of the second region R2. Alternatively, a silver sticker may be attached to the back side or the front side of the second region R2. In this case, since the light emitted from the sensor 630 can be easily reflected, the object on the front side of the game board 13 can be detected more reliably.

Alternatively, the portion of the second region R2 may have a curved shape that is convex toward the back surface side, or the portion of the second region R2 may be a flat surface. In this case, since the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected by the second region R2 and the range emitted to the front side can be widened, the detection range of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the sensor 630 is arranged in front of the cover member 621 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the sensor 630 is arranged behind the cover member 621. It may be set. In this case, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is transmitted through the cover member 621, so that an object on the front side of the game board 13 can be detected. Further, in this case, since the cover member 620 has a curved shape convex to the front side, the irradiation angle can be changed when the light emitted from the sensor 630 is incident on the cover member 630. That is, by transmitting the convex curved cover member 630 to the front side, the irradiation range of the sensor 630 emitted to the front side of the game board 13 can be widened.

In each of the above-mentioned implementation mobile phones, the case where the inclined surface 761 (third throwing path KR3) of 2 of the distribution member 760 is formed with the same length has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the inclined surface 761 of 2 is not necessarily limited to this. The length of (third throwing path KR3) may be different from each other. In this case, since the time until each ball distributed to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 720 is detected by the sensor SE can be made different in the left and right paths, the player can be given a hobby.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the roller 492a may be formed of a material having a lower elastic modulus than rubber or urethane, and an elastic member such as rubber or urethane may be externally fitted on the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a. In this case, since the volume of the elastic body can be reduced, the manufacturing cost of the roller member 492 can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the thickness of the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 is formed to be constant has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the thickness of the cover member 621 may be changed. For example, the cross-sectional shape of the cover member 621 may be formed into a substantially D shape. In this case, since the cover member 621 is a convex lens, the third symbol display device 81 and the decorative member 450 arranged on the back side of the cover member 621 can be displayed in a large size.

In the first embodiment, the case where the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 by utilizing the elastic deformation of the roller 492a has been described, but it is not always the case. The present invention is not limited to this, and the displacement of the roller 492a may be used. For example, even if the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a is formed so as to be displaceable and the roller 492a is displaced so as to be sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. good.

In this case, since the roller 492a can be sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 without utilizing the elastic deformation of the roller 492a, the roller 492a can be sandwiched between rubber and urethane. It is not necessary to form it with a material having a high elastic modulus, and for example, it can be formed with a resin having a lower elastic modulus than rubber or urethane, so that the manufacturing cost can be suppressed accordingly.

In the third embodiment, the case where the roller 492a arranged at the upper part abuts on the decorative member 450 before the roller 492a arranged at the lower part has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the roller 492a is arranged at the upper part. The roller 492a to be formed may come into contact with the decorative member 450 after the roller 492a arranged at the lower portion.

For example, the roller 492a arranged at the upper part of the regulation unit 490 at the initial position (the position where the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the roller 492a are separated from each other) is in the front-rear direction with the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (FIG. 50). (A) It may be configured to have a predetermined gap in the left-right direction). In this case, when the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position, the time until the decorative member 450 comes into contact with the roller 492a is delayed as compared with the first and third embodiments, so that the drive motor 441 for driving the decorative member 450 The time during which the load (resistance) increases can be shortened.

In the first embodiment, the case where the irradiation control unit 544 and the LED 532 are arranged in contact with each other has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined state is specified between the irradiation control unit 544 and the LED facing each other. Gap may be formed. In this case, since both ends of the irradiation hole 543 can be opened, it is possible to prevent air from staying (retaining) inside the irradiation hole 543. That is, since an air flow can be created inside the irradiation hole 543, the heat generated by the operation of the LED 532 can be efficiently cooled.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the rough surface processing is formed into an uneven shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rough surface processing may be a surface consisting of only protrusions (projections). , It may be a surface consisting only of a dent. Further, the rough surface processing may be extended as a strip or a groove. Further, the concave and convex cross-sectional shapes may be circular, keystroke, polygonal diameter, or a combination thereof. That is, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary as long as a portion higher than the reference position and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, a plurality of portions (faces) capable of reflecting light are formed, and diffuse reflection is possible.

In each of the above embodiments, a smoke generating device (smoke generating means) for generating smoke is provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 (base plate 60), and the smoke generated from the smoke generating device is placed in a displacement region of the rotating unit 500. It may be introduced in (rotation area). That is, an atmosphere filled with smoke may be formed in the space between the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 600 (center cover 620). As a result, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be visually recognized by the player while passing through the smoke, and the blinking of the LED 532 can be emphasized. Further, while hiding the rotating unit 500 or the member on the back side thereof by smoke (making it difficult for the player to see), only the blinking of the LED 532 can be visually recognized. Therefore, the effect of the LED 532 (light) can be enhanced.

In the conventional product, it is difficult to fill the above-mentioned space with smoke because the smoke is pushed out to the outer peripheral side as the rotating unit rotates. Therefore, it was difficult to obtain the effect of smoke. On the other hand, according to the rotary unit 500 in each of the above-described embodiments, the blow holes 512 and 522 are opened in the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, and the back surface of the structure in which the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are assembled is opened. Since the side is opened, the outside air taken in from the ventilation holes 512 and 522 can be exhausted from the back side and circulated. Therefore, the above-mentioned space can be filled with smoke (remaining around the rotating unit 500). As a result, the LED 532 can be made to blink in an atmosphere filled with smoke, and the above-mentioned effect can be obtained.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 123. In the first control example, the jackpot effect using the rotation unit 500 can be executed during the fluctuation display. More specifically, the rotation unit 500 is composed of a known versa writer, and the light emission pattern of a plurality of LEDs 532 arranged in a row inside is changed according to the rotation amount of the rotation unit 500 to perform a rotation operation. It is configured to display a specific character as an afterimage on the trajectory of.

In this control example, the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 when displaying a specific character as an afterimage on the locus of the rotation operation is configured to be 100 ms / rotation (that is, 600 rpm (revolution per minute)). .. Here, since the time resolution (the minimum visible lighting time) of the human eye is about 50 to 100 ms, the light source that repeatedly turns on and off at intervals of 100 ms is always recognized as being in the lighting state. Since the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 in this control example is 100 ms / rotation, the rotation unit 500 makes one rotation every 100 ms and returns to the same position. By controlling the LED 532 to be turned on again when returning to the same position, the position illuminated by the LED 532 can give the illusion that the LED 532 is always lit. This gives the impression that a specific character is displayed as an afterimage on the locus of the rotation operation.

The rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 is not limited to 100 ms / rotation, and may be slower or faster than this. When the rotation speed is high, it is possible to visually recognize (illusion) that a specific character or pattern is displayed more clearly. When the rotation speed is slow, it is possible to visually recognize (illusion) a specific character or pattern as if it is blinking. By setting a case where the rotation speed is fast and a case where the rotation speed is slow, it is possible to set a case where a specific character or symbol is turned on and a case where it blinks, the variation of the display can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved. .. Further, it is natural that a case where a specific character or a symbol is blinked may be provided only by changing the lighting interval of the LED 532 without changing the rotation speed.

Since the rotary unit 500 has a board member 531 on which a plurality of LEDs 532 are mounted, when a jackpot effect using the rotary unit 500 is performed, the LED 532 and the IC / capacitor mounted on the board operate. It generates heat by doing so. Therefore, if the rotating unit 500 is operated frequently, the solder connecting the LED 532, the IC, the capacitor, and the like to the substrate may be melted due to the influence of heat generation, resulting in poor contact. Therefore, in this control example, the operation frequency of the rotating unit 500 is suppressed, and a novel jackpot effect can be realized while preventing poor contact.

Further, in the first control example, the number of times the ball has entered the first ball opening 64 and the number of times the ball has entered the second ball opening 640 or the right second ball opening 640r can be held up to four times, respectively. It is configured in. Then, when the number of balls entered into the first ball opening 64 and the number of balls entered into the second ball opening 640 or the right second ball opening 640r are each the upper limit of four times (a total of eight times). (When the ball entry is suspended), a continuous notice effect (8 hold effect) that executes the effect of the same system is enabled over the variable display corresponding to the 8 times of ball entry. .. With this continuous advance notice effect, the player's expectation can be continuously held over a plurality of continuous variable displays. In the following description, for convenience, the lottery of the special symbol executed based on the entry into the first entry slot 64 is referred to as "the lottery of the special symbol 1", and each second entry opening (second entry). The lottery of the special symbol executed based on the entry into the ball opening 640 and the right second entry opening 640r) is referred to as a "special symbol 2 lottery".

First, the configuration of the rotation unit 500 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57A is a diagram illustrating a case where the rotation unit 500 is rotated by 90 degrees in the front clockwise direction by the drive of the drive motor 457. In this example, among the plurality of LEDs 532 arranged in the rotating unit 500, only the outermost LED 532 (LED1) continues to be lit, and the other LEDs 532 are turned off. As shown in FIG. 57 (a), when the rotating unit 500 rotates 90 degrees in the front view clockwise direction while the LED 1 remains lit, the LED 1 emits light for the player observing from the front of the rotating unit 500. The locus of light (the hatched portion in FIG. 57) is recognized as an afterimage, and it is recognized as if an arc having the same color as the emission color of LED 1 appears in the air. In the actual effect, a specific character is displayed as an afterimage by switching the lighting timing and the extinguishing timing of the plurality of LEDs 532 according to the rotation position (the number of rotation operation steps).

FIG. 57B is a diagram showing the arrangement of a plurality of LEDs 532 of the rotating unit 500. As shown in FIG. 57 (b), in the rotation unit 500, 40 sets of LEDs from LEDs 1 to 40 are arranged in a row as LEDs 532. Each LED is composed of three color LEDs of red, blue, and green, and a vertically long substantially rectangular diffuser plate is arranged on the front side thereof. With this diffuser plate, the light of the LED emitted from the back surface side can be evenly (evenly) transmitted to the front surface. As described above in the description of the structure of the rotating unit 500, each LED 532 is not directly arranged on the back side of each diffuser plate. Each diffuser has a structure in which the light reflected by the inclined surface 563b of the reflector 560 is irradiated (see FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the appearance of the afterimage at the time of the actual jackpot effect using the rotating unit 500 will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, in this control example, a big hit is obtained by lottery of a special symbol, and when the rotation unit 500 operates, an afterimage is displayed by setting a predetermined light emission pattern for each of the LEDs 1 to 40. .. In this control example, the light emission patterns of the LEDs 1 to 40 are set so that the afterimage forms the character "hit". By showing the winning character as an afterimage, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the lottery of this special symbol was a big hit. Although the details will be described later, the light emission patterns of the LEDs 1 to 40 constituting the rotation unit 500 are defined in the operation scenario table 222f provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The light emission pattern specified in the operation scenario table 222f defines one round of the rotating unit 500. That is, the same light emission pattern is repeatedly set each time the rotating unit 500 makes a round. As a result, the same character (the character of "hit") can appear at the same position every round. Therefore, the character of "hit" can be easily recognized by the player.

Although not shown, an afterimage of the "hit" character displayed in the upper half and the "hit" character having rotational symmetry are displayed in the lower half of the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500. Is controlled by. As a result, it is possible to make the player more surely recognize that it will be a big hit.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 63. FIG. 59 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 59 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 59B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of nine types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" and sub-symbols without numbers. Each main symbol is composed of numbers "1" to "9" on a rear symbol composed of marine creatures (octopus, shark, crab, etc.) predetermined for each number. The sub-design is composed of a simple design having a substantially triangular shape.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is a big hit, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A" or "big hit C", a variable display is performed in which any of the main symbols to which "1 to 9" is added is aligned. Further, in the case of "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which any of the main symbols to which the even numbers "2, 4, 6, 8" are added is aligned. That is, there is a possibility that the variable display in which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are aligned is performed only in the case of the probability variation jackpot. Therefore, when the variable display is executed, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the odd numbers will be aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the upper 3/4 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variablely displayed, and the rest. The lower 1/4 is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, which are upper, middle, and lower, are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, in each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3, the main symbol and the sub symbol are arranged alternately in ascending or descending order of numbers, and the variable display is scrolled from right to left with periodicity for each symbol column Z1 to Z3. It will be done. In particular, in the upper symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The vertical line on the left side of the main display area Dm, the vertical line in the middle row, and the vertical line on the right side are set as effective lines L1 to L3, respectively. In addition, the diagonal line rising to the right and the diagonal line falling to the right in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines L4 and L5, respectively. In each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective lines L1 to L5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1 → the lower symbol row L3 → the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped 3rd symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), whether or not the player is a combination of the 3rd symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is). Further, if a combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbol in this control example) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the disconnection and the reserved ball exists, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stopped display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first ball entry port 64. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. Despite the fact that the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), either the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, or the right second entrance 640r However, it is rare that there is no entry, and in many cases where the third symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the player quits the game and the pachinko machine 10 This is due to the fact that no games have been played. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, a new ball has entered any one of the first entry port 64, the second entry opening 640, and the right second entry opening 640r. In that case, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the new ball entry is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and the ball entered into the first entry port 64, the second entry opening 640, and the right second entry opening 640r. This is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed. As shown in FIG. 59 (b), in this sub-display area Ds, a substantially square-shaped execution display area Ds1a in which a symbol corresponding to the variable display during execution is displayed, and a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls are displayed. It is composed of a hold display area Ds1b having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, at the right end and the left end (outside the effective line) of the main display area Dm, three parts of the main symbol and a part of the sub symbol of the third symbol are displayed.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), or each second ball entry port (first). When a ball enters the 2 entry port 640 and the right second entry opening 640r), the number of entry is suspended up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the 1st symbol display device 37 and is subordinate. It is also displayed in the display area Ds. More specifically, in the hold display area Ds1b, the number of hold balls based on the entry into the first entry port 64 and each second entry opening (second entry opening 640, right side second entry opening 640r). ) Is displayed, and the same number of reserved symbols as the total number of reserved balls is displayed. That is, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b, it indicates that the total number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved symbols are displayed, the total number of reserved balls is displayed. Indicates that is 4 balls. When the reserved symbol is not displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b, it means that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. In FIG. 59 (b), the display content when the total of the number of reserved balls based on the entry into the first entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls based on the entry into each second entry opening is six. Is illustrated, and six circular reserved symbols are displayed with respect to the reserved display area Ds1b. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b is updated in synchronization with the actual number of reserved balls. Further, the reserved symbols displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b are displayed left-justified in order from the reserved symbol corresponding to the old reserved ball.

In this control example, the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the ball enters each second ball entry port (second ball entry port 640, right side second ball entry port 640r), respectively. Although it is configured to be able to hold up to 4 times, the upper limit of the number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, and even if it is set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). good. In addition, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the first ball entrance 64 and the reserved balls for entering each second entry port (second entry port 640, right side second entry port 640r). It is not limited to the same as the upper limit of the number. The upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the first entrance 64 may be larger than the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering each second entrance, or conversely, the upper limit may be decreased. good. Further, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the reserved display area Ds1b, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63, a continuous advance notice effect (8 hold effect), which is one of the effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, will be described. This continuous advance notice effect (8 hold effect) includes the number of reserved balls (reserved balls of special symbol 1) based on the entry into the first entry port 64 and each second entry opening (second entry opening). This is an effect that may be executed when the total value with the number of reserved balls (reserved balls of special symbol 2) based on the entry into the right second entrance (640r) is eight. ..

FIG. 60A is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the start of the eight hold effect is determined. When the eighth ball entry is suspended during the variation display of the third symbol, it is determined whether or not to execute the eight hold effect one second before the variation display ends. Although the details will be described later, the eight-piece hold effect is configured so that the more the lottery result with high expectation is held in the hold ball, the easier it is to decide the execution. Therefore, when the eight hold effects are executed, the player can be made to play the game in the expectation that there is a big hit in the hold. When the start of the eight hold effect is decided, the characters "Preparing for fish school mode" are displayed at the upper part of the change display main display area Dm which is changing when the eighth hold ball is held. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the eight hold effects are executed before the effects are started. Therefore, it can be expected that any of the eight pending variable displays will be a big hit.

FIG. 60B is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when eight hold effects are executed. As shown in FIG. 60 (b), when the eight hold effect is executed, the characters "fish school mode" are displayed at the upper part of the main display area Dm. In addition, a large number of fish (fish school) appear on the back surface of the sub-display area Ds. By changing the display mode (rear surface) of the execution display area Ds1a and the hold display area Ds1b, the player can expect that the variable display currently being executed and the variable display being held are highly expected. It can be easily recognized.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a display mode of a special pressing effect that may be executed in the eight hold effect. When a reach occurs in the eight hold effects, it is determined whether or not to execute this special press effect. Reach means that the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed in the variable display, and only the middle symbol row Z2 is variablely displayed, and on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. This is an embodiment showing a state in which the main symbols with the same number are stopped and displayed, and suggesting that the main symbols with the same number are a chance to be aligned on the effective line. In the example shown in FIG. 61, two main symbols with the number "1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line L3. In this case, the main symbol with the number "1" on the right side of the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, so that it becomes a big hit stop symbol, so that the player is expected to be a big hit. be able to.

When a reach occurs in the eight hold effects and the execution of the special press effect is decided, as shown in FIG. 61, an image of a button displaying the characters "PUSH" is displayed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm. Is displayed. By displaying the image of this button, the player can be urged to press the frame button 22. Further, when the player presses the frame button 22 in the state shown in FIG. 61 (the state in which the image of the button is displayed), the lottery is performed on the condition that the variable display during execution corresponds to the jackpot. When winning, a special notification sound (confirmed notification sound) is output. By outputting this special notification sound, it is possible to make the player recognize that the current variation display is a big hit before the third symbol is stopped and displayed. In this control example, when it is determined to output the special notification sound, the output of the special notification sound is not limited to one time, and can be output multiple times according to the operation of the player's frame button 22. There is. With this configuration, the player who wants to hear the special notification sound can operate the frame button 22 many times while the image of the button is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

In addition to this special pressing effect, in the first control example, an effect for urging the pressing of the frame button 22 is provided. Hereinafter, the pressing effect other than the special pressing effect is referred to as a normal pressing effect in order to distinguish it from the special pressing effect. In this normal pressing effect, for example, the pressing of the frame button 22 is prompted when the frame button 22 is developed, and when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of the super reach is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63, the transition of the display mode of the sub-display area Ds during the execution of the eight hold effects will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 62, a transition of the display mode when no new prize is detected between the start and the end of the execution of the eight hold effects will be described.

FIG. 62A is a diagram showing a display mode of the sub-display area Ds when the first variation display is being executed after the eight hold effects are started. As shown in FIG. 62 (a), when the lottery of the special symbol based on the first reserved ball (the oldest reserved ball in time) is executed and the variable display showing the lottery result is executed, the reserved ball is displayed. The reserved symbols displayed in the area Ds1b are shifted one by one to the execution display area Ds1a and displayed. As a result, the reserved symbol is not displayed at the right end of the reserved display area Ds1b. Even in this case, the fish school display on the back surface continues to be displayed for the entire sub-display area Ds. Then, regardless of the number of fluctuations (the number of displayed symbols on hold), the fish school display over the entire sub-display area Ds continues during the execution of the eight hold effect. As a result, the fish school display indicating whether or not the eight hold effect is being executed can be displayed in a wider display range regardless of the number of hold balls. Further, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced as compared with the case where the display area of the fish school display is changed according to the number of reserved balls.

As shown in FIG. 62 (b), the reserved symbol displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b disappears, and the sub-display area Ds is executed while the variable display based on the last (eighth) reserved ball is executed. The fish school display continues throughout. Then, when the variable display based on the last reserved ball of the eight reserved effect is completed and the lottery result is out of order, the back surface of the sub-display area Ds is returned to the normal back surface after that (FIG. 62 (c)). reference). As a result, the player can easily recognize that the eight-piece hold effect has been completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a transition of the display mode when a new prize is detected between the start and the end of the execution of the eight hold effects will be described. With the 8 hold effects executed and the back of the sub-display area Ds displayed as a school of fish (see FIG. 63 (a)), the first entry port 64, the second entry opening 640, or the right second entry When a new prize is detected for the ball mouth 640r, the display area after the reserved symbol corresponding to the new prize is set in a different mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the display area on the right side of the sub-display area Ds, which includes the hold symbol corresponding to the new hold ball, has a display mode in which a large number of bubbles are displayed on the back surface. Bubble display) is set. On the other hand, the back surface of the display area on the left side of the reserved symbol corresponding to the new reserved ball is retained as the fish school display. In this way, the hold symbol corresponding to the hold ball that was held at the time when the 8 hold effect was started, and the hold ball that did not exist at the time when the 8 hold effect was started (execute the 8 hold effect). By making the back image different from the hold symbol corresponding to the hold ball that is not used to judge whether or not to do it, the player is made to clearly recognize how long the eight hold effects will continue. Can be done. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the area is divided into an area for displaying the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball that was reserved at the time when the eight reserved effect was started and an area for displaying the reserved symbol corresponding to the new reserved ball. The display mode to be displayed is referred to as "split display".

This divided display basically continues until the variable display corresponding to the eight reserved balls, which is the target of the eight-held effect, is completed. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), when the variable display corresponding to the eighth reserved ball in the eight reserved effect is executed, the entire reserved display area Ds1b is set to the bubble display, and the execution display area is set. Only Ds1a is displayed as a school of fish. In this state, when the final variation effect of the eight hold effects is completed and the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the disengagement is stopped and displayed, the normal display mode is as shown in FIG. 63 (d) after the next change. Return to. That is, not only the fish school display but also the bubble display is canceled. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the eight hold effects have been completed.

As described above, in the first control example, a new start prize is detected during the execution of the eight hold effect, and when the number of hold balls increases, it corresponds to the hold ball that is the target of the eight hold effect. The reserved symbol and the reserved symbol corresponding to the new reserved ball are displayed separately. Here, even if a new start prize is detected until the 8 hold effect is completed, if the entire sub-display area Ds is fixed to the fish school display, the player will be notified at the end of the 8 hold effect. There is a risk of making you feel uncomfortable. Even though the reserved symbol is displayed, the sub-display area Ds display mode returns to the normal mode, which may give the impression that the eight-piece hold effect has ended in the middle. Because. On the other hand, in the first control example, by performing the divided display, it is possible to clearly suggest to the player how long the eight hold effects will continue when a new start winning prize is detected. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable at the end of the eight-piece hold effect.

<About the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 77, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. First, the details of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 64) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first hit type (big hit symbol) used for selection. The initial value setting of the hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern, and the first random number counter C1. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for is used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 89). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for winning a prize for the first ball entry port 64 and each second ball entry port (second ball entry port 640, There is provided a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in which each counter value is stored for winning a prize for the right second entrance ball opening 640r). As described above, in this control example, a maximum of four reserved balls are provided for each of the first ball entry port 64 and each second ball entry port. For this reason, if the ball wins the first entrance 64 during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game, each counter value is special. It is stored in the symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and when a ball wins in any of the second entrances, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. After that, among the counter values stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the oldest counter value in time is moved to the execution area, and the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 or Various settings and control processes for variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol 2 are executed.

On the other hand, during the period when the lottery of the special symbol 1 is impossible, such as during the variable display of the special symbol or during the big hit game, the ball wins the first entrance 64 or each second entrance, and the prize is won. If the number of reserved balls corresponding to the ball mouth is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value is acquired, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball is acquired. It is stored in the storage area 203b. Further, when the corresponding holding number is the upper limit value (4 in this control example) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and only the prize balls (5 prize balls in this embodiment) are obtained. Is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player.

In this control example, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is set to 4 for each of the first ball entry port 64 and each second ball entry port, but the limit is not limited to this, and the number is less than 4 (for example). It may be 3) or more than 4 (for example, 8). Further, a configuration in which an upper limit value is not provided may be used.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 64. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 89).

The value of the random number counter C1 per first is updated periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball is the first entry port 64 or each second entry port (second entry). It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball opening 640 and the right second entry opening 640r) are won. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is defined in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 66A) provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot specified in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

Here, the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 66 (a). The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66A, when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. Is determined to be "7", and if it is "7", it is determined to be a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is within the range of "0 to 9". If it is within the range of "0 to 9", it is determined to be a big hit.

Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is special. It will be the one at the time of the big hit of the design. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 which is the jackpot of the special symbol, and the random number value "7" is the special symbol jackpot random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 400, the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "1/400". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are 10 values of the first random number counter C1 which is the jackpot of the special symbol, and the random number values "0 to 9" are the special symbol jackpot random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 400, the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "1/40".

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 64. The value of the first type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, any one of the big hits A to C is based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66 (b)). The jackpot type will be selected.

Here, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 66 (b). As shown in FIG. 66 (b), in the jackpot type selection table 202b, the jackpot types to be selected are defined in association with each range of the values of the first hit type counter C2. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), "big hit A" is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 47". This "big hit A" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 16 and the gaming state after the big hit is set to the probable change state of the special symbol. "Big hit A" is the most disadvantageous big hit type for the player because the number of rounds is the largest and the gaming state after the big hit is set to the probable change state which is advantageous for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 48 are random values for which "big hit A" is selected, so if a big hit is achieved by a special symbol lottery, "big hit A" Is selected at 48%.

Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "48 to 87", "big hit B" is defined in association with it. This "big hit B" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 16 and the game state after the big hit is set to the time saving state of the normal symbol. Since the number of rounds is the largest along with "Big hit A", it is advantageous for the player in terms of the number of prize balls that the player can obtain, but since the probability change state is not given after the big hit, the game state after the big hit is the most disadvantageous. Will be. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 40 are random values for which "big hit B" is selected, so if a big hit is achieved by a special symbol lottery, "big hit B" Is selected at 40%.

Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "88 to 99", "big hit C" is defined in association with it. This "big hit C" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is two and the gaming state after the big hit is set to the probable change state of the special symbol. Since the number of rounds is the smallest, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that the player can obtain, but since the probability change state is given after the big hit, the game state after the big hit is advantageous for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 12 random values for which "big hit C" is selected. The percentage of "Big hit C" selected is 12%.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 64. The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99), and "reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the ball is the first entry port 64 or each second entry port (second entry). It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball opening 640 and the right second entry opening 640r) are won.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high-probability time and a special symbol for low-probability time, and a range of random value values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times where the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is wide, 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "front-back off reach" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "front-back off reach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "front-back off reach" or "front-back off reach". Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, which is a low probability state. The table for is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter for determining the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 89) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 67 and 68) storing the random value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

The variation pattern selection table 202d defines a plurality of data tables for selecting variation patterns (see FIGS. 67 and 68). A plurality of variation pattern tables according to the gaming state are set in the variation pattern selection table 202d, and variation pattern tables are set for each of them according to the result of the hit / fail determination. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. It is acquired when it is detected that it has been executed, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the ordinary symbol is defined in the random number table 202c (see FIG. 66 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit specified in the random number table 202c per normal symbol, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (second symbol). The details of the random number table 202c per ordinary symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 66 (c).

FIG. 66 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the random number table 202c per ordinary symbol. In this random number table 202c per normal symbol, there are 21 random numbers that can be hit by the normal symbol when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), and the range is "5 to 20". .. Since the total number of random numbers that can be hit by the second random number counter C4 is 240 and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 16, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "16/240".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. In, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 20", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. However, the opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol (during the time saving state of the normal symbol), there are 200 random values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". Since the total number of random numbers that can be hit by the second random number counter C4 is 240 and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 200, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "1 / 1.2". ..

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. In, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is further shortened. Since it becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 78). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 89).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. 65 (a). As shown in FIG. 65 (a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type selection table 202b, a normal symbol per random number table 202c, and a random number table 202c per ordinary symbol as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data. The variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

As described above, the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 66A) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first random number counter C1 is stored. The jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66B) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and as described above, the determination values of the first hit type counter C2 are each. It is specified in association with the jackpot type. As described above, the random number table 202c per ordinary symbol (see FIG. 66 (c)) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the ordinary symbol is stored. Since each of these tables has already been described in detail together with the description of various counters, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68.

FIG. 67A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first control example selects a variation pattern when the gaming state is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol). It is composed of a normal table 202d1 used for the purpose and a non-normal table 202d2 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern in a gaming state (probability change state or time saving state) other than the normal state.

First, the details of the normal table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 67 (b). As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the normal table 202d1 is provided with a table referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit and a table referred to when the lottery result is out of order. In each table, the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other for each stop type (stop symbol) of the symbol.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit and the stop type is a big hit A or B, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29". Is defined in association with the normal reach A per 30 seconds, and the super reach A per 60 seconds is defined in association with the range of "30 to 198". Further, for the stop type of the jackpot C, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 100" in association with the normal reach B per 34 seconds of the variable time, and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is defined. In the range of "101 to 198", the fluctuation time is defined in association with the super reach B per 64 seconds.

On the other hand, when the hit / fail determination result is incorrect, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 differs according to the total value of the number of reserved balls. Specifically, when the total number of reserved balls is 0 to 4, the deviation time variation A is 10 seconds for all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 for the completely out-of-stop stop type. Is specified in association with each other. Further, for the reach stop type other than the front-back deviation, the deviation type counter CS1 value in the range of "0 to 99" is defined in association with the deviation normal reach A having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, which is "100 to 198". In the range of, a deviation time of 60 seconds and a super reach are defined in association with each other. Further, for the stop type of the front / rear deviation reach, the deviation super reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with all possible values of the variation type counter CS1.

On the other hand, when the total number of reserved balls is 5 to 7, the variation type counter CS1 has an deviation time of 5 seconds and a short variation A for all possible values for the completely out-of-stop stop type. It is specified in association with each other. Further, for the reach stop type other than the front-back deviation, the deviation type counter CS1 value in the range of "0 to 150" is defined in association with the deviation normal reach A having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, which is "151 to 198". In the range of, a deviation time of 60 seconds and a super reach are defined in association with each other. Further, for the stop type of the front / rear deviation reach, the deviation super reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with all possible values of the variation type counter CS1.

As described above, when the number of reserved balls is large (5 or more), it becomes easy to select a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time as compared with the case where the number of reserved balls is small. Therefore, since it is possible to reduce the possibility that a new starting prize will be generated during the fluctuation, the first ball opening 64 and the second ball will be further entered with the maximum number of reserved balls (8 in total). It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the mouth 640 and the second right entrance port 640r and becoming an invalid ball. Further, when the number of reserved balls is small, it is possible to easily generate a new start winning prize during a long fluctuation time by configuring the fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time to be easily selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the holding ball from disappearing during the game and the fluctuation display from being interrupted, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Next, the details of the non-normal table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 68. As shown in FIG. 68, when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit and the stop type is a big hit A or B, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49" and the normal reach A per 30 seconds of the variable time. It is defined in association with each other, and the super reach A per 60 seconds of fluctuation time is associated with the range of "50 to 198". Further, for the stop type of the jackpot C, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 100" in association with the normal reach B per 34 seconds of the variable time, and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is defined. In the range of "101 to 198", the fluctuation time is defined in association with the super reach B per 64 seconds.

On the other hand, when the hit / fail determination result is incorrect, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 differs according to the total value of the number of reserved balls, as in the normal table 202d1. Specifically, when the total number of reserved balls is 0 to 2, the fluctuation time is 7 seconds for all possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the completely out-of-stop stop type. Is specified in association with each other. Further, for the stop type of reach other than the front / rear deviation, the deviation normal reach B having a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined in association with all the values that the value of the variation type counter CS1 can take, and for the stop type of the front / rear deviation reach. Therefore, a deviation time of 60 seconds is specified in association with all possible values of the variation type counter CS1.

On the other hand, when the total number of reserved balls is 3 to 7, the variation type counter CS1 has an deviation short variation B of 2 seconds for all possible values for the completely out-of-stop stop type. It is specified in association with each other. Further, for the reach stop type other than the front-back deviation, the deviation normal reach B having a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined in association with all possible values of the variation type counter CS1. Further, for the stop type of the front / rear deviation reach, the deviation super reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with all possible values of the variation type counter CS1.

In this way, in the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time-saving state of the normal symbol, it is configured so that the fluctuation pattern for a shorter time can be easily selected as compared with the normal state. As a result, it is possible to improve the gaming efficiency in an advantageous probabilistic state or a time-saving state.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 65 (b). FIG. 65B is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. , Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, time saving medium counter 203g, probability variation flag 203h, variation order storage area 203i, variation execution flag 203j, jackpot medium flag 203k. , And other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1 and a first hit type counter. The values of C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored respectively.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is acquired, and the acquired data is the four holding areas (4 holding areas (starting winning). Among the vacant areas (holding 1st area to holding 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are executed. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area after being shifted (moved) to the area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only for the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 and each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is acquired according to the starting winning prize, the original special symbol is used. Apart from the jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. In this way, various types obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the starting prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) before the original special symbol lottery is performed. Predicting the information is described as pre-reading the lottery result of the special symbol. It should be noted that the various information corresponds to whether or not the information is correct, the type of stop, the fluctuation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the look-ahead is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the look-ahead is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. Store in 223a.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In this special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, data (counters C1 to C3, CS1) corresponding to the start winning to each second ball entry port (second ball entry port 640, right side second ball entry port 640r). Each value of) is stored.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side, and the acquired data is used in the four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, other The shift processing is performed to pack the winning data stored in the holding area of No. 1 into the holding area 1 smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variation display of the special symbol 1 performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting winning prize) (in the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) up to 4 times (variation display performed). The initial value of the value N1 of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 (see S604 in FIG. 83). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S206 in FIG. 79).

The special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203e is a special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into each second entry opening (second entry opening 640, right side second entry opening 640r). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the fluctuation display (variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81) of 1 up to 4 times. The value N2 of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero as an initial value like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a ball enters each second entry port and is special. Every time the number of reserved balls of the symbol 2 increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 (see S612 in FIG. 83). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S211 in FIG. 79).

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1) and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of the variable display in the special symbol 2) are reserved balls. The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a number command (see S207 and S212 in FIG. 79 and S605 and S613 in FIG. 83). The hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e are changed. Command.

The voice lamp control device 113 is mainly controlled by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e are changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls itself of the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 held in the device 110. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of reserved balls in the actual fluctuation display is deviated from the actual number of reserved balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved symbol in the reserved display area Ds1b of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f is a hold ball number (standby) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67. It is a counter that counts the number of times) up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. (See S804 in FIG. 86). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 85).

If the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, the second random number counter is used. The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 86). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. (S803: No in FIG. 86).

The time saving medium counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203g is set to zero, and a special symbol is drawn in the main control device 110, and every time a "big hit B" is reached, 100 is set at the end of the big hit B. .. That is, in the case of "big hit B", 100 is newly set regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g (see S1212 in FIG. 90). After that, 1 is subtracted every time the variation display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 ends until the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203 g becomes 0 (S223 in FIG. 79).

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, a lottery for the normal symbol is performed based on the random number table per normal symbol for high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0 and the probability variation flag 203h described later is off, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability time. (See S710 and S711 in FIG. 85).

The probability change flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol), and if the value of the probability change flag 203h is on, the pachinko machine 10 is in the state of being on. Indicates that the special symbol is in a probabilistic state. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial state of the probability change flag 203h is set to off, and is set to on each time the end timing of "big hits A and C" is reached. On the other hand, the probability change flag 203h is turned off every time the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off or the start of the jackpot is set.

When the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 81) and the special symbol 2 variation start process (FIG. 82) are executed by the MPU 201, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is executed, respectively. In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing and the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing, the probability variation flag 203h is referred to, and if the state is on, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. A lottery for special symbol 2 is held. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203h is off, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are drawn based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability (S403, S404 in FIG. 81, S503 in FIG. 82). , S504).

In this control example, while the probabilistic state is set as the game state, the time saving state of the normal symbol is also set. Therefore, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g and the probability variation flag 203h are referred to to determine whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state. Specifically, if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203g is 1 or more, or if the probability change flag 203h is on (if the time reduction state or the probability change state), it is determined to be the time reduction state of the normal symbol. A lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on a random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0 and the probability change flag 203h is off (neither the time saving state nor the probability changing state), the normal symbol is based on the random number table per normal symbol for low probability time. A lottery is held (see S710 and S711 in FIG. 85).

The variable order storage area 203i stores information indicating the order in which the data (holding balls) stored in the holding areas of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b are stored. Storage area for. The variable order storage area 203i is composed of eight holding areas and one execution area, and data for identifying whether the special symbol 1 is a lottery or the special symbol 2 is a lottery in each area. Is stored. Specifically, for example, if 01H is stored, it means that the lottery of the special symbol 1 is suspended, and if 02H is stored, it means that the lottery of the special symbol 2 is suspended. means. Further, if 00H is stored, it means that the area is empty.

More specifically, the ball enters at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or each second entrance (second entrance 640, right second entrance 640r) (starting prize). The value corresponding to the entrance to the ball is stored in the lowest area (area with a small area number) among the vacant areas of the eight holding areas (holding first area to holding eighth area) (S607 in FIG. 83). , S615). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the data stored in the variable order storage area 203i is shifted (moved) to the execution area side and moved to the execution area. Based on the above information, it is determined whether to execute the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2 (see S304 and S306 in FIG. 80).

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 8th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 7th area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. By referring to the fluctuation order storage area 203i at the start of the fluctuation, the lottery of the special symbol can be executed in order from the reserved ball with the oldest time.

The variation execution flag 203j determines whether to draw a special symbol based on the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 when the variation display ends in the state where the reserved ball exists (the lottery condition of the next special symbol is satisfied). It is a flag indicating whether to draw a special symbol based on the reserved ball of the special symbol 2. The variable execution flag 203j is composed of two bits, the high-order bit corresponds to the special symbol 1 and the low-order bit corresponds to the special symbol 2. If each bit is on, it means that it is the execution timing of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the bit, and if it is off, it means that it is not the execution timing of the variable display. The variation execution flag 203j determines the type of the oldest reserved ball in time (whether it is the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 or the reserved ball of the special symbol 2) from the data of the variable order storage area 203i. , The state is updated according to the determined type (see S305 and S307 in FIG. 80).

The jackpot middle flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot is being hit. If the jackpot flag 203k is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot. This jackpot middle flag 203k is set to on when the start of the jackpot is set (see S221 in FIG. 79). On the other hand, it is set to off in the jackpot end processing executed at the end of the jackpot (see S1214 in FIG. 90).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73. FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 69, the ROM 222 includes a sub-variation pattern selection table 222a, a press notice selection table 222b, a back switching table 222c, a special back switching table 222d, a continuous notice lottery table 222e, and an operation scenario table 222f. And at least 222 g of the production upper limit number table.

The sub-variation pattern selection table 222a is referred to for selecting a detailed aspect of the variation effect (variation display) based on the mode of the rough variation effect (variation display) notified by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110. It is a table to be done. The sub-variation pattern selection table 222a defines a detailed mode of variation effect in association with the value of the sub-variation selection counter 223t, which will be described later. A display variation pattern command is set based on the variation effect mode selected from the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a (see S3505 in FIG. 106).

The press notice selection table 222b is a table for selecting the type (notice type) of the notice effect to be executed when the player presses the frame button 22 in the normal pressing effect. The details of the pressing notice selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 70 (a).

FIG. 70A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the press notice selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 70 (a), in this presser notice selection table 222b, the range of the value of the effect counter and the advancer type are defined in association with each other for each stop type in the variation display in which the normal press effect is set. Has been done. The effect counter is configured as a loop counter that is periodically updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated in, for example, the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. (Not shown).

As shown in FIG. 70 (a), when the stop types are jackpots A and B, the notice type of the "fish school" is defined in the range of "0 to 120" in the value of the effect counter. On the other hand, in the range where the value of the effect counter is "121 to 198", the notice type of "bubble" is defined in association with it. Although not shown, the notice type of "fish school" indicates a notice effect in which the fish school crosses the back of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the notice type of "bubble" is the third symbol. Shows a notice effect that bubbles are generated on the back of.

Further, when the stop type is the jackpot C, the notice type of "bubble" is defined in association with all the possible values of the effect counter. On the other hand, in the case of out of reach before and after, the value of the effect counter is defined in the range of "0 to 15" in association with the notice type of "fish school", and the notice type of "bubble" is specified in the range of "16 to 198". Is specified in association with each other.

In this way, when the number of rounds is 16 rounds of jackpots A and B, the rate at which "fish school" is selected as the notice type is higher than in the case of front-back off reach, so a notice effect of "fish school" occurs. If this is the case, the player's expectation for a big hit can be increased. On the other hand, the notice type of "foam" is easily selected in the case of jackpot C or front-back off reach. That is, when the notice effect of "bubble" occurs and it becomes a big hit, the possibility of "big hit C" becomes high. As described above, when the "big hit C" is reached, the gaming state after the big hit is set to the probable change state, so that it is an advantageous state in which the possibility of another big hit at short intervals (small number of lottery) is high. Therefore, when the notice effect of "bubbles" occurs, it is possible to make the player more strongly hope that it will be a big hit.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. The rear switching table 222c is a table that defines the order of stages (rear image) that is changed when the player presses the frame button 22 in a state where the normal pressing effect or the special pressing effect is not generated.

The details of the rear switching table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 70 (b). FIG. 70B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the rear switching table 222c. As shown in FIG. 70B, the rear switching table 222c has a value of the mode counter 223i whose value is updated every time the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, and a type of the rear image (rear type). It is specified in association with each other. The mode counter 223i is incremented by 1 in the range of "1 to 3" each time the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the stage (rear type) can be changed and the stage (rear type) is changed. Will be done. Then, when the stage is changed while the value of the mode counter 223i is "3", the value is updated to "1".

As shown in FIG. 70 (b), the value "1" of the mode counter 223i is associated with the back surface A (morning stage), and the value "2" is associated with the rear surface B (evening stage). It is defined, and the back surface C (night stage) is associated with "3". Therefore, each time the player operates the frame button 22, the back type can be changed as back A → back B → back C → .... Therefore, since the back type can be changed according to the mood of the player, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. The special rear switching table 222d is a table that defines the order of special stage types (special rear type) to be set during the time zone when the time measured by the RTC292 becomes a specific time zone. The details of the special rear switching table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 71 (a).

FIG. 71A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special rear switching table 222d. As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the special mode counter 223m in which the value of the special rear switching table 222d is updated every time a specific time zone (3 minutes every hour after the power is turned on) is reached. The value of and the type of special stage (special back type) are specified in association with each other. The value of the special mode counter 223m is incremented by 1 in the range of "1 to 3" each time a special stage is newly set (every time a specific time zone is reached). When the stage is changed while the value of the special mode counter 223m is "3", the value is updated to "1" as in the mode counter 223i.

As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the special back surface A (city stage) is defined in association with the value "1" of the special mode counter 223 m, and the special back surface B (forest stage) is defined with respect to "2". It is defined in association with each other, and a special back surface C (sea stage) is associated with "3". Therefore, every time a specific time zone (3 minutes every hour after the power is turned on), the special stage can be changed as special back surface A → special back surface B → special back surface C → ... can. Therefore, since it is possible to change to a different special stage according to the time zone, it is possible to diversify the mode of the special stage.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. The continuous notice lottery table 222e is a table referred to when determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect (8 hold effect). If the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 are stored for 4 each, which is the upper limit value, and 1 second before the end of the variable display during execution, this continuous notice is given. The lottery table 222e is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect (8 hold effect). The details of the continuous notice lottery table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 71 (b).

FIG. 71B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the continuous notice lottery table 222e. As shown in FIG. 71 (b), the continuous advance notice lottery table 222e defines a range of values of the effect counter that is determined to execute the continuous advance notice effect for each lottery result of the special symbol. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect (8 hold effect) is executed for each of the 8 hold balls in order from the oldest hold ball. Then, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed by the determination for any of the reserved balls, the determination is terminated at that point even if there is an undetermined reserved ball, and the execution start of the continuous advance notice effect is set. .. On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is not executed in the determination made for all eight reserved balls, the continuous advance notice effect is not set.

As shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit and the reserved ball pre-read when the fluctuation pattern hits and becomes super reach is the judgment target, the value of the effect counter is "0 to". If it is within the range of "180", the continuous notice effect is set. Of the 199 counter values (random values) that the value of the effect counter can take, 181 counter values (random values) that are determined to execute the continuous advance notice effect, so it hits among the 8 reserved balls and becomes super reach. If there is a corresponding reserved ball, a continuous advance notice effect (8 pending effects) is set at a rate of about 91% (181/199).

On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, and the reserved ball that has been pre-read when the fluctuation pattern is out of order and becomes super reach is the judgment target, the value of the effect counter is in the range of "0 to 99". A continuous notice effect is set. Of the 199 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the effect counter, 100 are the counter values (random values) that are determined to execute the continuous advance notice effect, so they fall out of the 8 reserved balls and are super reach. If there is a hold ball corresponding to, a continuous notice effect (8 hold effects) is set at a rate of about 50% (100/199).

It should be noted that other than the above-mentioned two types of pre-reading results (hit super reach, missed super reach), since it is not specified in the continuous notice lottery table 222e, it is determined that the continuous notice effect is executed regardless of the value of the effect counter. There is no such thing. In this way, by configuring the continuous notice effect to be executed only when the hold ball corresponding to the hit super reach or the out-of-hold super reach is included in the hold, the player's big hit when the continuous notice effect is started. It is possible to raise the expectation for.

In this first control example, the continuous advance notice effect may be set only when there is a reserved ball corresponding to the hit super reach or the missed super reach, but the configuration is limited to this. However, it may be determined arbitrarily. For example, when a reserved ball in which a reach occurs is included, it may be configured to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed for the reserved ball, or the reserved ball is a reserved ball corresponding to a completely off stop type. Even in such a case, the configuration may be such that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined with a lower probability than in the case where reach occurs. As a result, the frequency of executing the continuous advance notice effect can be increased.

In the first control example, each of the eight reserved balls is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be configured in which all the look-ahead results of the eight reserved balls are acquired and whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is executed is determined at one time. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the determination as to whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect is executed.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. The operation scenario table 222f is a table that defines the light emission patterns (operation scenarios) of the LEDs 1 to 40 of the rotation unit 500. In this operation scenario table 222f, the lighting states of the LEDs 1 to 40 are set in association with the value of the operation pointer 223ae which is updated according to the number of operation steps of the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500. The details of this operation scenario table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 71 (c).

FIG. 71 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the operation scenario table 222f. As shown in FIG. 71 (c), in this operation scenario table 222f, a combination of lighting states (light emission pattern) to be set for each of the LEDs 1 to 40 is defined in association with the value of the operation pointer 223ae. ing. As shown in FIG. 71 (c), the data indicating the lighting state of each of the LEDs 1 to 40 is composed of 3 bits each, and indicates the lighting state of the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED in order from the upper bit. .. More specifically, if each bit is 1 (on), it means that the LED of the corresponding color is set to the lighting state, and if it is 0 (off), the LED of the corresponding color is turned off. Means to set. For example, if the data indicating the lighting state is "001B", it means that the red and green LEDs are set to off and the blue LED is set to on. Further, for example, if the data indicating the lighting state is "101B", it means that the green LED is set to off and the red and blue LEDs are set to on. In this case, red and blue are combined to give the appearance that the diffuser is colored purple.

As shown in FIG. 71 (c), with respect to the value "00H" of the operation pointer 223ae, "000B" is defined in association with the lighting state of the LEDs 1 to 40. Therefore, while the value of the operation pointer 223ae is "00H", all the LEDs 1 to 40 are set to the off state. The value of the operation pointer 223ae is updated according to the number of steps (value of the step counter 223ad) of the drive motor 457 of the rotation unit 500.

Further, with respect to the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223ae, "000B" is associated with the lighting state of the LEDs 1 to 5, and "001B" is associated with the lighting state of the LEDs 6 and 7. There is. Further, although the illustration is omitted, "001B" is also defined in association with the lighting state of the LEDs 9, 10, 12, and 13. On the other hand, "000B" is defined in association with the lighting state of the other LEDs. As a result, the drive motor 457 performs a three-step rotation operation, and the blue LEDs of the LEDs 6, 7, 9, 10, 12, and 13 are set to the lighting state from the fourth step. As a result, the right end of the 4th stroke (LED6, 7), the 5th stroke (LED9, 10), and the 6th stroke (LED12, 13) among the characters of "this" displayed in the rotation display effect are displayed as an afterimage. Can be made to.

Further, with respect to the value "02H" of the operation pointer 223ae, "000B" is associated with the lighting state of the LEDs 1 and 3 to 5, and "001B" is associated with the lighting state of the LEDs 2, 6 and 7. It is stipulated. Further, although the illustration is omitted, "001B" is also defined in association with the lighting state of the LEDs 9, 10, 12, and 13. On the other hand, "000B" is defined in association with the lighting state of the other LEDs. As a result, in addition to the right end of the 4th stroke (LED6, 7), the 5th stroke (LED9, 10), and the 6th stroke (LED12, 13) among the characters of "this" displayed in the rotation display effect, 2 The right end of the image (LED2) can be displayed as an afterimage.

After that, the lighting state (light emission pattern) for each of the LEDs 1 to 40 is defined for displaying the afterimage constituting the character of "hit" for each value of the operation pointer 223ae. In this combination of lighting states, one rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 is set. When the rotation unit 500 goes around, the value of the operation pointer 223ae is reset to 00H, and the lighting state is set for each of the LEDs 1 to 40 again from the beginning of the operation scenario table 222f. As a result, since the lighting operation of each of the LEDs 1 to 40 can be made the same for each round, the player can more reliably recognize the afterimage composed of the above-mentioned "hit" character in FIG. 58.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. The effect upper limit number table 222g is a table in which the upper limit value of the execution number of the jackpot effect using the rotation unit 500 is defined. As described above, the rotating unit 500 has a board member 531 on which a plurality of LEDs 532 are mounted. Therefore, when a jackpot effect using the rotating unit 500 is performed, the LED 532 and the IC / capacitor mounted on the board are used. Generates heat due to the operation of. Therefore, if the rotating unit 500 is operated frequently, the solder connecting the LED 532, the IC, the capacitor, and the like to the substrate may be melted due to the influence of heat generation, resulting in poor contact. Therefore, in this control example, in order to suppress the operation frequency of the rotation unit 500, the upper limit value of the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 according to the elapsed time (time zone) is defined in the effect upper limit number of times table 222g. When an effect mode involving the operation of the rotation unit 500 is selected while the upper limit is reached, the effect is replaced with an alternative effect in which the rotation unit 500 does not operate. As a result, the number of operations of the rotating unit 500 can be reduced, so that failures such as poor contact can be prevented (suppressed). The details of the effect upper limit number table 222g will be described with reference to FIG. 72.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the effect upper limit number of times table 222g. As shown in FIG. 72, in the effect upper limit number of times table 222g, each time zone and the upper limit value of the operation number of the rotating unit 500 in the time zone are defined in association with each other. The time zone is determined by the time measured by the RTC292 electrically connected to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 is counted by the rotation display number counter 223x provided in the RAM 223.

As shown in FIG. 72, in the effect upper limit number of times table 222g, "0 times" is defined as the upper limit number of times for the time zone of "00:00 to 08:59". Therefore, even if an effect in which the rotation unit 500 operates is selected in this time zone, the rotation unit 500 does not operate and an alternative effect is executed. It should be noted that the reason why the rotating unit 500 is not operated during the time zone of "00:00 to 08:59" is that it is outside the business hours of a general hall. Outside the business hours of the hall, for example, the rotation unit 500 is operated by a trial hit by a clerk, and when the upper limit is reached, the rotation unit 500 may be operated when the player plays a game. I can't do it. In order to avoid this situation, in this control example, the upper limit is set to 0 so that the rotating unit 500 does not operate during the time zone of "00:00 to 08:59", which is likely to be outside the business hours of the hall. ing.

Further, for the time zone of "09: 00 to 11:59", "2 times" is defined in association with the upper limit number of times. Therefore, the number of operations of the rotating unit 500 can be limited to a maximum of two times in about three hours. For the time zone of "12:00 to 14:59", "4 times" is defined in association with the upper limit number of times. Therefore, when the production of the upper limit number of times (twice) is executed in the time zone of "09: 00 to 11:59", the rotation unit 500 can be operated up to twice. On the other hand, when the rotation unit 500 does not operate in the time zone of "09: 00 to 11:59" (the value of the rotation display count counter 223x is 0), it is "12:00 to 14:59". The rotation unit 500 can be operated up to four times in the time zone. Similarly, in the subsequent time zone, the upper limit value is increased twice every 3 hours. As a result, the number of operations of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the substrate or the like inside the rotating unit 500 from being destroyed by heat. Further, by defining a different upper limit number of times for each time zone, it is possible to make the effect using the rotating unit 500 appear evenly in each time zone.

Assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to specify only the total upper limit number of times from when the power is turned on to when the power is turned off, from the time when the upper limit number is reached until the power is turned off. During that time, it becomes impossible to execute the effect of operating the rotating unit 500. Therefore, the later the time zone in which the technique is performed, the less likely it is that the rotation unit 500 will be able to see the effect of operation. Therefore, the player who can perform the game only in the late time zone feels unfair. There is a possibility of letting it go. On the other hand, in this control example, the upper limit of the number of operations of the rotating unit 500 is different depending on the time zone. As a result, regardless of the time at which the game is started, it is possible to execute an effect in which the rotation unit 500 operates until the upper limit number of times in each time zone is reached. Therefore, even a player who can play the game only in a late time zone can play the game with the expectation that the effect of operating the rotation unit 500 will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling unfair to the player who can play the game only in the late time zone.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, and a time. The effect execution flag 223 g, the input time storage area 223h, the mode counter 223i, the press period timer 223j, the level storage area 223k, the special mode counter 223m, the touch effect effective time storage area 223o, and the interval counter 223p. Continuous notice flag 223q, remaining notice number counter 223r, split display flag 223s, sub-variation selection counter 223t, back change prohibition flag 223u, pressing effect in progress flag 223v, special notification in progress flag 223w, rotation display number of times At least a counter 223x, a rotation number counter 223aa, a rotation display effect flag 223ab, a lighting setting flag 223ac, a step counter 223ad, an operation pointer 223ae, a power supply cutoff flag 223y, and other memory areas 223z are provided. ..

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area, four areas corresponding to the special symbol 1 (first area to the fourth area), and four areas corresponding to the special symbol 2 (first area to the fourth area). ), And each of these areas stores winning information. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 detects a start winning prize for the first ball entry port 64 or each second ball entry port (second ball entry port 640, right side second ball entry port 640r). , When a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn from each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired in response to the starting winning. Various obtained information (whether or not, jackpot type in case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is received from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. Notified by command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information corresponds to four areas (first area- Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

Based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect (8 hold effect) can be executed. By configuring the continuous advance notice effect (8 hold effects) to be executable before the change display corresponding to each hold ball is executed, for each hold ball before the change display is started. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that will be a big hit.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b is a variation display of the special symbol 1 performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is a special symbol 2 reserved in the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable effect of the above up to 4 times for each type of special symbol. Similarly, the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223c is a variation display of the special symbol 2 performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is reserved by the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the special symbol 2 up to 4 times for each type of the special symbol.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Unable to get the value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and sets the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Therefore, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted. When this is done, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball count command from the hold ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command among the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (see S3008 in FIG. 101). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c. , A display hold ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 223b or the special symbol 2 hold ball count counter 223c after storage. ..

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 hold. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the ball number counter 223c is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is the main. The value is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is also set to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when the variation pattern command of the special symbol 1 transmitted from the main control device 110 or the variation pattern command of the special symbol 2 is received (see S3002 in FIG. 101), and the third symbol display device is displayed. It is turned off when the variation display in 81 is set (see S3402 in FIG. 105). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 has a variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs variation display of the third symbol. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3005 in FIG. 101), and the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3406 in FIG. 105). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223f stores a random number value in the range of 0 to 198 acquired from a random number generation IC (not shown) electrically connected to the voice lamp control device 113. The operating clock (operating frequency) of the IC for generating random numbers can be updated to different random number values for each of the eight reserved balls and the determination can be executed at least when determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. An IC that can operate with an operating clock (for example, 1 MHz) is adopted. The value of the effect counter 223f is used when executing various determinations executed by the voice lamp control device 113, such as whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed and the determination of the advance notice type of the normal pressing effect.

The time effect execution flag 223 g indicates whether or not to execute an effect (time effect) to change to a special stage (special back type) in a specific time zone (3 minutes every hour after the power is turned on). It is a flag. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, an upper limit (for example, 3 months) is set for the period during which the pachinko machine 10 can execute the time effect, and even if the upper limit is exceeded, a specific time zone is reached. The configuration is such that time production is not executed. As a result, the rarity of the time production can be increased, so that the player can be made to think that he / she wants to play the game with the pachinko machine 10 by the time the upper limit period is reached. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 in the period until the upper limit period is reached. The initial value of the time effect execution flag 223g is set to off, and is set to on when it is determined that the date and time when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is the upper limit period during which the time effect can be executed (FIG. FIG. See S2103 of 92). On the other hand, since the contents of the RAM 223 are not backed up when the power is cut off, the contents of the RAM 223 are turned off every time the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off.

In addition, you may configure it so that it can be executed without limitation without setting the upper limit period of time production. In this case, since the time effect can be executed for a longer period of time, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 that can be enjoyed for a long time.

The turn-on time storage area 223h is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the time when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. As described above, in the first control example, the time effect (change to a special stage) is executed every hour for 3 minutes after the power is turned on. Whether or not to start executing the time effect is determined by the difference between the time stored in the input time storage area 223h and the current time measured by the RTC292. When the time when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is acquired from the RTC292, the data corresponding to the time is stored in the input time storage area 223h (see S2104 in FIG. 92).

As described above, the mode counter 223i is set when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period in which the back type (stage) can be changed (normal pressing effect, special pressing effect, time effect, and outside the jackpot period). , A storage area for storing data indicating the back type to be changed. This mode counter 223i is composed of counters that can take four types of values from 0 to 3, and "1", "2", and "3" are rear A (morning stage), rear B (evening stage), and rear, respectively. Corresponds to C (night stage). Further, "0" is a value that can be taken only at the time of initialization, and indicates a state in which the back surface type is not set. The value of the mode counter 223i is updated by 1 each time the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the period in which the back type can be changed (see S2402 in FIG. 95), and the back type corresponding to the updated counter value is used. Is set. For example, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the state where the value of the mode counter 223i is "2" (the state where the rear surface B is set), the value of the mode counter 223i is updated to "3" and at the same time. , The back surface type is changed to the back surface C corresponding to the updated value "3". If the value of the mode counter 223i is updated while the upper limit value "3" is set, the value is set to "1". Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the value is updated from the initial value "0" to "1", and the process of setting the back surface A as the back surface type is executed (see S2105 in FIG. 92). ..

The pressing period timer 223j is a timer that measures the acceptable period of the frame button 22 when the normal pressing effect or the special pressing effect is executed. When the execution start timing of the normal pressing effect or the special pressing effect is reached, a timer value (effect period) corresponding to the type of the pressing effect to be executed is set for this pressing period timer 223j (S2602 in FIG. 97). The value is subtracted by 1 in the special notification sound setting process (see FIG. 96) or the pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 97) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 93). (See S2507 in FIG. 96 and S2606 in FIG. 97). When the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected when the value of the pressing period timer 223j is 1 or more, the effect corresponding to the pressing effect being executed is executed.

The level storage area 223k is a storage area for storing information indicating the effect level (effect mode) of the touch effect, which is one of the interesting effects in the first control example. In the first control example, the touch sensor 290 is mounted on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is configured to be able to determine whether or not the player has touched the screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the first control example, the touch sensor 290 is used to enable an entertaining effect. Specifically, in the third symbol display device 81, an effect (touch effect) for urging the user to touch the screen is executed (not shown). This touch effect may be set during the execution of the variable effect for notifying the jackpot, and the mode changes each time the player touches the screen (for example, an indicator displayed on the third symbol display device 81). (Increases) The production is executed. In this touch effect, for example, the maximum value of the indicator is predetermined for each jackpot type, and when the jackpot A is most advantageous to the player, the indicator becomes maximal. In other words, when the touch effect appears during the fluctuation, the jackpot is confirmed at that point, and when the displayed indicator reaches the maximum, it is determined that the jackpot A is the most advantageous, so it is positive for the player. Can be touched on the screen.

It should be noted that this touch effect is executed as an alternative effect to the effect in which the rotation unit 500 operates. This is because the detection range of the touch sensor 290 and the range of the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 are close to each other in this control example. That is, if the touch effect and the rotation display effect are executed at the same time, the player may touch the rotation unit 500, the rotation unit 500 may be damaged, or the player may be injured. Further, the touch sensor 290 may be difficult to touch due to being blocked by the rotating unit 500, which may cause stress on the player. Therefore, in this control example, the touch effect is performed only as an alternative effect when the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 reaches the upper limit so that the operation of the rotation unit 500 and the touch effect using the touch sensor 290 do not conflict with each other. Is configured to be feasible. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the touch effect and the rotation display effect from occurring at the same time, so that the player may be injured by touching the rotation unit 500, or the rotation unit 500 may be damaged. It is possible to prevent the player from being stressed by being relaxed or having difficulty touching the touch panel (touch sensor 290).

The level storage area 223k stores information corresponding to how much the effect mode has changed (change amount of the indicator) in this touch effect. Every time it is detected that the player touches the screen in the touch effect, the data of the level storage area 223k is updated within the range below the upper limit, and the display mode (amount of indicator) corresponding to the updated data is set. To. Further, when the player's touch is not detected for a certain period (for example, 2 seconds) in the touch effect, the data in the level storage area 223k is updated in the direction of reducing the amount of the indicator, and the updated data. The display mode corresponding to is set. By configuring the indicator amount to decrease if the touch operation is not performed during the execution of the touch effect, the player can positively touch the screen.

When the execution condition of the time effect is satisfied (the time measured by RTC292 becomes a specific time zone), the special mode counter 223m stores a value corresponding to the type of the special stage set in the time effect. It is a counter. In this special mode counter 223m, a value is added by 1 in the range of "1 to 3" every time a new specific time zone is reached, and a special back surface type corresponding to the added value is set. Further, when the value of the special mode counter 223m is newly set to a specific time zone in the state of "3", the value is updated to "1" as in the mode counter 223i. As described above, the values "1", "2", and "3" of the special mode counter 223m are the special back surface A (city stage), the special back surface B (Morikata stage), and the special rear surface C (sea stage), respectively. Corresponds to.

The touch effect effective time storage area 223o is a storage area for storing a period in which the touch to the screen (detection of the touch sensor 290) is treated as effective in the touch effect. The effective time corresponding to the touch effect is stored in the touch effect effective time storage area 223o at the start of the touch effect, and the effective time is subtracted each time the touch sensor control process is executed (S2702 in FIG. 98). reference). Only when the valid time stored in the touch effect effective time storage area 223o remains, the effect for the player touching the screen is set.

The interval counter 223p is a counter for counting the period during which the touch sensor 290 is off (the period during which the player does not touch the screen) during the touch effect. As described above, when the player's touch is not detected for a certain period (for example, 2 seconds) in the touch effect of this control example, the data in the level storage area 223k is updated in the direction of reducing the amount of the indicator. And the display mode corresponding to the updated data is set. Whether or not to execute the effect of reducing the amount of this indicator is determined by the value of the interval counter 223p.

The continuous notice flag 223q is a flag indicating whether or not the continuous notice effect (8 hold effect, see FIG. 60B) is being executed. When the continuous notice flag 223q is on, it indicates that the continuous notice effect is being executed, and when it is off, it indicates that the continuous notice flag is not being executed. This continuous notice flag 223q is set to on when the execution of the continuous notice effect is set (see S3808 in FIG. 109). On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the continuous advance notice effect (see S3206 in FIG. 103).

The remaining advance notice number counter 223r is a counter indicating the remaining number of times of continuous advance notice effect (number of fluctuation displays). The continuous advance notice effect continues over the variable display of the number of times of the value stored in the remaining advance notice number counter 223r. When the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the value of the remaining advance notice number counter 223r is set to 8 (see S3807 in FIG. 109), and each time the start of the variable display is set during the continuous advance notice effect. The values are subtracted by 1 (see S3508 in FIG. 106).

The split display flag 223s has a split display (see FIG. 63) in the sub-display area Ds based on the fact that a new start prize is detected and the number of reserved balls increases during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect (8 hold effect). It is a flag indicating whether or not it is set. If the split display flag 223s is on, it indicates that the split display is set, and if it is off, it indicates that the split display is not set. As described above, the split display changes the back surface between the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball that is the target of the continuous advance notice effect and the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball that is not the target of the continuous advance notice effect, and up to which reserved symbol. This is a display mode for clarifying whether or not a person should have a sense of expectation. Here, even if a new start prize is detected until the 8 hold effect is completed, if the entire sub-display area Ds is fixed to the fish school display, the player will be notified at the end of the 8 hold effect. There is a risk of making you feel uncomfortable. Even though the reserved symbol is displayed, the sub-display area Ds display mode returns to the normal mode, which may give the impression that the eight-piece hold effect has ended in the middle. Because. On the other hand, in the first control example, by performing the divided display, it is possible to clearly suggest to the player how long the eight hold effects will continue when a new start winning prize is detected. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable at the end of the eight-piece hold effect.

The sub-variation selection counter 223t is a counter used to select a detailed display mode of the variation pattern from the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a. Similar to the effect counter 223f, the sub-variation selection counter 223t stores a random number value acquired from the random number generation IC. As described above, the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a defines a detailed display mode of the variation pattern in association with the range of the values of the sub-variation selection counter 223t. By using the sub-variation selection counter 223t to select the display mode of the fluctuation pattern, the display mode can be randomly selected.

The back change prohibition flag 223u is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period during which the change of the back type is prohibited when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, and if it is on, the change of the back type is prohibited. Indicates that it is a period. On the other hand, if it is off, it indicates that the period is such that the back surface type can be changed according to the operation of the frame button 22. The period during which it is prohibited to change the back surface type is, specifically, during the execution of a normal pressing effect or a special pressing effect, during the execution of a time effect, or during a big hit.

The pressing effect in progress flag 223v is a flag indicating whether or not a normal pressing effect or a special pressing effect is being executed. The pressing effect in progress flag 223v is composed of, for example, two bits, the upper bit is a flag corresponding to the normal pressing effect, and the lower bit is a flag corresponding to the special pressing effect. If each bit is 1 (on), it means that the pressing effect corresponding to the 1 (on) bit is being executed, and if it is 0 (off), it means that the corresponding pressing effect is not being executed. Is shown. Specifically, if the pressing effect flag 223v is "10B" in binary notation, it means that the normal pressing effect is being executed, and if it is "01B", it means that the special pressing effect is being executed. Is shown. Further, if it is "00B", it means that none of the pressing effects is executed. In the pressing effect in progress flag 223v, when the start timing of the pressing effect is reached, the bit corresponding to the type of pressing effect to be started is set to 1 (on) (see S2603 in FIG. 97), and the end timing of the pressing effect is set. Is set to 0 (off) (see S2609 in FIG. 97).

The special notification flag 223w is a flag indicating whether or not the special notification sound can be output during the execution of the special pressing effect (see FIG. 61). If the special notification flag 223w is on, it indicates that the special notification sound can be output, and if it is off, it indicates that the special notification sound cannot be output. As described above, if it is determined by lottery whether or not to output the special notification sound in the special pressing effect, the special notification sound is output every time the frame button 22 is operated until the special pressing effect is completed. The state to be set is set. With this configuration, the player who wants to hear the special notification sound can operate the frame button 22 many times during the execution of the special pressing effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game. The special notification flag 223w is set to on when the special notification sound execution lottery is won (see S2504 in FIG. 96), and is set to off at the end of the special pressing effect (see S2510 in FIG. 96).

The rotation display count counter 223x is a counter for counting the number of executions of the effect (rotation display effect) in which the rotation unit 500 operates, and 1 is added to the value each time the rotation display effect is executed (FIG. 107). See S3606). When the mode accompanied by the rotation display effect is selected from the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a based on the variation pattern command, the value of the rotation display number counter 223x and the upper limit specified in the above-mentioned effect upper limit number table 222g. By comparing with the value, it is determined whether the rotation display effect is set as it is as the mode of the fluctuation pattern this time or the touch effect is set as the alternative effect. In this determination, as described above, when the value of the rotation display number counter 223x has reached the upper limit value, it is determined that the alternative effect is set. By avoiding the execution of the rotation display effect more than the upper limit value and executing the alternative effect, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the rotation unit 500 from operating frequently. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the failure of the rotating unit 500.

The rotation speed counter 223aa is a counter that counts the number of rotations of the rotation unit 500. Here, the rotation unit 500 is provided with an origin sensor (not shown). Since this origin sensor is already known, it will be briefly described. However, when the rotation unit 500 is in the origin position (rotation position shown in FIG. 35 (a)), the output is turned on (H) and the origin is turned on. It is a sensor whose output is turned off (L) when it becomes a rotation position deviated from the position (for example, a rotation position different from the arrangement shown in FIG. 35 (a) such as the rotation position shown in FIG. 35 (b)). Since this origin sensor is electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 221 monitors the output of the origin sensor to determine whether the rotation position of the rotation unit 500 is the origin position. Whether or not it can be easily determined. The rotation speed counter 223aa starts the rotation display effect, and 1 is added to the value every time the origin sensor is turned on by the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 (every time the rotation unit 500 goes around) (S2902 in FIG. 100). reference). The execution start of the rotation display effect is set according to the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa.

The rotation display effect flag 223ab is a flag indicating whether or not the rotation display effect is being executed. If the rotation display effect flag 223ab is on, it means that the rotation display effect is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the rotation display effect is out of the execution period. The rotation display effect flag 223ab is set to on when it is determined that the start timing of the rotation display effect has been reached (see S2803 in FIG. 99), and turned off when it is determined that the end timing of the rotation display effect has been reached. (See S2807 in FIG. 99).

The lighting setting flag 223ac is a flag indicating whether or not the setting of the light emission pattern specified in the operation scenario table 222f is started in the rotation display effect. If the lighting setting flag 223ac is on, it means that the setting of the light emission pattern has been started, and if it is off, it means that the light emission pattern has not been set. While the lighting setting flag 223ac is on, the operation pointer 223ae is updated according to the drive amount (rotation amount) of the drive motor 457, and the lighting setting corresponding to the updated value is read from the operation scenario table 222f. It is set to each LED 1 to 40.

The step counter 223ad is a counter that counts the number of drive steps of the drive motor 457. The drive of the drive motor 457 is controlled by a known motor driver. That is, by outputting a command for notifying the motor driver of the operating conditions such as the rotation speed from the voice lamp control device 113, the motor driver controls the drive motor 457 with the operation content corresponding to the command. Specifically, the motor driver changes the operating speed (rotational speed) of the drive motor 457 by changing the output frequency of the control signal that sets the operation of one step for the drive motor 457 according to the command. be able to. Further, each time the motor driver sets the operation of one step for the drive motor 457, the motor driver outputs an execution signal for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the operation of one step is set. The value of the step counter 223ad is updated according to the number of times the execution signal is received. From the value of the step counter 223ad, the progress of the rotation operation can be accurately grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In this first control example, the rotation unit 500 is rotated at a rotation speed of, for example, 0.1 second per lap. Further, the rotation unit 500 is configured to operate only 1/100 lap by one step operation of the drive motor 457. Therefore, in this control example, the drive motor 457 is controlled at a speed of one step per millisecond. Along with this, during the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500, an execution signal is output from the motor driver every 1 millisecond.

The operation pointer 223ae is a pointer indicating the progress of the setting based on the operation scenario table 222f. Every time the value of the operation pointer 223ae is updated, the light emission pattern corresponding to the updated pointer value is read from the operation scenario table 222f and set.

The power cutoff flag 223y is a flag used for determining whether or not there is a momentary power failure. The power cutoff flag 223y receives the power cutoff command from the main controller 110 and is set to on before the power cutoff process is executed (see S2218 in FIG. 93). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, when the power cutoff flag 223y is on (see 2008: Yes in FIG. 91) in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 91), it is constant after the power cutoff flag 223y is set to on. This is the case where the voice lamp control device 113 is started up before the lapse of time (100 milliseconds), that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not disappeared, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete due to the disappearance of only a part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information in the work area of RAM 223 is cleared (see S2009 in FIG. 91). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure, the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory 234a is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, the instructions constituting the control program can be read. It may take a long time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (command code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 110) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 110) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a is stored, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 77) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 112 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND type flash memory 234a facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or each second input is started. When a ball entering the ball opening (second entry port 640, right side second entry port 640r) is detected, the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 is displayed by a variable effect when the power is turned on. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to. This power-on image is an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 110).

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. However, until the transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. can.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in this control example, three types (rear surface A to C, special rear surface) A to C) are set for each of the rear image for normal use and the rear image for time production. Of these six types of rear images, the rear image corresponding to the default rear surface A is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on. On the other hand, the other rear image is transferred to the normal video RAM 236 when the change condition for each rear type is satisfied.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine types of main symbols (see FIG. 59 (b)) with numbers from "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. To. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or each second ball entry port (second ball entry port 640, right side second ball entry port 640r), the first symbol display device 37 fluctuates. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the effect is started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the sub-symbols without numbers are also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. Will be. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a sub-symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "youth" and "female" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. Flag 233j, drawing target buffer flag 233k, new hold ball number flag 233m, hold symbol number counter 233n, new continuous notice command flag 233o, continuous notice information storage area 233p, error occurrence flag 233q, error determination flag 233r, rear image change flag It has at least 233w and a rear image discrimination flag 233x.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will be from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the sub-symbols without the numbers "1" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a young man and characters used for various effects such as images and characters of adolescents, is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the back A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "morning stage", "evening stage", or "night stage"), or the back A to Information that specifies whether to display a back image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image (special back image A to C, etc.) different from the back images A to C is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed. ..

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this control example, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type will be described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 75). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 77) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 76). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist corresponding to the address. Null data is specified (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 76).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 76, in the example of FIG. 76). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 77) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 76, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display an image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is mainly executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. It is set to on during processing (see FIG. 110) (see S6005 in FIG. 110). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process of the transfer setting process. , Off (see S7805 in FIG. 121 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 112 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 112 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 112 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 112 (b) see S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 113 to 117) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 118 to 120) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7701 in FIG. 121 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 121 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 122) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 77), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 77) described later, which describes drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Null data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 77) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 112 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7404 in FIG. 118) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 77) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 77, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (design 1, symbol). 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, Number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., Error symbol ), Which describes the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) are set to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 performs the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 prepares an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 112 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7406 in FIG. 118). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 110) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 122) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7913 in FIG. 122). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7914 in FIG. 122). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S8002 in FIG. 123).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S6306 in FIG. 112 (b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The new reserved ball number flag 233m is a flag for determining whether or not to change the number of reserved symbols displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b of the third symbol display device 81. If this new reserved ball number flag 233m is on, it means that the display number of reserved balls is changed based on the display reserved ball number command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and if it is off, it is not changed (it is not changed). It means that the display hold ball count command has not been received). The new reserved ball number flag 233m is set to on when the display reserved ball number command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 116 (a)). Further, this new reserved ball number flag 233m is referred to in various image setting processes (see S7501 in FIG. 119), and is set to off when the process of changing the display number of reserved symbols is executed (FIG. 119). See S7503 of 119). As a result, the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the display reserved ball number command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The reserved symbol number counter 233n is a counter that counts the number of reserved symbols to be displayed. The number of reserved symbols corresponding to the counter value of the reserved symbol number counter 233n is displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b. The value of the reserved symbol number counter 233n is updated to the reserved ball number indicated by the command each time the display reserved ball number command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 (see S7003 in FIG. 116).

The new continuous notice command flag 233o is a flag for determining whether or not to update the display setting of the continuous notice effect (8 hold effect). If this new continuous notice command flag 233o is on, it means that the display setting of the continuous notice effect is updated based on the display continuous notice command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and if it is off, it is not updated. Means that. The new continuous warning command flag 233o is set to on when a continuous display warning command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7101 in FIG. 116 (b)). Further, this new continuous advance notice command flag 233o is referred to in various image setting processes (see S7504 in FIG. 119), and is set to off when the process of changing the display number of reserved symbols is executed (FIG. 119). See S7506 of 119). As a result, it is possible to update the display mode corresponding to the continuous display advance notice command received from the voice lamp control device 113. Specifically, when the continuous notice command for display is a command indicating the start of the continuous notice effect, a notice image (see FIG. 60 (a)) corresponding to the start of the continuous notice effect is set (developed). Will be done. If the continuous notice command for display indicates split display (see FIG. 63), the split display data of the distribution notified by the command is set (expanded).

The error occurrence flag 233q is a flag for determining whether or not an error has occurred. If this error occurrence flag 233q is on, it means that a warning image is set (expanded), and if it is off, it means that it is not set. The error occurrence flag 233q is set to ON when an error command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7301 in FIG. 117 (b)). Further, this error occurrence flag 233q is referred to in various image setting processes (see S7507 in FIG. 119), and is set to off when the process of developing a warning image corresponding to the error type is executed (see S7507 in FIG. 119). See S7509 in FIG. 119). As a result, the warning image corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The error determination flag 233r is a flag indicating the type of the error when an error occurs. A corresponding warning image is displayed based on the type of error indicated by the error determination flag 233r. The error determination flag 233r is updated every time an error command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, based on the error type indicated by the command (see S7302 in FIG. 117).

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the rear image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the rear image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7201 in FIG. 117 (a)). Further, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7909 in FIG. 122), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7910 in FIG. 122). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to on for the rear image discrimination flag 233x (FIG. 117 (a). ) S7202). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 78 to 90. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When it reaches 399, 99, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first entry opening 64 or each second entry opening (second entry opening 640 or right side second entry opening 640r) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 to 84.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through-gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. After the through-gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 78), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being a big hit (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d (number of reserved balls in the special symbol N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number of reserved balls in the special symbol). N2) is acquired (S203). Then, of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the variation execution determination process for determining the type of the special symbol for which the variation display is to be started is executed (S204). The details of this variation execution determination process (S204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 80.

After finishing the processing of S204, it is next determined whether or not to execute the variation display of the special symbol 1 based on the state of the variation execution flag 203j set in the variation execution determination process (S204) (S205). .. In the process of S205, when it is determined in the special figure 1 that the variation execution flag 203j is in the state indicating the variation execution (that is, the high-order bit is on) (S205: Yes), the variation display of the special symbol 1 is started. Therefore, the process proceeds to S206.

In the process of S206, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S206), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set. (S207). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 89) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S208). In the process of S208, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting the variation display (S209), and ends this process. The special symbol 1 fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S205, when it is determined that the variation execution flag 203j is not in the state corresponding to the variation start timing of the special symbol 1 (that is, the high-order bit is off) (S205: No), then the variation execution flag. It is determined whether or not 203j is in a state indicating the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol 2 (that is, the lower bits are on) (S210). In the process of S210, when it is determined that the variation execution flag 203j is in the state indicating the variation start timing of the special symbol 2 (least significant bit is on) (S210: Yes), in order to start the variation display of the special symbol 2. , S211.

In the processing of S211 to S213, the same processing as the above-mentioned processing for the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 (processing of S206 to S208) is performed for the reserved ball of the special symbol 2. Specifically, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S212). The reserved ball count command set here updates the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223c of the RAM 223. After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S213). After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes the special symbol 2 variation start process for starting the variation display (S214), and ends this process. The details of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 82.

On the other hand, in the process of S210, if it is determined that the state of the variation execution flag 203j is not the state indicating the variation start timing of the special symbol 2 (that is, the lower bit is on) (S210: No), the present process is terminated as it is. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), has the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 elapsed? Whether or not it is determined (S215). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S215: No) has not elapsed, the display content of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 or FIG. 82. When the special symbol 1 variation start process or the special symbol 2 variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it corresponds to the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot A, the jackpot B, or the jackpot C.

In this control example, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached, the blue LED is turned on. Turn on the green LED. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S217 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol 1 variation start process or the special symbol lottery performed by the special symbol 2 variation start process is performed. It is determined whether the result (the result of the lottery this time) is a big hit of the special symbol (S218). If the result of this lottery is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S219). When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the process of S219, when the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 89), it branches to S1201: Yes and the opening command. Is set. As a result, the jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S219 is completed, the probability change flag 203h is set to off, and the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203g is set to 0 (S220). The process of S220 is a process for making the state during the jackpot the same as the initial state. Next, the jackpot middle flag 203k is set to ON (S221), and the process proceeds to S224.

On the other hand, in the processing of S218, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S218: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S222), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203g. If is 1 or more (S222: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S223), and the process proceeds to S224. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0 (S222: No), the processing of S223 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S224.

In the processing of S224 executed after the processing of S221, S222, or S223, the LED lighting and the third symbol display device 81, which are the display modes of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the processing of S217, are displayed. A stop command is set to synchronize the fluctuation stop of (S224). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the variation execution determination process (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (S204). This variation execution determination process (S204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 79) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and is a process executed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. The effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the device 81 is set to the value of various counters stored in which of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b. It is a process for determining whether to execute based on.

In the variation execution determination process, first, 00B is set in the variation execution flag 203j to initialize (S301), and then the data in the variation order storage area 203i is acquired (S302). Then, the data in the variable order storage area 203i is shifted (S303). In the process of S303, the data stored in the first area to the eighth area of the variable order storage area 203i is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first area → the execution area, the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, the fifth area → the fourth area, the sixth area → the sixth. The data in each area is shifted such as 5 area, 7th area → 6th area, 8th area → 7th area, and so on. After shifting the data, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area of the variable order storage area 203i is the data indicating the special symbol 1 (S304).

When it is determined in the process of S304 that the data in the execution area of the variation order storage area 203i is the data indicating the special symbol 1 (S304: Yes), the variation execution flag 203j is the variation start timing of the special symbol 1. (S305), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S304, when it is determined that the data in the execution area of the variable order storage area 203i is not the data indicating the special symbol 1 (S304: No), the data in the execution area of the variable order storage area 203i is the special symbol 2. (S306). When it is determined in the process of S306 that the data in the execution area is the data indicating the special symbol 2 (S306: Yes), the state of the variation execution flag 203j is set to 01B indicating the variation start timing of the special symbol 2. (S307), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the data stored in the execution area of the variable order storage area 203i is not the data indicating the special symbol 2 (S306: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (S209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (S209). This special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 79) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and is a process of various counters stored in the execution area. Based on the value, a process for performing a big hit lottery (win / fail determination) of a special symbol and determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Is.

In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area is acquired (S401).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the probable change state (S402). Specifically, when the probability change flag 203h is on, it is determined that the probability change is in progress, and when the probability change flag 203h is off, it is determined that the probability change is not in progress (that is, it is a low probability state of the special symbol).

When it is determined in the processing of S402 that the probability is changing (S402: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S401 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability time are used. The lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is acquired (S403). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers "0 to 9" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits match. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After acquiring the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S405.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the probability change is not in progress (the probability change flag 203h is off) (S402: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol, so that the number acquired in the process of S401 is obtained. Based on the value of the random number counter C1 per unit and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S404). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. "7" is set as the random number value that becomes the big hit of the special symbol, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and "7" match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After acquiring the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S405.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired in the processing of S403 or S404 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S405), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S405: Yes). Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S406). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random number value stored in the jackpot type selection table 202b, and the jackpot of three types of special symbols (big hit A, Among the jackpot B and jackpot C), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 47", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16 round probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "48 to 87", it is determined. It is determined that the jackpot is B (normal jackpot for 16 rounds), and if it is in the range of "88 to 99", it is determined to be jackpot C (probability variation jackpot for 2 rounds) (see FIG. 66 (b)).

In the process of S406, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S406 is completed, next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S407), and the processing is transferred to S410. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S407, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d to determine the variation time of the symbol variation.

On the other hand, in the process of S405, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S405: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S408). In the process of S408, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-order symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the above, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a front-back off reach, a reach other than the front-back off, or a complete off.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach out of front and back. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. .. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S409). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S408, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To determine.

When the processing of S407 or the processing of S409 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S407 or the process of S409 is set (S410). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S406 or S408 is set (S411). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (see FIG. 89). Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S411 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (S214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (S214).

This special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b for the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 81), and the counter value shifted to the execution area is used. The only difference is that the jackpot lottery and the determination of the fluctuation pattern are performed, and the others are the same, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and the first ball entry port 64 or each second ball entry port (second ball entry port 640, or the right side first). 2 Whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the ball entrance 640r) is determined, and when there is a starting prize, the hold processing of the value indicated by the various random number counters and the value indicated by the held various random number counters are used. This is a process for executing the look-ahead of the lottery result in the special symbol.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S601). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending numbers N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S602). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S603).

Then, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S601: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is added by 1 (S604). Then, a special figure 1 holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S605).

The special figure 1 reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 as an external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 89) described later. Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the special figure 1 hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the special symbol 1 of the RAM 223. It is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b.

After setting the special figure 1 hold ball number command by the processing of S605, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S606), and the data corresponding to the first special symbol is set in the least significant bit of the variable order storage area 203i (S607). In the process of S607, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is used, if the value is 3, the third area is used, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is used as the first area. By discriminating the value set in the variation order storage area 203i by the variation execution determination process (S204) described above, the first ball slot 64, which is a lottery trigger for the special symbol 1, as in this control example, Even when there are two types of the special symbol 2 with each of the second entrances that trigger the lottery, the fluctuations can be started in the order in which the entrances are won.

When the processing of S607 is completed, the look-ahead processing (S620) is executed, and the process shifts to the processing of S609. On the other hand, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S603: No), the processes of S604 to S607 and S620 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S609.

In the process of S609, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (starting winning) in any of the second entrances (second entrance 640 or right side second entrance 640r) (S609). .. If it is determined that the ball has won a prize in each of the second entry openings (second entry opening 640 or right side second entry opening 640r) (S609: Yes), the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is used. The same process as when winning a prize in the first ball opening 64 is performed.

More specifically, if the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S610) and the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) ( S611: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is added by 1 (S612), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S613). Then, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (S614), and the first area of the variable order storage area 203i (S614). The data corresponding to the special symbol 2 is set in the least significant bit) (S615), the look-ahead process is executed (S620), and this process is terminated. The determination of the first area in S615 is performed in the same manner as in the process of S607.

Further, in the processing of S609, is there a prize in each second ball entry port (second ball entry port 640 or right side second ball entry port 640r) (S609: No), or each second ball entry port? Even if there is a prize in the mouth (second ball entrance 640 or right side second ball entrance 640r), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not less than 4 (S611: No). , End this process.

Next, the look-ahead process (S620) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S620). This look-ahead process (S620) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 83), is a process for determining the lottery result of each special symbol in advance and setting a winning information command based on the preliminary determination result. ..

In the look-ahead process (S604), first, the hit / fail determination result is determined based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in S606 of the start winning process described above or S614 (S621). It should be noted that the hit / fail judgment result determined here is determined in the case of a hit in the normal gaming state. Since the fluctuation time is variably set according to the number of holdings, the timing at which the fluctuation starts cannot be determined between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that it is not possible to accurately determine the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, the hit / fail determination result can be accurately determined only when the value of the first random number counter C1 that has the same jackpot determination value in both the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state is "7". Therefore, in the process of S621, it is determined whether or not it is determined as a hit during the normal gaming state.

Next, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination result in the process of S621 is a hit (S622). When it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is a hit (S622: Yes), the jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in S606 of the start winning process described above or S614. , The lottery result is 1 (S623). Then, the process proceeds to S625.

On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if it is determined that the winning / failing determination result is not a hit (that is, it is a mistake) (S622: No), the lottery result 1 is regarded as a mistake (S624), and the process proceeds to the process of S625. In the process of S625, the stop type is selected based on the stop type selection counter C3 and the lottery result 1 acquired in S606 of the start winning process described above or S614, and the lottery result 2 is obtained (S625).

Next, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is pre-read based on the variation type counter CS1 acquired in S606 or S614 of the start winning process described above and the lottery result 2 (S626). Then, a winning command is set based on the winning / failing (lottery result 1), the stop type (lottery result 2), and the pre-reading result of the fluctuation pattern (S627), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, the game ball wins in the first ball entry port 64 or each second ball entry port (second ball entry port 640 or right side second ball entry port 640r). When newly reserved and stored, the hit / fail determination result is determined (look-ahead) before the start of fluctuation based on the reserved and stored information (various counter values), and is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the display mode of the hold ball can be changed (for example, the color of the hold ball can be changed to a different color from the usual one) based on the hold-stored hit / fail determination result, or before the change starts. It is possible to display a notice symbol or the like and perform an effect of suggesting a winning / failing judgment result to the player.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and the variation display of the normal symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the electric motor attached to the second ball entry port 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S701). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is performed. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S701: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704 :. No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S705).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S708). Specifically, when the value of the time reduction counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability variation flag 203h is on, it is determined that the time reduction is in the normal symbol, and the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 0 and If the probability change flag 203h is off, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state.

In the process of S708, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the jackpot of the special symbol (S709). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In this control example, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry opening 640 is opened. This is to prevent the ball that is to be won in the specific winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible. Since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the second entry opening 640, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the second entry opening 640 during the big hit of the special symbol, the second entry opening 65a is provided. Many balls enter the ball entry port 640. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 becomes the upper limit (4) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state (big hit state).

In the processing of S709, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 66 (c)).

In the processing of S708, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 and the probability variation flag 203h is off) (S708: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S711. In the processing of S711, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S707 is low. Based on the second random number table for probability time (see FIG. 66 (c)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 20", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,21 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 66 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S710 or S711 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S712), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S712: Yes). The display mode at the time of hit is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S714), and if it is in the time saving state (S714: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the jackpot state (S715). As a result of the determination of S715, if it is determined that the special symbol is being hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In this control example, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second entrance 640 during the big hit of the special symbol, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

If it is determined in the processing of S715 that the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the ball entry port 640 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719. On the other hand, in the process of S714, if it is determined that the time reduction of the normal symbol is not in progress (S714: No), the process proceeds to the process of S717. In the processing of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set. It is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

In the process of S712, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S712: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol of the normal symbol. When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

In the process of S719, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S719), and if it is in the time saving state (S719: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds. (S720), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the normal symbol is in the normal state (S719: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this process is terminated. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability (when the time is shortened), the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability (normal state). Furthermore, since the opening period of the second entry port 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it is easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640. Will be.

In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S722). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If the fluctuation time has not elapsed in the process of S722 (S722: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S722, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "○" symbol as the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (lighting display) on the second symbol display device 83. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is out of order and the display mode is set by the process of S718, the "x" symbol as the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S723, and then the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 89) is executed, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S713 or the process of S718.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? Is determined (S724). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (S725), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S725, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 89) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and if the ball has passed, the second hit. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the sphere at the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S803).

If the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S801: No), or if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S803). : No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f The value (M) is added by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is first set in the empty hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S805), and this process is terminated. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S901) as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this control example) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1002). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process shifts to S1010. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if it is not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1010 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1010 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1114 of the main process (see FIG. 89), the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1010, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1010). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1011, S1012) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S1011, S1012) is executed. Further, the initialization process (S1011, S1012) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality in the backup is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S1011, S1012), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1011), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1012). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1013.

On the other hand, in the process of S1004, the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is If it is normal (S1007: Yes), the power cutoff occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1013. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1013, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1014), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 78), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence / absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 78) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 79) and the start winning process (see FIG. 83) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the look-ahead process (see FIG. 84) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 90) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 85), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by S407 and S409 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 81), S507 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 82), or S509. , The fluctuation display according to the fluctuation pattern is started in the first symbol display device 37. In this control example, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, the first symbol display update process corresponds to the variation pattern set by S407 and S409 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 81), S507 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 82), or S509. When the fluctuation time to be performed ends, the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 81) S406, S408, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (FIG. The stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by S506 or S508 of (see 82).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or the process of S721 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 85), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S723 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 85), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S713 or the process of S718 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 85) after ending the variable display (see FIG. 85). Lit display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1109). ), If the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process is transferred to S1101, and each process after S1101 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1109: No), the remainder until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. Within the time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1102 (S1111).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1108, if the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 87 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1112 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1113). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1114), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1108 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1101 to S1107, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack is used in the initial setting process (S1001). By setting the pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1101. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 89), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large open mouth) 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the jackpot of the special symbol (S1201). Specifically, if the processing of S219 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 79) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot. In the process of S1201, when it is determined that the start timing of the big hit is (S1201: Yes), the opening command is set (S1215), and the present process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the jackpot (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S1202). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1202, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1202: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the big hit (S1202: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1203). In the process of S1203, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1203: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1204), and the number of rounds indicating the number of newly started rounds is shown. Set the command (S1205). After setting the round number command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1203, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1203: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied (S1206). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls are played. When (for example, 10 pieces) or more are won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1206, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1206: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1207). End the process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1206: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1208). Specifically, when the special gaming state (16 rounds or all 2 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than in the normal time is completed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect.

If it is determined in the process of S1208 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1208: Yes), the ending command is set (S1209), and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1208, if it is not the end timing of the ending (S1208: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1210). If it is determined in the process of S1210 that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S1210: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1210, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1210: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is the jackpot B (S1211), and if it is the jackpot B (S1211). S1211: Yes), in order to shift to the time saving state of the normal symbol after the end of the jackpot B, 100 is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 203g (S1212), and the process proceeds to S1214.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1211, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not the jackpot B (that is, the jackpot A or C), in order to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot A or C, The probability change flag 203h is set to ON (S1213), and the process proceeds to S1214.

In the process of S1214, the jackpot medium flag 203k is set to off (S1214), and this process is terminated. By this jackpot control process (see FIG. 90), various settings related to jackpot can be made.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 to 109, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 91, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S2219 (see FIG. 93) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 93, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S2216 in FIG. 93), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S2219. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S2219 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S2219 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S2219 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2002 that the power off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power of S2219 is turned off. During the execution of the process, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2219 is executed (see S2218 in FIG. 93). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2219 is executed, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S2219 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (S2009) in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the process is shifted to S2010. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S2008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of S2008 via the processing of S2004 to S2006 is started. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process is shifted to S2010.

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S2009 is that when the processing of S2008 is reached via the processing of S2004 to S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S2004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

In the process of S2010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). Next, interrupt permission is set (S2011), and a time setting process for setting reference timekeeping information (reference time) for determining the execution period (specific time zone) of the time effect is executed (S2012). , Move to the main process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92, a time setting process (S2012) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. This time setting process (S2012) is a process for setting a reference time for determining whether or not a specific time zone (3 minutes every 1 hour after the power is turned on) has been reached. It is determined whether or not to execute the time effect (set the special back surface type) based on the reference time set in the time setting process (S2012).

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this time setting process (S2012). In this time setting process (S2012), first, the time information measured by the RTC292 is acquired (S2101), and it is determined whether or not the acquired time information is within the deadline data (S2102).

When it is determined that the time information acquired in the process of S2101 is within the deadline data (S2102: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON (S2103). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, the deadline is set to 3 months.

When the processing of S2103 is completed, the time information acquired in the processing of S2101 is then set in the input time storage area 223h (S2104), and the process proceeds to the processing of S2105. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2102 that the acquired time information is not within the deadline data (S2102: No), the processes of S2103 and S2104 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2105. That is, if it is outside the deadline data, the time information is not set in the input time storage area 223h, so that the time effect is not executed regardless of the time zone. As a result, the rarity of the time production can be increased, so that the player can be made to think that he / she wants to play the game with the pachinko machine 10 by the deadline. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 within the deadline (within 3 months).

In the process of S2105, 1 indicating the back surface A is set for the mode counter 223i (S2105), and this process is terminated. In this way, the reference time (timekeeping information) for determining the type of the effect period is stored in the input time storage area 223h of the RAM 223 by the start-up process. It is possible to determine whether or not it is the execution period of the time effect.

Further, if the timing for turning on the power (that is, the start-up process is performed) is matched in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall, the timing at which the time information is stored in the turn-on time storage area 223h of each pachinko machine 10. Can also be matched. If the timing for storing the time information is matched in the input time storage area 223h, the timing for determining the specific time zone in each pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted, so that the execution period of the time effect can be adjusted. .. As a result, the persons involved in the hall can arrange the production period of each pachinko machine 10 by simply turning on the power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall all at once. Therefore, since it is possible to display a unified effect on the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous process of S2201 was executed (S2201), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2201: No), the process proceeds to S2212 without performing the processes of S2202 to S2211. In the process of S2201, whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly related to display (directing) in S2202 to S2211, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2212, the variation display setting process of S2213, the special back surface setting process of S2214, and the look-ahead effect selection process of S2215 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2212 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and by executing the processing of S2213 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay. Further, by executing the processing of S2214 in a short cycle, it is possible to switch to the special back type without delay, and by executing the processing of S2215 in a short cycle, a continuous advance notice effect (8 hold effects) ) Can be set without delay.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S2201 (S2201: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2203 to S2215 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2202). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S2208 described later (S2203), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2204). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S2205 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2205, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S2206). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2207). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. The details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2207) will be described later with reference to FIG. 94.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S2208), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S2209). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2209, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S2210). In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2208 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S2209 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S2210 is completed, the rotation display operation setting process is executed (S2211). This rotation display operation setting process is a process for setting the effect operation of the rotation unit 500. The details of this rotation display operation setting process (S2211) will be described later with reference to FIG. 99.

In the process of S2212, a command determination process that performs a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed (S2212). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 101. Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S2213). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 105.

When the process of S2213 is completed, the special back surface setting process is executed (S2214). This special back setting process is a process for determining whether or not to change to a back image for time production based on the current time measured by the RTC292. The details of this special back surface setting process (S2214) will be described later with reference to FIG. 108.

Next, the look-ahead effect selection process is executed (S2215). This look-ahead effect selection process is a process for determining the execution of the continuous advance notice effect (8 hold effect). The details of this look-ahead effect selection process (S2215) will be described later with reference to FIG. 109.

When the processing of S2215 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2216). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If it is determined in the process of S2216 that the power cutoff occurrence information is stored (S2216: Yes), both the power cutoff flag and the power cutoff processing flag are turned on (S2218), and the power cutoff process is executed. (S2219). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S2220), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2216 (S2216: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2217), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2217: No), the process returns to the process of S2201 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2217: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2207) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2207). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2207) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the pressing of the frame button 22 is monitored. Then, it is a process of setting an effect corresponding to the case where the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2207), first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S2301). When it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the processing of S2301 (S2301: Yes), the pressing control processing for performing the control corresponding to the pressing is executed (S2302). The details of this pressing control process (S2302) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. When the press control process is completed, the process proceeds to S2304.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected in the processing of S2301 (S2301: No), the pressing effect setting process for updating the mode of the pressing effect (normal pressing effect, special pressing effect). Is executed (S2303). The details of this pressing effect setting process (S2303) will be described later with reference to FIG. 97. When the pressing effect setting process is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S2304.

When the process of S2302 or S2303 is completed, the output of the touch sensor 290 is monitored, the touch sensor control process for performing the corresponding control is executed (S2304), and this process is terminated. The details of this touch sensor control process (S2304) will be described later with reference to FIG. 98.

Here, with reference to FIG. 95, the press-time control process (S2302) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the pressing control process (S2302). As described above, this press control process (S2302) is a process for performing the corresponding control when the press of the frame button 22 is detected.

In the press control process (S2302), first, it is determined whether or not the rear change prohibition flag 223u is on (S2401). In the process of S2401, when it is determined that the back surface change prohibition flag 223u is off (that is, not on) (S2401: No), the back surface type can be changed each time the player presses the frame button 22. It means that there is. Therefore, in this case, in order to change the back surface type, first, the value of the mode counter 223i is updated (S2402). Specifically, as described above, the value is updated by 1 within the range of 1 to 3. For example, if the value before update is 1, the value is updated to 2, and if the value before update is 2, the value is updated to 3. If the value before the update is 3, the value is updated to 1.

When the processing of S2402 is completed, next, the back type corresponding to the updated mode counter 223i value is specified from the back switching table 222c (see FIG. 70B) (S2403), and the specified back type is displayed and controlled. A display rear image change command for notifying the device 114 is set (S2404), and this process ends. Based on this display rear image change command, the display control device 114 executes the change of the rear image. As a result, the rear image can be changed each time the operation of the player's frame button 22 is detected, so that the rear image can be changed to the player's favorite timing. Therefore, it is possible to provide a display mode that suits the taste of each player.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the back change prohibition flag 223u is on (S2401: Yes), whether or not the value of the press period timer 223j is larger than 0 (that is, a normal press effect or a special press). If it is determined (S2405) whether or not the effect is being executed and it is determined that the value of the press period timer 223j is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S2405: No), this process is terminated. do.

In the process of S2405, when it is determined that the value of the press period timer 223j is 1 or more (greater than 0) (S2405: Yes), it means that either the normal press effect or the special press effect is being executed. .. Therefore, in this case, the pressing effect in progress flag 223v is read out to specify the type of the pressing period (pressing effect) (S2406). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the pressing period of the special pressing effect (pressing period at the time of continuous notice) (S2407), and if it is determined that it is the pressing period of the special pressing effect (S2407: Yes), the special pressing effect is determined. A special notification sound setting process for determining whether or not to set a special notification sound for the middle press is executed (S2408), and this process ends. The details of this special notification sound setting process (S2408) will be described later with reference to FIG. 96.

On the other hand, in the process of S2407, when it is determined that it is not the pressing period of the special pressing effect (not the pressing period at the time of continuous advance notice) (S2407: No), it means that it is the pressing period of the normal pressing effect. The process for determining the notice type of the production is executed. Specifically, the advance notice type corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f is selected from the press advance notice selection table 222b (see FIG. 70A) (S2409). Next, a display notice command for notifying the display control device 114 of the selected notice type is set (S2410), and this process is terminated.

Next, the special notification sound setting process (S2408) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the special notification sound setting process (S2408). This special notification sound setting process (S2408) is executed in the press-time control process (see FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, is performed with respect to the press of the frame button 22. This is a process for determining whether or not to set a special notification sound.

In the special notification sound setting process (S2408), first, it is determined whether or not the special notification flag 223w is on (S2501), and if the special notification flag 223w is off (S2501: No), a jackpot is supported. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation display is being performed (S2502). In the process of S2502, when it is determined that the fluctuation corresponding to the jackpot is in progress (S2502: Yes), then a special notification execution lottery is performed, and it is determined whether or not to set the special notification sound (S2503). Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation, for example, it is determined that the winner is won by the execution lottery of the special notification at a rate of 20%. In the process of S2503, when it is determined that the special notification execution lottery has been responded to (S2503: Yes), the special notification in progress flag 223w is set to ON, and the process proceeds to the process of S2506 for setting the special notification sound.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2501 that the special notification in progress flag 223w is on (S2501: Yes), the special notification execution lottery has already been won in the special notification sound setting processing (see FIG. 96) before the previous time. It means that the special notification sound can be set according to the pressing of the frame button 22 until the special pressing period ends. Therefore, the processing of S2502 to S2504 is skipped and the special notification sound is set. Move to the processing of S2506 for the purpose. In the process of S2506, a voice special notification sound command for instructing the voice output device 226 to output the special notification sound is set (S2506). The special notification sound command set here is output to the voice output device 226 in the command output process of the main process (see S2202 in FIG. 93). The voice output device 226 that has received the special notification sound command outputs the special notification sound. This makes it possible for the player to detect that the jackpot will be a jackpot by the special notification sound before the result of the jackpot fluctuation during execution is notified. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

When the processing of S2506 is completed, the value of the pressing period timer 223j is next subtracted by 1 (S2507), and it is determined whether or not the value of the pressed period timer 223j after the subtraction is 0 (S2508). If it is determined in the processing of S2508 that the value of the pressing period timer 223j after subtraction is 0 (S2508: Yes), the process proceeds to the processing of S2509.

On the other hand, in the process of S2502, when it is determined that the variable display corresponding to the jackpot is not being executed (S2502: No), or in the process of S2503, it is determined that the special notification execution lottery is not won (S2502: No). S2503: No) sets a failure effect in which the special notification sound is not output (S2505), and proceeds to the process of S2509. When this failure effect is set, for example, the image of the button displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 61) disappears, and the character "sorry" is displayed on the screen. As a result, the player can be made to recognize whether the special notification sound is not won in the execution lottery or the variation display this time is the variation display corresponding to the deviation. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the variable display in the expectation that the jackpot will be notified as a result of the variable display during execution.

In the process of S2509, the end of the special pressing effect is set (S2509). After that, the back change prohibition flag 223u, the pressing effect flag 223v, and the special neglected flag 223w are set to off (S2510), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2508, if it is determined that the value of the press period timer 223j after subtraction is 1 or more (not 0) (S2508: No), the processes of S2509 and S2510 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

By this special notification sound setting process (see FIG. 96), once the special notification sound execution lottery is won, the output of the special notification sound can be repeatedly set as long as the pressing period remains. Therefore, since the player can listen to the special notification sound as many times as he / she wants by continuing to press the frame button 22, the player can be more satisfied. Further, since the chance of hearing the special notification sound increases as the frame button 22 is pressed earlier, the frame button 22 can be positively operated (pressed) when the special pressing effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the special pressing effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the pressing effect setting process (S2303) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the pressing effect setting process (S2303). This pressing effect setting process (S2303) is executed when the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see FIG. 94), and as described above, the pressing effect (normal pressing effect, This is a process for updating the mode of the special pressing effect).

In this pressing effect setting process (S2303), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the pressing effect (normal pressing effect, special pressing effect) (S2601). As for the start timing of the pressing effect, the effect start time is set in advance for each variation display mode. Specifically, for example, in the normal pressing effect, the start timing is defined as 1 second after the reach occurs. In this control example, in the variation display of the mode in which the reach occurs, such as the hit super reach and the missed super reach, the occurrence of the reach is 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, in the variation display in the mode in which the normal pressing effect is executed, the start timing of the normal pressing effect is determined at the timing when the elapsed time from the start of the variation is 11 seconds (10 seconds + 1 second).

If it is determined in the process of S2601 that it is the start timing of the pressing effect (S2601: Yes), the upper limit value corresponding to the current pressing effect is set in the value of the pressing period timer 223j (S2602). Specifically, in the case of a normal pressing effect, a timer value corresponding to 1 second is set, and in the case of a special pressing effect, a timer value of 3 seconds is set. Here, the reason why the special pressing effect is set to have a longer effect period is to increase the chances for the player to hear the special notification sound. As described above, in the first control example, when the special notification sound execution lottery is won in the special pressing effect, the special notification sound is sounded every time the frame button 22 is pressed until the production period of the special pressing effect ends. Is configured to be configurable. For this reason, if the production period is short, the production period expires before the player listens to the special notification sound a sufficient number of times (operates the frame button 22), which makes the player feel dissatisfied. There is a risk that it will end up. On the other hand, in the first control example, the effect period of the special pressing effect is set to be longer (three times) than the effect period of the normal pressing effect. With this configuration, when the execution of the special notification sound is determined, the player can press the frame button 22 a sufficient number of times during the effect period of the special pressing effect. Therefore, the player can be satisfied.

In the process of S2602, after setting the upper limit value in the pressing period timer 223j, the bit corresponding to the current pressing effect is set to on (S2603) among the pressing effect in-progress flags 223v, and the back change prohibition flag 223u is turned on. (S2604), and this process ends. As described above, in the pressing effect in progress flag 223v, the upper bit corresponds to the normal pressing effect and the lower bit corresponds to the special pressing effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2601 that it is not the start timing of the pressing effect (S2601: No), whether or not the value of the pressing period timer 223j is larger than 0 (whether or not the effect period of the pressing effect remains). Is determined (S2605). In the process of S2605, when it is determined that the value of the pressing period timer 223j is 1 or more (the effect period of the pressing effect remains) (S2605: Yes), the value of the pressing period timer 223j is subtracted by 1 (S2606). It is determined whether or not the value of the pressed period timer 223j after the subtraction is 0 (S2607).

In the process of S2607, when it is determined that the value of the pressing period timer 223j after subtraction is 0 (S2607: Yes), the end of the pressing effect is set (S2608). After that, all the bits of the back change prohibition flag 223u and the pressing effect flag 223v are set to off (S2609), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2605, when it is determined that the value of the pressing period timer 223j is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S2605: No), and in the processing of S2607, the value of the pressing period timer 223j after subtraction. If it is determined that is 1 or more (not 0) (S2607: No), this process is terminated as it is.

By this pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 97), the value of the pressing period timer 223j can be updated, and the start and end of the pressing effect can be preferably set.

Next, the touch sensor control process (S2304) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the touch sensor control process (S2304). This touch sensor control process (S2304) is executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 94), and as described above, the output of the touch sensor 290 is monitored and a touch operation is performed. This is the process for executing the corresponding control.

In the touch sensor control process (S2304), first, it is determined whether or not the touch effect is being executed (S2701). Here, the touch effect is one aspect of the hobby effect executed during the variable display, and is an effect of urging the player to touch the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is determined in the process of S2701 that the touch effect is not being executed (S2701: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2701 that the touch effect is being executed (S2701: Yes), the effective time of the touch effect stored in the touch effect effective time storage area 223o is subtracted (S2702). It is determined whether or not the output of the touch sensor 290 is turned on (S2703).

If it is determined in the process of S2703 that the output of the touch sensor 290 is on (S2703: Yes), a display touch command indicating that the output of the touch sensor 290 is turned on is set (S2704). Next, 1 is added to the value of the level storage area 223k (S2705), and a display command indicating the degree of expectation corresponding to the added value is set (S2706). If the value stored in the level storage area 223k has reached the upper limit set corresponding to the touch effect being executed, the value of the level storage area 223k may be updated or the command may be set. Not done. When the processing of S2706 is completed, the value of the interval counter 223p is reset (S2707), and the process proceeds to the processing of S2712.

On the other hand, in the process of S2703, when it is determined that the output of the touch sensor 290 is off (S2703: No), 1 is added to the value of the interval counter 223p (S2708), and the value of the interval counter 223p is the upper limit value. It is determined whether or not there is (S2709). In the process of S2709, when it is determined that the value of the interval counter 223p is the upper limit value (S2709: Yes), the value stored in the level storage area 223k is subtracted by 1 (S2710). Then, a display command indicating the degree of expectation corresponding to the value after subtraction is set (S2711), and the process proceeds to S2712.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2709 that the value of the interval counter 223p is not the upper limit value (S2709: No), the processes of S2710 and S2711 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2712.

In the process of S2712, it is determined whether or not the effective time of the touch effect is updated to 0 by the process of S2702 (S2712). In the process of S2712, when it is determined that the effective time of the touch effect is 0 (S2712: Yes), the notification effect in the mode corresponding to the value of the level storage area 223k is set (S2713), and the end of the touch effect is terminated. After setting (S2714), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2712 that the effective time of the touch effect is not 0 (S2712: No), the processes of S2713 and S2714 are skipped, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the rotation display operation setting process (S2211) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the rotation display operation setting process (S2211). This rotation display operation setting process (S2211) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93), and is a process for setting the effect operation of the rotation unit 500 as described above.

In the rotation display operation setting process (S2211), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the rotation display effect (S2801). Here, the rotation display effect may be executed in a part of the fluctuation display corresponding to the jackpot, for example, the execution is started 5 seconds before the fluctuation stop. If it is determined in the process of S2801 that it is the start timing of the rotation display effect (5 seconds before the change stop of the variation display of the mode accompanied by the rotation display effect) (S2801: Yes), the rotation of the rotation display device is rotated. Set the start (S2802). Here, the rotation speed of one rotation is set for 0.1 second with respect to the driver IC that controls the drive motor 457. Then, by setting the rotation display effect flag 223ab to ON, it indicates that the rotation display effect is being executed (S2803), and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2801, if it is not the start timing of the rotation display effect (S2801: No), it is determined whether or not the rotation display effect flag 223ab is on (S2804). If it is determined that the rotation display effect flag 223ab is off (that is, not on) (S2804: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2804 that the rotation display effect flag 223ab is on (S2804: Yes), it means that the rotation display effect is being executed. It is determined whether or not it is (S2805). In the process of S2805, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the rotation display effect (S2805: Yes), the end of the rotation display effect is set (S2806), the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa, the rotation display effect flag 223ab, and All the lighting set flags 223ac are reset (S2807), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2805, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the rotation display effect (S2805: No), then it is determined whether or not the lighting setting flag 223ac is on (S2808). In the process of S2808, when it is determined that the lighting setting flag 223ac is on (S2808: Yes), lighting for updating the lighting pattern of each LED 1 to 40 according to the progress of the rotation operation (rotation position). The setting update process is executed (S2809), and this process is terminated. The details of this lighting setting update process (S2809) will be described later with reference to FIG. 100.

In the process of S2808, when it is determined that the lighting setting flag 223ac is off (that is, not on) (S2808: No), the first lighting setting (light emission pattern) after starting the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 is started. ) Is not set, so next, it is determined whether or not the output of the origin sensor provided in the rotation unit 500 is on (S2810). In this control example, the setting of the light emission pattern is started after the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 is sufficiently stabilized. Specifically, the light emission pattern is set to start after the rotation unit 500 makes 10 rounds.

In the process of S2810, when it is determined that the output of the origin sensor is off (that is, not on) (S2810: No), the rotation position of the rotation unit 500 is a halfway position, and the setting of the light emission pattern is started. Since it cannot be done, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2810, when it is determined that the output of the origin sensor is on (S2810: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa (S2811), and the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa after the addition is changed. It is determined whether or not it is 10. (S2812). That is, it is determined whether or not the rotating unit 500 has made 10 rounds after the rotation operation of the rotating unit 500 is started. If it is determined in the processing of S2812 that the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa after addition is not 10 (S2812: No), the rotation speed may not be stable and the emission pattern setting should not be started. , Ends this process as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2812, when it is determined that the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa after addition is 10 (S2812: Yes), a sufficient number of rotations (10 laps) after the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 is started. Since it can be considered that the rotation speed is stable, the setting of the lighting pattern based on the operation scenario table 222f is started. Specifically, first, the operation pointer 223ae is reset (S2813). Then, the light emission pattern of the rotation unit 500 corresponding to the value (00H) of the operation pointer 223ae after reset is read from the operation scenario table 222f (see FIG. 71 (c)) and set in each of the LEDs 1 to 40 (S2814). , End this process.

By this rotation display operation setting process (see FIG. 99), the rotation display effect can be appropriately executed.

Next, the lighting setting update process (S2809) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the lighting setting update process (S2809). This lighting setting update process (S2809) is executed in the rotation display operation setting process (see FIG. 99), and as described above, each of the LEDs 1 to 1 according to the progress status (rotation position) of the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500. This is a process for updating the lighting pattern of 40.

In this lighting setting update process (S2809), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the origin sensor provided in the rotation unit 500 is ON (S2901). When it is determined in the processing of S2901 that the output of the origin sensor is ON (S2901: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa (S2902), and the value of the step counter 223ad and the value of the operation pointer 223ae are used. Is reset (S2903). Next, the light emission pattern corresponding to the value (00H) of the operation pointer 223ae after reset is read from the operation scenario table 222f (see FIG. 71 (c)) and set for each of the LEDs 1 to 40 (S2904), and the present process is completed. do. By resetting the operation pointer 223ae every time the origin sensor of the rotation unit 500 is turned on and resetting the light emission pattern from the beginning of the operation scenario table 222f, each rotation unit 500 is rotated regardless of the number of rotations. It is possible to prevent the timing of light emission and extinguishing of the LED from being deviated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2901 that the origin sensor is off (that is, not on) (S2901: No), the operation scenario table 222f (see FIG. 71 (c)) and the value of the step counter 223ad are used. Reading (S2905), it is determined whether or not the value of the step counter 223ad corresponds to the value of the operation pointer 223ae (S2906). If it is determined that the value of the step counter 223ad corresponds to the value of the operation pointer 223ae (S2906: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2906, when it is determined that the value of the step counter 223ad does not correspond to the value of the operation pointer 223ae (S2906: No), 1 is added to the value of the operation pointer 223ae (S2907), and after the addition. The light emission pattern corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223ae is read from the operation scenario table 222f (see FIG. 71 (c)) and set in each of the LEDs 1 to 40 (S2908), and the present process is terminated.

By executing this lighting setting update process (see FIG. 100), it is possible to appropriately control the lighting and extinguishing of each of the LEDs 1 to 40 according to the progress of the rotation operation. The afterimage of the character can be preferably perceived by the player.

Next, the command determination process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2212). This command determination process (S2212) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93), and is a process for executing control according to the type of the command received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control unit 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S3001). When it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S3001: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3002), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S3001: Yes). S3003), return to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 105) described later in order to determine a detailed display mode of the variation pattern. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, in the process of S3001, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S3001: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3004). Then, when the stop type command is received (S3004: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3005), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S3006), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 105) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3004, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S3004: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3007). Then, when it is determined that the hold ball number command is received (S3007: Yes), the hold ball number counter of the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) corresponding to the received hold ball number command is displayed. , Stores the value included in the received reserved ball count command (S3008), and ends this process. Specifically, when the reserved ball number command received this time is the reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 1, from the received reserved ball number command, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 is used. The value (the number of holdings N1 of the variation display in the special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, when the reserved ball number command received this time is the reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 2, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 (special) from the received reserved ball number command. The number of holdings N2) of the variation display in the symbol 2 is extracted, and this is stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113.

When any of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223c is changed in the process of S3008, the updated counter value is notified to the display control device 114. The hold ball count command for display is set. Since the actual number of reserved balls can be notified to the display control device 114 by this display reserved ball number command, an accurate number of reserved symbols can always be displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b of the third symbol display device 81. It can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3007, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S3007: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3009). Then, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S3009: Yes), the winning command receiving process is executed (S3010), and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 102, the details of the winning command receiving process (S3010) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this winning command reception process (S3010).

In the winning command receiving process, first, the winning information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) based on the winning command received from the main control device 110 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S3101). Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag 223q is currently set to on (8 hold effects are being executed) (S3102), and the continuous notice flag 223q is set to on (8 hold effects). (S3102: Yes), it is determined whether or not the split display flag 223s is on (S3103).

When it is determined in the process of S3103 that the split display flag 223s is off (that is, not on) (S3103: No), the value of the effect counter 223f and the continuous advance notice lottery table 222e (see FIG. 71B). Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect (8 hold effect) can be executed for the new winning information (S3104). When the execution of the continuous advance notice effect (8 hold effects) is determined by this determination, the hold symbol corresponding to the new winning information and the hold symbol targeted for the 8 hold effects are displayed separately (see FIG. 63). ), And the continuous notice production will be extended to the reserved symbols for the new winning information.

When the processing of S3104 is completed, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice for the new winning information (S3105). When it is determined that the continuous advance notice is not executed for the new winning information (S3105: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. The value obtained by subtracting 1 from the total value of the value) is overwritten on the remaining notice number counter 223r (S3106).

Next, the split display flag 223s is set to ON (S3107). Then, the divided display of the sub-display area Ds is set according to the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r (S3108), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in S3105, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice is executed for the new winning information (S3105: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are set. The total value is overwritten on the remaining notice number counter 223r (S3109), and this process is terminated. That is, in addition to the reserved symbols displayed at the start of the continuous advance notice effect (8 hold effect), the continuous advance notice effect is set to be extended for the reserved symbols corresponding to the new winning information. With such a configuration, it is possible to continue the continuous advance notice effect over a longer variable display, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation for a big hit for a longer time. In addition, even for a new prize, the prize information with low expectation is determined by determining the execution (extension) of the continuous notice effect under the same conditions as at the start of the continuous notice effect (8 hold effect). For example, it is possible to suppress the extension of the continuous advance notice effect for the stop type) that is completely off. Therefore, it is possible to give a higher expectation to the player who recognizes that the continuous advance notice effect (8 hold effect) has been set (extended) for the new winning information during the continuous advance notice effect. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S3102, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice flag 223q is off (that is, the continuous advance notice effect is not being executed) (S3102: No), and in the process of S3103, the split display flag 223s is turned on. If it is determined that (that is, the split display has already been set) (S3103: Yes), this process is terminated.

By executing this winning command receiving process (see FIG. 102), it is possible to set the split display when a new starting winning is detected during the execution of the eight hold effects. As a result, it is possible to clearly suggest to the player how long the eight-piece hold effect will continue when a new start prize is detected.

In this first control example, once the split display (see FIG. 63) is set, whether or not to set (extend) the continuous advance notice effect (8 hold effect) for the new winning information. The configuration was such that no judgment was made. That is, only when the entire sub-display area Ds is the back surface of the school of fish, it is determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous advance notice effect for the new winning information, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. Even after the display is divided into the back of the school of fish and the back of the bubbles, it may be determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous advance notice effect for the new winning information. That is, in the winning command reception process (see FIG. 102), if the process of S3103 is deleted and the continuous notice flag 223q is turned on in the process of S3102 (S3102: Yes), the process of S3104 is always executed. good. Then, when it is determined in the process of S3104 that the continuous advance notice effect is set (extended) for the new winning information, the entire sub-display area Ds is displayed on the back of the school of fish even if the divided display is set. It may be configured to return to the embodiment. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the continuous advance notice effect has been extended for the new winning information. In addition, when a new start prize is detected while the split display is set and it is determined that a continuous notice effect is set (extended) for the acquired new prize information, the split display is maintained. , The display area on the right side of the reserved symbol corresponding to the new winning information may be set on the back of the school of fish. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player more clearly recognize the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball with high expectation.

Further, in this control example, it is determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous advance notice effect (eight hold effect) for the new winning information during the continuous advance notice effect, and whether or not to newly start the continuous advance notice effect. The determination was made under the same conditions (probability), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a continuous notice lottery table 222e (see FIG. 71 (b)), a table to be referred to when a continuous notice effect is newly started, and a table to be referred to when a new start prize is detected during execution of the continuous notice effect. A table may be provided separately and the probabilities may be different. In this case, the winning probability may be set higher by determining whether or not to set the continuous advance notice effect for the new winning information during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect. With this configuration, once the continuous advance notice effect is started, it becomes easier to set the continuous advance notice effect for new winning information, so the continuous advance notice effect continues over a larger number of variable displays. It will be easier. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting a big hit for a longer period of time.

Returning to FIG. 101, the description will be continued. In the process of S3009, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S3009: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3011). Then, when the stop command is received (S3011: Yes), the stop command reception process for performing the control corresponding to the stop command is executed (S3012), and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the stop command reception process (S3012) will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing this stop command reception process (S3012). In the stop command reception process, first, the variable stop of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is set (S3201). Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous warning flag 223q is on (S3202). If it is determined in S3202 that the continuous notice flag 223q is off (S3202: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in S3202, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice flag 223q is on (S3202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining advance notice number counter 223r is 0 (S3203). If it is determined in S3203 that the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is 1 or more (not 0) (S3203: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3203 that the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is 0 (S3203: Yes), it is determined whether or not the stop display of the jackpot symbol is set in the third symbol display device 81 (S3204). .. If it is determined in S3204 that the stop display is not a jackpot symbol (S3204: No), a continuous notice command for display indicating the end of the continuous notice is set (S3205), and the process proceeds to S3206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3204 that the stop display of the jackpot symbol is set (S3204: Yes), the process of S3205 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3206. In the process of S3206, the continuous notice flag 223q and the split display flag 223s are set to off (S3206), and this process is terminated.

By executing this stop command reception process, it is possible to appropriately end the advance notice effect when the continuous advance notice effect (8 hold effect) ends with a miss.

Returning to FIG. 101, the description will be continued. In the process of S3011, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S3011: No), then it is determined whether or not the command related to the jackpot has been received from the main control device 110 (S3013). Then, when it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has been received (S3013: Yes), the jackpot-related command process is executed (S3014), and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the jackpot-related command processing (S3014) will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing this jackpot related command processing (S3014). In the jackpot-related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3301). Then, when it is determined that the opening command has been received (S3301: Yes), the display opening command for executing the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S3302), and this process is terminated. do. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3301, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S3301: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3301). Then, when the round number command is received (S3303: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S3304), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number (S3304). S3305), this process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3303, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S3303: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3306). Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S3306: Yes), the display ending command is set (S3307), and this process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3306 that the ending command has not been received (S3306: No), this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 101, the description will be continued. In the process of S3013, if it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received (S3013: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S3015), the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

By this process, it is possible to set a command for making various settings to the display control device 114 based on the command output from the main control device 110.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the variation display setting process (S2213) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S2213). This variation display setting process (S2213) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3401). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S3401: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S3405. do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S3401: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S3402), and then the variation pattern is processed in S3003 of the command determination process (see FIG. 101). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S3403).

Then, based on the extracted variation pattern, a variation pattern selection process for selecting a detailed aspect of the variation display is executed (S3404). The details of this fluctuation pattern selection process (S3404) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. After executing the variation pattern selection process, the process proceeds to the process of S3405.

In the process of S3405, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S3405). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S3405: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variation display setting. Finish the process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S3405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S3406), and then in the process of S3006 of the command determination process (see FIG. 101). The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3407).

Next, based on the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. (S3408), and this process ends. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the variation pattern selection process (S3404) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation pattern selection process (S3404). This variation pattern selection process (S3404) is a process for selecting a detailed variation display mode based on the rough variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command from the main control device 110.

In the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 106), first, the value of the sub-variation selection counter 223t is acquired (S3501). Next, the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a is read out (S3502), and the extracted fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the sub-variation selection counter 223t are selected from the read-out sub-variation pattern selection table 222a (S3503).

When the process of S3503 is completed, next, the rotation display execution determination process for determining whether or not to execute the rotation display effect is executed from the upper limit value of the rotation display effect (S3504). The details of this rotation display execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107. When the rotation display execution determination process is completed, the process proceeds to S3505.

In the process of S3505, a command for generating a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 based on the variation pattern type selected in the process of S3503. Set in the ring buffer for transmission (S3505). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S3506). In the process of S3506, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S3507.

In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is larger than 0 (S3507). When it is determined that the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is 1 or more (greater than 0) (S3507: Yes), the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is subtracted by 1 (S3508), and the process proceeds to S3509. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S3507: No), the processing of S3508 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3509.

In the process of S3509, it is determined whether or not the split display flag 223s is on (S3509). If it is determined that the split display flag 223s is on (S3509: Yes), a continuous display notice command for notifying the split display according to the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r after the update is set (S3510). End the process. As a result, the display mode of the sub-display area Ds in which the divided display (see FIG. 63) is set can be appropriately updated according to the number of reserved symbols. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3509 that the split display flag 223s is off (S3509: No), this process is terminated.

Next, the rotation display execution determination process (S3504) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the rotation display execution determination process (S3504). As described above, this rotation display execution determination process (S3504) is a process for determining whether or not to execute the rotation display effect from the upper limit value of the rotation display effect.

When the rotation display execution determination process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern selected in the process of S3503 of the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 106) is an aspect accompanied by the rotation display effect (S3601). In S3601, if the variation pattern selected in the process of S3503 does not include the rotation display effect (S3601: No), it is not necessary to determine the upper limit number of times, so the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in S3601, when the fluctuation pattern selected in the process of S3503 is accompanied by a rotation display effect (S3601: Yes), the current time is read from RTC292 (S3602), and the upper limit number of times corresponding to the read current time is set. It is read from the effect upper limit number table 222g (see FIG. 72) (S3603), and it is determined whether or not the value of the rotation display number counter 223x matches the read upper limit number (S3604). If it is determined in S3604 that the value of the rotation display count counter 223x does not match the upper limit (S3604: No), it means that the number of executions of the rotation display effect has not reached the upper limit. The execution of the rotation display effect is set as it is (S3605). Next, 1 is added to the value of the rotation display count counter 223x (S3606), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in S3604, when it is determined that the value of the rotation display number counter 223x matches the upper limit number (S3604: Yes), it means that the number of executions of the rotation display effect has already reached the upper limit number. As an alternative effect of the rotation display effect, the execution of the hit touch effect is set (S3607), and this process is terminated.

By this rotation display execution determination process (see FIG. 107), the number of times the rotation display effect in which the rotation unit 500 operates can be limited to a predetermined upper limit or less for each time zone. Here, since the substrate member 531 on which a plurality of LEDs 532 are mounted is arranged inside the rotating unit 500, when the effect using the rotating unit 500 is performed, the LEDs 532 and the IC / capacitor mounted on the substrate operate. It generates heat by doing so. Therefore, if the rotating unit 500 is operated frequently, the solder connecting the LED 532, the IC, the capacitor, and the like to the substrate may be melted due to the influence of heat generation, resulting in poor contact. Therefore, in the first control example, in order to suppress the operation frequency of the rotation unit 500, the upper limit of the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 according to the elapsed time (time zone) is defined for each time zone. When an effect mode involving the operation of the rotation unit 500 is selected while the upper limit is reached, the effect is replaced with an alternative effect in which the rotation unit 500 does not operate. As a result, the number of operations of the rotating unit 500 can be reduced, so that failures such as poor contact can be prevented (suppressed).

Next, the special back surface setting process (S2214) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the special back surface setting process (S2214). This special back setting process (S2214) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and whether the time effect is set based on the time information measured by the RTC292. This is a process for determining whether or not.

In the special back surface setting process (S2214), first, it is determined whether or not the time effect execution flag 223 g is on (S3701), and if the time effect execution flag 223 g is off (S3701: No), the time effect is set. Since there is no possibility that the time effect is being executed and there is no possibility that the time effect is being executed, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3701, when it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223g is on (S3701: Yes), the time information is acquired from RTC292 (S3702), and the acquired time data is switched to the special back surface (time). (Execution of effect) It is determined whether or not the data corresponds to the timing (S3703).

In the process of S3703, if it is determined that the acquired time data corresponds to the switching timing to the special back surface (S3703: Yes), the value of the special mode counter 223m is updated (S3704), and after the update. The special backside type corresponding to the value of the special mode counter 223m is specified from the special backside switching table 222d (see FIG. 71A) (S3705). Then, a display rear image change command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change to the specified special rear type is set (S3706), and the rear change prohibition flag 223u is set to ON (S3707). End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3703, if it is determined that the time data acquired in the process of S3702 is not the switching timing to the special back surface (S3703: No), is the acquired time data data indicating the end timing of the special back surface? It is determined whether or not (S3708). If it is determined in the process of S3708 that it is not the special backside end timing (S3708: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3708 that it is the end timing of the special back surface (S3708: Yes), the back surface type corresponding to the value of the mode counter 223i is specified from the rear surface switching table 222c (see FIG. 70 (b)). Then, a display rear change command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change to the specified rear type is set (S3709). Next, the rear change prohibition flag 223u is set to off (S3710), and this process is terminated.

Next, the look-ahead effect selection process (S2215) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead effect selection process (S2215). This look-ahead effect selection process (S2215) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a continuous advance notice effect (8 pieces) based on the look-ahead result of each reserved ball. This is a process for determining whether or not the hold effect) can be executed.

In the look-ahead effect selection process (S2215), first, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice flag 223q is on (S3801). If it is determined in the process of S3801 that the continuous notice flag 223q is on (S3801: Yes), the continuous notice effect (8 hold effect) is already being executed, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3801 that the continuous notice flag 223q is off (that is, not on) (S3801: No), the value and special of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b). It is determined whether or not the total value of the symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c) is 8 (S3802).

In the process of S3802, when it is determined that the total value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c) is 8 (S3802: Yes. ), It is determined whether or not the fluctuation display of the third symbol is being executed and one second before the fluctuation stop (S3803). In the process of S3803, when it is determined that it is one second before the fluctuation stop (S3803: Yes), each hold is based on the value of the effect counter 223f and the continuous notice lottery table 222e (see FIG. 71 (b)). It is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice can be executed for the ball (S3804).

In the process of S3805, if it is determined that the continuous advance notice is executed by the determination for any of the reserved balls (S3805: Yes), the continuous advance notice effect is started for the eight reserved balls currently held. A continuous display warning command for notifying the display control device 114 is set (S3806). Then, 8 is set in the remaining notice number counter 223r (S3807), and the continuous notice flag 223q is set to ON (S3808). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3802, the total value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c) is not 8 (that is, 7 or less). (S3802: No), if it is determined that it is not one second before the fluctuation stop in the processing of S3803 (S3803: No), and in the processing of S3805, continuous notice is given by the execution determination for all the reserved balls. If it is determined not to execute (S3805: No), the present process is terminated as it is without setting the start of the continuous advance notice effect (8 hold effect).

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 110 to 123, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

First, with reference to FIG. 110, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (command code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 110) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 110) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 110) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 111, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. And S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described. However, all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 110. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 121 (a)) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7702 in FIG. 121 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112 (b)), a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 112 (b)) and a simple display setting process so that the image at power-on is drawn are drawn. (See S6309 in FIG. 112 (b)) is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while being displayed on the display device 81, the first entry port 64 or each second entry opening (second entry opening 640 or right side second entry opening 640r). ), And the start instruction of the variation effect is from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, when the power is turned on. The variable image can be displayed immediately during the variable effect period, and a simple variable effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 112 (a). FIG. 112A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 112 (b). FIG. 112B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 77) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V-interruption process, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 113 to 117.

In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined by the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 77 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front-back off reach, front-back off reach, complete The stop type table corresponding to (off) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 113 to 117, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 113, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command. For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S6405), the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 114 (a). FIG. 114 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is stored in the variation effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b. Read from (not shown) and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in this control example, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6505), the fluctuation pattern command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 114A), in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6504 is updated, and the display data table buffer 233d is processed by the processing of S6501. From the set variable display data table, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, S6502 The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is obtained. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in advance.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 113. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display variable type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 114 (b). FIG. 114B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear off reach, non-front / back out reach, or complete off) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S6603) to end this process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will have a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete disconnection, in reality, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disconnected. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 113, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (a). FIG. 115A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is read from the opening effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6703). S6704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6705), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6704, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6701. The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S6702. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, when this opening command processing is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, the image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the reading speed is slow, so that the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced. It takes a lot of time for the image data used for the above to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, and thus indicates the first round. If the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There was a risk that time would be generated and the player would feel anxious and uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation had stopped.

Further, the display ending command instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects (16 rounds or 2 rounds) on the third symbol display device 81 are completed. After receiving the display ending command, if the image data required for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. There was a risk that a lot of waiting time would occur, causing the player to feel anxious and uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation was stopped.

Therefore, in this control example, when the display opening command is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and by the time the jackpot variation display is completed on the third symbol display device 81. , The transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is controlled to be completed. As a result, when the opening effect is completed in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, and the round effect is all (16 rounds) in the third symbol display device 81. , Or 2 rounds), the ending effect can be started immediately on the 3rd symbol display device 81, which may give the player anxiety or discomfort as to whether or not the operation has stopped. do not have. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

As described above, in this control example, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is started from there. The third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is completed by the time the variable effect that becomes a big hit is completed. As a result, when the variable effect that becomes a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the opening effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is worried that the operation has not stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

Returning to FIG. 113, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display is used. If there is an ending command (S6410: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (b). FIG. 115B is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is stored in the ending effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b. Read from (not shown) and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802). Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6803). S6804). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6805), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this ending command process, the ending effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot of the special symbol ends, so that the player recognizes that the jackpot has ended. Can be made to.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 113. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display reserved ball count command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is a hold ball count command for display (S6412: Yes), the hold ball count command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the reserved ball number command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (a). FIG. 116A is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command processing. This hold ball number command process executes the process corresponding to the display hold ball number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the hold ball number command process, first, the new hold ball number flag 233 m is set to ON (S7001). Then, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received display reserved ball number command (S7002), the reserved symbol number counter 233n is updated based on the extracted reserved ball number (S7003), and the reserved ball number command processing is terminated. Then, the process returns to the command judgment process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 113. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display reserved ball count command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a continuous display advance notice command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a continuous notice command for display (S6414: Yes), the continuous notice command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the continuous advance notice command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (b). FIG. 116B is a flowchart showing continuous advance notice command processing. This continuous advance notice command process executes the process corresponding to the continuous advance notice command for display received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the continuous notice command processing, first, the new continuous notice command flag 233o is set to ON (S7101). Then, the distribution between the back surface of the school of fish and the back surface of the bubbles is extracted from the continuous notice command for display (S7102). Next, based on the extracted distribution, the continuous notice information storage area 233p is updated (S7103), the continuous notice command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 113. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no continuous warning command for display (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the rear surface is determined. If there is an image change command (S6416: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w is set to ON (S7201). As a result, it is possible to determine the change of the rear image in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7703 in FIG. 121). Then, among the rear image discrimination flags 233x provided for each rear image type (rear surfaces A to C and special rear surfaces A to C corresponding to the time effect), the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is supported. The rear image discrimination flag 233x is turned on, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to other rear image types is set to off (S7202) to end the rear image change command process and return to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process (see S7703 in FIG. 121), when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S7201 is turned on, the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7202 is used. Specify the back image type after the change. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, the image data corresponding to those back images is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data is stored. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. When the rear image type after the change is rear A, all the image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that the image is not transferred.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that either the back side A to C or the special back side A to C corresponding to the time effect is displayed depending on the back side type of the back side image specified in the display data table, From the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the processing of S7202, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the back image of the back image is specified. The RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data corresponding to the range is stored and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, two or more rear image change commands may not be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a rear image change command. In the process of S7202, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 113. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), and there is an error command. If (S6418: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (b). FIG. 117B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag 233q indicating that an error has occurred is set to ON (S7301). Then, among the error discrimination flags 233r provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag 233r corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags 233r are set to off (S7302). , Ends error command processing and returns to command judgment processing.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7301, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7302 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag 233r corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the processing of S7302. .. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 113. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6418 (S6418: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6420), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2201 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are used from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 114 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 114 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, , Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 114 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 118, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7401), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7401: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S7402 and S7403 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7404. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7401: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7402), the new command received is received. Various image setting processes for setting the image corresponding to the command are executed (S7403).

Here, the details of various image setting processes (S7403) will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing various image setting processes (S7403).

In the various image setting processes (S7403), first, it is determined whether or not the new reserved ball number flag 233m is on (S7501), and if the new reserved ball number flag 233m is on (S7501: Yes), the reserved symbol is displayed. The number of reserved symbols data corresponding to the value of the number counter 233n is expanded (S7502). Then, the new reserved ball number flag 233m is set to off (S7503), and the process proceeds to S7504. On the other hand, if the new reserved ball number flag 233m is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), the processing of S7502 and S7503 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of S7504.

In the process of S7504, it is determined whether or not the new continuous notice command flag 233o is on (S7504), and if the new continuous notice command flag 233o is on (S7504: Yes), the data in the continuous notice information storage area 233p. The preview image data of the distribution (distribution between the back surface of the school of fish and the back surface of the bubble) corresponding to the above is developed (S7505). Then, the new continuous advance notice command flag 233o is set to off (S7506), and the process proceeds to S7507. On the other hand, if the new continuous warning command flag 233o is not on, that is, is off (S7504: No), the processing of S7505 and S7506 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of S7507.

In the process of S7507, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag 233q is on (S7507), and if the error occurrence flag 233q is on (S7507: Yes), the warning image data is expanded based on the error determination flag 233r. (S7508). Then, the error occurrence flag 233q is set to off (S7509), and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if the error occurrence flag 233q is not on, that is, if it is off (S7507: No), the processing of S7508 and S7509 is skipped, and the process returns to the display setting processing.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When various image setting processes (S7403) are completed, or when it is determined that the new command flag is off in the process of S7401 (S7401: No), then the pointer update process is executed (S7404).

Here, the details of the pointer update process (S7404) will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process (S7404). This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7601). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S7601, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S7602). As a result, if it is End information (S7602: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7603), and if it is a demo display data table (S7603: Yes), the display data table buffer is used. The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7604), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7605), this process is completed, and the display is performed. Return to the setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7603, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7603: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7606). ), Ends this process and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7602: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation is continued by returning to FIG. 118. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7405). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S7405 together with the warning image expanded earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7406), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7407). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7407: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S7407: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7408).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7408: No), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is the timing to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, in order to set the confirmation display of the third symbol, S7409 to The process of S7414 is executed. In the process of S7409, the definite display data table is read from the definite display effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b, set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7409), and then the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By doing so, the content is cleared (S7410). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7411).

When the processing of S7411 is completed, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7412). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7413), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7414), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7414 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S6304), from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7414, and the stop symbol of the variation effect is specified. , The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7408, if the definite display flag is on (S7408: Yes), the processes of S7415 to S7420 are executed in order to set the display mode of the demo effect. In the process of S7415, it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7415). If the demo display flag is off (S7415: No), the demo display data table is read, set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7416), and then the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the contents are cleared (S7417). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7418).

When the processing of S7418 is completed, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7419), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the on state is set to on (S7420), the main processing is completed, and the V split is performed. Return to the process.

As a result, even if a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the final display of the third symbol, the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display opening command is received. If not, the drawing contents can be automatically set so that the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305) described above, which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 121 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7701). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7701: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. (S7702) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 121 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S7701, that is, if it is off (S7701: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7703), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 122.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7702), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 121 (b). FIG. 121B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7702).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S7801), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7801: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7802). In the process of S7802, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. .. When it is determined by the process of S7802 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7802: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7802: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7803. Further, as a result of the processing of S7801, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7801: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7803.

In the process of S7803, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7803), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7803: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7804), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

On the other hand, if all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S7803 (S7803: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S7805), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 112 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 112 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 113 to 117) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 118 to 120) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 122) (see S7701: No in FIG. 121 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, a normal image transfer setting process (S7703), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7703).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7404) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S7901). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7902), and if it is transfer data information (S7902: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7903) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7904), and the process proceeds to S7905.

Further, in the process of S7902, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S7902: No), the processes of S7903 and S7904 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7905. In the process of S7905, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7905), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7905: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7906).

In the process of S7906, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7906 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7906: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7906: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7907. Further, as a result of the processing of S7905, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7905: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7907.

In the process of S7907, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7907), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7907: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7908), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7903 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7913. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7907: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7909). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7909: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7909: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S7910), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7911). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7912), and the process proceeds to S7913.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image should be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S7911, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S7913, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7913). The discrimination in the process of S3713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7913 (S7913: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7913 (S7913: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7914). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S7914, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S7915), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the jackpot effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α-blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 77 (S8001). That is, in the processing of S8001, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task process. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S8002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the processing of S8002 (S8003). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process (see FIG. 112 (b)) is performed every time the drawing process is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the first control example, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 both reach the upper limit value (4), eight reserved balls are used. It is configured to be able to execute a continuous advance notice effect that sets a special advance notice effect over the variable display of. This eight-piece hold effect is configured so that the more the lottery result with high expectation is held in the hold ball, the easier it is to decide the execution. Therefore, when the eight hold effects are executed, the player can be made to play the game in the expectation that there is a big hit in the hold.

Further, in the first control example, a new start prize is detected during the execution of the eight hold effect, and when the number of hold balls increases, the hold symbol corresponding to the hold ball that is the target of the eight hold effect is obtained. And the reserved symbol corresponding to the new reserved ball are displayed (divided and displayed) in a manner that can be easily distinguished by the player. Here, even if a new start prize is detected until the 8 hold effect is completed, if the entire sub-display area Ds is fixed to the display mode dedicated to the 8 hold effect, the 8 hold effect is set. When only the reserved balls corresponding to the new start prize detected inside remain, it seems as if the 8 reserved effects suddenly ended even though the reserved symbols remain. It may become. That is, there is a possibility that the eight-piece hold effect may give the impression that the effect has ended in the middle, which may make the player feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, in the first control example, by performing the divided display, it is possible to clearly suggest to the player how long the eight hold effect will continue when a new start winning prize is detected. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable at the end of the eight-piece hold effect.

Further, in the first control example, the rotation display effect of displaying a specific character by the rotation unit 500 configured by the versa writer can be executed. In this rotation display effect, by switching the light emission patterns of a plurality of LEDs 532 provided in the rotation unit 500 according to the progress of the rotation operation, a specific character (for example, "hit") is used in the locus of light emitted by each LED. (Character) is configured to be perceptible to the player as an afterimage. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel effect different from the display effect by a general display device.

Here, since the substrate member 531 on which a plurality of LEDs 532 are mounted is arranged inside the rotating unit 500, when the effect using the rotating unit 500 is performed, the LEDs 532 and the IC / capacitor mounted on the substrate operate. It generates heat by doing so. Therefore, if the rotating unit 500 is operated frequently, the solder connecting the LED 532, the IC, the capacitor, and the like to the substrate may be melted due to the influence of heat generation, resulting in poor contact. Therefore, in the first control example, in order to suppress the operation frequency of the rotation unit 500, the upper limit of the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 according to the elapsed time (time zone) is defined for each time zone. When an effect mode involving the operation of the rotation unit 500 is selected while the upper limit is reached, the effect is replaced with an alternative effect in which the rotation unit 500 does not operate. As a result, the number of operations of the rotating unit 500 can be reduced, so that failures such as poor contact can be prevented (suppressed). In this control example, the detection range of the touch sensor 290 and the range of the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 are close to each other. Therefore, the touch effect can be executed only as an alternative effect when the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 reaches the upper limit so that the operation of the rotation unit 500 and the touch effect using the touch sensor 290 do not conflict with each other. It is composed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being confused by the simultaneous occurrence of the touch effect and the rotation display effect.

In the first control example, the upper limit of the number of operations of the rotation unit 500 is increased twice every three hours, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of the time zone, the rotation display effect may be configured to be executable until the upper limit number of times per day (for example, 10 times) is reached. With this configuration, the earlier the game is played, the higher the possibility that the rotation display effect will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 when the hall is opened. can.

In this first control example, in order to prevent the touch effect and the rotation display effect from being executed at the same time, when the execution of the rotation display effect is canceled (the number of times the rotation display effect is executed reaches the upper limit). The touch effect is executed as an alternative effect only (if any), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that whether or not to set the touch effect is first determined, and the rotation display effect can be selected only when the touch effect is not set. In addition, it is not necessary to adopt a configuration in which two-step discrimination is performed. In the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a, the variation display mode in which only the rotation display effect is set and the variation display mode in which only the touch effect is set are separately defined in association with the values of the different sub-variation selection counters 223t. It may be configured to be kept. Further, the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a defines a variation display mode in which both effects are executed in the variation display of 1 by shifting the execution period of the touch effect and the execution period of the rotation display effect. May be good. Even when these modifications are applied, it is possible to prevent the touch effect and the rotation display effect from being executed at the same time. Therefore, when the player tries to touch the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 according to the touch effect, he / she touches the rotating rotating unit 500, and the rotating unit 500 is damaged or the player is injured. This can be prevented (suppressed). Further, the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 makes it difficult for the player to touch the display screen, and it is possible to prevent the player from being stressed by not being able to satisfactorily participate in the touch effect.

In this first control example, once the split display (see FIG. 63) is set, it is determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous advance notice effect (8 hold effect) for the new winning information. It was configured not to be done. That is, only when the entire sub-display area Ds is the back surface of the school of fish, it is determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous advance notice effect for the new winning information, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. Even after the display is divided into the back of the school of fish and the back of the bubbles, it may be determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous advance notice effect for the new winning information. That is, in the winning command reception process (see FIG. 102), if the process of S3103 is deleted and the continuous notice flag 223q is turned on in the process of S3102 (S3102: Yes), the process of S3104 is always executed. good. Then, when it is determined in the process of S3104 that the continuous advance notice effect is set (extended) for the new winning information, the entire sub-display area Ds is displayed on the back of the school of fish even if the divided display is set. It may be configured to return to the embodiment. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the continuous advance notice effect has been extended for the new winning information. In addition, when a new start prize is detected while the split display is set and it is determined that a continuous notice effect is set (extended) for the acquired new prize information, the split display is maintained. , The display area on the right side of the reserved symbol corresponding to the new winning information may be set on the back of the school of fish. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player more clearly recognize the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball with high expectation.

Further, in this control example, it is determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous advance notice effect (eight hold effect) for the new winning information during the continuous advance notice effect, and whether or not to newly start the continuous advance notice effect. The determination was made under the same conditions (probability), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a continuous notice lottery table 222e (see FIG. 71 (b)), a table to be referred to when a continuous notice effect is newly started, and a table to be referred to when a new start prize is detected during execution of the continuous notice effect. A table may be provided separately and the probabilities may be different. In this case, the winning probability may be set higher by determining whether or not to set the continuous advance notice effect for the new winning information during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect. With this configuration, once the continuous advance notice effect is started, it becomes easier to set the continuous advance notice effect for new winning information, so the continuous advance notice effect continues over a larger number of variable displays. It will be easier. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting a big hit for a longer period of time.

In the first control example, as a continuous advance notice effect (8 hold effect), the display mode of the sub-display area Ds in which the hold symbol is displayed is changed to a mode in which an image of a school of fish is displayed on the back surface. , Not limited to this. It suffices as long as the effect of the same system is continuously set over eight (plural) variable displays. For example, the display mode (color, shape, etc.) of the reserved symbol that is the target of the continuous advance notice effect is changed. You may. As a result, the player can easily understand the reserved symbol that is the target of the continuous advance notice effect. Further, instead of or in addition to changing the display mode of the back surface of the sub-display area Ds or the reserved symbol, the display mode of the variable display of the third symbol in which the continuous notice effect is set is changed to a special mode. It may be configured to be used. Specifically, a specific character that does not appear (or is difficult to appear) in the variable display executed in the state where the continuous advance notice effect is not set may be displayed, or the mode of the third symbol may be continuously announced. The display mode may be changed to a display mode dedicated to the effect, or the rear image may be changed to the back type dedicated to the continuous notice effect. Further, the combination of the stop symbols at the time of disconnection may be configured to be a special combination of stop symbols (so-called chance eye).

In the first control example, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect (8 hold effect) is newly executed regardless of the number of hold balls with high expectation. However, it is not limited to this. The more the lottery result with high expectation is held in the new holding ball in terms of time, the easier it is to execute the eight holding effect. With this configuration, when the continuous advance notice effect is started, the expectation that the reserved ball in the latter half will be a big hit can be higher, so the player is expected until the end of the continuous advance notice effect. The feeling can be sustained.

In the first control example, only two settings of lighting and extinguishing are provided as the settings of the red, blue, and green LEDs in the LEDs 1 to 40. That is, in the setting of each LED 1 to 40 in the operation scenario table 222f, if the bit corresponding to each color is 1 (on), the LED of that color is turned on, and if it is 0 (off), the LED of that color is turned on. The simple control to turn off the light was performed, but it is not limited to this. For example, the LED settings for each color may be finer. Specifically, it may be configured to have a plurality of stages of light emission state from the time when the light is turned off to the time when the light is fully turned on. That is, the LED current value of the LED of each color may be changed to a plurality of stages (for example, 16 stages) so that the brightness of each color can be adjusted to express the gradation. Then, the operation scenario table 222f is configured to express the data corresponding to the lighting state of each color by the number of bits corresponding to the number of stages (for example, 16 bits in the case of 16 stages), and the rotation display operation setting process (see FIG. 99). ), When a new emission pattern is set, the LED current value of each color may be updated from the read bit data. With this configuration, red, green, blue, yellow (red + green), purple (red + blue), light blue (green + blue), and white (red +) that can be expressed by a combination of red, green, and blue In addition to green + blue) and black (all off), various colors can be realized. Specifically, gray can be expressed as a color by lighting red, green, and blue with current values corresponding to half the brightness when all are lit. In addition, it is possible to express orange as a color by turning on all red (lighting at the maximum current value), turning on green with a current value corresponding to half the brightness when all are turned on, and turning off blue. can.

<Variation example of the first control example>
Next, a modification of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 128. In the above-mentioned first control example, the LEDs 1 to 40 are configured as a set of LEDs having three colors of red, green, and blue, and the lighting and extinguishing of the LEDs of each color can be controlled independently. , It was configured to be able to express multiple colors.

On the other hand, in the modified example of the first control example, a single color LED was adopted as each of the LEDs 1 to 40. Specifically, LEDs 1 to 20 were replaced with a single red LED, and LEDs 21 to 40 were replaced with a single blue LED. As a result, the weight of the rotating unit 500 can be reduced and the cost rate can be reduced.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above is that LEDs 1 to 20 are replaced with single red LEDs, and LEDs 21 to 40 are replaced with LEDs 21 to 40. The point of replacing each with a single blue LED, the point of partially changing the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Is the point that has been changed. The first regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the structure of the rotating unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 124 (a). As shown in FIG. 124 (a), in this modification, of the 40 LEDs 532 provided in the rotating unit 500, LEDs 1 to LED 20 are composed of red LEDs, and LEDs 21 to LED 40 are composed of blue LEDs. .. In this control example, as the rotation display effect, only the red character effect of displaying the red characters as an afterimage by lighting only the LEDs 1 to 20 composed of the red LED and the LEDs 21 to 40 composed of the blue LED are displayed. There is a blue character effect that displays blue characters as an afterimage by turning them on. Further, the red character effect is easily selected by the fluctuation pattern of the probabilistic jackpot (big hit A, C), and the blue character effect is easily selected by the fluctuation pattern of the normal jackpot (big hit B). With this configuration, when the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 is started, it is possible to pay attention to the lighting color and perform the game.

In addition, in this modification, the purple character effect that may be selected only in the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot A (16 round probability variation jackpot), which is the most advantageous for the player, is configured to be feasible. This purple character effect will be described with reference to FIG. 124 (b). FIG. 124 (b) is a diagram showing an aspect of an afterimage during execution of the purple character effect. When the purple character effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 124 (b), the red LED and the blue LED arranged at the target position of each red LED perform the same lighting operation at the same rotation position. As a result, the afterimage drawn by the red light emitted by the red LED and the afterimage drawn by the blue light emitted by the blue LED are alternately visually recognized at minute time intervals. In this case, it becomes difficult for the human eye to distinguish between the red characters and the blue characters, and as a result, the red characters and the blue characters are superimposed due to the integration effect of the human eyes. , The afterimage is perceived as if it were displayed in purple letters.

As described above, in this modification, the characters of three colors can be expressed by using only the LEDs of two colors. As a result, the number of parts of the rotating unit 500 can be reduced, so that the effect of the effect can be maximized while reducing the weight and the cost rate.

<About the electrical configuration in the modified example of the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the first control example will be described. FIG. 125 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 125, the RAM 223 in this modification is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 73) in that a scenario storage area 223af is provided. Other configurations are the same as the RAM 223 in the first control example.

The scenario storage area 223af is a storage area for storing operation scenarios corresponding to each of the red character effect, the blue character effect, and the purple character effect. In the modified example of the first control example, only the operation scenario for red character production is specified for the operation scenario table 222f. That is, only the light emission pattern for LEDs 1 to 20 is specified, and the light emission pattern for LEDs 21 to 40 is not specified. Therefore, when the operation scenario read from the operation scenario table 222f is applied as it is, only the red character effect can be executed. Therefore, in this modification, the operation scenario read from the operation scenario table 222f is converted into a format corresponding to each effect and stored in the scenario storage area 223af, and based on the operation scenario stored in the scenario storage area 223af. The light emission pattern is set. With this configuration, the amount of data in a single operation scenario table 222f can be reduced.

When executing the blue character effect, the data in which the correspondence between the LED of the operation scenario read from the operation scenario table 222f and the light emission pattern is inverted is stored in the scenario storage area 223af. That is, the light emission pattern of the LED 1 is converted into the light emission pattern of the LED 40, the light emission pattern of the LED 2 is converted into the LED 2, and each light emission pattern up to the LED 21 is inverted and stored in the scenario storage area 223af. As a result, it is possible to realize a blue character effect with simple control. Further, when the purple character effect is executed, the correspondence relationship between the LED of the operation scenario and the light emission pattern is reversed and the scenario storage area 223af is updated every time the rotation unit 500 makes one round. As a result, it is possible to realize purple character production with simple control.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the first control example will be described. First, the rotation display operation setting process (S2211) in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 126.

FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the rotation display operation setting process (S2211) in this modification. Of the rotation display operation setting processes (see FIG. 126) in the modified example of the first control example, in each of the processes S2801 to S2808 and S2810, the rotation display operation setting process (see FIG. 99) in the first control example, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S2801 to S2808 and S2810 is executed.

Further, in the rotation display operation setting process (see FIG. 126) in the modified example of the first control example, when it is determined that the lighting set flag 223ac is on in the process of S2808 (S2808: Yes), the first control is performed. Instead of the lighting setting update process (see FIG. 100) in the example, the lighting setting update process 2 is executed (S2821), and this process is terminated. The details of the lighting setting update process 2 (S2821) will be described later with reference to FIG. 127.

Further, in the process of S2810, when it is determined that the output of the origin sensor is on (S2810: Yes), the lighting start process for setting the start of the light emission pattern is executed (S2822), and this process is terminated. .. The details of this lighting start processing (S2822) will be described later with reference to FIG. 128.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the details of the lighting setting update process 2 (S2821) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the lighting setting update process 2 (S2821). The lighting setting update process 2 (S2821) updates the lighting patterns of the LEDs 1 to 40 according to the progress (rotation position) of the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500, similarly to the lighting setting update process (see FIG. 100). It is a process for.

Of the lighting setting update processing 2 (see FIG. 127) in the modified example of the first control example, in each of the processes S2901 to S2903, S2906, and S2907, the lighting setting update processing in the first control example (see FIG. 100), respectively. The same processes as those of S2901 to S2903, S2906, and S2907 are executed.

Further, in the lighting setting update process 2 (see FIG. 127) in the modified example of the first control example, when the process of S2902 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the rotation display effect this time is the purple character effect (see FIG. 127). In S2911), if it is a purple character effect (S2911: Yes), a scenario in which the correspondence between the LED of the operation scenario currently stored in the scenario storage area 223af and the light emission pattern is reversed is generated, and the scenario storage area 223af is generated. Is overwritten (S2912), and the process proceeds to S2903. Since the process of S2911 is executed every time the rotating unit 500 makes one round and returns to the origin position, when the purple character effect is set, the light emitting pattern for the red LED is executed every time the rotating unit 500 makes one round. And the light emission pattern for the blue LED can be set alternately. Therefore, as a result of the afterimage drawn by red light and the afterimage drawn by blue light being perceived alternately at minute time intervals, red and blue can be combined and perceived as purple by the integration effect. Therefore, it is possible to express afterimages of different colors by using only the red LED and the blue LED.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2911 that the rotation display effect this time is not a purple character effect (red character effect or blue character effect) (S2911: No), the scenario stored in the scenario storage area 223af. Since (light emission pattern) can be continued to be used as it is, the process of S2912 is skipped and the process is shifted to S2903.

In the process of S2903, the step counter 223ad and the value of the operation pointer 223ae are reset to the initial values as in the first control example (S2903). Next, the light emission pattern corresponding to the value (00H) of the operation pointer 223ae after reset is read from the scenario storage area 223af, set in each of the LEDs 1 to 40 (S2913), and the present process is terminated.

Further, in the lighting setting update process 2 (see FIG. 127) in this modification, when it is determined that the output of the origin sensor is off in the process of S2901 (S2901: No), it is stored in the scenario storage area 223af. The operation scenario (light emission pattern) and the value of the step counter 2233ad are read out (S2914), and the process proceeds to S2906.

Further, in the lighting setting update process 2 (see FIG. 127) in this modification, when the process of S2907 is completed, the light emission pattern corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223ae after the update by the process of S2907 is read from the scenario storage area 223af. Each LED 1 to 40 is set (S2915), and this process is terminated.

Next, the lighting start processing (S2822) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the lighting start processing (S2822). This lighting start process (S2822) is executed in the rotation operation setting process (see FIG. 126), determines whether or not the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 is stable, and when the rotation speed is stable, each LED 1 to This is a process for setting the light emission pattern of 40.

In the lighting start processing (S2822), first, 1 is added to the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa (S3901). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa after addition is 10. (S3902). That is, as in the first control example, it is determined whether or not the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 has reached a rotation speed that can be regarded as sufficiently stable. In the process of S3902, when it is determined that the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa is not 10 (9 or less) (S3902: No), the rotation speed after starting the rotation operation is small and the rotation speed is stable. Since there is a possibility that there is no such thing, this process ends as it is without setting the light emission pattern.

On the other hand, in the process of S3902, when it is determined that the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa is 10 (S3902: Yes), the operation scenario specified in the operation scenario table 222f is read (S3903), and the read operation scenario is read. On the other hand, the processes of S3904 to S3906 that are converted according to the effect type (red character effect, blue character effect, purple character effect) and stored in the scenario storage area 223af are executed.

Specifically, it is determined whether or not the rotation display effect this time is a blue character effect (S3904), and if it is a blue character effect (S3904: Yes), the LED and light emission of the operation scenario read out in the process of S3903. After reversing the correspondence with the pattern, the operation scenario after the reversal is stored in the scenario storage area 223af (S3905), and the processing is transferred to S3907. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3904 that the rotation display effect this time is not a blue character effect (red character effect or purple character effect) (S3904: No), the operation scenario read in the process of S3903 is processed. Without (conversion), it is stored in the scenario storage area 223af as it is (S3906), and the process is transferred to S3907.

In the processing of S3907 executed after the processing of S3905 or S3906, the value of the operation pointer 223ae is reset to the initial value (00H) (S3907), and the light emission pattern corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223ae after the reset is stored in the scenario storage area. It is read from 223af and set to each LED 1 to 40 (S3908), and this process is terminated.

By this lighting start processing (see FIG. 128), an operation scenario can be processed (converted) according to the effect type, and the light emitting operation of each LED 1 to 40 can be started in the operation scenario after the processing (conversion).

As described above, in the modified example of the first control example, a single color LED is adopted as each of the LEDs 1 to 40. Specifically, LEDs 1 to 20 were replaced with a single red LED, and LEDs 21 to 40 were replaced with a single blue LED. As a result, the weight of the rotating unit 500 can be reduced and the cost rate can be reduced.

Further, in the modified example of the first control example, the type of LED to be lit (red LED or blue LED) is switched every one round, and the lighting position and the extinguishing position are controlled to be the same position. It is configured so that the production can be executed. As a result, the red afterimage generated by the light emission of the red LED and the blue afterimage generated by the light emission of the blue LED are combined and can be perceived by the player as a purple afterimage. Therefore, even with a small number of LED types, more colors can be expressed, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this modification, the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 is constant (one lap in 0.1 seconds) regardless of the type of rotation display effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the purple character effect is set, the rotation unit 500 may be rotated at a rotation speed faster (for example, twice) than the rotation speed of the other effects. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the time interval from when the LED of one color emits light to when the LED of the other color emits light at the same position during the purple character production, so that an afterimage can be created. It can be perceived more clearly in purple. Therefore, the effect of production can be further enhanced.

In this modification, two types of LEDs, red and blue, are adopted, but the type of LED is not limited to this, and any type of LED may be adopted. For example, green and white LEDs may be adopted, or yellow and orange LEDs may be adopted. With such a configuration, the degree of freedom in design can be improved. Further, the LED is not limited to one color, and an LED in which two or more LED chips of different colors are arranged in one package may be adopted. With this configuration, the colors that can be expressed can be increased, so that the effect of production can be enhanced. Specifically, for example, as the LEDs 1 to 20, an LED composed of a combination of a red LED, a blue LED, and a green LED is adopted as in the first control example. On the other hand, as the LEDs 21 to 40, LEDs composed of a combination of cyan color, magenta color, and yellow color are adopted. With this configuration, the color gamut that can be expressed can be expanded.

In this modification, only two settings, lighting or extinguishing, are provided as the setting of each LED 1 to 20 composed of red LEDs and the setting of each LED 21 to 40 composed of blue LEDs. That is, if the bit corresponding to each of the LEDs 1 to 40 in the operation scenario table 222f is 1 (on), the LED corresponding to the bit is turned on, and if it is 0 (off), the LED corresponding to the bit is turned off. It was a simple control to make it, but it is not limited to this. For example, the setting of each LED may be finer. Specifically, it may be configured to have a plurality of stages of light emission state from the time when the light is turned off to the time when the light is fully turned on. That is, the LED current value of each LED may be configured to be changeable in a plurality of stages (for example, 16 stages) so that the brightness of each LED can be adjusted to express gradation. Then, the operation scenario table 222f is configured to express the data corresponding to the lighting state of each LED by the number of bits corresponding to the number of stages (for example, 16 bits in the case of 16 stages), and the rotation display operation setting process (FIG. 126). When a new emission pattern is set in (see), the LED current value of each LED may be updated from the read bit data. With this configuration, various colors can be realized in addition to the three colors of red, blue, and purple. Specifically, the red LED that has reached the predetermined lighting position is fully lit, and the blue LED that has reached the same lighting position in the next round is lit with half the brightness of the full lighting, so that the color is pink. Can be expressed. In this case, LEDs 1 to 20 are composed of a combination of red, green, and blue LEDs as in the first control example, and LEDs 21 to 40 are composed of combinations of LEDs of different colors (for example, cyan, magenta, and yellow). It may be configured. With this configuration, an afterimage of a wider variety of colors can be realized. In addition, the afterimage of the color that can be expressed by the combination of red, green, and blue and the afterimage of the color that can be expressed by the combination of cyan, magenta, and yellow can be switched at high speed in a short time. By superimposing, it is possible to realize an afterimage with a color range wider than the color range that can be expressed only by red, blue, and green. Therefore, the effect of production can be further enhanced.

In this modification, only one operation scenario table 222f that defines the light emission pattern for the red LED (for LEDs 1 to 20) is provided, and when the LEDs 21 to 40 are made to emit light in the blue character effect or the purple character effect, the LED 21 to 40 is emitted. The light emission pattern can be set for the blue LED by inverting the correspondence between the LED and the light emission pattern in the light emission pattern for red characters, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, two types of light emission patterns for red character production and blue character production are provided, and in the case of purple character production, a light emission pattern for red character production and a light emission pattern for blue character production are provided. And may be alternately switched every round. With this configuration, it is possible to express an afterimage display mode that does not have rotational symmetry in the vertical direction, so that the degree of freedom in the rotation display effect can be improved.

In this modification, only three types are provided: a red character effect composed of only a red afterimage, a blue character effect composed of only a blue afterimage, and a purple character effect composed of only a purple afterimage. However, you may perform an effect in which the afterimages of each color coexist. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a light emitting pattern having a light emitting position in which only one of the blue LED and the red LED emits light and a light emitting position in which both emit light is provided. With this configuration, it is possible to diversify the variation of the display mode of the afterimage in the rotation display effect.

In the first control example and the modification thereof, the light emission pattern for one rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 is defined as the operation scenario table 222f (see FIG. 71 (c)), and the same data is used as it is or processed. The configuration was such that the correspondence between the LED and the light emission pattern was reversed and the setting was repeated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of different scenarios may be defined as the light emission pattern for one round, and the operation scenario to be applied may be switched for each rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 (value of the rotation speed counter 223aa). Then, the mode of the afterimage may be changed according to the rotation speed (value of the rotation speed counter 223aa). Specifically, for example, the three characters "hit" may be repeatedly brought close to each other and separated from each other according to the number of rotations to form an afterimage as if each character is shaking. Further, the characters may be gradually changed according to the number of rotations (for example, "Congratulations" characters, etc.). With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the production mode of the rotation display effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<About the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 147. In the first control example described above, the number of times the ball has entered the first ball opening 64 and the number of times the ball has entered the second ball opening 640 or the right second ball opening 640r are four times, which are the upper limit values, respectively. In that case (when a total of 8 times of ball entry is suspended), a continuous notice effect (8 pieces of hold effect) is executed to execute the same system of effect over the variable display corresponding to the 8 times of ball entry. I explained the possible gaming machines.

On the other hand, in the second control example, as the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, a grant effect to which a ticket (privilege) is given is displayed, and the number of tickets given in the grant effect is displayed. Depending on the situation, the reel effect is displayed during the jackpot game. In the reel effect, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a mode in which the three symbols are aligned (one of "○○○", "△△△", and "□□□"), and the probable change game state after the jackpot game. Is given (that is, the winning of the probable change jackpot). Since this reel effect is configured to be executed (displayed) during the jackpot game after the normal opening effect indicating that the normal game state is given after the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game is started. At that time, the player who was aware that the normal gaming state is granted can be notified that the game will shift to the probabilistic gaming state, so the impression that the privilege granted has improved (so-called promotion). Can be given to the player, and the player's interest can be improved.

In the second control example, when the winning information is held based on the winning of the game ball, the variation type is removed and the short-changing winning information is continuously held before the holding. Based on this, those deviation short fluctuations are changed (overwritten) to the variation type of the short reach, and the continuous short reach effect is executed. When the winning information that becomes a big hit is reserved based on the winning of the game ball, the short reach is set to be executed three times in a row as a continuous short reach effect, and the winning information that is out of order is reserved. Is set so that the short reach is executed twice in succession as a continuous short reach effect. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the short reach will be executed three times in a row in the continuous short reach production, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the second control example, when the continuous short reach effect is executed, the change of the rear image based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is not executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the continuous short reach effect executed over a plurality of fluctuations gives the player the impression that the rear image is temporarily interrupted due to the change of the rear image. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. Further, when the continuous short reach effect is executed, the rear image is changed based on the passage of time (that is, the rear image is changed in synchronization with a plurality of gaming machines, so-called island interlocking effect). When is executed), it is configured so that the rear image can be changed. As a result, the change of the rear image based on the passage of time (so-called island interlocking effect) is executed without delay, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In this case, the continuous short reach effect is terminated in the middle, and a privilege (ticket used in the reel effect described above) is given according to the progress of the completed continuous short reach effect. As a result, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction felt by the player when the continuous short reach effect ends in the middle.

In this second control example, the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed with respect to the first control example, and the process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is one. The difference is that the part changed and the process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are partially changed. Other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, among the effects executed in the second control example, the reel effects displayed during the execution of the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. FIG. 129 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a reel effect executed during a jackpot game. Specifically, FIG. 129 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the time when the first reel effect executed during the jackpot game is started, and FIG. 129 (b) shows the hit reel effect as the reel effect. It is a figure which showed the example at the time when it was executed and the specific aspect (display which three symbols are aligned) was displayed.

Further, FIG. 130 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a reel effect executed during a jackpot game. Specifically, FIG. 130 (a) is a diagram showing an example at the time when all reel effects are off reel effects and the last off reel effect is completed, and FIG. 130 (b) is a probabilistic gaming state. It is a figure which showed an example of the promotion ending effect which is executed when all the reel effect executed in the jackpot game which shifts to is an off reel effect (or when the reel effect is not displayed). ..

The reel effect is an effect executed (displayed) during the execution of the jackpot game according to the number of tickets granted based on the execution (display) of the grant effect. Specifically, the number of times the reel effect can be executed is variable according to the number of tickets. For example, if one ticket is given, the reel effect can be executed once, and four tickets are given. If so, the reel effect can be executed four times. By displaying a specific mode (display in which three symbols are aligned) in the reel effect, it is notified that the game shifts to the probabilistic game state after the end of the jackpot game being executed. As a result, by displaying the grant effect to which the ticket is given, the player is given the impression that the expectation that a specific mode is displayed in the reel effect in the jackpot game to be executed thereafter has increased. And can improve the interest of the game. In addition, by displaying a specific mode in the reel production, it is notified that the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot has been executed, but the game is changed to the probabilistic game state. It is possible to give the player the impression that it has improved (so-called promotion), and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

In this control example, the value of the ticket counter 223bb is added (the number of tickets is increased) by displaying the granting effect in the variable effect until the jackpot game is started. When the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 1 or more, the reel effect can be executed in the jackpot game. When the reel effect is executed with the value of the ticket counter 223bb being 8, first, as shown in FIG. 129 (a), the third symbol display device is executed when the jackpot game of the fourth round is executed. The display of the reel effect is started at the lower right of the screen of 81. In the reel effect displayed at the bottom right of the screen, three reels with three types of figures (circle figure, triangle figure, square figure) rotated and displayed side by side are displayed side by side, and at the top of those reels. The text "If you get 3 of them within 8 times, you will be promoted!" Is displayed. In addition, in the upper right part of the screen, the characters "ticket x 8" indicating the number of tickets granted by the grant effect executed until the jackpot game is started (that is, the value of the ticket counter 223bb) are displayed. Will be done.

The trigger for starting the reel effect is not limited to the start of the fourth round, and may be another trigger. For example, the trigger for starting the reel effect may be changed according to the value of the ticket counter 223bb, or the trigger for starting the reel effect may be changed according to the effect time of the reel effect to be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the effect time of the reel effect from exceeding the execution time of the jackpot game, and to appropriately display the reel effect.

The reel effect of this control example is an effect in which one ticket is consumed (reduced) for each reel that is executed once. FIG. 129 (b) shows a case where the jackpot game progresses from the state of FIG. 129 (a) in which the number of tickets is eight, the reel fluctuation is executed six times, and the winning reel effect is executed. It is a figure.

When the reel is changed six times from the state where the number of tickets is eight (see FIG. 129 (a)), the number of tickets becomes two, and as shown in FIG. 129 (b), the third symbol display device 81. The characters "ticket x 2" are displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. Then, in the winning reel effect, all the symbols displayed on the three rows of reels displayed at the lower right of the screen are the same symbol (here, a circle figure) and are stopped and displayed. At the top of the reel, the characters "promotion get" are displayed, which suggests that the probabilistic game state will be given after the jackpot game is executed. Here, when the reel effect is executed, as the opening effect of the jackpot game, a normal opening effect indicating that the normal game state is given after the execution of the jackpot game is displayed. As a result, the winning reel effect is displayed for the player who has recognized that the normal gaming state is given after the jackpot game is executed, so that the probabilistic gaming state advantageous to the player is given after the jackpot game is executed. Since it is notified that the reel will be played, it is possible to give the player the impression that the privilege to be granted has improved (so-called promotion), and the interest of the player can be improved.

After the hit reel effect is executed, it has already been notified that the probability variation game state will be given after the big hit game is executed. Therefore, the reel effect is ended and the big hit game is executed.

On the other hand, a case where the winning reel effect is not executed (displayed) in the eight reel effects will be described. FIG. 130A is a diagram showing an example of a case where the hit effect is not executed (displayed) in the eight reel effects and the eighth off reel effect is executed (displayed).

When the reel is changed eight times from the state where the number of tickets is eight (see FIG. 129 (a)), the number of tickets becomes zero, and as shown in FIG. 130 (a), the third symbol display device 81. The characters "ticket x 0" are displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. Then, when the final off-reach effect is executed (displayed) and the symbols of the three rows of reels are stopped and displayed with symbols that are not the same symbol, the characters "Sorry!" Are displayed at the top of the reels (sorry!). See FIG. 130 (a)). Then, when the execution (display) of the reel effect is completed and then the jackpot game in the 16th round is completed, the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game is executed (displayed).

In this control example, as an ending effect of the jackpot game, an image imitating a closed door is displayed in the center of the screen, and an effect that the door is opened is displayed. In the promotion ending effect, when the door is opened, the characters "promotion" are displayed in the opened door as shown in FIG. 130 (b), and the probability change game state is given after the jackpot game is completed. Is notified. On the other hand, in the normal ending effect, an image imitating the door is displayed in the same manner, and the characters "sorry" are displayed in the opened door. As a result, even when the normal ending effect is displayed, the door can be opened and the player can be expected to display the characters "promotion", so that the player's interest can be improved.

In this control example, the timing at which each reel is stopped and displayed in the reel effect is predetermined, but is not limited to this. For example, each reel may be stopped and displayed based on the pressing of the frame button 22, or based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, the first ball entry port 64). , It may be stopped and displayed. As a result, each reel is stopped and displayed based on the player's operation, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. Similarly, the trigger for starting the reel effect may be started based on the pressing of the frame button 22, or the passing of the game ball to a specific area (for example, the first entry port 64). , It may be started based on the number of balls entered into the specific winning opening 65a (so-called over winning).

In this control example, the probability variation opening effect for notifying that the probability variation game state is given at the start of the jackpot game is provided, but it may not be provided. As a result, it becomes impossible to determine whether or not the probabilistic gaming state is given at the time when the jackpot game is started, so that it is possible to pay attention to the effect during the jackpot game.

In this control example, the reel effect is configured to be executed once for one ticket given in the grant effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. The reel effect may be executed when a predetermined number or more are accumulated, the reel effect may be executed once for a plurality of tickets, or one ticket may be executed. The reel effect may be executed a plurality of times. Further, a reel effect in which the effective line is variable (for example, 3 lines) may be executed (displayed) according to the number of tickets to be consumed. The number of tickets to be consumed may be determined by lottery, or may be made selectable by the player. That is, the number of tickets granted by the grant effect may be stored, and the mode of the reel effect executed may be changed according to the number of stored tickets.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132, the continuous short reach effect executed in the second control example will be described. The continuous short reach effect is an effect of notifying that the next fluctuation becomes a big hit by executing the short reach three times in succession. In the continuous short reach effect in this control example, the winning information held in the winning information storage area 223a is 4 or more (that is, the holding is 4 or more balls), and the variation type is out of order and the winning information of the short variation is It is an effect that is executed when it is held continuously. The details of the conditions under which the execution of the continuous short reach effect is set will be described later with reference to the winning command receiving process 2 (FIG. 139).

Here, the flow in which the continuous short reach effect is set when the winning information that is a big hit is suspended, and the case where the back change (special back setting) based on the passage of time is executed during the execution of the continuous short reach effect. The transition effect displayed in is described. In this control example, regardless of the number of pending winning information (number of pending prizes), one of the short deviation variation and the long deviation variation is selected by lottery as the variation type.

First, as shown in FIG. 131 (a), as the winning information stored (held) in the winning information storage area 223a, the holding 1 has a short fluctuation, the holding 2 has a short fluctuation, and the holding 3 has a short fluctuation. When the winning information that is a big hit is held as the hold 6 in the state where the short fluctuation is stored in 4 and the short fluctuation is stored in the hold 5, as shown in FIG. 131 (b), from the hold that is the big hit. The winning information up to 3 years ago is changed (overwritten) so that it becomes a continuous short reach effect. As described above in the first control example, the area of the winning information storage area 223a is the area of hold 1 to hold 8, and the hold timing is oldest (that is, executed) in order from the hold 1 area. The winning information is stored.

Specifically, the winning information of hold 1 and hold 2 is not changed, hold 3 is changed to short reach (first time), hold 4 is changed to short reach (second time), and hold 5 is changed to short reach (third time) (overwrite). ). After three consecutive short reach is executed by these hold 3 to hold 5, the fluctuation that becomes a big hit is started.

After that, when the four fluctuations based on the hold 1 to the hold 4 are executed, as shown in FIG. 131 (c), the short reach (third time) is stored in the hold 1 and the jackpot winning information is stored in the hold 2. It becomes. On the screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this state, as shown in FIG. 132 (a), the characters "morning mode" indicating the current background (mode) are displayed on the left side of the area Dm1 at the upper part of the screen. The characters "2 consecutive reach times" indicating the number of consecutive short reach executed in the center of the area Dm1 are displayed, and the "ticket" indicating the number of tickets given by the grant effect is displayed in the right part of the area Dm1. The characters "x2" are displayed. The second short reach effect being executed is displayed in the area Dm2 in the center of the screen, and two circle figures are displayed in the area Ds1b indicating the current number of reserved balls in the area Ds at the bottom of the screen. It is shown that the number of reserved balls is two.

In this state, when the execution timing of the island interlocking effect is reached, the rear image is changed and the special rear image (background of the city mode) is set. If the back image is changed to the special back image during the execution of the continuous short reach effect, the transition effect shown in FIG. 132 (b) is executed. In this transition effect, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), the effect in which the tickets (here, two) given in the grant effect are given according to the number of consecutive short reach (here, two times) is displayed on the screen. It is displayed in the central area Dm2, and the display indicating the number of tickets on the right side of the area Dm1 at the upper part of the screen is updated according to the number of granted tickets. Further, the variation display displayed in the area Dm2 before the transition effect is displayed is variablely displayed in the area Dm3 at the lower right of the area Dm2 in a simple manner with only numbers, and is displayed in the center of the area Dm1. The display indicating the number of consecutive reach is hidden. Since the variable display is displayed in the area Dm3 in a simple manner with only numbers while the transition effect is displayed, it is suitable even if the display period of the transition effect straddles the timing when the next variation display is started. Variable display can be performed on.

When the back image is changed to the special back image (background of the city mode), the short reach (third time) of the hold 1 stored in the prize information storage area 223a is removed and short as shown in FIG. 131 (d). It is changed (overwritten) to the fluctuation, and the continuous short reach production is completed. As a result, the continuous short reach effect set before the back image is changed to the special back image can be ended at the timing when the back image is changed. As a result, the rear image and the effect of the variable display can be integrally executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<About the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 and the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed. The points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 133 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 133 (a), the ROM 222 in the present control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that the given effect selection table 222ba and the reel effect selection table 222bb are added, and the other points are the same. be. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the details of the grant effect selection table 222ba will be described with reference to FIG. 133 (b). FIG. 133 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the grant effect selection table 222ba. As shown in FIG. 133 (b), the grant effect selection table 222ba is a table in which the type of grant effect selected corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f is defined.

Specifically, for the value "0 to 179" of the effect counter 223f, "none" indicating that the imparted effect is not selected as the given effect type is specified. Since the effect counter 223f is a loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198, the probability that the given effect type "none" is selected is 180/198.

For the value "180 to 194" of the effect counter 223f, "granting effect A" indicating an effect in which one ticket is given is specified as the giving effect type. The probability that this grant effect A is selected is 15/198.

With respect to the value "195 to 198" of the effect counter 223f, "giving effect B" indicating an effect in which two tickets are given is specified as the giving effect type. The probability that this grant effect B is selected is 4/198.

By the grant effect selected based on the grant effect selection table 222ba, the grant effect to which the ticket is given is displayed. Whether or not the reel effect is executed in the jackpot game and the number of times the reel effect is executed are changed according to the number of tickets given by the given effect. As a result, the player can be expected to execute (display) the granting effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved. The details of the reel effect will be described in the reel effect setting process (see FIG. 137).

Next, the contents of the reel effect selection table 222bb will be described with reference to FIG. 133 (c). The reel effect selection table 222bb is a table for selecting an effect mode to be executed during the jackpot game according to the number of times the above-mentioned grant effect is executed and the ticket is granted. As shown in FIG. 133 (c), the reel effect selection table 222bb includes a short reel effect selection table 222bb1 that makes it easy to select a reel effect with a short effect time, and a long reel effect selection table that makes it easy to select a reel effect with a long effect time. 222bb2 is provided.

Here, the details of the short reel effect selection table 222bb1 and the long reel effect selection table 222bb2 will be described with reference to FIG. 134.

FIG. 134A is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the short reel effect selection table 222bb1. As shown in FIG. 134 (a), the short reel effect selection table 222bb1 defines the type of reel effect corresponding to the jackpot type and the value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot, a short reel effect with an effect time of 5 seconds is specified for the value "0 to 14" of the effect counter 223f, and the value "15 to" of the effect counter 223f is specified. A long reel effect with an effect time of 10 seconds is specified for "19", and a short reel effect with an effect time of 5 seconds is specified for the value "20 to 169" of the effect counter 223f. With respect to the value "170 to 198", a short reel production with a production time of 10 seconds is specified.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, a short reel effect with an effect time of 5 seconds is specified for the value "0 to 149" of the effect counter 223f, and the value "150 to 198" of the effect counter 223f. On the other hand, an off-length reel effect with an effect time of 10 seconds is specified.

Next, the details of the long reel effect selection table 222bb2 will be described with reference to FIG. 134 (b). FIG. 134 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the long reel effect selection table 222bb2. As shown in FIG. 134 (b), the long reel effect selection table 222bb2 defines the type of reel effect corresponding to the jackpot type and the value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot, a hit short reel effect is specified for the value "0 to 2" of the effect counter 223f, and a hit is applied to the value "3 to 19" of the effect counter 223f. The long reel effect is specified, the off-short reel effect is specified for the effect counter 223f value "20 to 149", and the off-long reel effect is specified for the effect counter 223f value "150 to 198". ..

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the off-short reel effect is specified for the value "0 to 99" of the effect counter 223f, and the off-long reel is specified for the value "100 to 198" of the effect counter 223f. The production is stipulated.

As described above, in the second control example, as the reel effect executed according to the value of the ticket counter 223bb during the jackpot game, a short reel effect with a short effect time and a long reel effect with a long effect time can be selected. It has become. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of reel production and improve the fun of the game.

In addition, a short reel effect selection table 222bb1 that makes it easy to select a short reel effect with a short effect time and a long reel effect selection table 222bb2 that makes it easy to select a long reel effect with a long effect time are provided, depending on the progress of the jackpot game. , Which table is used is variable. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the effect time of the reel effect from exceeding the execution time of the jackpot game, and to appropriately display the reel effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the details of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 135, the RAM 223 in the present control example has the promoted flag 223ba, the ticket counter 223bb, the reel effect setting timing 223bc, the reel effect timing counter 223bd, the continuous short reach counter 223be, and the continuous with respect to the RAM 223 in the first control example. The difference is that the short reach setting flag 223bf is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The promoted flag 223ba is a flag for determining whether or not an effect suggesting the transition to the probabilistic game state is executed (displayed) after the end of the jackpot game in the jackpot game, and if it is on, the probabilistic change is made. It indicates that the effect suggesting the transition to the gaming state has been executed (displayed) (or executed (displayed)), and when it is off, it indicates that it has not been executed (displayed). This promoted flag 223ba is set to ON when the winning reel effect is selected in the reel effect setting process (see FIG. 137) (see S4110 in FIG. 137). Further, it is set to ON when the probabilistic opening effect is selected in the opening effect setting process (see FIG. 141) (see S4106 in FIG. 141).

Then, in the jackpot command-related process 2 (FIG. 140), it is referred to when the ending command for the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot is received (see S3334 in FIG. 140), and the promoted flag 223ba is on (that is, that is). When it is already notified that the transition to the probabilistic gaming state has been made), the probabilistic ending effect indicating the ending of the probabilistic jackpot is selected as the ending effect of the jackpot game (see S3335 in FIG. 140). On the other hand, when the promoted flag 223ba is off (that is, when the transition to the probabilistic gaming state is not notified), promotion indicating that the probabilistic gaming state is subsequently given as the ending effect of the jackpot game. The ending is selected (see S3336 in FIG. 140). As a result, in the jackpot game, although it was notified that the game will shift to the normal game state, it is notified that the game will shift to the probabilistic game state, so that the privilege given has improved (so-called promotion). ) Can be given to the player, and the player's interest can be improved.

The ticket counter 223bb is a counter for counting the number of tickets given by the execution (displayed) grant effect. This ticket counter 223bb is added according to the selected grant effect when the grant effect is selected in the variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 143) (see S3535 in FIG. 143). Further, when a special back surface set based on the passage of time is set during the execution of the continuous short reach effect, the addition is made according to the number of times the continuous short reach effect is executed (that is, the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be). (See S3733 in FIG. 144). Then, it is referred to in the reel effect setting process (see FIG. 137), and the reel effect is executed (displayed) according to the value of the ticket counter 223bb during the execution of the jackpot game, and the reel effect is executed (displayed). Is subtracted by 1 (see S4016 in FIG. 137). Further, when the winning reel effect is executed (displayed), the value of the ticket counter 223bb is initialized to 0 because the reel effect is not executed (displayed) in the same big hit game thereafter (the value of the ticket counter 223bb is initialized to 0). See S4011 in FIG. 137).

The reel effect setting timing 223bc is an area in which a value indicating the setting timing of the reel effect is stored. Specifically, the timing for setting the reel effect is stored as the elapsed time (milliseconds) from the start of the jackpot game. When the value of the reel effect timing counter 223db, which will be described later, matches the reel effect setting timing 223bc, it is determined that it is the timing for setting the reel effect (see S4003 in FIG. 137).

The reel effect timing counter 223bad is a counter for counting the elapsed time (milliseconds) from the start of the jackpot game, and is a counter for determining the execution timing of the reel effect to be executed during the jackpot game. This reel effect timing counter 223bad is added one by one when it is determined in the reel effect setting process (see FIG. 137) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process 2 (see FIG. 136) that the jackpot game is in progress. (See S4002 in FIG. 137). Then, in the reel effect setting process (see FIG. 137), it is referred to for determining whether or not it is the setting timing of the reel effect (see S4003), and when the winning reel effect is executed, or the ticket counter 223bb. When the value becomes 0 (that is, when the reel effect is finished), it is cleared to 0 (see S4012 in FIG. 137).

The continuous short reach counter 223be is a counter for counting the number of times the short reach effect is continuously executed. The continuous short reach counter 223be is incremented by 1 when the variation pattern of the short reach is selected in the variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 143) (see S3537 in FIG. 143), and the variation pattern other than the short reach is selected. If so, it is initialized to 0 (see S3539 in FIG. 143). The value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is referred to when the special backside setting executed based on the passage of time is executed (see S3731 in FIG. 144), and the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is larger than 0 (see S3731 in FIG. 144). That is, when the continuous short reach effect is being executed), the transition effect corresponding to the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is displayed.

The continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is a flag for determining whether the continuous short reach effect has been set. When it is on, it indicates that the continuous short reach effect has been set, and when it is off, it indicates that the continuous short reach effect has been set. Indicates that the reach effect has not been set. This continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is set to on when the execution of the continuous short reach effect is set in the winning command reception process 2 (see FIG. 139) (see S3137 in FIG. 139). Then, in the jackpot-related command process 2 (see FIG. 140), it is set to off when an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot is received (see S3332 in FIG. 140). This continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is referred to in the winning command reception process 2 (see FIG. 139), and is configured to set the execution of the continuous short reach effect when the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is off. ing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the continuous short reach effect from being set in duplicate.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 144, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. This control example differs from the first control example described above in that the main process 2 (see FIG. 136) is executed instead of the main process (see FIG. 93). In the main process 2 (see FIG. 136), the reel effect setting process (see FIG. 137) is added to the main process (see FIG. 93) of the first control example, and the command determination process (see FIG. 101) is replaced. The command determination process 2 (see FIG. 138) is executed, the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 142) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 105), and the special back setting process (see FIG. 142) is executed. The difference is that the special back surface setting process 2 (see FIG. 144) is executed instead of 108) and the look-ahead effect selection process (see FIG. 109) is deleted, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 136. In the main process 2, the processes S2201 to S2211 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 93) in the first control example described above.

When the processing of S2211 is completed, the reel effect setting processing is executed (S2231), and the process proceeds to the processing of S2212. When the process shifts to the process of S2212, the command determination process 2 is executed (S2212), the variable display setting process 2 is executed (S2213), the special back surface setting process 2 is executed (S2214), and the process shifts to the process of S2216. After S2216, the processes of S2216 to S2219 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above.

Here, the details of the reel effect setting process (S2231) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 137. This reel effect setting process (S2231) is a process for executing (displaying) a reel effect according to the value of the ticket counter during the jackpot game.

In the reel effect setting process (S2231), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is being executed (S4001). If it is determined in the process of S4001 that the jackpot game has not been executed (S4001: No), it is not the timing to execute the reel effect, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4001 that the jackpot game is being executed (S4001: Yes), the value of the reel effect timing counter 223bad is used to count the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot game. Is added by 1 and updated (S4002), and based on the updated value of the reel effect timing counter 223bad and the value of the reel effect setting timing 223bc, it is determined whether or not the reel effect setting timing is reached (S4003). ..

If it is determined in the process of S4003 that it is not the setting timing of the reel effect (S4003: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4003, when it is determined that the reel effect setting timing is reached (S4003: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S4004), and whether or not the value of the ticket counter 223bb is larger than 5. Is determined (S4005).

In the process of S4005, if it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is larger than 5 (S4005: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the number of rounds of the jackpot game currently being executed is 8 or more. (S4006). In the process of S4006, when it is determined that the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 8 or more (S4006: Yes), the value of the ticket counter 223bb (that is, the remaining number of executions of the reel effect) remains large. , When the remaining time of the jackpot game is low. In this case, using the short reel effect selection table 222bb1 in which the reel effect with a short effect time is easily selected, the reel effect is selected based on the jackpot type and the value of the effect counter 223f (S4007), and the processing of S4009. Move to. This makes it possible to execute all the remaining reel effects in the remaining time of the jackpot game. If all the remaining reel effects cannot be executed, the value of the ticket counter 223bb may be inherited until the next jackpot game is executed without initializing the value.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4005 that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 5 or less (S4005: No), the value of the ticket counter 223bb is small (that is, the number of remaining executions of the reel effect) is small. Therefore, the reel effect is selected (S4008) using the long reel effect selection table 222bb2, which makes it easy to select the reel effect having a long effect time, and the process proceeds to S4009. As a result, in the jackpot game, the reel production does not end early, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, in the processing of S4006, when it is determined that the number of jackpot rounds currently being executed is smaller than 8 (S4006: No), the remaining time of the jackpot game is large, so that the reel has a long production time. Using the long reel effect selection table 222bb2 in which the effect is easily selected, the reel effect is selected (S4008), and the process proceeds to S4009. As a result, in the jackpot game, the reel production does not end early, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the process of S4009, it is determined whether or not the reel effect selected in the process of S4007 or S4008 is a winning reel effect (S4009). When it is determined in the processing of S4009 that the winning reel effect is selected (S4009: Yes), the promoted flag 223ba is set to ON (S4010), and the value of the ticket counter 223bb is cleared to 0 (S4011). , The reel effect setting timing 223 bc and the reel effect timing counter 223 bd are cleared (S4012), and the process proceeds to S4016.

On the other hand, in the process of S4009, when it is determined that the winning reel effect is not selected (that is, the off reel effect is selected) (S4009: No), then the value of the ticket counter 223bb is greater than 0. It is determined whether or not it is large (S4013).

In the process of S4013, when it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is larger than 0 (S4013: Yes), it is the case of executing the reel effect based on the value of the ticket counter 223bb, so it was selected. The timing at which the reel effect effect ends is updated as the reel effect setting timing value (S4014), the value of the ticket counter 223bb is decremented by 1 (S4015), and the process proceeds to S4016.

On the other hand, in the process of S4013, when it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 0 (S4013: No), the reel effect is not executed in the currently executed jackpot game. The process of S4012 is executed in order to clear the information, and the process proceeds to the process of S4016.

In the process of S4016, a display reel effect command indicating the reel effect selected in the process of S4007 or S4008 is set (S4016), and this process is terminated. The display reel effect command set in the process of S4016 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is the command output process (S2202) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. Inside, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display reel effect command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the reel effect corresponding to the received command.

In this way, the reel effect setting process (S2231) executes the reel effect according to the number of tickets granted by the grant effect during the jackpot game. In addition, the reel effect can be changed depending on the progress of the jackpot game (that is, the remaining time of the jackpot game), which is easier to select, a long reel effect with a long effect period or a short reel effect with a short effect period. Will be done. As a result, the reel effect can be suitably executed according to the game time of the jackpot game.

When a jackpot game with a short game time (for example, a jackpot of two rounds) is executed, a special reel effect (see FIG. 177) that consumes a large number of tickets granted by the grant effect is executed. May be good. As a result, even when a jackpot game with a short game time is executed, the reel effect can be suitably executed.

Specifically, it will be described with reference to FIG. 177. FIG. 177 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a reel effect executed during a jackpot game.

FIG. 177 (a) shows a display screen at the time when the jackpot game (two rounds) with a short game time is executed and the reel effect is started in the jackpot game when the number of tickets given by the grant effect is eight. An example is shown.

When the jackpot game of two rounds is executed, the reel effect is started at the timing when the first round is started. In this reel production, the probability that the three symbols are aligned (winning probability) is set to be different depending on the number of tickets consumed. Specifically, when the number of tickets consumed is 3, the winning probability is 80%, when the number of tickets consumed is 2, the winning probability is 60%, and the number of tickets consumed is 1. In the case of, the winning probability is 40%. The relationship between the number of tickets consumed and the winning probability is displayed in the center on the right side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the winning probability differs depending on the number of tickets consumed, and when the number of tickets consumed is large, the winning probability is set high, so that the three symbols are aligned. Can be expected from the player.

Then, the characters "two consumption tickets" indicating the number of tickets to be consumed are displayed on the upper part of the reel displayed as the reel effect, and the first variation display of the reel is executed. It should be noted that, in the first reel variation display, all the tickets (8 tickets) may be consumed, and the winning probability may be increased according to the number of all the consumed tickets.

When the first reel fluctuation display is completed, the screen shifts to the display screen shown in FIG. 177 (b). Specifically, the number of tickets is subtracted (consumed) from 8 to 6, the round of the jackpot game shifts to the 2nd round, and the second reel fluctuation display is started. In the second reel variation display, the reel on which three tickets are consumed is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the characters "The number of reels has increased" is displayed at the upper part. At the top of that, another reel that consumes 3 tickets is displayed. With these multiple (two) reels, a reel effect in which a total of 6 tickets are consumed is executed.

Since the winning probability when three tickets are consumed is 80%, the probability that one of the reels will be stopped and displayed in a specific mode (a mode in which three symbols are aligned) is 96%, which is a higher probability. It is a reel effect that is stopped and displayed in a specific mode. As a result, the player's interest can be improved, and the ticket given by the given effect can be consumed for all the jackpot games with a short effect time to execute the reel effect, so that the reel effect can be suitably executed.

In this way, by varying the effect mode of the reel effect according to the type of the jackpot game, the reel effect can be executed by using all the given tickets even in the jackpot game with a short game time. The reel effect can be suitably executed.

In the reel effect in which two reels are variablely displayed at the same time, one privilege (the number of jackpot rounds is increased to 16 rounds) is shown based on the fact that a specific display mode is stopped and displayed on one reel. Display) may be added, and another privilege (indication indicating that the gaming state shifts to the probabilistic gaming state) may be granted based on the fact that a specific display mode is stopped on the other reel.

In addition, the reel effect is executed during the jackpot game according to the number of tickets granted by the grant effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in order to suggest the current gaming state, the reel effect may be executed (displayed) during the execution of the variable display. Specifically, when a specific mode is displayed in the reel effect, it is notified that the current gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state (so-called latent probabilistic gaming state). As a result, even when the jackpot game is not executed, the effect based on the ticket given by the given effect can be executed, and the number of tickets can be suitably controlled. Further, the reel effect does not suggest the current gaming state, but may suggest whether or not there is winning information that is a big hit in the winning information storage area 223a.

When the reel effect is executed during the execution of the variable display, the reel effect effect mode (number of tickets to be consumed, effect time, etc.) is configured to be variable according to the variable time of the variable display. May be good. As a result, the reel effect can be suitably executed (displayed) according to the fluctuation time. Further, it may be configured to change the effect mode of the reel effect according to the timing when the rear surface change is executed.

Next, the details of the command determination process 2 (S2212) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 138. This command determination process 2 (S2212) executes the winning command receiving process 2 (see FIG. 139) instead of the winning command receiving process for the command determination process (see FIG. 101) of the first control example, and is a big hit. The difference is that the jackpot related command process 2 is executed instead of the related command process, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the command determination process 2 (S2212), the processes of S3001 to S3009 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example. Then, in the process of S3009, if it is determined that the winning command has been received (S3009: Yes), the winning command receiving process 2 is executed (S3010), and this process is terminated. The details of the winning command receiving process 2 (S3010) will be described later with reference to FIG. 139.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3009 that the winning command has not been received (S3009: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3011, and the processes of S3011 to S3013 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example.

If it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received in the process of S3013 (S3013: Yes), the jackpot-related command process 2 (S3014) is executed to end this process. The details of the jackpot-related command process 2 (S3014) will be described later with reference to FIG. 140.

Next, the details of the winning command receiving process 2 (S3010) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 139. The winning command receiving process 2 is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 138) that a winning command has been received.

In the winning command receiving process 2 (S3010), first, the received winning information command information is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S3101), and the process proceeds to the processing of S3131.

In the process of S3131, it is determined whether or not the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is off (S3131). If it is determined in the process of S3131 that the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is on (S3131: No), it means that the continuous short reach effect has already been set, so that the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3131 that the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is off (S3131: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is 4 or more prize information reserved in the prize information storage area 223a. Discrimination (S3132). If it is determined in the process of S3132 that the reserved winning information is 3 or less (S3132: No), the continuous short reach effect cannot be set, so that the process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S3132, when it is determined that there are 4 or more reserved winning information (S3132: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current winning information is the jackpot winning information (S3133). .. In the process of S3133, when it is determined that the winning information this time is a big hit (S3133: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223f is 19 or less (S3134).

In the process of S3134, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is larger than 19 (that is, the value of 20 to 198) (S3134: No), this process is performed without setting the continuous short reach effect. To finish.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3134, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is 19 or less (S3134: Yes), then all the winning information up to three before from the current winning information is out of order and the short fluctuation occurs. It is determined whether or not it is a variable type (S3135).

In the processing of S3135, if it is determined that all the winning information up to three previous prizes are out of order and not short fluctuations (S3135: No), this processing is performed as it is without setting the continuous short reach effect. finish.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3135, if it is determined that all the winning information up to three previous from the current winning information is out of the variation type of the short fluctuation (S3135: Yes), in order to set the continuous short reach effect. , The winning information up to three from the current winning information is overwritten with the variation type of the short reach (S3136), and the process proceeds to S3137.

In the process of S3133, when it is determined that the current winning information is out of order (S3133: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223f is 1 or less (S3138). In the process of S3138, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter is larger than 1 (that is, a value of 2 to 198) (S3138: No), this process is performed without setting the continuous short reach effect. To finish.

On the other hand, in the process of S3139, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is 1 or less (S3138: Yes), then all the winning information up to two before from the current winning information is out of order and the short fluctuation occurs. It is determined whether or not it is a variable type (S3139).

In the processing of S3139, if it is determined that all the winning information up to two previous prizes are not the variation type of the short fluctuation (S3139: No), the book without setting the continuous short reach effect. End the process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3139, if it is determined that the winning information up to two previous from the current winning information is out of the variation type of the short fluctuation (S3139: Yes), up to two previous from the current winning information. The winning information of is overwritten with the variation type of the short reach (S3140), and the process proceeds to the process of S3137.

In the process of S3137, the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf indicating that the continuous short reach effect has been set is set to ON (S3137), and this process is terminated.

As described above, when the winning information is a big hit, the continuous short reach effect is set if the value of the effect counter 223f updated in the range of 0 to 198 is 19 or less. That is, when the winning information is a big hit, the continuous short reach effect is set with a probability of 19/198 (about 10%). On the other hand, when the winning information is out of order, if the value of the effect counter 223f is 1 or less, the continuous short reach effect is set. That is, if the winning information is out of order, the continuous short reach effect is set with a probability of 2/198 (about 1%). As a result, when the continuous short reach effect is set, there is a high possibility that the winning information is a big hit. Therefore, by executing the continuous short reach effect, the player can expect the arrival of the big hit. , The interest of the player can be improved.

In this control example, regardless of the gaming state, when two or more out-of-short fluctuations are set as the fluctuation type, the continuous short reach effect is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the continuous short reach effect may be set only when the game is in a short game state. Further, it may be configured to change the probability that the continuous short reach effect is set according to the gaming state.

Next, the details of the jackpot-related command process 2 (S3014) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 140. The jackpot-related command process 2 (S3014) is determined to have received the jackpot-related command in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 138) in the same manner as the jackpot-related command process (see FIG. 104) of the first control example. This is the process that is executed when.

In the jackpot-related command process 2 (S3014), first, as a jackpot-related command, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S3301). When it is determined that the opening command has been received in the processing of S3301 (S3301: Yes), the opening effect setting processing is executed (S3331), the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is set to off (S3332), and this processing is performed. To finish.

Here, the details of the opening effect setting process (S3331) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 141. This opening effect setting process (S3331) is a process executed to set the opening effect when it is determined that the opening command has been received in the jackpot-related command process 2 (see FIG. 140).

In the opening effect setting process (S3331), first, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot (S4101). In the process of S4101, when it is determined that the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot (S4101: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the ticket counter 223bb is larger than 0 (S4102). In the process of S4102, when it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is larger than 0 (that is, the reel effect can be executed) (S4102: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S4103). , The value of the effect counter 223f is determined (S4104), and the opening effect is selected.

Specifically, in the process of S4104, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is 99 or less (that is, the value is 0 to 99) (S4104: Yes), the probabilistic opening effect is selected. (S4105), the promoted flag 223ba is set to ON (S4106), the value of the ticket counter 223bb is set to 0 (S4107), and the process proceeds to S4112.

On the other hand, in the process of S4104, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is 100 or more (that is, the value is 100 to 198) (S4104: No), the reel effect is executed during the jackpot game. Then, the process proceeds to S4109.

Further, in the process of S4101, when it is determined that the type of jackpot to be started is a normal jackpot (S4101: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the ticket counter 223bb is larger than 0 (S4101: No). S4108), a process for executing a reel effect is executed according to the determination result.

If it is determined in the process of S4108 that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is larger than 0 (S4108: Yes), the normal opening effect is selected in order to execute the reel effect (S4109), and the reel effect setting timing. 223bc is set (S4110), and the process proceeds to S4112.

On the other hand, in the process of S4108, when it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 0 (S4108: No), the reel effect cannot be executed. Therefore, the normal opening effect is selected (S4111). The process proceeds to S4112.

In the process of S4112, a display opening effect command indicating the opening effect selected in any of the processes of S4105, S4109, and S4111 is set (S4112), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, when the jackpot game based on the probabilistic jackpot is executed, the opening effect is the same as when the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot game is executed (that is, after the jackpot game). There is a possibility that an effect) indicating that the game state will be changed to the normal game state) will be selected. In this case, by displaying a specific mode (display in which three symbols are aligned) in the reel effect executed during the jackpot game, it is notified that the game shifts to the probabilistic game state. As a result, even if the opening effect based on the normal jackpot game is displayed, the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific mode (display in which three symbols are aligned) will be displayed in the subsequent reel effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the player's game.

Returning to FIG. 140, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3301 that the opening command has not been received (S3301: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S3301).

When it is determined that the round number command has been received in the processing of S3303 (S3303: Yes), the processing of S3304 and S3305 is executed in the same manner as the jackpot related command processing (see FIG. 104) in the first control example. This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3303, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S3303: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S3306). If it is determined in the process of S3306 that the ending command has not been received (S3306: No), this process ends as it is. In the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 138), the ending command is not received (that is, various jackpot-related commands are not received) even though it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received. If it is determined that an error has occurred, it is possible that an error has occurred, so error processing indicating the occurrence of the error (for example, outputting a sound indicating the occurrence of the error, setting a display error command, etc.) should be performed. You may do it. This makes it possible to promptly notify the occurrence of an abnormality.

On the other hand, in the process of S3306, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S3306: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot game being executed is based on the probability variation jackpot (S3333). In the process of S3333, when it is determined that the jackpot game being executed is based on the normal jackpot (S3333: No), the normal ending indicating that the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot ends is selected (S3333: No). S3337), the process proceeds to S3338.

In the process of S3333, when it is determined that the jackpot game being executed is based on the probability variation jackpot (S3333: Yes), it is determined whether or not the promoted flag 223ba is on (S3334).

In the process of S3334, when it is determined that the promoted flag 223ba is on (S3334: Yes), it is a case where it has already been notified that the game will shift to the probabilistic gaming state after the jackpot game, so it is based on the probabilistic jackpot. The probability variation ending indicating that the jackpot game is completed is selected (S3335), and the process proceeds to S3338.

On the other hand, in the process of S3334, when it is determined that the promoted flag 223ba is off (S3334: No), it is not notified that the game shifts to the probabilistic game state after the big hit game, and the normal game is performed after the big hit game. Since the effect of shifting to the state (similar to the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot) has been executed, the gaming state transitioned after the jackpot game has changed (promoted) from the normal gaming state to the probabilistic gaming state. The promotion ending indicating that is selected (S3336), and the process proceeds to S3338. By the processing of S3336, it is possible to give the player the impression that the privilege to be given has improved (so-called promotion), and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In the process of S3338, a display ending command indicating the ending effect selected in the processes of S3335 to S3337 is set, and this process ends.

Next, the details of the variable display setting process 2 (S2213) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 142. The variation display setting process 2 (S2213) replaces the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 106) with respect to the variation display setting process (see FIG. 105) of the first control example, and the variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 143). The difference is that it is changed to execute, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variation display setting process 2 (S2213), first, the processes of S3401 to S3403 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example, then the variation pattern selection process 2 is set (S3404), and the process proceeds to the process of S3405. After S3405, the processes of S3405 to S3411 are executed and the present process is terminated as in the first control example.

Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the details of the variation pattern selection process 2 (S3404) executed in the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 142) will be described. The variation pattern selection process 2 (S3404) is a process for selecting a variation pattern display mode according to the variation pattern command notified from the main control device 110 and setting a display variation pattern command. Further, in the variation display executed by the set variation pattern, it is a process for selecting whether or not to execute the grant effect and setting a display grant effect command for displaying the selected grant effect. ..

In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S3404), first, in order to set the variation pattern, S3501 to S3506 (excluding the process of S3504) are executed in the same manner as the variation pattern selection process in the first control example, and the imparting effect is set. Therefore, the process proceeds to S3531. In the process of S3531, it is determined whether or not the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 8 or less (S3531). If it is determined in the process of S3531 that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 9 or more (S3531: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3536 without setting the grant effect. This prevents the occurrence of a problem that the value of the ticket counter 223bb becomes excessively large and the reel effect executed (displayed) based on the value of the ticket counter 223bb cannot be executed (displayed) during the jackpot game. Can be (suppressed).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3531 that the ticket counter is 8 or less (S3531: Yes), the grant effect is selected from the grant effect selection table 222ba based on the value of the effect counter 223f (S3532). Then, in the process of S3532, it is determined whether or not the grant effect is selected (S3533), and if it is determined that the grant effect is selected (S3533: Yes), a display grant indicating the selected grant effect is given. The effect command is set (S3534), the value of the ticket counter 223bb is added according to the selected grant effect (S3535), and the process proceeds to S3536. In the process of S3535, specifically, when the grant effect A is selected, the value of the ticket counter 223bb is incremented by 1, and when the grant effect B is selected, the value of the ticket counter 223bb is incremented by 2. .. Therefore, in this control example, when the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 8 or less, the grant effect can be selected. In this case, when the grant effect B is selected, the value of the ticket counter 223bb becomes 10 which is the maximum value. Become.

Not limited to this, the ratio at which the grant effect is selected may be changed according to the value of the ticket counter 223bb. For example, when the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 8, it may be configured so that the value of the ticket counter 223bb becomes 9 at the maximum by giving only the grant effect A.

Further, the ratio at which the granting effect is selected may be changed according to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. For example, when the winning information that is a probable change jackpot is stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the ratio of selecting the grant effect may be increased.

If it is determined in the process of S3533 that the grant effect is not selected (S3533: No), the processes of S3534 and S3535 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3536.

In the process of S3536, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern selected in the process of S3505 has a short reach (S3536). In the process of S3536, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is short reach (S3536: Yes), the continuous short reach counter 223be is added by 1 (S3537), and the rear change prohibition flag 223u is set to ON (S3537). S3538), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3536 that the fluctuation pattern is not short reach (S3536: No), the continuous short reach counter 223be is initialized to 0 (S3539), and this process is terminated.

By setting the back change prohibition flag 223u to ON in the process of S3538, the change of the back image based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is not executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 94). Here, if the rear image is changed during the execution of the continuous short reach effect, the continuous short reach effect ends in the middle. On the other hand, in this control example, the rear image is not changed even if the frame button 22 is pressed during the execution of the continuous short reach effect. As a result, even if the player is excited or mistakenly presses the frame button 22, the rear image is not changed, so that the continuous short reach effect is prevented (suppressed) from being terminated in the middle. can. Of course, an image such as a character image may be displayed based on the pressing of the frame button 22 during the continuous short reach effect so that the continuous short reach effect is continued.

Next, the details of the special back surface setting process 2 (S2214) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 144. In the special back setting process 2, the transition effect is displayed when the back image is changed to the special back image during the execution of the continuous short reach effect for the special back setting process (FIG. 108) in the first control example. It differs in that it is set to the same, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the special back surface setting process 2 (S2214), first, the processes S3701 to S3703 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example. In the processing of S3703, when it is determined that the special back switching timing is based on the time information acquired from RTC292 in the processing of S3702 (S3703: Yes), then whether the value of the continuous short reach counter 223bf is larger than 0. Whether or not it is determined (S3731).

When it is determined in the process of S3731 that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223bf is larger than 0 (S3731: Yes), a transition effect corresponding to the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be indicating the number of executions of the continuous short reach is shown. A display transition effect command is set (S3732). The display transition effect command set by the process of S3732 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is the command output process (S2002) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. Inside, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display transition effect command, the display control device 114 displays a transition effect in which a ticket is given according to the number of continuous short reach. As a result, the background screen is switched during the execution of the continuous short reach, and even if the continuous short reach effect ends, the effect that the ticket is given is displayed, so that the player is dissatisfied. Can be suppressed (prevented).

When the processing of S3732 is completed, the value of the ticket counter 223bb is updated according to the transition effect set in the processing of S3732 (S3733), the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is initialized to 0, and the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is completed. Is set to off (S3734), and the process proceeds to S3735.

In the process of S3735, the variation type corresponding to the transferred special back surface is reselected and overwritten (S3735) with respect to the prize information whose variation type is short reach, which is stored in the prize information storage area 223a, and the process of S3704 is performed. Move to. By the process of S3735, the variation can be executed (displayed) by the variation type according to the set special back surface.

On the other hand, if the value of the continuous short reach counter 223bf is determined to be 0 in the processing of S3731 (S3731: No), the processing of S3732 to S3735 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S3704.

When the process shifts to the process of S3704, the processes of S3704 to S3707 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example, and the present process is terminated.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the display control device in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described. This control example differs from the first control example described above in that reel effect command processing, transition effect command processing, and grant effect command processing are added in the command determination process (see FIG. 145), and other points are different. It is the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 145. In the command determination process, the processes S6401 to S6411 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 113) in the first control example described above.

Then, in the process of S6410, when it is determined that the display ending command has not been received (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not the display reel effect command has been received (S6431).

If it is determined that the display reel effect command has been received in the process of S6431 (S6431: Yes), the reel effect command process is executed (S6432), and the process returns to the process of S6401. The details of the reel effect command processing (S6432) will be described later with reference to FIG. 146 (a).

On the other hand, in the process of S6431, when it is determined that the display reel effect command has not been received (S6431: No), then it is determined whether or not the display shift effect command has been received (S6433).

If it is determined that the display transition effect command has been received in the process of S6433 (S6433: Yes), the transfer effect command process is executed (S6434), and the process returns to the process of S2601. The details of the transition effect command process (S6434) will be described later with reference to FIG. 146 (b).

On the other hand, in the process of S6433, when it is determined that the display transition effect command has not been received (S6433: No), then it is determined whether or not the display grant effect command has been received (S6435). If it is determined in the processing of S6435 that the display grant effect command has been received (S6435: Yes), the grant effect command process is executed to display the grant effect during the execution (display) of the variable display. (S6436), the process returns to the process of S6401. The details of the grant effect command process (S6436) will be described later with reference to FIG. 147.

On the other hand, in the process of S6435, when it is determined that the display transition effect command has not been received (S6435: No), the processes of S6416 to S6420 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example, and the process of S2601 is executed. Return to.

Next, the details of the reel effect command processing (S6432) will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (a). FIG. 146 (a) is a flowchart showing the reel effect command processing. This reel effect command process executes the process corresponding to the display reel effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the reel effect command processing, first, a reel effect display data table corresponding to the reel effect indicated by the display reel effect command is determined, and the determined reel effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S8501). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the reel effect display data table is determined, and the determined transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8502).

Then, based on the reel effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8501, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S8503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8504). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S8505), the reel effect command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Next, the details of the transition effect command processing (S6433) will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (b). FIG. 146 (b) is a flowchart showing the transition effect command process (S6433). This transition effect command process (S6443) executes a process corresponding to the display transition effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the transition effect command processing, first, a transition effect display data table corresponding to the transition effect indicated by the display transition effect command is determined, and the determined transition effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S8601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8602).

Then, based on the transition effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S8603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8604). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S8605), the transition effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Next, the details of the grant effect command processing (S6436) will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the grant effect command process (S6436). The grant effect command process (S6436) executes a process corresponding to the display grant effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the grant effect command processing, first, a grant effect display data table corresponding to the grant effect indicated by the display grant effect command is determined, and the determined grant effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S8701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8702).

Then, based on the given effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S8703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S8705), the granting effect command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

As described above, in the second control example, the grant effect to which the ticket (privilege) is given is displayed as the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the ticket given in the grant effect is displayed. Depending on the number of cards, the reel effect is displayed during the jackpot game. In the reel effect, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a mode in which the three symbols are aligned (one of "○○○", "△△△", and "□□□"), and the probable change game state after the jackpot game. Is given (that is, the winning of the probable change jackpot). Since this reel effect is configured to be executed (displayed) during the jackpot game after the normal opening effect indicating that the normal game state is given after the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game is started. At that time, the player who was aware that the normal gaming state is granted can be notified that the game will shift to the probabilistic gaming state, so the impression that the privilege granted has improved (so-called promotion). Can be given to the player, and the player's interest can be improved.

In this control example, it is configured to suggest a game state that shifts after the jackpot game depending on the effect mode of the reel effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to suggest the number of rounds of the jackpot game. Specifically, if the reel effect is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (a mode in which three symbols are aligned), the jackpot game is executed up to 16 rounds, and if not, the jackpot game ends in 8 rounds. It may be configured as. Further, depending on the number of tickets given and the type of tickets, it is natural that a specific mode may be easily stopped and displayed in the reel effect.

Further, the opportunity for the ticket to be granted is defined as the case where the grant effect is displayed during the execution of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a ticket may be given based on the fact that a game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a, or a predetermined number or more of game balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a (so-called over winning). The ticket may be granted based on the above. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the opportunity for the ticket to be given, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the second control example, the granting effect of granting a ticket is executed based on the result of the lottery as to whether or not to grant the ticket, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a ticket may be given when a predetermined variation pattern (for example, fish school reach) is executed as a variation display for displaying a lottery result of a special symbol. Further, a ticket may be given when all of a plurality of predetermined fluctuation patterns are executed. In this case, the effect (or a combination of a plurality of effects) to which the ticket is given can be selected by the player, and the variation pattern (for example, normal reach) that is executed less frequently than the variation pattern (for example, normal reach) that is executed more frequently (for example). For example, it is advisable to increase the number of tickets given to those who select Super Reach).

With this configuration, in addition to the fun of knowing the lottery result, you can get a ticket (a privilege that is not based on the special symbol lottery) for the variable display for displaying the lottery result of the special symbol. ) Since it is possible to provide fun, it is possible to enhance the effect of production. In addition, the player can select (set) the conditions (for example, fluctuation patterns) for which the tickets are given, and the number of tickets given is different based on the difficulty of achieving the selected (set) conditions. By doing so, it is possible to make the player play the game while predicting the fluctuation display to be executed in the future, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, when the game is terminated with the ticket acquired, a specific effect right erasing means for erasing the acquired ticket may be provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the acquired ticket from being used by the next player. Further, the information regarding the acquired ticket may be displayed in a mode (for example, password information or two-dimensional code information) that can be acquired by the player. As a result, by inputting information about the ticket acquired when the next game is executed, the ticket acquired in the previous game may be continuously used. This makes it possible to increase the motivation to participate in the next game.

In the second control example, the ratio at which the effect of giving a ticket is executed is always constant regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, but the effect of giving a ticket is executed based on the gaming state. It may be configured to change the ratio, for example, a game state in which it is easy to win a big hit (a time-saving game state in which a lottery of a special symbol is easier to be executed than in a normal game state, or a special symbol than in a normal game state). When a high-probability gaming state, etc., in which the probability of winning in the lottery is high) is set, it is preferable to make it easier for the ticket to be given than in the normal gaming state. As a result, when the period until the jackpot game is executed (time or the number of lottery of special symbols) is short, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of tickets to be given, regardless of the game state. It is possible to perform a production during a jackpot game (reel production using a ticket).

In addition, if the number of tickets won is small (or none), such as immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or immediately after the jackpot game ends (after the jackpot game using all the tickets acquired in the jackpot game ends), the jackpot is won. If this happens, there is a risk that the effect using the ticket cannot be executed (the number of times it can be executed decreases) during the jackpot game. Therefore, immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or immediately after the jackpot game is completed, it is preferable to execute an effect in which a ticket is given under conditions different from the lottery (variation) of the special symbol. For example, if the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) or the game ball enters the entry slot provided in the game board 13, a ticket is given to the player. good. With this configuration, even if the jackpot is won immediately after the power is turned on or immediately after the jackpot is finished, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect using the ticket cannot be executed during the jackpot game.

In the second control example, the ticket granting effect in which the ticket is granted based on the game for the pachinko machine 10 is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine 10 is not in operation. However, the ticket-giving effect may be configured to be executed, and for example, the ticket-giving effect may be executed when the RTC (real-time clock) clocks a predetermined time. As a result, the number of tickets can be automatically increased on the pachinko machine 10 in which the player is not playing, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to play the game.

Further, in the second control example, an effect using the acquired ticket is executed during the jackpot, and the gaming state set after the jackpot game is completed based on the result of the effect is a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example,). , It is configured to notify whether or not it is a probabilistic game state), but the acquired ticket may be used for other purposes. For example, in a game state (so-called latent probability change state) in which it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the currently set game state is a game state advantageous to the player, the effect using the acquired ticket is executed. , An effect of suggesting (notifying) the current gaming state to the player as a result of the effect may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute the effect during the hit game (for example, the small hit game) in which the game state is not changed. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect using the acquired ticket even when the jackpot game is not executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by executing the effect during the period during which the hit game (small hit game) in which the game state is not changed is executed, it becomes easy to divert at least a part of the effect data of the effect executed during the big hit game. Therefore, the amount of data used for the production can be reduced.

Further, it is preferable to determine the period during which the effect to be executed using the ticket acquired by the player can be executed, and to set a specific effect from a plurality of effects based on the determination result. Thereby, for example, when a selection period for allowing the player to select whether or not to execute the effect is set and the player selects to execute the effect during the selection period, the effect differs according to the remaining effect enable period. The production can be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored at an early stage. In addition, by providing a plurality of effects having different effect periods as the effects executed by using the tickets acquired by the player, for example, at various timings during the jackpot game and various jackpot games with different jackpot game periods. It is possible to execute a production using the ticket acquired by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in this control example, it is configured to notify that a ticket has been granted by the grant effect and to notify the number of tickets granted, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of tickets granted may not be displayed. Further, the imparting effect may be in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize (for example, bubbles are displayed in a part of the background). As a result, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be focused on, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to add unexpectedness when the reel effect is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the second control example, when the winning information is held based on the winning of the game ball, the variation type is removed and the short-changing winning information is continuously held before the holding. Based on this, those deviation short fluctuations are changed (overwritten) to the variation type of the short reach, and the continuous short reach effect is executed. When the winning information that becomes a big hit is reserved based on the winning of the game ball, the short reach is set to be executed three times in a row as a continuous short reach effect, and the winning information that is out of order is reserved. Is set so that the short reach is executed twice in succession as a continuous short reach effect. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the short reach will be executed three times in a row in the continuous short reach production, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In this control example, the short variation is changed (overwritten) to the variation type of the short reach, and the continuous short reach effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to execute a continuous short reach effect regardless of the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Specifically, when the short reach variation is executed, the effect is controlled so that the short reach effect is executed once, and when the long deviation variation is executed, the short reach effect is pseudo 2 The effect may be controlled so that it is executed once (so-called pseudo-ream). As a result, it is possible to execute the continuous short reach effect even when the deviation short variation is not continuous as the variation display of the special symbol.

Further, although it is configured to change (overwrite) the variation type of the out-of-short fluctuation to the variation type of the short reach, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the stop type may be changed to the reach mode without changing the variable type. As a result, even if a plurality of types of variable times are provided, the stop display can be easily displayed in the reach mode (specific mode) only by changing the stop type.

In the second control example, when the continuous short reach effect is executed, the change of the rear image based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is not executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the continuous short reach effect executed over a plurality of fluctuations gives the player the impression that the rear image is temporarily interrupted due to the change of the rear image. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. Further, when the continuous short reach effect is executed, the rear image is changed based on the passage of time (that is, the rear image is changed in synchronization with a plurality of gaming machines, so-called island interlocking effect). When is executed), it is configured so that the rear image can be changed. As a result, the change of the rear image based on the passage of time (so-called island interlocking effect) is executed without delay, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In this case, the continuous short reach effect is terminated in the middle, and a privilege (ticket used in the reel effect described above) is given according to the progress of the completed continuous short reach effect. As a result, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction felt by the player when the continuous short reach effect ends in the middle.

It should be noted that, when the continuous short reach effect is being executed, the rear image may be changed based on the pressing of the frame button 22. Even when the rear image is changed based on the pressing of the frame button 22, the transition effect may be displayed, or when the rear image is changed based on the pressing of the frame button 22. Of course, the continuous short reach effect may be configured to be continuously executed.

In the second control example, the eight hold effect is not executed in the first control example described above, but the eight hold effect may be configured to be executable.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 161. In the first control example described above, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected or when it is detected that a specific time zone has been reached, only the rear image displayed on the rear side of the third symbol is changed. Was supposed to be. That is, the configuration is such that only the rear image is switched while maintaining the mode of the third symbol and the reserved symbol, and the image data for displaying the third symbol and the image data for displaying the reserved symbol are common.

On the other hand, in the third control example, a stage (rear surface D) in which the third symbol and the reserved symbol can be switched to different modes is provided together with the rear image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the third control example, a hold notice effect is provided in which the display mode of the hold symbol is changed according to the expectation degree of the winning information (hold ball) corresponding to the hold symbol. In this hold notice effect, the player can be made to recognize the expectation level of a big hit according to the mode of the hold symbol, so that the hold ball is set before the variable display corresponding to the hold symbol is started. You can have a sense of expectation.

If the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed and the display mode is switched to the back surface D, the display mode of the reserved symbol is also changed in conjunction with the rear image. In this control example, when the hold notice effect is set and the back side D is switched to, the hold notice effect is changed to the hold notice effect corresponding to the back surface D. As a result, it is possible to set the effect mode corresponding to the changed back type while continuing the hold notice effect before and after the change of the back type.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The configuration of the work RAM 233 provided in the display control device 114 has been partially changed, the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been changed, and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has changed. The point is that some of the processing to be executed has changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and other processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in 1 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149. In FIG. 148 (a), when the back surface A is set as the back surface type, the hold notice effect is set in the hold symbol HY1 which is the third hold symbol from the right among the hold symbols displayed in the hold display area Ds1b. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the case.

As shown in FIG. 148 (a), the reserved symbol HY1 in which the reserved notice effect is set is set to a color different from that of the other reserved symbols. This color change is basically continued until the reserved symbol HY1 is moved to the execution display area and the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol HY1 is completed. Although the details will be described later, in the hold notice effect, the hold symbol is changed to one of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors. The expectation of a big hit is set so that blue is the lowest and the expectation is higher in the order of green, red, and rainbow. As a result, when the hold notice effect occurs, it is possible to pay attention to the color in which the target hold symbol changes, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148 (b), a display mode when the back surface D is set will be described. The back surface D may be set by the player operating the frame button 22 during a period in which the back surface type can be changed. Specifically, in the third control example, the back surface type is changed in the order of back surface A → back surface B → back surface C → back surface D → back surface A → ... According to the operation for the frame button 22. As described above, when the back surface D is set, the display mode of the third symbol and the display mode of the reserved symbol change in addition to the back surface type. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 148 (b), the third symbol is changed to a mode composed of only numbers with respect to the main display area Dm. Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls by the number of reserved symbols, the mode is changed to display the number of reserved balls numerically with respect to the reserved ball number display area Ds1c in the small display area Ds. Further, the characters "simple mode" are displayed above the main display area Dm. In this way, when the back surface D is set, the third symbol and the reserved symbol become a simple and easy-to-understand display mode, so that beginners of the game and players who are not good at lively production can play the game with peace of mind. Can be done.

It should be noted that the display mode of the reserved symbol at the time of the change is the same depending on whether the back surface D is changed with the hold notice effect set or not. On the back surface D, when the fluctuation is stopped, an effect corresponding to the hold notice effect (special hold notice effect) is executed. The details of this special hold notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 (a) and 149 (b).

FIGS. 149 (a) and 149 (b) are views showing a display mode when the hold notice is set and the back surface D is changed, and the variation display that was being executed at the time of the change is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 149 (a), when the fluctuation is stopped, both the mode of the third symbol and the mode of the reserved symbol are displayed in the same manner as when the special reserved notice effect is not set. In addition, the special hold notice effect is executed for 0.1 seconds out of 0.5 seconds when the third symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149 (b), the number "3" is displayed on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81 for 0.1 seconds during the stop display. This number "3" is displayed until the hold symbol HY1 for which the hold notice effect is set before the back type is changed to the back D is moved to the execution display area (variation display corresponding to the hold symbol HY1 starts). It shows the remaining number of fluctuations (until it is done). That is, every time the variation display is executed and the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the number shown in FIG. 149 (b) is displayed for 0.1 seconds, and the number is subtracted and displayed by 1 for each variation display. .. As a result, the player who visually recognizes the numbers can easily understand the start timing of the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol HY1 for which the reserved notice effect has been set.

The color of the numbers displayed in the special hold notice effect (see FIG. 149 (b)) is set to the same color as the color of the hold symbol in the hold notice effect that was set before the change to the back surface D. .. For example, when the player switches to the back surface D by operating the frame button 22 in a state where the hold notice effect to be changed to the red hold notice effect is set, the special hold notice effect (FIG. 149 (b)). The color of the numbers displayed in (see) is also set to red. The same applies to other colors.

As described above, in the third control example, as a kind of back surface type (stage), a back surface D is provided in which the display mode of the third symbol and the reserved symbol can be changed in addition to the rear image. On the back surface D, the display mode of the third symbol is changed to a simple mode composed of only numbers, and the mode of the reserved symbol is also changed to a simple mode in which the number of reserved balls is indicated by numbers. Since the reserved symbol is different from the other back types (backs A to C), the hold notice effect set for the other back types cannot be applied to the back D as it is.

However, if the back surface D is changed and the hold notice effect is cut off, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the number of the hold ball for which the hold notice effect is set. be. In addition, since the hold notice effect has been discontinued, there is a risk that the player may be suspicious that the hold ball for which the hold notice effect has been set has disappeared. On the other hand, when the hold notice effect is set, it is also conceivable to display each hold symbol including the hold symbol HY1 for which the hold notice effect is set as it is even after the change to the back surface D. However, the display mode of the third symbol and the display mode of the reserved symbol do not match, and there is a possibility that the display content may be uncomfortable for the player.

On the other hand, in the third control example, the display mode is the same when the back surface D is changed, regardless of whether or not the hold notice effect is set for any of the hold symbols. is doing. Then, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of fluctuations until the variation display based on the hold ball for which the hold notice effect is set is executed is displayed for 0.1 seconds. With this configuration, the special hold notice effect can be executed without changing the mode of the hold symbol or the mode of the third symbol. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the hold notice effect is set, the back surface. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the display content of D from causing a sense of discomfort. Further, by configuring the configuration to execute the special hold notice effect at the timing of the stop display of the third symbol that the player pays the most attention to, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player misses the special hold notice effect.

In this control example, the special hold notice effect is executed for 0.1 seconds while the third symbol is stopped and displayed, but the timing and period for displaying the special hold notice effect are arbitrarily determined. You may.

In this control example, as a special hold notice effect, the remaining number of fluctuations until the fluctuation display based on the hold ball with high expectation is started is displayed on the full screen for 0.1 seconds, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, when the back surface D is changed in the state where the hold notice effect is set (see FIG. 148 (a)), a character indicating the remaining number of times until the hold symbol HY1 is supported and the expected degree of the hold symbol HY1. The symbol or the like may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, for example, the character "something may happen in three more times !?" may be displayed on the right side of the reserved ball number display area Ds1c. Further, for example, when the start timing of the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the reserved notice effect is set is reached, the reserved symbol having the same mode as the reserved symbol displayed before the back type is changed is reduced. It may be configured to be displayed in the display area Ds.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 152. First, the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222.

As shown in FIG. 150, the ROM 222 in the third control example is different in that the hold notice execution determination table 222dc is provided in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example. The hold notice execution determination table 222dc is a table referred to when determining whether or not to execute the hold notice effect. In the third control example, every time a new winning information command is received from the main control device 110, the hold notice execution determination table 222dc is referred to to determine whether or not to set the hold notice effect, and to determine whether to set the hold notice effect. The mode (color of the reserved symbol) is determined. The details of the hold notice execution determination table 222dc will be described with reference to FIG. 151.

FIG. 151 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the hold notice execution determination table 222dc. As shown in FIG. 151, in the hold notice execution determination table 222dc, the range of the value of the effect counter and the type of the hold notice effect (color of the hold symbol) are associated with each type of winning information (lottery result). It is stipulated.

Specifically, when the winning information is a winning super reach, "rainbow color" is defined as a notice type in association with the value "0" of the effect counter 223f. Further, the value of the effect counter 223f is defined in association with "red" as the notice type for the range of "1 to 12", and "green" corresponds to the range of "13 to 22" as the notice type. It is specified with the addition, and "blue" is specified as a notice type in association with the range of "23, 24". On the other hand, since the range of "25 to 198" is not specified, continuous notice effect is set when the hold notice execution determination table 222dc is referred to while the value of the effect counter 223f is within this range. Not done.

On the other hand, when the winning information is a winning normal reach, the value of the effect counter 223f is defined as "red" in association with the range of "0 to 7" as the advance notice type. Further, the value of the effect counter 223f is defined in the range of "8 to 13" in association with "green" as the advance notice type, and the value "14" of the effect counter 223f is associated with "blue" as the advance notice type. It is stipulated. On the other hand, since the range of "15 to 198" is not specified, continuous notice effect is set when the hold notice execution determination table 222dc is referred to while the value of the effect counter 223f is within this range. Not done. Since the hit normal reach has more random values (counter values) for which the continuous notice effect is not set than the hit super reach, the hit super reach can be expected at the stage when the hold notice effect is set.

When the winning information is lost and the super reach is reached, the value of the effect counter 223f is defined as "red" as the advance notice type with respect to the range of "90,91". Further, the value of the effect counter 223f is defined in the range of "92 to 98" in association with "green" as the advance notice type, and the value "99" of the effect counter 223f is associated with "blue" as the advance notice type. It is stipulated. On the other hand, since the range of "0 to 89, 100 to 198" is not specified, when the hold notice execution determination table 222dc is referred to while the value of the effect counter 223f is within this range, it is continuous. No notice effect is set. Since the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the execution of the continuous notice effect is set smaller than the hit super reach and the hit normal reach, it is possible to expect a big hit when the hold notice effect is set. can.

When the winning information is lost and the normal reach is reached, "green" is specified as the advance notice type in association with the value "98" of the effect counter 223f. Further, "blue" is specified as a notice type in association with the value "99" of the effect counter 223f. On the other hand, since the range of "0 to 97, 100 to 198" is not specified, when the hold notice execution determination table 222dc is referred to while the value of the effect counter 223f is within this range, it is continuous. No notice effect is set. Since the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the execution of the continuous notice effect is set smaller than the hit super reach, the hit normal reach, and the off super reach, it will be a big hit when the hold notice effect is set. You can expect it.

As shown in FIG. 151, the notice type of "rainbow color" can be selected only by "hit super reach". As a result, it is confirmed that the jackpot will be a big hit when the reserved symbol becomes "rainbow-colored", so that the player will be a jackpot until the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol of "rainbow-colored" is executed. It is possible to play a game while giving a sense of superiority to the fact that it has been detected in advance. In addition, the notice type of "red" is configured so that it is not selected in the off-normal reach. As a result, when the notice type of "red" occurs, it will be a big hit or it will be confirmed that it will develop into super reach, so I strongly expect the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved symbol that changed to "red". Can be made to.

Next, the configuration of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 152 (a). FIG. 152A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 152 (a), the work RAM 233 of the third control example has a new hold notice command flag 233 da and a hold notice information storage area in addition to the configuration of the work RAM 233 in the first control example (see FIG. 74). 233db is provided. Further, as a type of display data table stored in the data table storage area 233b, various display data tables corresponding to the back surface D are provided. The various display data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b are transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 when the power is turned on, like the other display data tables.

The new hold notice command flag 233da is a flag for determining whether or not to set the hold notice effect. If the new hold notice command flag 233da is on, it means that the hold notice effect is set (the mode of the hold symbol is changed), and if it is off, it means that the hold notice effect is not performed. The new hold notice command flag 233da is set to on when the display hold notice command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S9001 in FIG. 158 (a)). Further, the new hold notice command flag 233da is referred to in various image setting processes 3 (see S7552 in FIG. 161), and is set to off when the image data for the hold notice effect is expanded (S7555 in FIG. 161). reference). As a result, it is possible to display an image of the hold symbol corresponding to the display hold notice command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The hold notice information storage area 233db is a storage area for storing data indicating the content of the set hold notice effect. The hold notice information storage area 233db is provided with a dedicated storage area for each hold symbol, and data corresponding to the type of hold notice set for each hold symbol is stored in each storage area. Specifically, for example, when "00H" is stored as data corresponding to the type of notice, it is determined that the hold notice is not set in the hold symbol corresponding to the storage area in which the data is stored. means. On the other hand, when "01H" is stored, it means that the notice type of "blue" is set, and when "02H" is stored, the notice type of "green" is set. When "03H" is stored, it means that the notice type of "red" is set, and when "04H" is stored, "rainbow" is stored. It means that the notice type of "color" is set. The display mode of the reserved symbol can be accurately updated by each data stored in the reserved notice information storage area 233db.

Further, in the third control example, the display data table includes a special hold notice data table for setting the special hold notice effect when the back surface D is set. The details of this special hold notice data table will be described with reference to FIG. 152 (b).

FIG. 152 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special hold notice data table. As shown in FIG. 152 (b), in this special hold notice data table, only the display contents for the range of the address (value of the pointer 233f) from 02E1H to 02E5H are specified. As described above, since the value of the pointer 233f is updated every 20 milliseconds, the display content for 0.1 seconds (20 milliseconds × 5) is specified in this special hold notice data table.

As shown in FIG. 152 (b), in this special hold notice data table, a back image for special hold notice is defined as a back image for each address (value of the pointer 233f). Further, as the character 1, the special hold notice symbol 3 is defined. It should be noted that eight types of special hold notice symbols 1 to 8 are provided, and each of them is composed of images of numbers 1 to 8. In the example of FIG. 152 (b), since the special hold notice symbol 3 is defined, it is composed of the same image of the number 3 as shown in FIG. 149 (b).

When a new display variation pattern command is received with the special hold notice effect set, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern, the variation display data table, and the special hold notice effect this time are displayed. A special hold notice data table corresponding to the embodiment is selected. Then, in the display data table buffer 233d, the two types of read display data tables are combined. More specifically, among the variable display data tables stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the range of the pointer 233f corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the execution period of the special hold notice effect (example of FIG. 152B). Then, the data of 02E1H to 02E5H) is overwritten with the specified contents of the special hold notice data table. This eliminates the need to separately provide a table in which the special hold notice effect of each mode is set and a table in which the special hold notice effect is not set as the variable display data table (0.1 corresponding to each mode). Since it is sufficient to separately specify only the data for one second as the special hold notice data table), the amount of data in the character ROM 234 and the work RAM 233 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 153 to 155, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. First, the winning information command receiving process 3 executed in place of the winning command receiving process (see FIG. 102) in the first control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 153.

Of the winning information command receiving processing 3 (see FIG. 153), each processing of S3101 to S3108 is the same as each processing of S3101 to S3108 of the winning information command receiving processing (see FIG. 102) in the first control example, respectively. Is executed. Further, in the winning information command receiving process 3 (see FIG. 153) in the third control example, whether or not to set the hold notice effect after the processing of S3101 is completed, and the type when the hold notice effect is set. The hold notice setting process for determining the above is executed (S3121), and the process shifts to S3102. The details of this hold notice setting process (S3121) will be described with reference to FIG. 154.

FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the hold notice setting process (S3121). When this hold notice setting process (S3121) is started, it is first determined whether or not the current back surface type is the back surface D (S4201). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the mode counter 223i is "4" corresponding to the back surface D. If it is determined in the process of S4201 that the back surface D is set (S4201: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is without setting the hold notice effect.

Further, in the process of S4201, when it is determined that a value other than the rear surface D is set (S4201: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the hold notice counter 223ca (not shown) is larger than 0 (S4202). ). The hold notice counter 223ca is a counter indicating the remaining number of times until the variable display is executed based on the hold ball corresponding to the hold symbol for which the hold notice effect is set, and the hold notice effect is set. The current number of reserved balls is set for each. Therefore, in the process of S4202, it is determined whether or not the hold notice effect is being executed.

In the process of S4202, when it is determined that the value of the hold notice counter 223ca is larger than 0 (the hold notice effect is already being executed) (S4202: Yes), it is for determining whether or not to set the hold notice effect. The process of S4203 to S4207 is skipped, and the present process is terminated as it is. In this control example, the hold notice effect is configured not to be set in duplicate, but it may be set in duplicate.

In the process of S4202, when it is determined that the value of the hold notice counter 223ca is 0 (S4202: No), then the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S4203), and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f and the value of the effect counter 223f are acquired. By comparing with the hold notice execution determination table 222dc (see FIG. 151), it is determined whether or not the hold notice can be executed for the new winning information, and when the hold notice effect is set, the notice type is determined (S4204).

When the processing of S4204 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the determination made in the processing of S4204 is the determination result of executing the hold notice (S4205), and the determination result corresponding to the non-execution of the hold notice is used. If it is determined that there is (S4205: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4205 that the hold notice effect is to be executed (S4205: Yes), the notice type of the hold notice effect specified from the hold notice execution determination table 222dc in the process of S4204 is displayed by the display control device 114. A display hold notice command for notifying the user is set (S4206). Next, the value of the hold notice counter 223ca is updated to the total value of the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c (S4207), and the present process is terminated. ..

By executing this hold notice setting process (see FIG. 154), it is possible to determine whether or not the hold notice effect can be executed and the type of notice of the hold notice effect each time a new start prize is detected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the stop command reception process 3 (S3051) executed in place of the stop command reception process (see FIG. 103) in the first control example will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the stop command reception process 3 (S3051). In each of the stop command reception processes 3 (S3051), the same processes as those of S3201 to S3206 in the stop command reception process (see FIG. 103) of the first control example are executed. ..

Further, in the stop command reception process 3 (see FIG. 155) in the third control example, whether the process of S3206 is completed or whether the process of S3202 determines that the continuous warning flag 223q is off (S3202: No). When it is determined in the process of S3203 that the value of the remaining advance notice counter 223r is 1 or more (S3203: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the hold advance notice counter 223ca is larger than 0 (S3251). That is, it is determined whether or not the hold notice effect is being executed.

If it is determined in the process of S3251 that the value of the hold notice counter 223ca is 0 (the hold notice effect is not set) (S3251: No), it is not necessary to update the value of the hold notice counter 223ca. This process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3251 that the value of the hold notice counter 223ca is 1 or more (S3251: Yes), then the value of the hold notice counter 223ca is subtracted by 1 and updated (S3252), and the value is subtracted. A display hold notice command for setting a display mode of the hold symbol corresponding to the later hold notice counter 223ca is set (S3253), and this process is terminated. By executing this stop command reception process 3 (see FIG. 155), every time the variable display ends with the hold notice set, the hold symbol for which the hold notice effect is set is suitably executed on the display area DS1a side. Can be moved to.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the third control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 to 161. First, the command determination process of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 156. Similar to the first control example, this command determination process (S6302) analyzes the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process, and performs the process according to the command. It is a process to execute.

Of the command determination processes (see FIG. 156) in the third control example, in each of the processes S6401 to S6404, S6406 to S6416, and S6418 to S6420, the command determination processes (see FIG. 113) in the first control example are S6401 to S6401 to The same processing as each processing of S6404, S6406 to S6416 and S6418 to S6420 is executed. Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 156) in the third control example, when it is determined that the display variation pattern command is received in the process of S6404 (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process in the first control example is performed. Instead of (S6405), the variation pattern command process 3 is executed (S6451), and this process is terminated. The details of the fluctuation pattern command processing 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. 157.

Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 156) in the third control example, when it is determined that the continuous notice command for display is not included in the unprocessed commands in the process of S6414 (S6414: No), Next, it is determined whether or not there is a display hold notice command (S6452). In the process of S6452, if it is determined that the pending command for display is included in the unprocessed command (S6452: Yes), the pending notice for executing the process corresponding to the received hold notice effect command is executed. The command process is executed (S6453), and this process is terminated. The details of the hold notice command processing (S6453) will be described later with reference to FIG. 158 (a).

Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 156) in the third control example, when it is determined that the rear image change command exists among the unprocessed commands in the process of S6416 (S6416: Yes), the first control example. Instead of the rear image change command process (see FIG. 117 (a)) in, the rear image change command process 3 is executed (S6454), and the process returns to the process of S6401. The details of the rear image change command process 3 (S6454) will be described later with reference to FIG. 158 (b).

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the variation pattern command process executed in place of the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 114 (a)) in the first control example in the above-mentioned command determination process (see FIG. 156). The details of 3 (S6451) will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process 3 (S6451).

Of the variation pattern command processing 3 (see FIG. 157), each processing of S6501 to S6505 is the same as each processing of S6501 to S6505 of the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 114 (a)) in the first control example, respectively. The process is executed. Further, in the variation pattern command process 3 (see FIG. 157) in the third control example, when the process of S6502 is completed, the rear image discrimination flag is then determined whether or not the currently set rear surface type is the rear surface D. Discrimination is made based on 233x (S6551).

If it is determined in the process of S6551 that the back type currently set is the back D (S6551: Yes), then the hold notice is issued based on the data stored in the hold notice information storage area 233db. It is determined whether or not it is set (S6552). If it is determined in the process of S6552 that the hold notice effect is set (S6552: Yes), the special hold notice data table corresponding to the data stored in the hold notice information storage area 233db is determined. That is, from the data of the hold notice information storage area 233db, the remaining number of times until the variable display based on the hold ball for which the hold notice effect is set is started, and the notice type are specified, and the special hold notice data corresponding to these is specified. The table is determined from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the specified content of the determined special hold notice data table is overwritten in the range of the value of the corresponding pointer 233f in the display data table buffer 233d (S6553), and the process is shifted to S6503.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a device other than the back surface D is set in the process of S6551 (S6551: No), or when it is determined that the hold notice effect is not set in the process of S6552 (S6552: No). Since it is not necessary to set the execution of the special hold notice effect, the process of S6553 is skipped and the process is transferred to S6503.

Next, the details of the hold notice command processing (S6453) will be described with reference to FIG. 158 (a). This hold notice command process (S6453) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 156) in the third control example, and as described above, the control corresponding to the display hold notice command received from the voice lamp control device 113. It is a process for performing.

In this hold notice command processing (see FIG. 158 (a)), first, the new hold notice command flag 233da is set to ON (S9001), and then the hold notice effect is set from the received display hold notice command. The hold symbol and the type of the hold notice are extracted (S9002). Next, the data in the hold notice information storage area 233db is updated based on the extracted hold symbol and the type of hold notice (S9003), and this process is terminated. Based on the data of the hold notice information storage area 233db updated by the process of S9003, the image data for the hold notice effect is specified in various image setting processes 3 (see FIG. 161) described later.

Next, the details of the rear image change command process 3 (S6454) will be described with reference to FIG. 158 (b). This rear image change command process 3 (S6454) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 156) in the third control example, and corresponds to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 as described above. This is a process for controlling.

Of the rear image change command process 3 (see FIG. 158 (b)) in the third control example, in each process of S7201 and S7202, S7201 of the rear image change command process (see FIG. 117) in the first control example, respectively. , And the same processing as each processing of S7202 is executed. Further, in the rear image change command process 3 (see FIG. 158 (b)) in the third control example, when the process of S7201 is completed, next, whether or not the rear surface type before the change (that is, the current state) is the rear surface D. Is determined based on the rear image discrimination flag 233x (S7251).

In the process of S7251, if it is determined that the current back type is the back D (S7251: Yes), the mode of the third symbol or the reserved symbol is changed by changing from the back D to another back type. The processing at the end of the back surface D is executed (S7252), and the processing is transferred to S7201. On the other hand, in the process of S7251, if it is determined that the rear surface type at the time when the rear image change command is received is not the rear surface D (S7251: No), the process of S7252 is skipped and the process is shifted to S7202.

Further, in the rear image change command process 3 (S6454) in the third control example, when the process of S7202 is completed, whether or not the rear image change command received this time is a command indicating a change to the rear surface D. If it is determined (S7253) and it is determined that the command indicates a change to the back surface D (S7253: Yes), the third symbol or the reserved symbol is used as the command is changed from another back surface type to the rear surface D. The back surface D transition processing for changing the aspect of the above is executed (S7254), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S7253, if it is determined that the command is not a command indicating the change to the back surface D (S7253: No), the process of S7254 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the details of the rear surface D end time process (S7252) executed in the rear image change command process 3 (see FIG. 158 (b)) described above will be described. As described above, the back surface D end processing (S7252) is a process for changing the mode of the third symbol or the reserved symbol as the back surface D is changed to another back surface type.

In this back D end processing, first, the variable display data table after the change to the back D corresponding to the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is read and overwritten on the display data table buffer 233d. (S9101). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table overwritten on the display data table buffer 233d is determined and overwritten on the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9102). In each of these processes, the value of the pointer 233f is held without being initialized, so even if the frame button 22 is operated in the middle of the variation display, the variation display is restarted in the changed mode. Can be done.

Next, based on the data stored in the hold notice information storage area 233db, it is determined whether or not the hold notice is set (S9103), and if the hold notice effect is set (S9103: Yes), the hold is held. The hold symbol data corresponding to the mode of the hold notice effect indicated by the data stored in the notice information storage area 233db is expanded (S9104), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9103 that the hold notice effect is not set (S9103: No), the process of S9104 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

In this way, by executing the processing at the end of the back surface D, it is possible to change the display mode such as the back surface type and the third symbol from the middle of the variable display during execution.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the rear surface D transition time process (S7254) executed in the rear image change command process 3 (see FIG. 158 (b)) described above will be described. This back surface D transition process (S7254) is a process for changing the mode of the third symbol or the reserved symbol as the back surface type is changed to the back surface D.

In this rear D transition process (see FIG. 160), first, the variable display data table for the rear D corresponding to the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is determined, and the display data table buffer 233d is determined. (S9201). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the set variable display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9202).

Next, based on the data stored in the hold notice information storage area 233db, it is determined whether or not the hold notice is set (S9203), and if the hold notice effect is set (S9203: Yes), the hold is held. A special hold notice data table corresponding to the mode of the hold notice effect indicated by the data stored in the notice information storage area 233db is determined, and is specified in the determined special hold notice data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The specified content of the special hold notice data table is overwritten with respect to the range of the pointer value (S9204), and this processing is terminated. As a result, when the hold notice effect is set and the change is made to the rear surface D during the execution of the change display, the special hold notice effect (see FIG. 149 (b)) from the stop display of the change display during the change. ) Can be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9203 that the hold notice effect is not set (S9203: No), the process of S9204 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

In this way, by executing the back D transition processing, it is possible to change the display mode such as the back type and the third symbol from the middle of the variable display during execution.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the various image setting processes 3 (S7453) executed in the display setting process (see FIG. 118) instead of the various image setting processes (see FIG. 119) in the first control example. The details will be described. The various image setting process 3 (S7453) is a process for setting various images such as a reserved symbol and an image at the time of continuous advance notice effect (8 pending effect).

Of the various image setting processes 3 (see FIG. 161), in each of the processes S7501 and S7503 to S7509, the processes S7501 and S7503 to S7509 of the various image setting processes (see FIG. 118) in the first control example, respectively. The same process as is executed.

Further, in the various image setting processes (see FIG. 161) in the third control example, when it is determined that the new reserved ball number flag 233 m is on in the process of S7501 (S7501: Yes), then the number of reserved symbols. The reserved symbol data corresponding to the value of the counter 233n and the current back type (state of the back image discrimination flag 233x) is expanded (S7551), and the process is shifted to S7503. Specifically, in the process of S7551, if the back surface type is other than the back surface D, the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the value of the reserved symbol number counter 233n is expanded in the reserved display area Ds1b. On the other hand, in the case of the back surface D, the numerical data corresponding to the value of the reserved symbol number counter 233n is expanded with respect to the reserved ball number display area Ds1c.

Further, in the various image setting processes 3 (see FIG. 161) in the third control example, it is determined whether the new continuous notice command flag 233o is off in the process of S7504 (S7504: No), or the process of S7506 is completed. In this case, it is determined whether or not the new hold notice command flag 233da is on (S7552). In the process of S7552, if it is determined that the new hold notice command flag 233da is on (S7552: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the currently set back type is back D (S7553). If it is determined that the back surface D does not appear (S7553: No), the reserved symbol data corresponding to the data stored in the reserved notice information storage area 233db is expanded (S7554), and the process shifts to S7555. On the other hand, in the processing of S7553, if it is determined that the back surface type currently set is the back surface D (S7553: Yes), the processing of S7554 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S7555.

In the process of S7555, the new hold notice command flag 233da is set to off (S7555), and the process shifts to S7507. If it is determined that the new hold notice command flag 233da is off in the processing of S7504 (S7552: No), the processing of S7553 to S7555 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7507.

By executing the various image setting processes 3 (S7453), it is possible to set an appropriate display mode in consideration of the set back type and the hold notice effect.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, the third symbol and the reserved symbol can be switched to different modes among the rear types that can be changed based on the operation of the player with respect to the frame button 22. It is configured to provide. Specifically, the third symbol is changed to a symbol composed only of numbers, and the back type of a simple display mode in which the number of reserved balls is displayed by a single reserved symbol composed of numbers is provided. .. With this configuration, when the rear image is changed to the rear D, the player can feel the novelty, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the third control example, when the back type is changed to the back D in a state where the hold notice effect in which the mode (color tone) of the hold symbol changes is set, the hold notice effect corresponds to the back D. It is configured to be changed to the mode. Specifically, for each stop display of the third symbol, the remaining number of fluctuations until the variation display corresponding to the hold ball for which the hold notice is set is executed is displayed numerically for 0.1 seconds. The color of the numbers suggests the degree of expectation of the hold notice. With this configuration, it is possible to take over the hold notice effect set in the back type before the change without breaking the concept of the simple and easy-to-understand display mode of the back D. Further, by configuring the configuration to execute the special hold notice effect at the time of the stop display of the third symbol that the player pays the most attention to, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the special hold notice effect.

In the third control example, the special hold notice effect is executed when the back side D is changed, but even when the hold notice effect is set and the back side is changed to another back type. The configuration may be such that the mode of the hold notice effect is different. By making the mode of the hold notice effect different for each back type, the mode of the hold notice effect can be diversified. Further, when the back type is changed, the hold notice effect itself may be canceled. With this configuration, regardless of whether or not the hold notice effect is set, when the back type is changed, the same mode of the hold symbol may be expanded, so that the back type can be changed. The processing load can be reduced.

In the third control example, when the hold notice effect is set, the color is changed only once, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the color may be changed in a plurality of stages from the time when the reserved symbol is newly displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b based on the start winning prize to the end of the corresponding variable display. Specifically, for example, when a hold symbol for which a hold notice has been set is displayed by the hold notice setting process (see FIG. 154), a predetermined opportunity (for example, the start of variable display corresponding to another hold symbol) is started. It may be configured to execute a lottery as to whether or not to rank up the mode of the reserved symbol to a mode with higher expectation at the timing (timing or timing of new start winning). In this case, in the lottery for the hold notice effect at the time of the start winning, the probability of being set to blue or green corresponding to the low expectation is set high, so that the hold ball corresponding to the high expectation hold ball is set. In some cases, the configuration may be such that the mode corresponding to the low expectation level can be easily changed to the mode having a high degree of expectation step by step. With this configuration, even if a low expectation hold notice effect occurs, it can be expected that the mode will change to correspond to the high expectation after that, so that the player can be expected to hit the jackpot. Expectations can be held more often. Further, in a configuration in which the rank-up of the hold notice effect is possible, if the back D is changed while the hold notice effect is set, the rank-up lottery is performed in the same manner as when the back type is not changed. May be. If the rank-up lottery is won in the special hold notice effect, the character color of the special hold notice effect (see FIG. 149 (b)) displayed while the fluctuation is stopped is simply changed to the color after the rank-up. Alternatively, a special effect for rank-up may be provided separately in a state where the special hold notice effect is set. As a special effect for rank-up in the special hold notice effect, for example, at the timing when the rank-up is won, a special character appears, the color tone on the back is changed, the character "rank up" is displayed, and the like. Illustrated. With this configuration, even when the back surface D is set, it is possible to make the player clearly understand that the rank-up lottery has been won. Further, the back surface D may be configured so that the timing of performing the rank-up lottery is different from that of other back surface types. Specifically, for example, on the rear surfaces A to C, a rank-up lottery is executed every time the fluctuation start timing is reached in a state where the hold notice effect is set, while the rear surface D is set, the fluctuation starts. A rank-up lottery may be executed when the game is stopped. Then, when the rank-up lottery is won on the back surface D, the rank-up effect is also executed in the special hold notice effect (see FIG. 149 (b)) executed during the stop display of the third symbol. May be good. With this configuration, it is possible to expect rank-up at different timings according to the set back type. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Modified example of hold notice effect in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 174, a modified example of the hold notice effect in the third control example will be described. In the hold notice effect in the third control example described above, the hold notice effect is configured to suggest the degree of expectation of the hold symbol by changing the color of the hold symbol. That is, a lottery was conducted as to whether or not to set a hold notice separately for each hold symbol (regardless of the look-ahead result of other hold balls). On the other hand, in this modification, the mode of the reserved symbol is not changed, but the combination of the look-ahead results of one or more reserved balls is converted into a numerical value (point) and displayed. did. Then, the more the reserved ball with high expectation is held, the larger the number of points is converted into the point. As a result, the larger the displayed points, the higher the expectation that the jackpot will be.

In this modification, when the look-ahead result of the reserved ball is completely off, it is converted to 1 point, when it is out of normal reach, it is converted to 2 points, and when it is out of super reach or various jackpots, it is converted to 10 points. It is supposed to be.

First, the configuration of the sub-display region Ds in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 174 (a). As shown in FIG. 174 (a), in this modification, a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area (point display area) for displaying points is formed in the upper right of the front view of the sub display area Ds. In the example of FIG. 174 (a), the standby state (variable stop state) is shown, and since there is no reserved symbol, "0pt" is displayed as a point.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 174 (b) to (e), a method of increasing or decreasing points when the number of reserved balls increases or decreases will be described. FIG. 174 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when five start winnings are detected during the fluctuation corresponding to the deviation and five reserved symbols appear in the reserved display area Ds1b during the fluctuation. be. In addition, as a holding ball corresponding to these five holding symbols, four complete deviations (1, 2, 4, and the fifth holding symbol) and one detached super reach (third holding symbol) are used. The case where it is configured is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 174 (b), when the number of reserved balls increases by 5 during the fluctuation, 1 point is uniformly added as a provisional point for each reserved ball. As a result, the character "5pt" is displayed for the point display area.

Then, when the out-of-change fluctuation during the fluctuation ends and each reserved symbol is shifted to the execution display area Ds1a, for each reserved ball corresponding to the four reserved symbols displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b after the shift. Look ahead and calculate accurate points. The reserved symbol displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b after the shift is composed of one reserved symbol (10 points) corresponding to the out-of-order super reach and three reserved symbols (1 point) corresponding to the complete outlier. Therefore, the exact point is 13 points. Therefore, the character "13pt" is displayed for the point display area.

Instead of pre-reading at the start winning prize and immediately reflecting the accurate points, it is changing by calculating and reflecting the accurate points collectively for each end of the fluctuation display (shift of the reserved symbol). When a plurality of reserved ball symbols increase, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the breakdown of points. Therefore, by increasing the number of reserved balls, when a large amount of points are increased at the end of the variable display, it is possible to have a feeling of expectation for a big hit for all the increased reserved balls.

After the accurate point is reflected, it becomes the end timing of the variable display, and every time the reserved symbol of 1 is shifted to the execution display area Ds1a, the point corresponding to the shifted reserved symbol is subtracted from the point display area and displayed. Will be done. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 174 (d) and 174 (e), when the reserved symbol corresponding to the complete deviation (1 point) is shifted to the execution display area Ds1a, the points displayed in the point display area. When 1 point is subtracted from (see FIG. 174 (d)) and the reserved symbol corresponding to the out-of-order super reach (10 points) is shifted to the execution display area Ds1a, 10 points are displayed from the points displayed in the point display area. Is subtracted (see FIG. 174 (e)).

As described above, in this modification, the mode of the hold notice effect is configured by converting the look-ahead result for each hold symbol into points and displaying the total value of the points for each hold symbol in the point display area. There is. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which of the reserved symbols corresponds to the reserved ball with high expectation, so when a large number of points is displayed in the point display area, it is reserved. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation for a big hit to the reserved balls corresponding to all the reserved symbols displayed in the display area Ds1b.

<Modified example of special hold notice effect in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 175 and 176, a modified example of the special hold notice effect in the third control example will be described. In the third control example described above, when the mode of the third symbol or the mode of the reserved symbol is changed to the back surface D different from the other back surface types in the state where the hold notice effect is set, the special hold notice effect (FIG. The configuration for executing 149 (b)) has been described. On the other hand, in this modification, when the back type is switched between the back types other than the back D, the mode of the hold notice effect is changed. An example will be described.

Here, a case of changing from the back surface A to the back surface B will be described as an example. The back surfaces A and B are stages in which the display mode of the third symbol and the reserved symbol is common, and only the rear image is different. FIG. 175 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the back surface A is set and the hold notice effect is set in the hold symbol HY1 which is the third hold symbol HY1 from the left of the hold display area Ds1b. The mode of the hold notice effect executed on the back surface A is the same as that of the third control example described above. That is, an effect of changing the display color of the reserved symbol displayed corresponding to the reserved ball to blue, green, red, or rainbow color is executed according to the look-ahead result for the reserved ball.

As shown in FIG. 175 (b), when the player presses the frame button 22 and the back image is changed to the back B in the state where the hold notice effect is set, the back image is changed and the hold display area Ds1b is changed. In, the display mode of each reserved symbol including the reserved symbol HY1 is reset to the normal reserved symbol mode. It should be noted that the apparent display mode is only changed to the normal display mode of the reserved symbol, and the setting itself of the hold notice effect is stored.

After that, a lottery for whether or not to revive the display mode of the hold notice effect (hold notice revival lottery) is executed every time the start timing of the new variable display is reached, and when it is determined that the winning is won, FIG. 176 is performed. As shown in (b), the setting of the hold notice effect before changing the rear image is restored.

In the hold notice revival lottery, the hold symbol for which the hold notice effect was set before changing the back image is the hold symbol corresponding to the hold ball with high expectation, so that it is easier to be determined as winning. It is set. Specifically, for example, if the hold notice is a winning super reach or a holding symbol of a holding ball corresponding to a hit normal reach, after changing the back image, the holding notice revival lottery will be held at a rate of 50% each time the fluctuation starts. If you win and the hold notice is off and the hold symbol of the hold ball corresponds to Super Reach, after changing the back image, you will win the hold notice revival lottery at a rate of 30% every time the fluctuation starts, and the hold notice will be missed and normal reach If it is a hold symbol corresponding to, after changing the back image, the hold notice revival lottery will be won at a rate of 10% each time the change starts. That is, the more the hold notice is set for the hold ball with a high expectation, the easier it is to win the hold notice revival lottery. As a result, when the hold notice is restored after the back type is changed, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be increased. Further, for a player who wants to determine the degree of expectation of the hold notice effect depending on whether or not the hold notice effect is restored, the back type can be positively changed during the setting of the hold notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

<About a modified example of the rotating unit 500>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 162 to 164, a modification of the rotation unit 500 used in each of the above-described embodiments or control examples will be described. The structure of the versa writer illustrated below will be described by reducing the number of LEDs 532 to 8 (LEDs 1 to 8) for the sake of brevity.

The above-mentioned rotary unit 500 is configured to have a long shape centered on the rotation axis, and the display surface side (front side of the game machine) of the long shape rotary unit 500 has a uniform opening through which light can be transmitted (the rotary unit 500). By irradiating 40 diffusers provided (evenly in the longitudinal direction) with light from the back side (lower side from the viewpoint of FIG. 162) using 40 sets of LEDs corresponding to each diffuser. The light divided into 40 can be visually recognized from the front side of the game machine.

With this configuration, by executing the rotation control of the rotation unit 500 and the light emission control of the LED, it is possible to execute the display effect in a wide area for the player.

However, in the structure of the rotating unit 500 described above, since a plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the rotating unit 500 (see FIG. 28), the distance of each LED 532 from the rotating axis of the rotating unit 500 is different. become. As a result, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, a stronger centrifugal force is applied to the LED arranged at a position far from the rotation axis as compared with the LED arranged at a position closer to the rotation axis. There is a problem that it is easy to cause damage or malfunction.

On the other hand, in the first modification of the rotation unit 500, the LEDs 532 (LED1 to LED8) forming the rotation unit 500 are arranged in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500, and are arranged in the vicinity of the rotation axis. A light guide path for transmitting the light emitted from each LED 532 to each diffuser plate partitioned into 8 is provided. As a result, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, the centrifugal force applied to each LED 532 can be reduced, and damage or malfunction of the LED 532 can be suppressed (prevented). Further, since each LED 532 is configured to have the same distance from the rotation shaft 580e of the rotation unit 500, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the force applied to the LEDs during the rotation operation from being biased to some of the LEDs.

Specifically, it will be described with reference to FIG. 162 (a). FIG. 162 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing a cross-sectional view of the rotary unit 500 in the first modification so that the upper side of the paper surface is the front side of the gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 162 (a), a central wall portion 580e that divides the inside of the rotating unit into left and right is provided in the central portion of the rotating unit 500, and LEDs 1 to 4 are arranged on the left side of the central wall portion 580e. The LEDs 5 to 8 are arranged on the right side.

Eight sections (openings 580a1 to 580a8) are provided in a horizontal row on the front side (front side of the gaming machine) of the rotating unit 500, and are provided in each section (openings 580a1 to 580a8). By irradiating the diffuser plate (not shown) with the light emitted from each of the LEDs 532 described above, it is possible to visually recognize that each section is lit from the front side (front side of the gaming machine) of the rotating unit 500.

A light guide path is provided inside the rotating unit 500 so that the diffusers provided in the openings 580a1 to 580a8 are irradiated with light only from the corresponding LEDs. Specifically, the light emitted from the LED 1 passes through the first light guide path 580d1, and the direction of being guided by the reflection member 580c1 provided at the tip of the first light guide path 580d1 is changed, and the second light guide path is changed. It passes through the light guide path 580b1 and reaches the diffuser plate provided in the opening 580a1. Similarly, the light emitted from the LEDs 2 to 8 passes through the first light guide path 580d2 to 580d8, and the direction in which the light is guided by the reflection members 580c2 to 580c8 is changed, and the second light guide path 580b2 to b8 is set. After passing through, it is possible to reach the diffusion plates provided in the openings 580a2 to a8, respectively. The first light guide paths 580d1 to 580d8 are independently configured, and the second light guide paths 580b1 to 580b8 are independently configured. As a result, the light emitted from the LEDs 1 to 8 can reach only the corresponding openings 580a1 to 580a8, and the afterimage display generated by lighting the diffuser plates of the openings (sections) 580a1 to 580a8. The outer shape of can be clarified.

As described above, in the first modification, the LEDs 1 to 8 are collectively arranged in the vicinity of the rotation axis. As a result, the rotation starting energy required to start the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, so that the power consumption can be reduced and the response of the rotation operation can be improved, so that the rotation effect can be achieved. The production effect of can be enhanced.

Next, in the second modification of the rotating unit 500, the light emitted from the LED 532 provided inside the rotating unit 500 is configured to be incident on the reflector, and the angle of the reflector is variably controlled. By changing the direction in which the irradiated light propagates, it is configured to change the lighting section (opening). This eliminates the need to provide an LED 532 corresponding to each section (opening), so that power consumption can be reduced.

Specifically, a second modification of the rotating unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 162 (b). FIG. 162 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a cross-sectional view of the rotary unit 500 in the second modification so that the upper side of the paper surface is the front side of the gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 162 (b), inside the rotating unit 500 in the second modification, the LED 1 for lighting the diffuser plates provided in the openings 580a1 to 580a4 on the left side of the rotating unit 500, and the rotating unit. An LED 2 for lighting the diffuser plate provided in the openings 580a5 to 580a8 on the right side of the 500 is provided. The LED 1 is provided on the back side of the gaming machine (the back side of the rotating unit 500) near the rotation axis in the left side region divided by the central wall portion 585 g that divides the inside of the rotating unit 500 into left and right. On the other hand, the LED 2 is provided on the back side of the gaming machine near the rotation axis (the back side of the rotation unit 500) in the right side region divided by the central wall portion 585 g inside the rotation unit 500.

In the left region inside the rotating unit 500, a partition member 585c1 made of black-colored plastic is provided so that light does not directly propagate from the LED1 provided near the rotating shaft to the openings 580a1 to 580a4. It is erected (integrally molded) from the back side of the game machine of the rotating unit 500 (the back side of the rotating unit 500). Here, among the regions partitioned by the partition member 585c1, the region near the rotation axis where the LED1 is provided is called the first region 585d1, which is on the side farther from the rotation shaft than the first region and has the opening 580a1. The area where ~ 580a4 is provided is referred to as a second area 585e1.

A reflective member 585a1 is provided at a position on the front side of the gaming machine near the rotation axis inside the rotating unit 500, where light from the LED 1 arranged on the back side of the gaming machine is incident. After the light emitted from the LED 1 passes through the first region 585d1, it is reflected by the reflecting member 585a1 and then propagated to the second region 585e1. The light propagated to the second region 585e1 is reflected by the reflection wall portion 585f1 provided on the back side of the gaming machine in the second region 585e1 and propagated to the front side of the gaming machine. If the propagated destination is any one of the openings 580a1 to 580a4, the diffuser plate arranged there is irradiated with light, and the diffuser plate is turned on.

The direction of the light propagating in the second region 585e1 is determined by the angle reflected by the reflecting member 585a1. Here, the reflection member 585a1 is provided with a drive motor 585b1 for adjusting the angle, and by driving the drive motor 585b1 and changing the angle of the reflection member 585a1, the light incident from the LED 1 is emitted. The direction of reflection (propagation destination) can be changed.

The configuration in which the diffuser plates of the openings 580a5 to 580a8 are lit by the LED 2 is the same as the configuration in which the diffuser plates of the openings 580a1 to 580a4 are lit by the LED 1 described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. ..

As described above, in the second modification, the light emitted from the LED 532 provided inside the rotating unit 500 is configured to be incident on the reflector, and the angle of the reflector is variably controlled to irradiate the light. By changing the direction in which the emitted light propagates, it is configured to change the lighting section (opening). This eliminates the need to provide an LED 532 corresponding to each section (opening), so that power consumption can be reduced.

Further, the LED and the reflective member are integrated in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500. As a result, the rotation starting energy required to start the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, so that the power consumption can be reduced and the response of the rotation operation can be improved, so that the rotation effect can be achieved. The production effect of can be enhanced.

By making the wavelengths (colors) of the light of the LED 1 and the LED 2 different, the color lit in the openings 580a1 to a4 and the color lit in the openings 580a5 to a8 may be different. For example, LED1 is a red LED and LED2 is a blue LED. As a result, the color displayed as an afterimage when the rotation operation is performed can be red, blue, and a color (purple) that is a combination of red and blue, and the effect of effect can be enhanced.

Next, in the third modification of the rotating unit 500, the light emitted from the LED 532 provided inside the rotating unit 500 is a light emitting unit provided on the surface portion of the rotating unit 500 via an optical fiber (light guide path). Was configured to reach. As a result, it is possible to control lighting of each section of the rotation unit 500 while arranging the LED 532 in the vicinity of the rotation axis. As a result, the rotation starting energy required to start the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, so that the power consumption can be reduced and the response of the rotation operation can be improved, so that the rotation effect can be achieved. The production effect of can be enhanced.

Specifically, a third modification of the rotating unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 163 (a). FIG. 163 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing a cross-sectional view of the rotary unit 500 in the third modification so that the upper side of the paper surface is the front side of the gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 163 (a), a central wall portion 590f that divides the inside of the rotating unit into left and right is provided in the central portion of the rotating unit 500, and the LED1 is located near the rotation axis in the left region of the central wall portion 590f. The internal compartments 590a1 to 590a4 in which ~ 4 are arranged are arranged. On the other hand, internal compartments 590a5 to 590a8 in which LEDs 5 to 8 are arranged are arranged in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the right side region divided by the central wall portion 590f.

The internal compartments 590a1 to 590a4 and the light emitting portions 590c1 to 590c4 provided on the front side of the gaming machine of the rotating unit 500 are connected by optical fibers 590b1 to 590b4, respectively. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 2 in the internal compartment 590a2 propagates through the optical fiber 590b2 and reaches the light emitting unit 590c2, and the light emitting unit 590c2 emits light (see FIG. 163 (a)). Similarly, the light emitting units 590c1, 590c3, and 590c4 also emit light when the light emitted from the LEDs 1, 3, and 4 propagates through the optical fibers 590b1, 3, and 4.

Similarly, in the right side region, the light emitting units 590c5 to c8 are controlled to emit light by the LEDs 5 to 8 provided in the internal compartments 590a5 to 590a8. Since the details are the same as those in the left area, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the fourth modification, the light emitted from the LED 532 provided inside the rotating unit 500 reaches the light emitting portion provided on the surface portion of the rotating unit 500 via the optical fiber (light guide path). It was configured to do. As a result, it is possible to control lighting of each section of the rotation unit 500 while arranging the LED 532 in the vicinity of the rotation axis. As a result, the rotation starting energy required to start the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, so that the power consumption can be reduced and the response of the rotation operation can be improved, so that the rotation effect can be achieved. The production effect of can be enhanced.

Next, in the fourth modification of the rotating unit 500, with respect to the third modification described above, one LED 532 is arranged in each of the left side region and the right side region, and the light emitted from the LED 532 is an optical fiber. A blocking member capable of blocking the light so as not to enter the 590b is provided. As the blocking member, a known light shutter made of a liquid crystal display is used, and the passage of light is blocked by applying a voltage (5V), and the passage of light is allowed by canceling the application of the voltage. As a result, even if the LED 532 provided in the left side region and the right side region is set to one, the light emission control of each light emitting unit 590c1 to 590c8 can be performed individually. As a result, the number of LEDs 532 can be reduced without impairing the effect of the effect, so that power consumption can be reduced and defects due to heat generation or the like can be suppressed (prevented).

Further, since the amount of light passing through can be adjusted by adjusting the voltage applied to the blocking member, the amount of light incident on each optical fiber 590b1 to 590b8 can be adjusted, and the light emitting units 590c1 to 590c8 can be adjusted. The emission brightness can be adjusted.

Specifically, a fourth modification of the rotating unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 163 (b). FIG. 163 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a cross-sectional view of the rotary unit 500 in the fourth modification so that the upper side of the paper surface is the front side of the gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 163 (b), a central wall portion 590f that divides the inside of the rotating unit into left and right is provided in the central portion of the rotating unit 500, and a first portion is provided near the rotation axis in the left region of the central wall portion 590f. One area 590 g1 is arranged. On the other hand, the second region 590g2 is arranged near the rotation axis of the right region divided by the central wall portion 590f.

The LED1 is disposed in the first region 590g1, and the LED2 is disposed in the second region. Further, optical fibers 590c1 to c4 for propagating the light emitted from the LED 1 are connected to the light emitting units 590c1 to 590c4 in the first region 590g1.

At the connection portion where the first region 590 g1 and the respective optical fibers 590 c1 to c4 are connected, it is possible to block the light emitted from the LED 1 in the first region 590 g1 from being incident on each optical fiber. A blocking member 590e1 is provided. As described above, the blocking member 590e1 uses an optical shutter made of a known liquid crystal display, and the passage of light is blocked by applying a voltage (5V), and the passage of light is allowed by canceling the application of the voltage. To.

The blocking member 590e1 can individually control the light incident on each of the optical fibers 590c1 to 590c1 to 4.

As a result, even if the LED 532 provided in the left side region and the right side region is set to one, the light emission control of each light emitting unit 590c1 to 590c8 can be performed individually. As a result, the number of LEDs 532 can be reduced without impairing the effect of the effect, so that power consumption can be reduced and defects due to heat generation or the like can be suppressed (prevented).

Next, in the fifth modification of the rotation unit 500, the blocking member 590e1 was removed from the fourth modification described above, and the LED 532 was made into a multicolor LED capable of emitting multiple colors. Then, each optical fiber 590b1 to 590b8 is an optical fiber capable of propagating light of a specific wavelength, and each optical fiber has a different wavelength that can be propagated. Each optical fiber 590b1 to 8 has a large amount of attenuation and cannot propagate even if light having a wavelength other than a specific wavelength is incident. As a result, by controlling the wavelength (color type) of the light emitted from the multicolor LED 532, the optical fibers 590b to which the irradiated light is propagated are different, so that the light emitting units 590c1 to 590c8 that emit light are variable. be able to. As a result, the light emitting unit 590c that emits light can be changed only by changing the wavelength (color type) of the light that is emitted. Therefore, even if the number of LEDs 532 is reduced, the light emission is not impaired. Afterimage display can be performed by the light emission of the unit 590c.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 164 (a), the light emitting portion provided on the surface portion (front surface portion) of the rotating unit 500 is composed of a member (for example, a polarizing plate) capable of transmitting only light of a specific wavelength. By varying the color emitted by the LED 532 inside the rotating unit 500, it may be configured so that only the light emitting portion 590c at a specific location can emit light.

In this case, by setting the light emitting color of the LED 532 to be a color in which a plurality of wavelengths are combined, it is possible to control the lighting of the plurality of light emitting units 590c.

Thereby, the lighting of the arbitrary light emitting unit 590c can be controlled by the lighting control of the multicolor LED 532 without using the optical fiber as in the fifth modification described above. As a result, even if the number of LEDs 532 is reduced, an afterimage can be displayed by the light emitted from the light emitting unit 590c without impairing the responsiveness.

Further, as shown in FIG. 164 (b), a prism 595d1 for refracting the light emitted from the multicolor LED 532 arranged inside the rotating unit 500 to the openings (580a1 to 580a8) may be provided. good. The light emitted from the multicolor LED 532 is refracted by the prism 595d1 and propagated to the openings (580a1 to 580a8). Here, the amount (angle) refracted by the prism 595d1 differs depending on the wavelength (that is, the color) of the irradiated light. For example, light with a short wavelength (blue) is refracted in a large amount, and light with a long wavelength (red) is refracted in a small amount. Therefore, by adjusting the wavelength (that is, color) of the light emitted from the multicolor LED 532, the amount (angle) of being diffracted (refracted) is adjusted, and the light is irradiated to an arbitrary opening (580a1 to 580a8). be able to.

The rotation unit 500 described above is configured to supply electric power for causing each LED 532 (LEDs 1 to 8) to emit light from the outside of the rotation unit 500, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a power supply means (battery) may be provided inside the rotary unit 500 so that power can be supplied to each LED 532 from the power supply means. As a result, in order to supply electric power to each LED 532 of the rotating unit 500, it is not necessary to connect each LED 532 to be rotated and the outside, so that the signal transmission mechanism 458 in the above-described embodiment can be eliminated. , Wiring can be simplified. Further, since the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be eliminated, maintainability can be improved and problems due to damage to the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be prevented.

In this case, by configuring the power supply means (battery) to charge in a non-contact manner, each LED 532 can be driven to emit light even if the capacity of the power supply means (battery) is reduced. As a result, since the capacity of the power supply means (battery) can be reduced, the weight of the power supply means (battery) can be reduced, and the power for rotationally driving the rotary unit 500 can be reduced. Further, since the energy required to shift the rotating unit 500 from the stopped state to the rotating state is reduced, the response when the rotating unit 500 is rotated can be improved, and the effect of using the rotating unit 500 can be improved. The effect can be enhanced.

Further, a switching element (for example, MOSFET) for controlling whether or not power is supplied to each LED (whether or not the LED is turned on) from the power supply means (battery) and a signal for the switching element are output. The MPU to be used may be provided inside the rotating unit 500, and a control instruction may be transmitted to the MPU by wireless communication. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for a signal line for controlling the lighting of each LED. In this case, the drive power may be supplied from the power supply means (battery) to the MPU and the switching element provided inside the rotating unit 500.

Further, in the rotation unit 500 described above, a specific character or pattern is configured to be perceptible to the player as an afterimage by rotating the unit 500, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the afterimage may be displayed by repeatedly (vibrating) the rotating unit 500 up and down (or left and right).

Further, in the rotation unit 500 described above, the LED 532 (or the opening (lighting portion)) is arranged symmetrically from the rotation axis (rotation center), and the rotation operation is performed around the rotation axis, and the LED 532 is lit and controlled. So, it is configured to display an afterimage, but it is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 178 (a), an opening 580a whose lighting is controlled by the illuminated light of the LED 532 may be provided in only one direction from the rotation axis (rotation center). As a result, the energy required for the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, so that the response of the rotation operation can be improved, and the effect of producing the afterimage display can be enhanced. Further, since the rotary unit 500 can be miniaturized, space can be saved.

The rotation unit 500 shown in FIG. 178 (a) is a rotation unit 500 in the first modification described above divided into only the left half. Specifically, the wall portion 580e on the right side of the paper surface is used as a rotation axis (rotation center), and LEDs 1 to 4 are arranged in the vicinity of the rotation axis. Then, the light emitted from each of the LEDs 1 to 4 is reflected by the reflecting members (half mirrors) 580c1 to 580c4 and transmitted to a diffusion plate (not shown) provided in the openings 580a1 to 580a4. Thereby, by controlling the lighting of each of the LEDs 1 to 4, it is possible to control the lighting of the diffusion plates of the openings 580a1 to 580a4.

The afterimage display can be displayed by controlling the rotation of the rotation unit 500 around the rotation axis and controlling the lighting of the LEDs 1 to 4. By providing LEDs 1 to 4 in the vicinity of the rotating shaft, the centrifugal force applied to each of the LEDs 1 to 4 when the rotating unit 500 is rotated can be reduced, so that the centrifugal force damages the LEDs 1 to 4. It is possible to suppress (prevent) movements due to errors. Further, since only the wall portion 580e is arranged on the back side of each of the LEDs 1 to 4, the heat dissipation efficiency of each of the LEDs 1 to 4 can be improved, and the solder connecting the LEDs 1 to 4 melts due to the influence of heat generation. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the problem that it may lead to poor contact.

The rotation unit 500 may be made to perform a repetitive motion (pendulum motion) on a locus that draws an arc. As a result, for example, the space required for afterimage display can be reduced by repeatedly operating the locus that draws a semicircle, so that afterimage display can be performed even in a limited space, and the variation of the game can be increased. Can be done.

Further, a case where the operation is repeated in a semicircle and a case where the operation is rotated may be provided. As a result, the variation in the operation of the rotating unit 500 can be further increased, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, the shape of the rotating unit 500 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is not limited to a substantially rectangular shape, and may be a substantially square shape so as not to rotate. Specifically, it will be described with reference to FIG. 178 (b). FIG. 178 (b) is a schematic view showing the rotating unit 500 when the gaming machine is viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 178 (b), in front view of the gaming machine, a total of 64 openings 580a11 to 580a88 are arranged in the rotating unit 500 in 8 vertical stages and 8 horizontal rows. A total of eight openings, openings 580a11 to 580a18, are arranged in a horizontal row on the uppermost stage, and openings 580a21 to 580a28, openings 580a31 to 580a38, openings 580a41 to 580a48, and openings 580a51 to 580a58 are arranged on the lower stage. The openings 580a61 to 580a68, the openings 580a71 to 580a78, and the openings 580a81 to 580a88 are arranged side by side in this order. By controlling the lighting of each of these openings 580a, it is possible to perform a predetermined display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 178 (b), the uppermost opening 580a31, 580a41, 580a23, 580a26, 580a32, 580a37, 580a42, 580a47, 580a52 to 580a57, 580a62, 580a67, 580a72, 580a77, 580a82, 580a87 are lit. By controlling to do so, the character "A" can be displayed. As a result, a predetermined display can be displayed without rotating the rotation unit 500.

An LED unit 589 is provided on the left side of each stage provided with the opening 580a, and LEDs 11 to 88 are arranged inside the LED unit 589 corresponding to each stage. Specifically, LEDs 11 to 18 are provided corresponding to the uppermost stage where the openings 580a11 to 580a18 are provided. The LEDs 11 to 18 are provided corresponding to the openings 580a11 to 580a18, and for example, the openings 580a11 are controlled to be lit by the light emitted from the LEDs 11. Similarly, the openings 580a12 to 580a18 are configured to be lit and controlled corresponding to the LEDs 12 to 18.

As a detailed structure, each opening 580a is controlled to be lit by using the structure of the first modification of the rotation unit 500 described above (a structure in which a light guide path is provided for each). It should be noted that the structure is not limited to this, and the structures of the second to fifth modifications may be adopted as a matter of course. In addition, a known edge light type light guide plate may be configured in which the light input from the side surface is diffused over the entire surface to make the display unit visible. This eliminates the need to dispose an LED or the like as a light source on the back side of the gaming machine, so that the rotating unit 500 can be made thinner. Further, by providing a region where the light input from the side surface is reflected to the front side and a region where the light is not reflected, the specific characters or symbols may be displayed only when the light is incident from the side surface. By providing a plurality of layers in which the light input from this side surface is reflected on the front side, it may be possible to display characters and patterns in a plurality of modes. The characters and patterns of the plurality of modes are arranged so as to increase in size in order from the inner layer, for example, and are displayed as a moving image in which the characters and patterns become larger by injecting light in order from the inner layer. be able to.

The position where the LED unit 589 is provided is not limited to the left side, but may be the right side, either the upper or lower side, or may be arranged on both the left and right sides. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) uneven brightness between the opening 580a that is far from the LED unit 589 and the opening 580a that is close to the LED unit 589. Further, when it is arranged on both the left and right sides, the display may be configured to be different depending on the light emission of the left and right LEDs. For example, a red LED is arranged in the LED unit 589 on the left side, and a blue LED is arranged in the LED unit 589 on the right side. Then, by displaying letters and symbols (for example, the letter "A") with the left LED, red letters and symbols can be displayed, and in the case of the right LED, blue letters and symbols can be displayed. can. Further, by combining the left side LED and the right side LED to emit light, purple characters and patterns can be displayed.

Further, the LED units 589 may be provided on the left side and the upper side so that the opening 580a is lit when the left side LED and the upper side LED are lit. Specifically, a polarizing plate is provided so that purple can be visually recognized from the opening 580a, and a red color is emitted from the left LED and a blue color is emitted from the upper LED. The purple light reaches only the opening 580a in which both the left side LED and the right side LED are lit, and the lighting of the light becomes visible. As a result, one LED is provided corresponding to each stage and each row, and by combining the lighting of each, it is possible to control the lighting of an arbitrary opening 580a, so that the total number of LEDs can be reduced, and the gaming machine can be used. Manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Further, when light is incident on each opening 580a from a plurality of positions (for example, the left side and the upper side), the LED unit 589 is arranged at one place (for example, the left side), and the light emitted from the LED unit 589 is used. It may be configured so that light can be incident from a plurality of positions by a light guide path (for example, an optical fiber or the like).

Further, a plurality of types of diffusion plates may be provided in the opening 580a. Specifically, a diffuser plate that is turned on by being irradiated with light from the LED provided in the LED unit 589 and a diffuser plate (or a blocking plate) that is not turned on are provided. Thereby, by turning on the LED of 1, it is possible to provide an opening 580a that is turned on and an opening 580a that is not turned on. That is, by preparing a display area in which a lighting position in which the lighting state is set and a non-lighting position in which the lighting state is not set are predetermined and irradiating the display area with light, predetermined characters and patterns can be displayed. Can be displayed.

Further, the plurality of types of diffuser plates may be configured so that they are lit differently when irradiated with light. For example, the colors to be lit may be different, or different patterns may be displayed when lit. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the display mode displayed on the front side of the rotating unit 500, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The opening 580a to be lit may be lit when light of a specific wavelength is irradiated, or may be lit when light is irradiated from a specific angle. You may. Further, the above-mentioned display areas (lighting position and non-lighting position) are made of a material (an acrylic plate in which a specific area is subjected to reflection processing) through which light is transmitted, and for example, the front surface of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. By arranging it on the side, the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 is not impaired in normal times, and predetermined characters and symbols are displayed only when light is irradiated from a specific wavelength or a specific angle. can do. As a result, even if the display area (rotating unit 500) is arranged on the front side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the effect of the rotating unit 500 can be executed without impairing the visibility of the third symbol display device 81. .. Further, the effect integrated with the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be executed. As a result, the variation of the production can be further increased, so that the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, by making the distance between the openings 580a very small (for example, 1 mm), it is natural that the displayed characters and patterns can be clearly displayed. Further, there may be only one opening 580a, and characters and symbols may be displayed by controlling lighting of only a specific area of the opening 580a. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the space portion of each opening 580a that cannot be controlled for lighting, so that the displayed characters and patterns can be displayed more clearly.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples and each modification, the drive control of the drive motor 457 of the rotation unit 500 and the lighting control of the LED 532 are executed by the voice lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be controlled by the display control device 114 or the main control device 110, or a control device may be separately provided. Further, the drive control of the drive motor 456 may be executed by the voice lamp control device 113, and the lighting control of the LED 532 may be executed by the display control device 114. This makes it possible to distribute the control load. Further, by executing the lighting control of the LED 532 by the display control device 114, it is possible to easily synchronize with the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<About the 4th control example>
Next, a fourth control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 173. The fourth control example is configured to execute the continuous short reach effect used in the second control example described above with different controls. Hereinafter, the continuous short reach effect in the fourth control example will be described. First, in the second control example described above, as a continuous short reach effect, when the winning information is held based on the winning of the game ball, the variation type is removed and the short-changing winning information is displayed before the holding. Based on the fact that they are continuously held, those short fluctuations are changed (overwritten) to the short reach fluctuation type, and the continuous short reach effect is executed. When the winning information that becomes a big hit is reserved based on the winning of the game ball, the short reach is set to be executed three times in a row as a continuous short reach effect, and the winning information that is out of order is reserved. In this case, by configuring the short reach to be executed twice in a row as the continuous short reach effect, the player can expect the number of times the short reach is executed (continuous number of times) in the continuous short reach effect. , I was trying to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, a symbol (hereinafter referred to as a reach symbol) that is a reach that is stopped and displayed in each short reach executed in the continuous short reach effect is configured to have regularity. ing. The regularity of this reach symbol will be described in detail later, but the reach symbol stopped and displayed in continuous short reach is more game than the reach symbol stopped and displayed in the short reach executed one change before. It is structured so that it does not become a reach pattern that is disadvantageous to the person. With this configuration, when the continuous short reach effect is executed, in addition to the number of consecutive short reach for the player, the symbol (reach symbol) that is stopped and displayed at each short reach is also watched. It becomes possible to make it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the fourth control example, the variation after the continuous short reach effect is executed, that is, the variation corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous short reach effect (hereinafter referred to as the effect target variation). On the other hand, it is configured to execute a special effect related to the continuous short reach effect. Although a detailed explanation of this special effect will be described later, the running effect indicating that the continuous short reach effect is being executed is configured to be continuously displayed even during the change of the effect target change (the effect is changed). See FIG. 167 (b)). With this configuration, it is possible to execute a short reach continuous effect as a series of continuous effects including a change in the effect target, so that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect.

As described above, when the running effect indicating that the continuous short reach effect is executed is displayed even for the effect target change, the predetermined timing during the effect target change, that is, , If the reach mode is not displayed at the timing when the reach mode is displayed in the short reach (for example, 1 second after the start of the fluctuation), the player can easily grasp the end timing of the continuous short reach effect. There was a problem that the production effect could not be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, as the fluctuation pattern of the effect target fluctuation, the special fluctuation pattern (special reach) in which the reach mode is displayed at the same timing as the short reach (for example, 1 second after the start of the fluctuation). Is configured to be configurable. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the end timing of the continuous short reach effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

In the fourth control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed with respect to the second control example described above, and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is performed. It differs from the part that has been changed. Other points are the same as the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the flow of the continuous short reach effect executed in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 167. FIG. 165 is a timing chart showing the flow of continuous short reach effect in the fourth control example. Specifically, FIG. 165 (a) is a diagram showing an example of special symbol variation when the continuous short reach effect is executed, and FIG. 165 (b) is a diagram when the continuous short reach effect is executed. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device 81. 166 and 167 are schematic views showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the continuous short reach effect is executed. Specifically, FIG. 166 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case where the first short reach is executed as a continuous short reach effect, and FIG. 166 (b) shows 2 as a continuous short reach effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the case where the second short reach is executed. Further, FIG. 167 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case where the third short reach is executed as the continuous short reach effect, and FIG. 167 (b) is a schematic diagram showing three short reach effects as the continuous short reach effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the case where the first variation (effect target variation) is executed after the reach is completed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 165 (a), as a special symbol variation, a short deviation B (see FIG. 68) with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds (hereinafter referred to as a short deviation variation) is executed three times in a row. After that, the continuous short reach effect will be described by taking as an example the case where the super reach A (see FIG. 68) (hereinafter referred to as the long hit fluctuation) is executed per 60 seconds of the fluctuation time.

As shown in FIG. 165 (b), when the first short deviation variation is executed as the special symbol variation, the third symbol display device 81 is continuously connected to the upper region Dm1 (see FIG. 132 (a)) in the third symbol display device 81. "Continuous reach mode" is displayed as an in-execution display indicating that the short reach effect is in progress, and "1 continuous reach count" is displayed as an execution number display indicating the number of reach executed during the continuous short reach effect. (See FIG. 166 (a)). Further, in the short reach with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds, a reach mode in which the third symbol reaches the reach state 1 second after the start of the fluctuation is displayed.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 166 (a). In FIG. 166 (a), among the three rows of symbols arranged in the vertical direction in the central region Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81, numbers are shown at the center positions of the upper symbol row and the lower symbol row. The symbol with "4" is stopped and displayed, and the so-called reach state in which the symbol row in the middle row continues to fluctuate is displayed. Further, in the upper area Dm1, the execution in progress display and the execution count display are displayed as described above. Since the other elements are the same as those of the second control example described above, the same elements are similarly coded and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Returning to FIG. 165, the explanation will be continued. When the first short reach is completed, the short reach (second time) and the short reach (third time) are executed, respectively, so as to correspond to the short deviation variation 2 and the short deviation variation 3 of the special symbol variation. In this case, the number of executions displayed in the upper area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81 is "two consecutive reach times" (see FIG. 166 (b)) and short reach (third time) in the short reach (second time). ) Is updated and displayed as "3 consecutive reach times" (see FIG. 167 (a)). In this way, by displaying the running display indicating that the continuous short reach effect is being executed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can easily grasp the current effect state. Further, by displaying the execution number display indicating the number of times of reach executed during the continuous short reach effect on the third symbol display device 81, the player can easily determine the number of reach executed during the continuous short reach effect. Can be grasped by.

Then, when the special symbol variation per long time is executed after the short deviation (short deviation 1 to short deviation 3) of the special symbol variation set three times in a row (see FIG. 165 (a)), the third symbol display device. In the upper area Dm1 of 81, the “continuous reach mode” which is the display during execution is continuously displayed, and the “fourth continuous reach” is displayed as the number of executions display. Then, in the central region Dm2, a special reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is executed (see FIG. 167 (b)). This special reach is a reach effect set so that the reach mode is displayed one second after the start of the special symbol change.

With this configuration, the reach mode can be displayed at the same timing as when the short reach is executed (that is, one second after the start of the special symbol change), so that the final of the continuous short reach effect. It is possible to suppress that the fluctuation is noticed by the player immediately after the special symbol fluctuation is started. More specifically, when an effect corresponding to a special symbol change for a long period of time (for example, 60 seconds) is usually performed, the period until the reach mode is displayed is used for the player. A notice effect suggesting that the expectation of winning is high is executed. Further, since the reach mode is displayed after the period for executing the above-mentioned advance notice effect has elapsed, an effect for securing a predetermined period (for example, 20 seconds) until the reach mode is displayed is executed. If such an effect is executed after the end of continuous short reach (short reach 1 to 3), the continuous short reach effect is performed when the reach mode is not displayed 1 second after the start of fluctuation. There was a problem that it was noticed that it was the final fluctuation. Therefore, even if the special symbol variation after the end of continuous short reach (short reach 1 to 3) is a long-term special symbol variation, the same timing as when the short reach is executed (that is, the special symbol variation starts). By executing the special reach in which the reach mode is displayed (1 second after that), it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that it is the final variation of the continuous short reach effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 167 (b), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the special reach is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 167 (b), even when the special reach is being executed, the execution in progress display and the execution count display are displayed in the upper region Dm1. Then, in the central region Dm2, the symbol with the number "1" and the symbol with the number "9" in the upper symbol row and the lower symbol row are stopped and displayed in the reach mode, and are displayed in the middle row. The symbol sequence is displayed in a variable manner. The symbol with the number "1" and the symbol with the number "9" are given a big hit game when they are hit (when the same symbols are stopped and displayed so that they are in a row). In addition, it is the most advantageous symbol for the player who is given a high probability state (so-called probabilistic state) in which the lottery result of the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot after the jackpot game is completed.

Here, the reach symbols set for each reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. In the fourth control example, in a plurality of reach effects executed during the continuous short reach effect, the reach symbol that is more disadvantageous to the player than the reach symbol once stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed during the same continuous short reach effect. It is configured so that it will not be done. For example, in the short reach (first time) shown in FIG. 166 (a), a symbol with the number “4” (a normal symbol in which a probability variation state is not given based on a hit) is displayed, and is shown in FIG. 166 (b). In the short reach (second time), the symbol with the number "1" (the probabilistic symbol to which the probabilistic state is given based on the hit) and the symbol with the number "2" (normal symbol) are the reach mode (double). In the short reach (third time) displayed in the reach mode) and shown in FIG. 167 (a), the symbol with the number “1” (probability variation symbol) is displayed in the reach mode and is shown in FIG. 167 (b). In the special reach, as described above, the symbol with the number "1" (probability variation symbol) and the symbol with the number "9" (probability variation symbol) are displayed in the reach mode (double reach mode).

In this way, in the continuous short reach effect, the reach symbol that is more disadvantageous to the player than the reach symbol once stopped and displayed is configured so as not to be stopped and displayed during the same continuous short reach effect. During the continuous short reach production, the game can be performed while expecting both the number of consecutive short reach and the reach symbol displayed as a stop, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this fourth control example, as in the second control example described above, when the continuous short reach effect is executed, it is a highly reliable effect that becomes a big hit with a high probability (about 85%), so that the game is played. The person will pay attention to which symbol (probability variation symbol or normal symbol) is hit, rather than whether or not it will be a big hit as a result of this continuous short reach production. Therefore, the single reach mode in which only the probabilistic symbol is the reach mode is set as the reach symbol which is more advantageous to the player than the double reach mode in which the normal symbol and the probabilistic symbol are the reach mode. If, as a result of the continuous short reach effect, the expectation of a big hit is not high, the double reach mode may be set as the reach symbol advantageous to the player rather than the single reach mode.

Further, during the continuous short reach effect, the mode of the reach symbol (normal symbol, probabilistic symbol or single reach, double reach) that is stopped and displayed at the next short reach may be suggested. In this case, for example, the suggestion notification is executed using the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the short reach, that is, the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row of the central region Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81. It is good to do it. With this configuration, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the short reach (variation time 2 seconds) is short enough that the player cannot sufficiently identify the symbol (for example, 0.25 seconds). Since only the stop display is displayed, it is possible to vaguely notify the player of the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed in the next short reach executed. This makes it possible for the player to expect the next short reach while suggesting the content of the next short reach to be executed.

In addition, the method of suggesting the mode of the reach symbol (normal symbol, probabilistic symbol or single reach, double reach) that is stopped and displayed at the next short reach during the continuous short reach effect is limited to the above. Instead, for example, some information of the symbol mode forming the reach symbol to be stopped and displayed (for example, visual information such as color and size, character information that makes the image of the symbol, etc.) is displayed in advance or stopped and displayed. A plurality of symbols including the reach symbol (plural within the range not including the total number of symbols) may be displayed. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect the next short reach while suggesting the content of the next short reach to be executed.

In addition, the reach symbol that has already been stopped and displayed may be displayed as a history display on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous short reach effect. As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the continuous short reach effect. In addition, a plurality of reach symbols that are advantageous to the player (for example, an order based on ease of winning or an order based on the privilege given at the time of winning) are set, and any of these orders is set. When is set and the continuous short reach effect is executed, the player can enjoy the continuous short reach effect while predicting the order set this time by checking the history of the reach symbols that have already been stopped and displayed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<About the electrical configuration in the 4th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 and 169, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example described above in that the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 and the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed. , Other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 168 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 168 (a), the ROM 222 in the present control example is different from the ROM 222 in the second control example in that the reach symbol selection table 222da for effect is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the details of the effect reach symbol selection table 222da will be described with reference to FIG. 168 (b). FIG. 168 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect reach symbol selection table 222da. As shown in FIG. 168 (b), the effect reach symbol selection table 222da corresponds to the hit / fail determination result and the value of the stop symbol counter 223 da, and the short reach reach symbol type executed in the continuous short reach effect. Is a specified table.

The effect reach symbol selection table 222da is used for the winning command reception process 4 (see S3010 in FIG. 170), the winning continuous short reach effect setting process (see S3151 in FIG. 171), or the losing continuous short reach effect setting process (see S3151 in FIG. 171). In S3152) of FIG. 172, it is referred to when setting the reach symbol of each variation (short reach variation) (see S4514 of FIG. 171 or S4614 of FIG. 172).

Specifically, when the hit / fail determination result is a probability variation and the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is "0 to 99", the reach symbol type "probability variation A" is selected. In this reach symbol type "probability variation A", "normal symbol, single line" is defined for the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be of "1", and "normal / probability variation symbol, double line" is defined for "2". Is stipulated, and "probability variation symbol, single line" is stipulated for "3". The continuous short reach counter 223be counts the number of fluctuations (reach execution count) of the continuous short reach effect, and the counter value "1" is the first reach (short reach (first time) of the continuous short reach effect. )). Hereinafter, the counter value "2" indicates the second reach of the continuous short reach effect, and the counter value "3" indicates the third reach of the continuous short reach effect. Further, since the stop symbol counter 223da is a loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198, the probability that the reach symbol type “probability variation A” is selected is 100/199.

When the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is "100 to 194", the reach symbol type "probability variation B" is selected. In this reach symbol type "probability variation B", "normal / probability variation symbol, double line" is defined for a continuous short reach counter 223be value of "1", and "normal / probability variation symbol, double line" is defined for "2". "Double line" is specified, and "probability variation symbol, single line" is specified for "3". The probability that this reach symbol type "probability variation B" is selected is 95/199.

When the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is "195 to 198", the reach symbol type "probability variation C" is selected. In this reach symbol type "probability variation C", a "premier symbol" is defined for the values of the continuous short reach counter 223be of "1" to "3". The "premier symbol" is a symbol dedicated to continuous short reach (for example, a symbol imitating a whale character) that is displayed in a display format different from the symbol that is displayed in a variable manner due to normal special symbol fluctuation, and is stopped and displayed. It is a symbol that confirms that the most advantageous privilege is given to the player by being performed. The probability that this reach symbol type "probability variation C" is selected is 4/199.

Next, when the hit / fail determination result is a normal hit and the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is "0 to 99", the reach symbol type "normal A" is selected. In this reach symbol type "normal A", "normal symbol, single line" is defined for the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be of "1", and "normal / probabilistic symbol, double line" is defined for "2". "Is stipulated, and" normal / probabilistic symbol, double line "is stipulated for" 3 ". The probability that this reach symbol type "normal A" is selected is 100/199.

When the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is "100 to 198", the reach symbol type "normal B" is selected. In the reach symbol type "normal B", "normal symbol, single line" is defined for the values of the continuous short reach counter 223be of "1" to "3". The probability that this reach symbol type "normal B" is selected is 99/199.

Finally, when the hit / fail determination result is wrong and the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is “0 to 99”, the reach symbol type “missing A” is selected. For this reach symbol type "off A", "normal symbol, single line" is defined for the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be of "1", and "normal / probabilistic symbol, double line" is defined for "2". Is stipulated. If the result of the hit / fail determination is incorrect, the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is configured so that the short reach is not executed three times in a row during the continuous short reach effect as in the second control example described above. The reach symbol is not specified for "3". The probability that this reach symbol type "outside A" is selected is 100/199.

When the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is "100 to 149", the reach symbol type "off B" is selected. In this reach symbol type "off B", "normal symbol, single line" is defined for the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be of "1", and "probability variation symbol, single line" is defined for "2". It is stipulated. The probability that this reach symbol type "out of B" is selected is 50/199.

When the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is "150 to 198", the reach symbol type "off C" is selected. In this reach symbol type "off C", "normal / probabilistic symbol, double line" is defined for the values of the continuous short reach counter 223be of "1" and "2". The probability that this reach symbol type "outside C" is selected is 49/199.

As described above, in the fourth control example, when it is determined that the continuous short reach effect is executed, the continuous short reach effect is executed with reference to the effect reach symbol selection table 222da. The reach symbol is set in advance for each short reach variation. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the reach symbol advance notice effect that announces the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed in the next short reach, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, when the reach symbol is set in advance for each short reach variation, the reach symbol type that defines the reach symbol for each short reach variation is selected, so that the reach symbol is in line with regularity. Can be displayed reliably, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

The effect reach symbol selection table 222da described with reference to FIG. 168 (b) defines the conditions (ranks) of the reach symbols that are stopped and displayed for each item, and the selected reach is defined. The reach symbol corresponding to the symbol condition (rank) is randomly selected and then stopped and displayed as the reach mode. Specifically, the reach symbol selection table 222da for directing is stopped in the reach mode. It may be specified up to the displayed "number".

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the details of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 169 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 169, the RAM 223 in the present control example has the information set (stored) in the winning information storage area 223a added to the RAM 223 in the second control example, and the stop symbol counter 223da is added. The differences are in, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The winning information storage area 223a has the same configuration as the second control example described above, and when it is determined in the winning command receiving process 4 (see S3010 in FIG. 170) that the continuous short reach effect is executed, the continuous short reach effect is executed. Various information is set for each variation in which the reach effect is executed, and when a variation pattern command is received, the above-mentioned various information is referred to and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display content to be displayed is determined.

Specifically, the winning continuous short reach effect setting process (see S3151 in FIG. 171) executed in the winning command receiving process 4 (see S3010 in FIG. 170) or the continuous short reach effect setting process for losing (see FIG. 171). In (see S3251 of 172), when it is determined that the continuous short reach effect is executed (S4511: Yes in FIG. 171 or S4611: Yes in FIG. 172), the winning information corresponding to each short reach variation is stored. A reach symbol is set in the winning information storage area 223a (see S4512 in FIG. 171 or S4612 in FIG. 172), and the continuous short reach is continuously short reach in each winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the variation in which the continuous short reach effect is executed. The variation type of the effect is set (see S4513 in FIG. 171 or S4613 in FIG. 172), and the continuous short reach effect is started. Start information indicating the start of the effect is set (see S4514 in FIG. 171 or S4614 in FIG. 172).

In this way, by setting the effect information related to the continuous short reach effect in the winning information storage area 223a, it is possible to easily set the effect to be executed for a plurality of fluctuations.

The stop symbol counter 223da is a counter used when selecting the reach symbol of each short reach executed in the continuous short reach effect with reference to the effect reach symbol selection table 222da. The stop symbol counter 223da is composed of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 93) is executed, the value is incremented by 2. Will be updated. By setting the effect counter 223f and the updated value to be different from each other, the effect to be set when the value of the effect counter 223f and the value of the stop symbol counter 223da are acquired and the effect is set is set. It suppresses bias.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. In this control example, the winning command receiving process 4 (see FIG. 170) is executed instead of the winning command receiving process 2 (see FIG. 139) for the second control example described above, and the variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 143). The difference is that the variation pattern selection process 4 (see FIG. 173) is executed instead of (see FIG. 173). The winning command receiving process 4 (see FIG. 170) has a continuous short reach effect setting process for hitting (see FIG. 171) and a continuous short reach effect for losing, as opposed to the winning command receiving process 2 (see FIG. 139) of the second control example. The difference is that the setting process (see FIG. 172) is added, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the winning command receiving process 4 (S3010) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning command receiving process 4 (S3010). When the winning command receiving process 4 (S3010) is executed, the processing of S3101 to S3134 is executed in the same manner as in the winning command receiving process 2 (see FIG. 139) in the second control example described above.

When the processing of S3134 is completed and it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is "19" or less (S3134: Yes), the hit continuous short reach effect setting process is executed (S3151), and this hit continuous short is executed. The reach effect setting process (S3151) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 171. Then, when the processing of S3151 is completed, the main processing is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3133, it was determined that the current winning information was not a big hit (S3133: No), as in the winning command receiving process 2 (see FIG. 139) of the second control example described above, and then acquired. When it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is "1" or less (S3139: Yes), the continuous short reach effect setting process for disengagement is executed (S3152). The continuous short reach effect setting process (S3152) for disengagement will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 172. Then, when the processing of S3152 is completed, the main processing is completed.

Here, the winning continuous short reach effect setting process (S3151) executed in the winning command receiving process 4 (see FIG. 170) will be described with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous short reach effect setting process (S3151) for hitting. This hit continuous short reach effect setting process (S3151) is a process for setting a continuous short reach effect when the received winning command is a big hit.

In the winning continuous short reach effect setting process (S3151), first, it is determined whether or not all the winning information up to three from the current winning information is out of order and the variation type is short fluctuation (S4511).

In the processing of S4511, if it is determined that all the winning information up to three previous prizes are out of order and not short fluctuations (S4511: No), this processing is performed as it is without setting the continuous short reach effect. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of S4511, when it is determined that all the winning information up to three previous from the current winning information is out of the variation type of the short fluctuation (S4511: Yes), in order to set the continuous short reach effect. , The processes of S4512 to S4516 described later are executed.

First, in the process of S4512, "3" is set in the upper limit value of the continuous short reach counter 223be (S4512). Here, the value of the continuous short reach counter corresponding to each winning information storage area 223a that is the target of the continuous short reach effect is set. Next, a variation type indicating a continuous short reach effect is set in the prize information storage area 223a corresponding to the prize information up to three from the current prize information (S4513), and the process proceeds to S4514.

In the process of S4514, the reach symbol of each variation is determined based on the effect reach symbol selection table 222da, set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S4514), and then the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be "1". In the winning information storage area 223a in which "" is set, start information indicating the start of the continuous short reach effect is set (S4515). Next, the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is set to ON (S4516), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172, a continuous short reach effect setting process for disengagement (S3152) executed in the winning command receiving process 4 (see FIG. 170) will be described. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous short reach effect setting process (S3152) for disconnection. This disengagement continuous short reach effect setting process (S3152) is a process for setting a continuous short reach effect when the received winning command is deviated.

In the continuous short reach effect setting process for loss (S3152), first, it is determined whether or not all the prize information from the current prize information to the previous two is a variation type of the loss short variation (S4611).

In the processing of S4611, if it is determined that all the winning information up to two previous prizes are out of order and not short fluctuations (S4611: No), this processing is performed as it is without setting the continuous short reach effect. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of S4611, if it is determined that all the winning information up to two before from the current winning information is out of the variation type of the short fluctuation (S4611: Yes), in order to set the continuous short reach effect. , The processes of S4612 to S4616 described later are executed.

First, in the process of S4612, "2" is set in the upper limit value of the continuous short reach counter 223be (S4612). Here, the value of the continuous short reach counter corresponding to each winning information storage area 223a that is the target of the continuous short reach effect is set. Next, a variation type indicating a continuous short reach effect is set in the prize information storage area 223a corresponding to the prize information up to two from the current prize information (S4613), and the process proceeds to S4614.

In the process of S4614, the reach symbol of each variation is determined based on the effect reach symbol selection table 222da, set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S4614), and then the value "1" of the continuous short reach counter 223be. In the winning information storage area 223a in which "" is set, start information indicating the start of the continuous short reach effect is set (S4615). Next, the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is set to ON (S4616), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3404) will be described with reference to FIG. 173. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3404). In this variation pattern selection process 4 (S3404), in addition to the variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 143) of the second control example described above, the next variation (effect target) in which the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is the upper limit value. The background command is set so that the continuous short reach effect is continuously executed until (variation).

In the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3404), first, the same processes as in S3501 to S3505 of the variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 143) of the second control example described above are executed. Then, when the processing of S3505 is completed, it is determined whether the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is set to ON (S3551). If it is determined in the processing of S3551 that the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is not set to ON (S3551: No), the processing related to the setting of the continuous short reach effect (processing of S3552 to S3559) is skipped, and the first step is made. 2 The same process as S3506 of the variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 143) of the control example is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3551 that the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is set to ON (S3551: Yes), the start indicating the start of the continuous short reach effect is started in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the current fluctuation. It is determined whether the information is set, that is, whether it is the start timing of the continuous short reach effect (S3552). The start information indicating the start of the continuous short reach effect is obtained by the process of S4515 of the continuous short reach effect setting process for hitting (see FIG. 171) or the process of S4615 of the continuous short reach effect setting process for disengagement (see FIG. 172). It is set (stored) in the winning information storage area 223a.

In the process of S3552, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the continuous short reach effect (S3552: Yes), that is, when the variation pattern in which the continuous short reach effect is started is selected, the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be. After adding 1 (S3553), a short reach background command for display is set (S3554).

This display short reach background command is an execution display indicating that the continuous short reach effect is being executed (see FIG. 166 (a)), and an execution number display indicating the number of times the reach is executed during the continuous short reach effect. (See FIG. 166 (a)) is a command to be output to the display control device 114 in order to display (see FIG. 166 (a)) in the upper region Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81. The number of executions displayed in the upper area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed every time a new change is executed until the normal background command for display is output (until the continuous short reach effect is completed). The number of times is set to be incremented by 1. This execution count display update process may be set by adding update information of the execution count display to the display variation pattern command set by the voice lamp control device 113, or a new display may be set by the display control device 114. It may be configured to execute a process of adding 1 to the number of impressions when the variation pattern command for use is received.

When the process of S3554 is completed, the process of S3506 described above is executed, and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3552, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the continuous short reach effect (S3552: No), then it is determined whether the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is 1 or more (S3555). Here, when it is determined that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is not 1 or more (S3555: No), that is, the winning information for starting the continuous short reach effect while the continuous short reach effect is set. If is stored on hold, the process related to the continuous short reach effect is skipped, the process proceeds to the process of S3506, the process of S3506 described above is executed, and then the present process is terminated.

In the process of S3555, when it is determined that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is 1 or more (S3555: Yes), the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is added by 1 (S3556), and the continuous short reach counter 223be It is determined whether the value is one more than the upper limit value (S3557). Here, if it is determined that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is not one more than the upper limit value (S3557: No), the processing of S3558 and S3559 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S3506. This process ends after the process is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3557 that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is one more than the upper limit value (S3557: Yes), a normal background command for display is set (S3558), and the continuous short reach is set. The flag 223bf is set to off (S3559), the process proceeds to the process of S3506, the process of S3506 described above is executed, and then the process ends. In this way, by setting the display short reach background command until the value becomes one more than the upper limit of the continuous short reach counter 223be, the continuous short reach effect is executed by the third symbol display device 81. This can be displayed up to the first rotation after the end of the continuous short reach variation, that is, the variation corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous short reach effect (effect target variation). As a result, it is possible to execute a series of effects by a plurality of deviation fluctuations updated so that the short reach variation is executed as a continuous short reach effect and the effect target variation.

As described above, in the fourth control example, a symbol (hereinafter referred to as a reach symbol) that is a reach that is stopped and displayed in each short reach executed in the continuous short reach effect is given regularity. It is composed. The regularity of this reach symbol will be described in detail later, but the reach symbol stopped and displayed in continuous short reach is more game than the reach symbol stopped and displayed in the short reach executed one change before. It is structured so that it does not become a reach pattern that is disadvantageous to the person. With this configuration, when the continuous short reach effect is executed, in addition to the number of consecutive short reach for the player, the symbol (reach symbol) that is stopped and displayed at each short reach is also watched. It becomes possible to make it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the fourth control example, the variation after the continuous short reach effect is executed, that is, the variation corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous short reach effect (hereinafter referred to as the effect target variation). On the other hand, it is configured to execute a special effect related to the continuous short reach effect. Although a detailed explanation of this special effect will be described later, the running effect indicating that the continuous short reach effect is being executed is configured to be continuously displayed even during the change of the effect target change (the effect is changed). See FIG. 167 (b)). With this configuration, it is possible to execute a short reach continuous effect as a series of continuous effects including a change in the effect target, so that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect.

As described above, when the running effect indicating that the continuous short reach effect is executed is displayed even for the effect target change, the predetermined timing during the effect target change, that is, , If the reach mode is not displayed at the timing when the reach mode is displayed in the short reach (for example, 1 second after the start of the fluctuation), the player can easily grasp the end timing of the continuous short reach effect. There was a problem that the production effect could not be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, as the fluctuation pattern of the effect target fluctuation, the special fluctuation pattern (special reach) in which the reach mode is displayed at the same timing as the short reach (for example, one second after the start of the fluctuation). Is configured to be configurable. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the end timing of the continuous short reach effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

In the fourth control example, when it is determined that the continuous short reach effect is executed, each short reach variation executed in the continuous short reach effect is previously performed with reference to the effect reach symbol selection table 222da. It is configured to set the reach symbol. As a result, it is possible to execute a reach symbol advance notice effect that announces the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed in the next short reach, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, when the reach symbol is set in advance for each short reach variation, the reach symbol type that defines the reach symbol for each short reach variation is selected, so that the reach symbol is in line with regularity. Can be displayed reliably, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this way, in the continuous short reach effect, the reach symbol that is more disadvantageous to the player than the reach symbol once stopped and displayed is configured so as not to be stopped and displayed during the same continuous short reach effect. During the continuous short reach production, the game can be performed while expecting both the number of consecutive short reach and the reach symbol displayed as a stop, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this fourth control example, as in the second control example described above, when the continuous short reach effect is executed, it is a highly reliable effect that becomes a big hit with a high probability (about 85%), so that the game is played. The person will pay attention to which symbol (probability variation symbol or normal symbol) is hit, rather than whether or not it will be a big hit as a result of this continuous short reach production. Therefore, the single reach mode in which only the probabilistic symbol is the reach mode is set as the reach symbol which is more advantageous to the player than the double reach mode in which the normal symbol and the probabilistic symbol are the reach mode. If, as a result of the continuous short reach effect, the expectation of a big hit is not high, the double reach mode may be set as the reach symbol advantageous to the player rather than the single reach mode.

Further, during the continuous short reach effect, the mode of the reach symbol (normal symbol, probabilistic symbol or single reach, double reach) that is stopped and displayed at the next short reach may be suggested. In this case, for example, the suggestion notification is executed using the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the short reach, that is, the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row of the central region Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81. It is good to do it. With this configuration, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the short reach (variation time 2 seconds) is short enough that the player cannot sufficiently identify the symbol (for example, 0.25 seconds). Since only the stop display is displayed, it is possible to vaguely notify the player of the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed in the next short reach executed. This makes it possible for the player to expect the next short reach while suggesting the content of the next short reach to be executed.

In addition, the method of suggesting the mode of the reach symbol (normal symbol, probabilistic symbol or single reach, double reach) that is stopped and displayed at the next short reach during the continuous short reach effect is limited to the above. Instead, for example, some information of the symbol mode forming the reach symbol to be stopped and displayed (for example, visual information such as color and size, character information that makes the image of the symbol, etc.) is displayed in advance or stopped and displayed. A plurality of symbols including the reach symbol (plural within the range not including the total number of symbols) may be displayed. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect the next short reach while suggesting the content of the next short reach to be executed.

In addition, the reach symbol that has already been stopped and displayed may be displayed as a history display on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous short reach effect. As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the continuous short reach effect. In addition, a plurality of reach symbols that are advantageous to the player (for example, an order based on ease of winning or an order based on the privilege given at the time of winning) are set, and any of these orders is set. When is set and the continuous short reach effect is executed, the player can enjoy the continuous short reach effect while predicting the order set this time by checking the history of the reach symbols that have already been stopped and displayed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the fourth control example described above, the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed in the short reach is used to execute the effect of suggesting the result of the continuous short reach effect to the player. A symbol other than the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed in the short reach may be used to suggest the result of the continuous short reach effect to the player. For example, the type of the symbol that is stopped and displayed at the end may be the continuous short reach. You may suggest the result of the production. Even in this case, when it is determined that the continuous short reach effect is to be executed, the same effect as in this control example can be obtained by setting in advance a symbol that is stopped and displayed at the end due to the short reach fluctuation. be able to.

Further, when the arrangement of the symbols stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a predetermined arrangement (for example, an arrangement one frame deviated from the reach mode (so-called chance eye)), the player is expected to win a big hit. In the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration for notifying the above, a plurality of chances (for example, a single reach one-frame shift chance and a double reach one-frame shift chance) in which different jackpot expectations are set are the same. A chance eye mode in which the symbol is stopped and displayed in a Y shape, etc.) may be set, and the chance eye mode may be used instead of the reach mode of the fourth control example, or the reach mode and the chance eye mode may be combined. The degree of expectation that is advantageous to the player may be set step by step, and the continuous short reach effect may be executed.

In the fourth control example, in the continuous short reach effect, if the result of the continuous short reach effect is a hit, the number of consecutive short reach is 3 times, and the result of the continuous short reach effect is out of order. Is configured so that the number of short reach executed continuously is two times, but the number of times the short reach is executed in the continuous short reach effect may be determined by lottery. In this case, it is preferable to set so that the number of short reach to be executed is larger when the result of the continuous short reach effect is a hit than when the result is off. As a result, even when the short reach number is set by lottery, it is possible to execute an effect in which the higher the number of consecutive times is, the higher the expectation is.

In the fourth control example, it is a condition that the continuous short reach effect is executed that the short deviation of 2 seconds is continuously set a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to satisfy the condition even when a deviation variation with a long variation time is set. In this case, it is possible to execute the same effect as this control example by configuring the effect similar to the short reach to be executed a plurality of times in one variation pattern.

Specifically, when it is determined that the continuous short reach effect is to be executed in the prize command reception process, the prize command reception process is completed before (one before) the prize command that is the target of the determination, and the prize is won. The fluctuation time information of the winning information stored in the information storage area 223a is extracted. Then, a pseudo short reach effect pattern is set in which the short reach effect is executed a plurality of times within the variation time (for example, 15 seconds) set in the fluctuation time information. In this case, for example, as a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds, a fluctuation pattern in which the first pseudo-off variation (9 seconds) and the pseudo-short reach variation (2 seconds) are executed three times, and a second pseudo-off variation (11 seconds). ) And a variation pattern in which the pseudo-short reach variation (2 seconds) is executed twice, and a variation pattern in which the third pseudo-off variation (13 seconds) and the pseudo-short reach variation (2 seconds) are executed once are prepared in advance. However, when it is determined that the continuous short reach effect is to be executed in the winning command reception process, the variation pattern corresponding to the set number of short reach is set. With this configuration, even in a state where a large amount of winning information (reserved balls) is not accumulated, the continuous short reach effect can be suitably executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the fourth control example, the continuous short reach effect is executed by using the fluctuation time of the special symbol, but other periods (waiting period, period during the winning game, etc.) are used (the period during the game, etc.). It may be configured to perform a continuous short reach effect (in combination). For example, the same effect as the short reach may be configured to be feasible by using the ending period of the jackpot. As a result, it is possible to execute a continuous short reach effect even for the fluctuation of the first rotation after the end of the big hit.

In this case, when a plurality of winning information for winning a jackpot is set in the winning information set (stored) in the winning information storage area 223a, the ending period of the first jackpot game and after the end of the jackpot game A continuous short reach effect is executed using the special symbol variation set up to the special symbol variation corresponding to the next jackpot.

Specifically, when the winning information won in the second jackpot is set in the winning information set (stored) in the winning information storage area 223a, the winning information won in the first jackpot is used. The interval (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed between the winning information corresponding to the two jackpots) is calculated, and the jackpot is based on the calculation result and the number of short reach executed in the continuous short reach effect. Set the production mode of the short reach effect executed during the ending period of the game. Then, the short reach effect of the effect mode set in the ending period of the jackpot game is executed. With this configuration, a series of continuous effects (continuous short) using the ending period of the jackpot game and the special symbol fluctuation period executed after the jackpot game ends (straddling the jackpot game period and the special symbol fluctuation period). Reach production) can be executed. Therefore, immediately after the end of the big hit game (for example, the special symbol change of the second rotation after the end of the big hit game), even if the next big hit is won, the continuous effect (continuous short reach effect) is preferably executed. Can be done.

In addition, when using the above-mentioned configuration, if the next big hit is won in the first special symbol change after the big hit game is completed, the short reach effect executed during the ending period of the previous big hit game is special. It is advisable to make the specifications (for example, to make a premier design appear) and to give a special feeling to the player. As a result, in addition to the joy of winning consecutive jackpots, the joy of performing a special effect can be given to the player.

Further, in the above-mentioned example, an example using the ending period of the jackpot game and the special symbol variation executed after the jackpot game is completed is shown. It may be configured to perform a continuous short reach effect using the opening period of the game. In this case, since it is not necessary to execute the continuous short reach effect using the plurality of winning information set (stored) in the winning information storage area 223a, for example, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation that is won in the jackpot. You may set the continuous short reach effect when setting.

Specifically, when it is determined that the continuous short reach effect is to be executed in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 105) for the special symbol variation won by the jackpot, the special symbol variation time and the opening period of the jackpot game to be executed thereafter are executed. Use with and to set a variation pattern in which a continuous short reach effect is executed. As a result, the continuous short reach effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 across the timing when the special symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed (the timing when the big hit game is started). Then, the type of the jackpot game being executed this time is notified by the result of the continuous short reach effect that ends during the opening period. With this configuration, it is not necessary to execute a process of changing the fluctuation pattern of a plurality of winning information set in the winning information storage area 223a (a process of setting a continuous effect based on a so-called look-ahead process). It is possible to execute continuous production.

Furthermore, even if the above-mentioned continuous short reach effect is configured to be executed during the interval period of the jackpot game, and one jackpot game is used to execute an effect that makes the player think that he / she has won multiple jackpots. good. Specifically, in a gaming machine in which a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player (for example, 16 rounds jackpot) and a jackpot that is more disadvantageous to the player (for example, 8 rounds jackpot) are set as the types of jackpot games. During the interval period set between the 8th round and the 9th round, the continuous short reach effect is executed. Then, when the result of the continuous short reach effect is a predetermined result (the winning symbols are aligned), the big hit in-game effect that makes it appear as if a new big hit game has been executed is executed from the ninth round. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that he / she has won a plurality of big hit games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In the above-mentioned example, as the type of the jackpot game, a gaming machine in which a jackpot game advantageous to the player (for example, 16 round jackpot) and a jackpot more disadvantageous to the player (for example, 8 round jackpot) are set is used. In addition to the above-mentioned jackpot game, in the case of a specific discrimination result set as a part of the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be out of order, the game ball is played in the jackpot game. In a gaming machine having a privileged game (for example, a small hit) that opens a variable winning means that is opened so that a ball can be entered for a predetermined period (for example, 1.6 seconds), the production mode of the big hit game is the first half production mode and the second half. Divided into the production mode, the first half production mode is set in the same manner as the production mode of the small hit game, and the continuous short reach production is executed using the period (interval period) after the end of the first half production mode, and the continuous short reach production is performed. When the result is a predetermined result, the latter half effect mode may be executed. As a result, it is difficult to determine whether the small hit game is executed for the player or the first half effect mode of the big hit game is executed, and the player is executed after the continuous short reach effect executed after the first half effect mode. The latter half of the production mode can be thought of as the start of a new jackpot game.

Further, the above-mentioned various periods (that is, a period straddling a plurality of special symbol fluctuations, a period straddling the end period of the jackpot (small hit) game and the special symbol fluctuation executed after the end of the jackpot (small hit) game, the jackpot The special symbol change that won the (small hit) and the period that straddles the big hit (small hit) game start period in which the big hit (small hit) game is executed, the period during the big hit (small hit) game) is continuously executed. It is preferable to configure it so that multiple short reach effects can be executed. As a result, it is possible to standardize the effect data of the effect to be executed in various periods, reduce the capacity of the effect data, and execute the effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player. Can be done.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Concept of the invention using the center cover 620 as an example>
A game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device visibly arranged through the opening of the game board, and the liquid crystal display device by emitting light and receiving reflected light from the object of light. In a gaming machine provided with a sensor device for detecting the presence of the object on the front side of the liquid crystal display, at least the front surface is formed as a convex curved surface and a light transmissive material. A game machine A1 characterized by being provided with a front member made of.

Here, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device visibly arranged through the opening of the game board, and an object of the light (for example, a player's hand) that emits light. A gaming machine equipped with a sensor device (motion sensor) that detects the presence of an object on the front side of a liquid crystal display device by receiving reflected light is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-208139). In this case, if the sensor device is visibly exposed to the player, the player's interest is impaired. Therefore, the sensor device is arranged on the back side of the decorative member, and is difficult for the player to see. The sensor device emits light through the open portion on the side of the decorative member and receives the reflected light from the object of the light to detect the presence of the object. The sensor device detects the presence of the object, and the sensor device opens the side of the decorative member. The farther away it is from the part (retracted to the back side), the more difficult it is for the player to see it, but the range in which the object can be detected becomes narrower, and the sensor device is an open part on the side of the decorative member. The closer it is to the object, the wider the range in which the object can be detected can be widened, but it becomes easier for the player to see it. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor device.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, it is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, and at least the front surface is formed as a convex curved surface and includes a front member made of a light transmissive material, so that light is emitted from the sensor device. The emitted light can be reflected by the front member to reach the object, and the reflected light by the object can be reflected by the front member to reach the sensor device. Therefore, the sensor device can be arranged so as to be separated from the open portion on the side of the decorative member (retracted to the back side) by that amount, so that the sensor device can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the player, and the object can be placed. A detectable range can be secured. Since the front member is made of a light-transmitting material, the visibility of the design displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be ensured.

Further, since the front surface is a convex curved surface, when the light emitted from the sensor device is reflected by the front surface of the front member, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) is set to a sharper angle at a position close to the sensor device. On the other hand, at a position far from the sensor device, the angle of reflection (each reflection) can be made an acute angle, and the range in which the object can be detected can be easily expanded by that amount. The same applies to the case where the light reflected by the object is reflected in front of the front member.

In the gaming machine A1, the gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the thickness dimension of at least a portion formed as the curved surface of the front member is set to a substantially constant value.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, at least the thickness dimension of the portion formed as the curved surface of the front member is set to a substantially constant value, so that the front member acts as a convex lens. Can be suppressed to ensure the visibility of the design displayed on the liquid crystal display device. Further, since a space can be formed on the back side of the front member, a space for other members (displaceable members formed so as to be displaceable) can be secured by that amount.

The gaming machine A2 includes a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between the liquid crystal display device and the front member, and the front member has a first portion of the peripheral edge of the front member on the front side of the second portion. A gaming machine A3, characterized in that it is arranged at a position where

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, the front member is arranged at a position where the first portion of the peripheral edge of the front member is on the front side of the second portion. The first portion can be used as a passage when the displacement member is displaced between the back side of the board and the back side of the front member. On the other hand, since the second portion of the peripheral edge of the front member is located on the back side of the first portion, the curvature of the front member can be increased by that amount in the limited space.

The first part of the front member is arranged at a position substantially the same as the back of the game board or at a position on the front side of the back of the game board, and the second part of the front member is more than the back of the game board. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it is arranged at a position on the back side.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the first portion of the front member is arranged at a position substantially the same as the back surface of the gaming board or on the front side of the back surface of the gaming board. It is possible to more reliably suppress the displacement member from interfering with the first portion, and it is possible to increase the size of the displacement member by that amount. Further, since the second part of the front member is arranged at a position on the back side of the back surface of the game board, the curvature of the front member can be made larger, and the front surface of the front member can be illuminated by that amount. It can be easily used as a reflective surface. That is, it is possible to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making the sensor device difficult for the player to see.

In the gaming machine A3 or A4, a center frame disposed on the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board is provided, and the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable between the back surface side of the gaming board and the back surface side of the front surface member. A gaming machine A5 comprising a main body member to be formed and a rotating member rotatably arranged on the main body member, wherein a second portion of the front member is connected to the center frame.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3 or A4, since the second portion is connected to the center frame, the displacement member (main body member) is displaced to the back side of the front member and the rotating member is rotated. The wind generated by this can be blocked by the second portion (front member). As a result, it is possible to suppress the influence of the flow of the sphere by the action of the wind. Further, even if a wind is generated by the rotation of the rotating member and the dust or dust is blown off by the wind, it can be blocked by the second portion (front member), so that the blown dust or dust emits light from the sensor device. -It is possible to prevent the light receiving light from flying up on the optical path and deteriorating the detection accuracy.

In the gaming machine A5, the center frame includes a stage in which a ball is rotatably formed, and a second portion of the front member is connected to a range including at least the stage of the center frame. The gaming machine A6.

Here, it has been conventionally known that a back wall is erected on the stage of the center frame so that the ball rolling on the stage does not fall to the back side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating member wraps around from the standing tip of the back wall erected from the stage to the front side, or is folded back by the glass plate on the front side of the game board. It affects the ball that rolls on the stage. On the other hand, in order not to affect the rolling sphere of the stage by the wind, the back wall is curved to the front side so as to cover the circumference of the sphere of the stage (that is, to form a closed passage). , Since it becomes difficult for the player to see the ball rolling on the stage, the interest of the game is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the second portion of the front member is connected to a range including at least the stage in the center frame, so that the rotating member is rotated. The wind generated by this can be blocked by the second portion (front member). As a result, since it is not necessary to cover the periphery of the stage, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the ball rolling on the stage, and to prevent the flow of the ball from being affected by the action of the wind.

In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the first portion of the front member is disposed between the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board or the center frame at a predetermined distance from the gaming machine A7.

According to the gaming machine A7, in either the gaming machine A5 or the A6, the first portion of the front member is arranged at a predetermined distance from the inner edge or the center frame in the opening of the gaming board. , The back side and the front side of the game board and the front member can be communicated with each other through such a predetermined interval. As a result, it is possible to prevent the heat generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member) from being trapped on the back side of the game board and the front member.

The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A7, the first portion of the front member is formed in a region on the upper side in the vertical direction of the peripheral edge of the front member.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the first portion of the front member is formed in the upper region of the peripheral edge of the front member in the vertical direction, so that the rotating member is rotated. The wind generated in the above can be flowed toward the upper area of the game area (the area above the opening of the game board), and the action of the wind can suppress the flow of the ball from being affected. That is, the ball flowing down the upper area of the game area is an initial ball launched from the launcher and flowed into the game area, and since its speed is relatively high, for example, it rolls on the stage of the center frame. Compared to a moving ball, it is less susceptible to the effects of wind. In other words, the wind can flow toward the area where the ball is not easily affected by the wind. Therefore, the rotation speed of the rotating member can be increased by that amount, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Here, when heat is generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member), the air warmed by the heat is raised, and the first portion of the front member is on the upper side in the vertical direction of the peripheral edge of the front member. A gap (predetermined interval) formed in the region, that is, a gap (predetermined interval) for communicating the back side and the front side of the game board and the front member can be formed on the upper side. As a result, the heat generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member) is easily flowed to the front side of the game board and the front member through the gap, and the heat is trapped on the back side of the game board and the front member. Can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the gaming machine A9 is characterized in that the front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is directed downward at least below the horizontal direction.

Here, since the front member is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, it is substantially faced with the player's face (facing directly in front of the player). Therefore, when the front surface of the front member is formed as a convex curved surface, the light from the fluorescent lamp installed on the ceiling of the store and other game machines is reflected toward the player, and the player feels dazzling. There is a risk that the visibility of the liquid crystal display device will deteriorate (the light from a fluorescent lamp or other gaming machine will be reflected on the front member, making it difficult to see the liquid crystal display device).

On the other hand, according to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A8, the front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is at least downward from the horizontal direction. The light incident on the front surface of the front member can be reflected downward. That is, when light from a fluorescent lamp installed on the ceiling of the store or another game machine is incident on the front of the front member, it is possible to suppress the light from being reflected toward the player, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the light from being reflected toward the player. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzling and the visibility of the liquid crystal display device from deteriorating.

In the gaming machine A9, the first portion of the front member is formed in a region on the upper side in the vertical direction of the peripheral edge of the front member, and the front member has at least a thickness dimension of a portion formed as the curved surface. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the horizontal component becomes larger toward the front surface located above the vertical direction while being set to a constant value.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, the first portion of the front member is formed in the upper region of the peripheral edge of the front member in the vertical direction, and the front member is formed at least as a curved surface. The thickness dimension of the part is set to a substantially constant value, and the horizontal component becomes larger toward the front located above the vertical direction, so the air warmed by the heat generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member) Can be raised along the back surface of the front member, and the raised air (heat) is communicated with the first portion of the front member (the game board and the back side and the front side of the front member (predetermined). It can be easily flowed from the interval)) to the front side of the game board and the front member. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from being trapped on the back side of the game board and the front member.

<Concept of the invention using the sorting device 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a passage member forming a passage through which a ball can pass and having a bent portion formed in a part of the passage member, the passage member includes an opening formed in a side wall of the bent portion. A game machine B1 characterized by.

Here, a gaming machine including a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-97764). In this case, a bent portion is also formed in a part of the passage member. By forming the bent portion, the throwing direction of the ball (the position where the ball flows out from the passage to the game area) can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, when a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member as in the conventional gaming machine described above, the flow of the ball in the bent portion tends to be stagnant. Therefore, when passing through the bent portion in a state where a plurality of balls are connected, the ball following the preceding ball catches up, and the ball following the preceding ball presses against the side wall, so that both cannot roll. , There was a problem that ball clogging may occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the passage member includes an opening formed in the side wall of the bent portion, so that when a plurality of balls pass through the bent portion in a continuous state, the passage member is rearward to the preceding ball. Even if the traveling ball catches up, it is possible to make it difficult to press the preceding ball against the side wall, and it is possible to easily continue the rolling of both. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

The bent portion is formed by connecting the first portion of the passage member and the downstream side of the first portion, and forming the first portion and the second portion in which the passing direction of the sphere is different. Means the range to be. In this case, the first portion and the second portion may be a passage extending linearly, a passage curved in a curved shape and extended, or these. It may be a passage having a combined shape of.

In the game machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member includes a vertical passage extending in a substantially vertical direction and an extending passage extending downward from the vertical passage, and the opening is the vertical passage. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that it is formed in a region where a passage and the extended passage intersect.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member is a vertical passage extending in a substantially vertical direction and an extended passage extending downward from the vertical passage. Since the opening is formed in the region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect with each other, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

That is, the region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect is a position where the ball flowing down (falling) in the vertical passage changes direction and starts rolling in the extending direction of the extended passage, and precedes. It is easy for the ball that follows the ball to catch up. Therefore, when the ball that follows the preceding ball presses against the side wall, both cannot roll and the ball is likely to be clogged. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, since an opening is formed in the region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect, even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball is used as the side wall. It can be difficult to press, and it can be easy to continue the rolling of both. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine B2, the opening is a region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect, and is formed on the left and right side walls when the ball rolls along the extending direction of the extended passage. A gaming machine B3 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the opening is a region where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect, and when the ball rolls along the extending direction of the extending passage. Since it is formed on the left and right side walls of the ball, even if the ball following the preceding ball catches up, it is difficult to press the preceding ball against the left and right side walls, and it is possible to easily continue the rolling of both. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine B3, the area where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect, the bottom wall serving as a rolling surface, and the back side when the ball rolls along the extending direction of the extended passage. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that an inclined surface that is inclined downward at an angle larger than the downward inclination of the extended passage is formed on the side wall of the machine.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, the area where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect, along the bottom wall serving as the rolling surface and the extension direction of the extension passage. On the side wall on the back side when the ball rolls, an inclined surface that is inclined downward at an angle larger than the downward inclination of the extended passage is formed, so that the ball flowing down (falling) in the vertical passage changes direction. When starting rolling in the extension direction of the extension passage, the ball can be quickly rolled by utilizing the downward inclination of the inclined surface. This makes it easier to roll the leading ball before the trailing ball catches up, and the trailing ball rolls the ball on the back side (along the extension direction of the extension passage). Since it can be suppressed from being pressed against the side wall of the back surface), it is possible to easily continue the rolling of both. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

The slope of the inclined surface may be a linear slope, a curved slope, or a combination of these. Further, the angle of the downward inclination of the inclined surface does not have to be larger than the angle of the downward inclination of the extension passage in the entire area of the inclined surface, and the angle of the downward inclination at least in a part of the inclined surface is extended. It is sufficient if the angle is larger than the angle of the downward slope of the passage.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed on the front side is provided, and at least the region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect in the bent portion of the passage member is the game. A gaming machine B5 characterized in that it is arranged on the front side of the board.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, at least the region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect (that is, the portion where the opening is formed) in the bent portion of the passage member. ) Is arranged on the front side of the game board. Therefore, when a ball is clogged at the bent portion of the passage member, the glass plate is opened so that the ball clogged at the bent portion on the front side of the game board. Can be accessed from the opening. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work of clearing the ball clogging.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the opening is a side wall in a region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect, and is a height position corresponding to the radius of the sphere from the bottom wall serving as a rolling surface. A gaming machine B6, characterized in that it is formed in a range including.

According to the gaming machine B6, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the opening is a side wall in the region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect, and corresponds to the radius of the sphere from the bottom wall serving as the rolling surface. Since it is formed in a range including the height position where the ball flows down (falls) in the vertical passage, when the ball reaches the bottom wall of the extended passage, the ball can be easily received in the opening. Therefore, even when the ball following the preceding ball catches up, it is possible to make it difficult to press the preceding ball against the side wall, and it is possible to easily continue the rolling of both. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B6, a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed on the front side is provided, and at least the region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect in the bent portion of the passage member is the game. The gaming machine B7 is arranged on the front side of the board, and the opening is formed to a size that allows a ball to pass through.

According to the gaming machine B7, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B6, at least a region (that is, a portion where an opening is formed) where at least a vertical passage and the extended passage in the bent portion of the passage member intersect is a game. Since it is arranged on the front side of the board and the opening is formed in a size that allows the ball to pass through, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of ball clogging.

That is, when the size of the opening is such that the ball cannot pass through, it is usually possible to use the opening to make it difficult to push the preceding ball against the side wall, except for the trailing ball. A form is formed in which the preceding sphere is pressed against the center of the opening, and the preceding sphere may be internally fitted (fitted) into the opening. In this case, the rolling of the trailing ball is hindered by the ball fitted in the opening, and the ball is clogged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B7, even when the preceding ball is pressed against the center of the opening, the preceding ball is pushed from the opening to the outside of the passage member (on the front side of the gaming board). It can be discharged to the game area), and it is possible to prevent the preceding ball from being internally fitted (fitted) into the opening. As a result, the rolling of the following ball can be continued, so that the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

Further, in this way, an opening is formed in a size that allows the ball to pass through, and the opening is arranged on the front side (that is, the game area) of the game board, so that the ball flowing down the game area can be prevented. It can flow from the opening into the passage member. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, when a sensor for detecting a winning ball is arranged downstream of the bent portion, in addition to the ball flowing into the passage member from the upstream of the bent portion, the ball flowing into the passage member from the opening is also used as a winning opening. It can be detected. In particular, in this case, since the opening (the area where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect) is arranged on the front side of the game board, the player can visually recognize the ball flowing into the passage member from the opening. be able to.

The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that the lower end of the inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated from the bottom wall of the extended passage by a predetermined distance in the gaming machine 7.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B7, the lower end of the inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated by a predetermined distance from the bottom wall of the extending passage, so that the lower end of the inner edge of the opening and the extending passage are set. A side wall can be left (formed) between the bottom wall and the wall. Therefore, even when an opening is formed to a size that allows the ball to pass through, it is possible to prevent the ball from unnecessarily flowing out from the passage member to the outside (game area) through the opening.

In the gaming machines B1 to B8, the passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the bent portion, is connected to the upstream side of the bent portion, and is extended substantially linearly along the width direction of the gaming region. The passage members are arranged in a posture in which the upstream side of the inclined passage is located at the center in the width direction of the gaming area and the bent portion is located outside in the width direction of the gaming area, and a pair of them. The gaming machine B9, wherein the winning device is positioned between the bent portions of the passage member of the above.

According to the gaming machine B9, the passage member is formed by inclining downward toward the bent portion, is connected to the upstream side of the bent portion, and is an inclined passage extending substantially linearly along the width direction of the gaming region. A pair of passage members are arranged in such a posture that the upstream side of the inclined passage is located in the center of the width direction of the game area and the bent portion is located outside in the width direction of the game area, and the bent portion in the pair of passage members is arranged. The winning device is located between.

In this case, if the angle of the downward inclination of the inclined passage is small (the downward inclination is gentle), the flow velocity of the ball becomes low, and the ball is likely to be clogged at the bent portion. On the other hand, if the angle of the downward inclination of the inclined passage is large (the downward inclination is steep), the flow speed of the ball can be increased and the ball clogging at the bent portion can be less likely to occur. The required space in the height direction becomes large, and it becomes difficult to arrange the winning device.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B9, since an opening is formed in the side wall of the bent portion, it is possible to prevent ball clogging in the bent portion, so that the angle of the downward inclination of the inclined passage is reduced accordingly ( The downward slope can be made gentle). As a result, the space in the height direction required for the arrangement of the inclined passage can be suppressed, and the winning device can be arranged. That is, the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine B9 is not possible with the conventional product, and is made possible only by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion as described above. ..

The gaming machine B9 is provided with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed on the front side, and at least a region of the bent portion of the passage member where at least the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect is on the front side of the gaming board. At least a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between a portion of the bent portion of the passage member arranged on the front side of the game board and a lower edge portion of the game area. A game machine B10 characterized by.

Here, an opening is formed in the center of the game board, and the liquid crystal display device is made visible to the player through the opening. In recent years, with the demand for larger liquid crystal display devices, the opening in the center of the game board has also become larger, so that the space between the lower edge of the opening in the center of the game board and the lower edge of the game area is narrowed. Therefore, in the conventional product, it is difficult to arrange the passage member and the member corresponding to the winning device described in the gaming machine 9 in the space between the lower edge portion of the opening in the center of the gaming board and the lower edge portion of the gaming area. there were. That is, as described above, when the angle of the downward inclination of the inclined passage is small (the downward inclination is gentle), the flow velocity of the ball becomes low, and the ball is likely to be clogged at the bent portion. On the other hand, if the angle of the downward inclination of the inclined passage is large (the downward inclination is steep), the flow speed of the ball can be increased and the ball clogging at the bent portion can be less likely to occur. The required space in the height direction becomes large, and it becomes difficult to arrange the winning device. Further, since the arrangement position of the bent portion in the vertical direction is lowered (lowered), it is difficult to secure a gap through which the ball can pass between the bent portion and the lower edge portion of the game area, and the bent portion is formed. It is necessary to provide out ports on both sides.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B9, the opening is formed in the side wall of the bent portion, so that ball clogging in the bent portion can be less likely to occur. The angle of the downward slope of the passage can be made small (the downward slope can be made gentle). As a result, since the arrangement position of the bent portion in the vertical direction can be raised (raised), it is possible to secure a gap through which the ball can pass between the bent portion and the lower edge portion of the game area. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide out openings on both sides of the bent portion. That is, in the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the game machine B9, the arrangement described in the game machine B10 (arrangement in which a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between the bent portion and the lower edge portion of the game area). Is an arrangement that is not possible with conventional products, and as described above, it is possible for the first time by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion.

<Concept of the invention using the rotating unit 500 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a rotation display device having a plurality of light emitting means and displaying an afterimage by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to a rotation position, the rotation display device is the plurality of light emitting means. The main body member includes a substrate in which the main body members are arranged in a row, a main body member that accommodates the main body member, and a base member that rotatably supports the main body member. The gaming machine C1 is provided with a plurality of through holes formed through the side wall facing in the rotation direction.

Here, a gaming machine having a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) and having a rotation display device for displaying an afterimage by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to a rotation position is known (for example,). JP-A-2015-100285, JP-A-2015-053968, etc.).

In this case, in the technique of JP-A-2015-100285, since the light emitting means is exposed, the appearance is impaired. On the other hand, in the technique of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-053968, the light of the light emitting means is visually recognized through a translucent member (push button). Therefore, the light emitting means is not exposed. However, in this case, even if the member (reel) on which the light emitting means is arranged is rotated, the rotation is not visually recognized, so that there is no point in displaying an afterimage by the afterimage effect. That is, the same display can be performed by arranging a plurality of light emitting means vertically and horizontally in a matrix and controlling the blinking of each of the light emitting means.

Therefore, the applicant of the present application has devised a rotation display device in which a substrate in which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged is housed in a main body member and the main body member is rotatably supported by a base member (not yet applied at the time of filing the present application). Known). According to this, since the light emitting means is housed in the main body member, it is difficult to visually recognize the light emitting means and the appearance is not impaired. Further, since the afterimage display by the blinking of the light emitting means is visually recognized in the state where the rotation of the main body member can be visually recognized, the interest can be enhanced. However, in this case, since the light emitting means is housed in the main body member, a new problem has been found that it is difficult to cool the light emitting means. Light emitting means (LEDs) and ICs / capacitors that control them are soldered to the board. If the heat generated by these light emitting means (LEDs) and ICs / capacitors cannot be sufficiently cooled, the solder melts. , May lead to poor contact.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the main body member has a plurality of through holes formed through the side wall facing in the rotation direction, the main body member is formed through the plurality of through holes when the main body member is rotated. The outside air can be taken into the inside of the. Therefore, it is possible to cool the heat generated when the light emitting means operates.

The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the main body member is formed in a container-like shape with an open back surface.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the main body member is formed in a container-like shape with the back side open, so that the outside air taken in from the through hole of the side wall is efficiently taken from the back side. Can be exhausted. Therefore, it is possible to cool the heat generated when the light emitting means operates. Further, by exhausting from the back surface side of the main body member in this way, it is possible to prevent such exhaust from affecting the ball flowing down (or rolling on the stage) in the game area.

In the gaming machine C2, the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view having a long shape along the diameter direction in the rotation plane of the main body member, and the front wall forming the front side is rearward toward the end side in the longitudinal direction. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that it is formed in a curved shape that retracts to the side.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the main body member is formed in a frontal view (that is, a rotation axis direction view) rectangular shape having a long shape along the diameter direction in the rotation plane of the main body member. Therefore, by utilizing the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation of the main body member, the air inside the main body member can be flowed to the end side in the longitudinal direction (outward in the radial direction during rotation) and exhausted from the back surface side. Therefore, with the flow of the air, the outside air can be taken into the main body member from the back surface side in the rotation axis and its vicinity. That is, since the rotation speed is low in the rotation axis and its vicinity, the efficiency of taking in outside air from the through hole of the side wall is poor (or cannot be taken in), but the circulation of air using centrifugal force (the back surface in the rotation axis and its vicinity). The outside air is taken in from the side, and the taken-in outside air is flowed to the end side in the longitudinal direction (outward in the radial direction during rotation) by centrifugal force to form the flow of air exhausted from the back side on the outer side in the radial direction). be able to. As a result, it is possible to cool the heat generated when the light emitting means operates. In particular, cooling of the light emitting means disposed on the rotating shaft and its vicinity can be achieved.

In this case, if the front wall forming the front side of the main body member has a shape parallel to the rotation plane of the main body member (that is, if the main body member has a rectangular parallelepiped shape), the longitudinal end portion (during rotation) due to centrifugal force. Since the angle of the portion where the air flowing outward in the radial direction changes direction toward the back surface side is substantially a right angle, a vortex is likely to be formed in such a portion. Therefore, the air flow is obstructed and smooth exhaust from the back surface side becomes difficult.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C3, the front wall forming the front side is formed in a curved shape that recedes toward the back side toward the end side in the longitudinal direction, so that the end side in the longitudinal direction (during rotation) is formed by centrifugal force. The air that flows outward in the radial direction can be gradually flowed to the back side, and the angle of the part where the air that has flowed in the longitudinal end (outward in the radial direction) turns toward the back side. Can be made larger than a substantially right angle, so that the formation of a vortex at such a portion can be suppressed and the air flow can be smoothed. Therefore, exhaust from the back side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, cooling of the light emitting means disposed on the rotating shaft and its vicinity can be more reliably achieved.

In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the main body member is characterized in that the open area on the back surface side in the rotation axis and the vicinity of the rotation axis is larger than the open area on the back surface side on the end side in the longitudinal direction. Machine C4.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2 or C3, the open area on the back side of the main body member in the vicinity of the rotation axis and the rotation axis is larger than the open area on the back side on the end side in the longitudinal direction. Is also increased, so the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation is used to allow the air inside the main body member to flow toward the end side in the longitudinal direction (outward in the radial direction during rotation), and from the back side on the outer side in the radial direction. By exhausting, when the outside air is taken in from the back surface side in the rotating shaft and its vicinity, the taking in can be efficiently performed.

In the gaming machine C4, the main body member is characterized in that the rotating shaft and the open portion on the back surface side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft are formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotating shaft.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open portion on the back surface side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft is formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotating shaft. It is possible to prevent the outside air on the back surface side of the rotation axis and its vicinity from being disturbed (flow in the rotation direction is formed) due to the rotation of the rotation axis. As a result, the outside air can be efficiently taken in from the back surface side in the rotation axis and its vicinity.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the base member is provided with a shaft member that rotatably supports the main body member, and the shaft member is reduced in diameter from the back surface side to the back surface side of the main body member. The gaming machine C6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the shaft member that rotatably supports the main body member on the base member has a reduced diameter from the back side to the back side of the main body member. Therefore, when the outside air is taken in from the back surface side in the rotation shaft and its vicinity with the rotation of the main body member, the flow of the outside air along the outer peripheral surface of the shaft member can be smoothed and the flow resistance can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to efficiently take in outside air from the back surface side in the rotating shaft and its vicinity, so that cooling of the light emitting means arranged in the rotating shaft and its vicinity can be more reliably achieved.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the substrate is housed in the main body member in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted or the surface opposite to the surface faces the side wall of the main body member. Characteristic gaming machine C7.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the substrate is in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted or the surface opposite to the surface faces the side wall of the main body member. Since it is housed in the member, the outside air introduced from the through hole formed through the side wall can be efficiently blown to the light emitting means or the IC / capacitor to enhance the heat dissipation effect. As a result, the heat generated when the light emitting means or the IC / capacitor operates can be effectively cooled. Further, the posture in which the substrate is housed in the main body member is a posture in which the front surface or the back surface of the substrate faces the side wall of the main body member, so that the width dimension of the main body member (the dimension in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction) is taken. ) Can be reduced. As a result, when the main body member (rotation display device) is stopped, the visibility of the member or device arranged on the back side thereof can be ensured.

A gaming machine C8, wherein any of the gaming machines C1 to C7 is provided with a smoke generating means for generating smoke in a displacement region of a main body member of the rotation display device.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, a smoke generating means for generating smoke is provided in the displacement region of the main body member of the rotation display device, so that the blinking of the light emitting means is made to stand out. Can be done. Further, while hiding the rotation display device by smoke, only the blinking of the light emitting means can be visually recognized, and the effect of light can be enhanced.

In the conventional rotation display device, it is difficult to obtain the effect of smoke because smoke is pushed out to the outer peripheral side as the main body member rotates. However, according to the present invention, a through hole is formed in the main body member. Is formed and the outside air can be circulated, so that smoke can be retained around the main body member. As a result, the light emitting means can be made to blink in an atmosphere filled with smoke, and the above-mentioned effect can be obtained.

As a smoke generator, for example, a type that heats and vaporizes water-based or oil-based oil (liquid) to generate smoke (smoke), and liquid (water-based / oil-based) is pressurized and diffused by a compressor and put into the air. Examples include a type that stays as fine particles and a type that ejects carbon dioxide gas.

In the game machine C8, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device visibly arranged through the opening of the game board, and a liquid crystal display device arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device and convex on the front side. A game characterized in that at least a main body member of the rotation display member is located between the liquid crystal display device and the front member, and the front member is provided with a front member formed of a curved surface and made of a light transmissive material. Machine C9.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of the game machine C8, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device visibly arranged through the opening of the game board, and a front surface of the liquid crystal display device. It is arranged on the side, is formed to be convexly curved toward the front side, and is provided with a front member made of a light transmissive material, and at least the main body member of the rotation display member is positioned between the liquid crystal display device and the front member. Therefore, the smoke generated from the smoke generator can be easily retained (easily confined) in the displacement region of the main body member. Therefore, it is possible to make the light emitting means blink in an atmosphere filled with smoke to make the blinking stand out, or to make it easy to visually recognize only the blinking of the light emitting means while hiding the rotation display device by the smoke. As a result, the effect of light can be enhanced. In particular, since the front member is curved convexly toward the front, it is possible to easily retain smoke in the space on the back side of the front member. As a result, it is possible to easily enhance the effect of producing light using the smoke described above.

<Concept of the invention using the rotating unit 500 as an example>
It comprises a base member, a main body member that is displaced between the first and second positions with respect to the base member, and a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the main body member, and the main body member is at least said. In a gaming machine in which the displacement member is displaced while being arranged at the first position, a rotating member rotatably supported by one of the base member or the main body member and the main body member are arranged at the first position. The main body member is arranged at the first position by being provided with a contact member disposed on the other side of the base member or the main body member while being faced to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so as to be in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the displacement direction at the time and the rotation direction of the rotating member are set substantially in parallel.

Here, the main body member includes a base member, a main body member that is displaced between the first position and the second position with respect to the base member, and a displacement member that is displaceably arranged on the main body member. A gaming machine in which a displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable while being arranged at a first position is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-162990).

In this case, when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the displacement member is displaced, the main body member may rattle with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member. Therefore, there is a method in which an engaging means for engaging the main body member and the base member is provided to suppress rattling. The engaging means is formed on one of the main body member or the base member and urged by the urging means, and is formed so as to be engageable with the engaging member and on the other of the main body member or the base member. It is provided with an engaged member to be disposed, and the engaging member is retracted while resisting the urging force of the urging means by utilizing the displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member (displacement toward the first position), and the main body is provided. When the member is placed in the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the urging force of the urging means to engage with the engaged member. As a result, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member is regulated by the engagement of the engaging means, and the rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

However, in such a conventional engaging means, in order to put the engaging means in the engaged state (the main body member is arranged at the first position), the engaging member is placed against the urging force of the urging means. Not only does it need to be retracted, but it also resists the urging force of the urging means when disengaging the engaging means (displaces the main body member from the first position to the second position). There is a problem that the engaging member needs to be retracted, and the driving force required for displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member increases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the rotating member rotatably supported by one of the base member and the main body member and the main body member abut on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member in the state of being arranged at the first position. Since it is provided with a contact member that is face-to-face and is disposed on the other side of the base member or the main body member, the contact member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, so that the main body member is relative to the base member. It is possible to regulate the displacement and suppress the rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member. In this case, since the displacement direction when the main body member is arranged in the first position and the rotation direction of the rotating member are set substantially parallel, when the main body member is arranged in the first position and from the first position to the second position. When displacing to a position, the rotating member can be rotated along with the displacement, so that the driving force required for displacing the main body member with respect to the base member can be suppressed.

The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the rotating member is formed of an elastic body whose outer peripheral surface side is elastically deformable at least.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the rotating member is formed of an elastic body whose outer peripheral surface side can be elastically deformed at least, so that the contact member comes into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. In this case, the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member can be elastically deformed so that the abutting member can easily hold the rotating member. As a result, the rotating member can be made difficult to rotate and the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member can be regulated, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

The elastic body is preferably a viscoelastic body exemplified by rubber, urethane, or the like. In this case, due to the vibration damping effect, it is possible to perform a vibration damping function or a vibration insulation function that damps and insulates the vibration input from the main body member to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member, and is arranged on the base member side. This is because it is possible to suppress wear and tear of various installed devices, loosening of fastening portions, and the like. In particular, when the displacement member is displaced periodically (for example, when it is rotated at a relatively high speed to function as a versa writer), vibrations with relatively small amplitude and high frequency are generated from the main body member to the base member. Since it is input to, it is particularly effective to adopt a viscoelastic body.

In the gaming machines D1 or D2, the rotating member is formed so as to be displaceable in the radial direction, and one of the base member or the main body member holds the rotating member in a state where the main body member is arranged at the first position. The gaming machine D3 is provided with an opposing member that is sandwiched and arranged to face the contact member and that faces the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so as to be in contact with the contact member.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the rotating member is formed so as to be displaced in the radial direction, and one of the base member or the main body member has the main body member arranged at the first position. In this state, it is arranged to face the abutting member with the rotating member sandwiched between them, and also has an opposing member that faces the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so as to be able to abut against the base member of the main body member due to the displacement of the displacement member. When the contact member comes into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member due to the rattling, the outer peripheral surface on the opposite side of the rotating member can be brought into contact with the facing member. That is, the rotating member can be sandwiched between the abutting member and the facing member. As a result, the rotating member can be made difficult to rotate and the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member can be regulated, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

The form in which the rotating member can be displaced in the radial direction includes, for example, a form in which a shaft that rotatably supports the rotating member is formed so as to be rotatable in the radial direction, and a shaft that rotatably supports the rotating member. The outer diameter of the shaft is smaller than the inner diameter of the insertion hole of the rotating member that accepts the shaft, and the outer diameter of the shaft fixed to the rotating member is smaller than the insertion hole of one of the main body member or the base member that accepts the shaft. The form to be used is exemplified.

In the game machine D3, the rotating member is provided with a shaft fixed to one of the base member or the main body member, and the rotating member is formed from an elastic body in an annular cross section having a shaft support hole through which the shaft is inserted. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the radial displacement of the rotating member is formed by elastically deforming the elastic body.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, the radial displacement of the rotating member is formed by the elastic deformation of the elastic body, so that the base of the main body member due to the displacement of the displacement member is formed. When a rotating member is sandwiched between the abutting member and the opposing member due to rattling with respect to the member, the elastic recovery force of the rotating member (elastic body) is used to rotate the abutting member and the opposing member. It is possible to easily hold the member more firmly. As a result, the rotating member can be made difficult to rotate and the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member can be regulated, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

Further, by configuring the rotating member to be displaced in the radial direction by utilizing the elastic deformation of the elastic body in this way, the shaft inserted into the shaft support hole of the rotating member can be moved in the radial direction. It does not need to be formed as a shaft, and can be formed as a shaft fixed to either a base member or a main body member. As a result, the structure can be simplified to improve durability and reduce product cost.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, a pair of the rotating members are arranged on one of the base member or the main body member, and the pair of rotating members is used when the main body member is arranged at the first position. A gaming machine D5 characterized in that it is arranged side by side with a predetermined interval in the displacement direction.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, a pair of rotating members are arranged on one of the base member or the main body member, and the main body member is the first of the pair of rotating members. Since they are arranged side by side with a predetermined interval in the displacement direction when they are placed at one position, the main body due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed while suppressing the driving force required when the main body member is displaced with respect to the base member. It is possible to effectively suppress rattling of the member with respect to the base member.

That is, when the contact member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member to regulate the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member, only one rotating member is in contact with the contact member. If there is, there is a possibility that the rotating member is rotated and the contact member is tilted, and the tilt of the contact member due to the rotation of the rotating member is a factor of rattling of the main body member due to the displacement of the displacement member. Become.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D5, since the pair of rotating members are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval, the abutting member abuts on the pair of rotating members at two locations at a predetermined interval. Therefore, it is possible to abut the rotating member without rotating it, and it is possible to prevent the abutting member from tilting. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the abutting member is a side that receives the rotating member when the main body member of the abutting surface to which the rotating member abuts is arranged at the first position. The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that an inclined surface that is inclined downward as it is separated from the contact surface is formed at an end portion.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the contact member is when the main body member of the contact surface with which the rotating member is abutted is arranged at the first position. Since an inclined surface that is inclined downward as it separates from the contact surface is formed at the end on the side that receives the rotating member, when the main body member is arranged in the first position, the inclined surface is used. The rotating member can be guided to the contact surface of the contact member. This makes it possible to suppress the driving force required when arranging the main body member in the first position.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the rotating member is disposed on the base member and the contact member is disposed on the main body member.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the rotating member is arranged on the base member and the contact member is arranged on the main body member, so that the weight is relatively heavy. Since it is not necessary to dispose of a bulky rotating member, the weight of the main body member can be reduced and the driving force required for displacement of the main body member can be suppressed. Further, when suppressing the rattling of the main body member due to the displacement of the displacement member, the weight of the main body member on the vibration source side can be reduced, so that the rattling can be easily suppressed.

In any of the game machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably arranged on the main body member, and the rotation plane of the displacement member is in contact with the rotating member of the contact member. The gaming machine D8 is characterized in that it is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotating member and the rotating shaft.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably arranged on the main body member, and the rotation plane of the displacement member is on the rotating member of the contact member. Since the contact surface to be abutted and the rotation axis of the rotating member are substantially parallel to each other, the driving force required when arranging the main body member in the first position and when displacing the main body member from the first position to the second position. It is possible to effectively suppress the rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member.

That is, since the displacement form of the displacement member is rotation, the main body member tilts the rotation plane of the displacement member due to the aging motion of the displacement member (the motion in which the rotation axis of the displacement member swings like a circle). It is vibrated in the mode to make it. Therefore, the rotation plane of the displacement member is substantially parallel to the contact surface of the contact member and the rotation axis of the rotation member, so that the contact surface of the contact member is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation member. It can be pressed against the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member from the direction. As a result, when the main body member is arranged in the first position and when the main body member is displaced from the first position to the second position, the rotating member is rotated, so that the driving force required for the displacement of the main body member is suppressed. By the contact of the contact member with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, it is possible to effectively suppress the rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member.

In any of the game machines D1 to D8, the driving means for generating the driving force and the transmitting means for transmitting the driving force to the main body member to displace between the first position and the second position are provided. The transmission means includes a rotating body that is rotated around the first axis by the driving force of the driving means, a crank member that has a pin portion that is eccentric from the first axis of the rotating body and protrudes from the rotating body. The pin portion of the crank member has a sliding guide groove, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove so that the pin portion is rotated about the second axis as a rotation center and the main body member is rotated with the rotation. In a state where the main body member is arranged at the first position with the arm member to be displaced, the straight line connecting the first axis of the crank member and the axis of the pin portion is the second axis of the arm member. The gaming machine D9, characterized in that it is substantially orthogonal to a straight line connecting the axial center of the pin portion of the crank member.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, rattling of the main body member can be effectively suppressed.

Here, in the present invention, the displacement direction when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the rotation direction of the rotating member are set to be substantially parallel. Therefore, if the rattling direction of the main body member at the first position is from the first position to the second position or vice versa, the rotating member tends to rotate in such a direction. It becomes difficult for the rotating member to exert the effect of suppressing rattling.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D9, when the main body member is arranged at the first position, the straight line connecting the first axis of the crank member and the axis of the pin portion is the second axis of the arm member and the crank. Since it is substantially orthogonal to the straight line connecting the axis of the pin portion of the member, even if the main body member tries to rotate the arm member due to its displacement, a force component in the direction of rotating the crank member is not formed (a state in which a force component in the direction of rotating the crank member is not formed. That is, a dead point) can be formed. That is, it is possible to suppress rattling of the main body member in the direction from the first position to the second position or vice versa. As a result, even if the direction of rattling of the main body member is from the first position to the second position or vice versa (that is, the direction in which the rotating member is easy to rotate), the crank member and the arm member are dead center. By forming the above, the rattling of the main body member can be effectively suppressed.

<Concept of the invention using the regulation unit 490 as an example>
In a gaming machine having a plurality of light emitting means and having a rotation display device for displaying an afterimage by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to a rotation position, the rotation display device is the plurality of light emitting means. The substrate is provided with a substrate in which is arranged in a row, a main body member accommodating the substrate, and a base member that rotatably supports the main body member, and the substrate has a surface on which the light emitting means is mounted. The gaming machine E1 characterized in that it is housed in the main body member in a posture substantially parallel to the rotation axis.

Here, a gaming machine having a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) and having a rotation display device for displaying an afterimage by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to a rotation position is known (for example,). JP-A-2015-100285, JP-A-2015-053968, etc.). However, in the above-mentioned conventional technique, the posture of the substrate is a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the axis of rotation (that is, a rotation plane in which the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is directed to the front side (player side). Since it is in a parallel posture), the outer shape in front view (rotational axis direction view) becomes large. Therefore, there is a problem that the visibility of the back side of the rotation display device is impaired when the rotation of the rotation display device is stopped.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, the rotation display device includes a substrate in which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged in a row, a main body member accommodating the substrate, and a base member rotatably supporting the main body member. The substrate is housed in the main body member in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member, so that the outer shape of the main body member in front view (rotation axis direction view) is suppressed. be able to. As a result, the visibility of the back side of the main body member can be improved in the state where the rotation of the rotation display device (main body member) is stopped.

In the gaming machine E1, the rotation display device includes a facing member arranged to face the surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the rotation display device includes facing members arranged to face each other on the surface on which the light emitting means of the substrate is mounted, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means faces each other. It can be reflected by a member and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotation display device. Therefore, even when the posture of the substrate is such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the axis of rotation, the light (blinking) of the light emitting means is visually recognized by the player, and an afterimage is displayed by the afterimage effect. Can be done.

In the gaming machine E2, the facing member is provided with a plurality of recesses that are recessed in a surface facing the substrate and are extended in a groove shape substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member, and the facing members are provided in the plurality of recesses. The gaming machine E3, wherein the plurality of light emitting means face each other.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the facing member is recessed in the surface facing the substrate and has a plurality of recesses extending in a groove shape substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member. Since a plurality of light emitting means are faced to each of the plurality of recesses, the light emitted from each of the plurality of light emitting means is passed through the plurality of recesses of the facing member, respectively, and the front side of the rotation display device (game). It can be emitted to the person side). That is, since the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted in a state of being partitioned by each concave portion, the division of light of each light emitting means can be clarified. As a result, the outer shape of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be clarified.

The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the recess of the facing member includes an end partition wall for partitioning an end portion opposite to the front side of the rotation display device.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E3, the recess of the facing member is provided with an end partition wall for partitioning the end on the opposite side to the front side of the rotation display device, so that light is emitted from the light emitting means. The light radiated to the concave portion of the facing member can be reflected by the end partition wall and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotation display device. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

In the gaming machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in a direction away from the light emitting means toward the front side of the rotation display device, and the light emitting means is positioned at a position facing the end partition wall of the recess. A gaming machine E5 characterized by being disposed.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in a direction away from the light emitting means toward the front side of the rotation display device, and the light emitting means is the end section of the recess. Since it is arranged at a position facing the wall, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be applied to the end partition wall, so that stronger light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotation display device. can. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

In any of the gaming machines E3 to E5, the gaming machine E6 is characterized in that a portion of the inner surface of the concave portion of the facing member is formed as an uneven surface.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E3 to E5, the concave portion of the facing member is formed as an uneven surface on a part of the inner surface thereof, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted. It can be diffusely reflected by the uneven surface and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotation display device in a state of being evenly dispersed. That is, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the opening of the recess from being visually recognized in a state of being biased toward a part of the opening.

The uneven surface may be a surface consisting of only convexes (projections) or a surface consisting of only concaves (dents). The convex or concave may be extended as a strip or groove. Further, the convex and concave cross-sectional shapes may be circular, elliptical, polygonal, or a combination thereof. That is, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary as long as a portion higher than the reference position and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, a plurality of portions (faces) capable of reflecting light are formed, and diffuse reflection is possible.

In the gaming machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from the front end of the rotation display device in the inner surface of the concave portion of the facing member, and the inner surface of the predetermined range is formed. The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that it is formed as a smoother surface than the uneven surface.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from the front end of the rotation display device in the inner surface of the concave portion of the facing member. Since the inner surface of the predetermined range is formed as a smoother surface than the uneven surface, it is possible to easily emit light toward the front side (player side) of the rotation display device, and the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be easily performed. The intensity of light can be increased. That is, when a concavo-convex surface is formed in a predetermined range from the end portion of the inner surface of the concave portion of the facing member on the front side of the rotation display device, light is diffusely reflected on the concavo-convex surface and the front side of the rotation display device ( Where the light emitted toward the player side) is reduced, the inner surface of the predetermined range is made a smoother surface than the uneven surface, thereby suppressing diffused reflection and the front side of the rotation display device. It is possible to increase the light toward (player side).

In the gaming machine E7, the predetermined range in which the uneven surface is not formed is characterized in that the cross-sectional area of the inner surface thereof increases toward the front end portion of the rotation display device. E8.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E7, the cross-sectional area of the inner surface of the predetermined range in which the uneven surface is not formed is increased toward the end on the front side of the rotation display device. (That is, the diameter is expanded), so that the light emitted toward the front side (player side) of the rotation display device can be expanded. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be expanded beyond the area of the light emitting surface (irradiated surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the light emitting means can be miniaturized.

In any of the gaming machines E6 to E8, the concave portions of the facing members are arranged in a row, and the uneven surface is arranged radially outward from the rotation axis of the main body member. The gaming machine E9, characterized in that the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the main body member is increased.

According to the game machine E9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E6 to E8, the concave portions of the facing members are arranged so as to be radially outwardly separated from the rotation axis of the main body member. Since the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the member is increased, the visible brightness (brightness of light) of each of the plurality of recesses can be made uniform.

That is, in the rotation display device, the displacement speed (peripheral speed) becomes faster as it goes outward in the radial direction from the rotation axis (rotation center). The light of the light emitting means closer to the axis looks brighter (brighter) than the light of the light emitting means farther from the axis of rotation (outward in the radial direction).

On the other hand, according to the game machine E9, the uneven surface disposed radially outward from the rotation axis of the main body member has a larger length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the main body member. The concave portion (light emitting means) that is radially outwardly separated from the rotation axis of the main body member is more diffusely reflected by the uneven surface (that is, the proportion of light directly visible to the player from the light emitting means is reduced). , Can be visually recognized as high-brightness light. As a result, it is possible to suppress the difference in brightness seen by the eyes at the arrangement position in the radial direction and make the brightness (brightness of light) uniform.

In any of the gaming machines E3 to E9, a cover member is provided which is covered with the front end of the rotation display device in the recess of the facing member and is formed of a light transmissive material, and the cover member includes a cover member. The gaming machine E10 is characterized in that an uneven surface is formed at least in a region facing the end of the concave portion.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E3 to E9, a cover formed from a light-transmitting material while being covered on the front end of the rotation display device in the recess of the facing member. A member is provided, and the cover member has an uneven surface formed at least in a region facing the end of the concave portion. Therefore, light is diffusely reflected by the uneven surface, and then the front side (player side) of the rotation display device is provided. ) Can be emitted. That is, since the emitted light can be expanded, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be expanded beyond the area of the light emitting surface (irradiated surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the light emitting means can be miniaturized.

In any of the gaming machines E3 to E10, a plate-shaped interposing member interposed between the substrate and the facing member is provided, and the interposing member includes the plurality of light emitting means and the plurality of recesses. The gaming machine E11 characterized by having a through hole formed through the position through which the pachinko machine is passed.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E3 to E10, a plate-shaped interposing member interposed between the substrate and the facing member is provided, and the interposing member includes a plurality of interposing members. Since a through hole is provided at a position through which the light emitting means and the plurality of recesses are passed, the light of each light emitting means is surely incident on the corresponding recess and is prevented from being incident (leaked) on the adjacent recess. can. As a result, the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted only from the corresponding concave portion, and the outer shape of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be clarified.

Further, according to the gaming machine E11, a structure for incident the light of the light emitting means into the corresponding recess through the through hole is formed from two members, the facing member and the interposing member. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case of being composed of members. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine E11, the interposition member is provided with a seat portion that comes into contact with the light emitting means, and the through hole is formed in the seat portion of the gaming machine E12.

According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E11, the interposition member includes a seat portion that abuts on the light emitting means, and the through hole is formed in the seat portion. Can be easily incident on the through hole, and leakage to the outside of the through hole can be suppressed. As a result, the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be increased. Further, since the seat portion is in contact with the light emitting means, it is possible to suppress the light of the adjacent light emitting means from being incident on the through hole, so that the outer shape of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be clarified.

In the gaming machine E12, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means is formed in a circular shape in front view, and the through hole is formed in a circular cross section having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface. The gaming machine E13, characterized in that the machines are arranged concentrically.

According to the game machine E13, in addition to the effect of the game machine E12, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means is formed into a circular shape in front view, and the through hole has a circular cross section having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface. Since they are formed and the irradiation surface and the through hole are arranged concentrically, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be efficiently incident on the recess through the through hole.

In the gaming machine E13, the gaming machine E14 is characterized in that the through hole has an inner diameter expanded from the substrate side toward the facing member.

According to the gaming machine E14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E13, the inner diameter of the through hole is increased from the substrate side toward the facing member, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is transmitted through the through hole. It can be efficiently incident on the concave portion through the recess. Further, since the area in contact with the light emitting means can be secured, it is possible to suppress the light of each light emitting means from leaking to the outside of the through hole. As a result, the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines E12 to E14, the gaming machine E15 is characterized in that the seat portion is formed so as to project from a surface of the interposing member facing the substrate.

According to the gaming machine E15, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E12 to E14, the seat portion is formed so as to project from the surface of the interposing member facing the substrate, so that the protruding portion faces the substrate. A space can be formed between the member and the light emitting means, and the heat generated by the operation of the light emitting means can be dissipated.

In the gaming machine E15, the interposing member is provided with a groove-shaped groove portion that is recessed in a surface facing the substrate and extends along a base portion of the seat portion.

According to the gaming machine E16, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E15, the facing member is provided with a groove-shaped groove portion that is recessed in the surface facing the substrate and extends along the base of the seat portion. The heat dissipation effect can be enhanced while ensuring the rigidity of the intermediate member. That is, by forming a groove-shaped groove extending along the base of the seat portion, the region recessed in the intermediate member is minimized, and the rigidity of the intermediate member is ensured while the light emitting means of the light emitting means. The space can be expanded to the part where the heat generated by the operation is particularly concentrated, and the heat dissipation effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine E15 or E16, the seat portion is characterized in that adjacent seat portions and their outer peripheral surfaces are connected to each other.

According to the gaming machine E17, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E15 or E16, the seat portion is connected to the adjacent seat portion and the outer peripheral surfaces of each other, so that the rigidity of the interposing member can be increased.

In this case, the outer peripheral surface of the seat portion may be circular so that the adjacent seat portions and the outer peripheral surfaces of each other are connected to each other. As a result, the outer shape of the group in which a plurality of seats are connected is formed unevenly, so that the space is secured and the heat dissipation effect is enhanced, and the unevenness of the outer shape is used to increase the rigidity of the interposing member. Can be increased.

<Concept of the invention using the sorting device 4700 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass, and a first privilege granting means that is arranged on the downstream side of the passage member and grants a predetermined privilege as the ball passes. An opening is formed in the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting means to a size that allows the ball to pass through, and a ball that has flowed out from the opening into the gaming area is formed so that the ball can pass through. The gaming machine F1 is provided with a second privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege upon passing through the game machine F1.

Here, a gaming machine including a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-97764). On the downstream side of such a passage member, a sensor device for detecting the passage of a ball of the passage member is provided, and when the sensor device detects the passage of the ball, a predetermined privilege is given. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the passage member only has a function of guiding the ball toward the downstream side (sensor device) thereof, and while the space required for the arrangement is increased, the game is given an interest. There was a problem that it was difficult to do.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, when the ball guided to the passage member passes through the first privilege granting means, a predetermined privilege is granted by the first privilege granting means. In this case, an opening is formed in the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting means to a size that allows the ball to pass through, and a ball that has flowed out from the opening into the game area is formed so as to be able to pass through. Since it is provided with a second privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege as the ball passes, it is possible to form a form in which the ball flows out from the opening to the game area while being guided through the passage member, and the outflowing ball. If the player has passed the second privilege granting means, the predetermined privilege can be granted by the second privilege granting means. As a result, the ball guided to the passage member not only passes through the first privilege granting means, but also flows out from the opening to the game area, and the outflowing ball passes through the second privilege granting means. It is possible to form a form and add interest to the game.

The second privilege granting means may be arranged at a position that can accept all the balls that have flowed out from the opening to the game area, or depending on the state of the balls that have flowed out from the opening to the game area. The spheres of the part may be arranged at a position where they are accepted and some spheres are not accepted.

Further, the privilege given by the first privilege granting means and the privilege given by the second privilege granting means may be the same privilege or may be different privilege.

In the gaming machine F1, the passage member includes a bent portion formed in a part thereof, and the opening is formed in a side wall of the bent portion.

Here, by forming a bent portion in a part of the passage member, the throwing direction of the ball can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, when the bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member, the flow of the sphere in the bent portion tends to be stagnant. Therefore, when passing through the bent portion in a state where a plurality of balls are connected, the ball following the preceding ball catches up, and the ball following the preceding ball presses against the side wall, so that both cannot roll. , There was a problem that ball clogging occurred.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F2, since the passage member has an opening formed in the side wall of the bent portion, when a plurality of balls pass through the bent portion in a continuous state, the passage member is rearward to the preceding ball. Even if the traveling ball catches up, it is possible to make it difficult to press the preceding ball against the side wall, and it is possible to easily continue the rolling of both. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

The bent portion is formed by connecting the first portion of the passage member and the downstream side of the first portion, and forming the first portion and the second portion in which the passing direction of the sphere is different. Means the range to be. In this case, the first portion and the second portion may be a passage extending linearly, a passage curved in a curved shape and extended, or these. It may be a passage having a combined shape of.

The gaming machine F2 is provided with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed on the front side, and at least a portion of the bent portion of the passage member on which the opening is formed is arranged on the front side of the gaming board. The featured gaming machine F3.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, at least a portion of the bent portion of the passage member where an opening is formed is arranged on the front side of the gaming board, so that the bent portion of the passage member When a ball is clogged, the glass plate can be opened so that the ball clogged in the bent portion can be accessed from the opening on the front side of the gaming board. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work of clearing the ball clogging. Further, when the game ball flows out from the opening of the passage member to the game area, the player can visually recognize the outflow mode, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F3, the second privilege granting means is characterized in that at least its entrance is arranged on the front side of the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, at least the entrance of the second privilege means is arranged on the front side of the gaming board, so that the gaming ball flows out from the opening of the passage member to the gaming area. At that time, the player can visually recognize the mode in which the outflowing ball enters the entrance of the second privilege granting means, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the second privilege granting means is connected to the passage member, and the connecting passage is provided with a connecting passage for guiding the ball passing through the second privilege granting means to the passage member. The gaming machine F5, which is connected to the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting means.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F4, a connecting passage for connecting the second privilege granting means to the passage member and guiding the ball passing through the second privilege granting means to the passage member is provided. Since the connecting passage is connected to the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting means, the ball flows out from the opening to the gaming area while the passage member is being guided, and the outflowing ball is the first. (2) When passing through the privilege granting means, the ball can be guided to the passage member through the connecting passage and passed through the first privilege granting means. Therefore, in addition to the awarding of the award by the second award-giving means, the award can be given by the first award-giving means, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, a distribution means for alternately distributing the entered balls to one and the other is provided, the passage members are arranged in a pair, and one of the pair of passage members is the vibration. A gaming machine F6, characterized in that it is connected to one of the distribution means and the other is connected to the other of the distribution means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, a distribution means for alternately distributing the incoming balls to one and the other is provided, and a pair of passage members are arranged and a pair of passage members are provided. Since one of the aisle members is connected to one of the distribution means and the other is connected to the other of the distribution means, it is possible to insert balls into the aisle member one by one. That is, since it is possible to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the passage member in a row, it is possible to suppress clogging of the balls in the passage member.

<Concept of the invention using the sorting device 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a passage member through which a ball can pass, a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed is provided on the front side, and the passage member has an entrance for the ball and is arranged on the front side of the gaming board. The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that at least a part of the downstream side of the entrance is arranged on the back surface side of the gaming board.

Here, a gaming machine including a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-97764). By using the passage (passage member), the ball that has entered the passage can be reliably thrown to a predetermined position. However, if the passage is arranged on the front side of the game board, there is a problem that the space on the front side of the game board is reduced by that amount. That is, the flow area of the ball in the game area is limited (reduced).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the passage member has an entrance on the front side of the game board, and at least a part of the passage member on the downstream side of the entrance is arranged on the back side of the game board. Since it is installed, it is possible to secure a space on the front side of the game board. That is, it is possible to secure a flow area of the ball in the game area.

In the gaming machine G1, the passage member is branched from the downstream side of the entrance, and is inclined downward toward one side in the width direction and the other side in the width direction of the game board, and is arranged on the back side of the game board. It is provided with a pair of inclined passages to be provided and a pair of second passages connected to the downstream side of the pair of inclined passages and at least a part of which is arranged on the front side of the game board, and is provided from the entrance. A gaming machine G2, which is also below and has a winning device arranged between the pair of second passages.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the passage member is branched from the downstream side of the entrance and is inclined downward and inclined toward one side in the width direction and the other side in the width direction of the game board. It is provided with a pair of inclined passages arranged on the back side of the game board and a pair of second passages connected to the downstream side of the pair of inclined passages and at least a part of them are arranged on the front side of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to secure a space (a ball flow area in the game area) on the front side of the game board by the amount of the inclined passage. Therefore, the winning device can be arranged below the entrance and between the pair of second passages. That is, the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine G2 is an arrangement that is impossible with the conventional product in which the passage member is arranged on the front side of the gaming board, and the inclined passage is arranged on the gaming board like the gaming machine G2. It was possible for the first time by arranging it on the back side of.

In the gaming machine G2, the second passage is formed as a bending passage having a bent portion formed in a part thereof, and an opening is formed in a side wall of the bent portion.

Here, by forming a bent portion in a part of the passage member, the throwing direction of the ball (the position where the ball flows out from the passage to the game area) can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, when the bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member, the flow of the sphere in the bent portion tends to be stagnant. Therefore, when passing through the bent portion in a state where a plurality of balls are connected, the ball following the preceding ball catches up, and the ball following the preceding ball presses against the side wall, so that both cannot roll. , There was a problem that ball clogging may occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the passage member has an opening formed in the side wall of the bending portion, so that the passage member passes through the bending portion in a state where a plurality of balls are connected. In this case, even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, it is difficult to press the preceding ball against the side wall, and it is possible to easily continue the rolling of both. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

The bent portion is formed by connecting the first portion of the passage member and the downstream side of the first portion, and forming the first portion and the second portion in which the passing direction of the sphere is different. Means the range to be. In this case, the first portion and the second portion may be a passage extending linearly, a passage curved in a curved shape and extended, or these. It may be a passage having a combined shape of.

In the gaming machine G3, the gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the opening is arranged on the front side of the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, the opening is arranged on the front side of the gaming board, so that the glass plate is opened when the ball is clogged at the bent portion of the second passage. By doing so, it is possible to access the ball clogged in the bent portion from the opening on the front side of the gaming board. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work of clearing the ball clogging.

In the gaming machine G3 or G4, at least a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between a portion of the second passage arranged on the front side of the gaming board and a lower edge portion of the gaming area. A gaming machine G5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3 or G4, at least a ball is formed between the portion of the second passage arranged on the front side of the gaming board and the lower edge of the gaming area. Since a passable gap is formed, it is not necessary to provide out openings on both sides of the second passage. Therefore, the space on the front side of the game board (the area where the ball flows down in the game area) can be secured by that amount, and the number of parts can be reduced to reduce the product cost.

In any of the gaming machines G2 to G5, one side of the gaming machine is provided with a mounting member formed in an open cross-sectional shape and the opened side is attached so as to face the back surface of the gaming board. The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that the inclined passage is formed between the back surface and the inner surface of the mounting member.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of either of the gaming machines G2 to G5, one side is formed in an open cross-sectional shape and the open side is attached so as to face the back of the gaming board. Since the attachment member is provided and an inclined passage is formed between the back surface of the gaming board and the inner surface of the attachment member, the back surface of the gaming board can also be used as a part of the inclined passage to form the inclined passage. It is possible to reduce the number of parts for. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

<Characteristic K group> (Pending look-ahead effect on hold)
The acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information stored in the storage means when the determination condition is satisfied are determined. The determination means, the display means for displaying the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the identification information by the dynamic display means. Based on the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the information and the storage means for storing the information, the display means causes the display means to display the identification symbol and displays the information on the display means. When the determination condition corresponding to the identification symbol is satisfied, the symbol display control means for changing the corresponding identification symbol to a different display mode, and the determination condition based on the information stored in the storage means. The specific condition is satisfied by the pre-determination means that executes the determination before the establishment of the above, the specific condition determination means that determines the establishment of the specific condition based on the determination result by the pre-determination means, and the specific condition determination means. When it is determined, it has a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect that changes the background display mode of the display area in which the two or more identification symbols are displayed to a different specific background display mode. The featured game machine K1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery executed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is configured to be hold-stored multiple times, and a hold symbol corresponding to the hold-stored number is displayed. There is something to do. As such a gaming machine, a determination is executed in advance for the information stored on hold, and an effect suggesting the determination result is determined in advance by the time a lottery based on the pre-determined hold storage is executed. There is one that executes an effect using a reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved storage (so-called hold look-ahead notice effect) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-3400038). In this hold look-ahead notice effect, for example, an effect of suggesting a preliminary determination result to the player is executed by changing the display mode of the hold symbol.

In such a conventional gaming machine, since the effect suggesting the pre-determination result is executed by using the hold symbol corresponding to the pre-determined hold memory, the player is interested in the hold symbol on which the effect is executed. It was possible to have it, but there was a problem that the player's interest in other reserved symbols diminished and he got tired of the game early. The purpose is to solve the above-exemplified problems.

According to the gaming machine K1, the information acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition is stored by the storage means. When the determination condition is satisfied, the information stored in the storage means is determined by the determination means, the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means is displayed on the display means, and the identification information is displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. It is displayed dynamically. Then, the dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. Based on the fact that the information is stored in the storage means, the identification symbol is displayed on the display means, and when the determination condition corresponding to the identification symbol displayed on the display means is satisfied, the corresponding identification symbol is controlled to display the symbol. The display mode is varied depending on the means, and the determination is executed by the pre-determination means before the determination condition is satisfied based on the information stored in the storage means. In addition, when the establishment of the specific condition is determined by the specific condition determination means based on the determination result by the prior determination means, the background display mode of the display area in which two or more identification symbols are displayed is different from the specific background display. The specific effect to be varied according to the mode is executed by the specific effect executing means.

As a result, the background display mode of the display area in which two or more identification symbols are displayed is variably displayed in the specific background display mode based on the judgment result by the pre-determination means, so that the specific condition is satisfied by the pre-determination means. It becomes difficult for the player to identify the identification information for which the determination is made, and it is possible to make the player interested in the identification symbol for the area where the specific effect is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect including at least a display area of the identification symbol displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect including at least the display area of the identification symbol displayed on the display means.

As a result, since the specific effect is executed including at least the display area in which the identification symbol is displayed, there is an effect that the player can be more interested in the determination result corresponding to the identification symbol displayed. be.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect for all display areas in which the identification symbol is displayed.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1 or K2, the specific effect is executed for all the display areas where the identification symbol is displayed, so that the specific effect is performed when the identification symbol is not displayed. Even when is started, there is an effect that the player can have expectations for the identification symbol displayed after that.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, there is an end condition determining means for determining whether or not the end condition for ending the specific effect is satisfied, and the specific effect execution end means has the end condition set by the end condition determining means. The gaming machine K4, characterized in that the execution of the specific effect is terminated when it is determined that the specific effect has been established.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the specific effect is continuously executed until the ending condition is satisfied, so that the player continues until the ending condition is satisfied. It has the effect of making the displayed identification symbol interesting.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the specific effect executing means displays the display area on which the identification symbol is displayed when the specific condition is satisfied in the first specific background display mode, and the identification symbol is displayed. The gaming machine K5 is characterized in that the display area in which the identification symbol that is not displayed is displayed is displayed in a second specific background display mode different from the first specific background display mode.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the identification symbol that may have been determined to satisfy the specific condition by the prior determination means and the identification symbol that does not have the possibility of being determined to be satisfied are distinguished and recognized by the player. This has the effect of making the player interested in a limited range of identification symbols displayed on the player.

In the gaming machine K5, when the identification symbol is displayed in the display area displayed in the second specific background display mode, the specific condition determination means is based on the information corresponding to the displayed identification symbol. When the determination is executed, the establishment of the specific condition is determined with a higher probability than the case where the determination is made based on the information corresponding to the identification symbol previously displayed in the first specific background display mode. A gaming machine K6 characterized by being there.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K5, since the specific conditions are easily satisfied, there is an effect that the specific effect can be continuously displayed.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K6, a dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information based on the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, and its operation. It has a dynamic display mode storage means in which a plurality of the dynamic display modes determined by the target display mode determination means are stored, and the dynamic display mode storage means includes, as a type of the dynamic display mode. The gaming machine K7, characterized in that a plurality of specific dynamic display modes set as specific types are stored.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K6, the types of the dynamic display mode are classified for each type, so that the player can easily understand the dynamic display mode. There is.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K7, the predetermining means at least determines the type of the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the information stored in the storage means. It is possible, and the specific condition determination means determines the establishment of the specific condition with a predetermined lottery probability based on the determination by the prior determination means that the type of the specific dynamic display mode is determined. A gaming machine K8 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K7, when a specific effect is executed, the specific effect is specified by the dynamic display corresponding to any of the displayed identification symbols. Since the type of the dynamic display mode is executed, there is an effect that the player can recognize that the specific type of the dynamic display mode is executed earlier.

In the gaming machine K8, in the first term specific condition determination means, the type of the dynamic display mode corresponding to any of the identification symbols displayed on the display means is the specific dynamic display mode by the prior determination means. The gaming machine K9 is characterized in that the establishment of the specific condition is determined by establishing a predetermined lottery based on the determination of the type.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K8, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied when the type of the specific dynamic display mode is determined for any of the displayed identification symbols. There is an effect that the identification symbol displayed on the player can be expected.

<Characteristic L group> (Round production)
A determination means that executes a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, an effect execution means that executes an effect based on the determination result by the determination means, and an effect based on a specific determination result are executed by the effect execution means. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player in the case, a plurality of the effect modes including the first effect mode are stored as the effect executed by the effect executing means. The effect storage means, the information storage means for storing the information corresponding to the executed first effect mode when the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means, and the execution condition. A notification effect execution means for executing a notification effect for notifying a player of specific game information based on the establishment, and a notification effect executed by the notification effect execution means based on the information stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine L1 is characterized by having a type setting means for setting the type of the above.

Here, it is suggested whether or not a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a gaming state (for example, a probabilistic gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as a gaming state after the winning game is completed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-119006). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to enjoy a production that suggests a gaming state after the hit game is completed while playing the hit game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game during the hit game.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the production mode of the effect executed during the hit game is determined by the type of the hit game, the player is early in the period until the hit game is executed. There was a problem that a problem of getting bored occurred. The purpose is to solve the above-exemplified problems.

According to the gaming machine L1, information corresponding to the case where the first effect mode is executed as an effect based on the determination result by the determination means is stored in the storage means, and the information is notified based on the information stored in the storage means. Since the type of the notification effect to be executed changes depending on the effect executing means, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation not only for the specific determination result but also for the execution of the first effect mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the trouble that the player gets bored at an early stage can be suppressed.

The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the first effect mode is set to a high ratio when the effect is executed based on the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the first effect mode is set so that it can be easily executed when the effect based on a specific determination result is executed. By executing this, there is an effect that it is possible to have an expectation for the specific determination result before the effect result is notified.

In the gaming machine L1 or L2, as a privilege given to the player, at least one of a plurality of different benefits is given based on the establishment of the privilege giving condition, and a privilege given to the player by the privilege giving means. The game is characterized in that it has a privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege, and the notification effect is such that notification based on the privilege type determined by the privilege type determining means is executed. Machine L3.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the notification is executed based on the type of the privilege determined by the privilege type determining means by the notification effect, so that the notification is given to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to recognize the type of privilege.

In the gaming machine L3, the privilege type determining means is either a normal gaming state or a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state as the gaming state given to the player after the execution of the privilege game. The gaming machine L4 is characterized in that at least one of them can be determined, and the notification effect is executed during the execution of the privileged game.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L3, the player can know the gaming state given after the privileged game by the notification effect even during the privileged game, and suppresses getting bored during the privileged game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L4, the type setting means sets a type of notification effect corresponding to the number of times the first effect mode is executed during a specific period. Machine L5.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L4, even if the first effect mode is executed and the privileged game is not executed, it is executed in the privileged game executed thereafter. Since the specific effect is variable, there is an effect that the value of the first effect mode can be increased for the player.

In the gaming machine L4 or L5, as the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game in which the execution period of the privilege game is set in the first period and the first privilege game are longer than the first privilege game. At least the second privilege game set in the execution period is set, and the type determination means is set depending on whether the first privilege game is executed or the second privilege game is executed. A gaming machine L6 characterized in that the type of notification effect is variably set.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1 or L5, the type of the notification effect is set to be variable depending on the execution period of the privilege game, so that the player can perform the notification effect according to the length of the privilege game. There is an effect that it is possible to perform an effect according to the period during which the notification effect can be executed.

<Characteristic M group> (Reach continuous production)
The main control means for executing the main control of the game and the sub-control means for executing the control of the game based on the signal output from the main control means, and the main control means satisfies the determination condition. The determination means that executes the determination based on the above, the determination information output means that outputs the determination information signal based on the determination result by the determination means to the slave control means, and the determination result by the determination means are specific determination results. A privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the above, and the slave control means for notifying the player of the determination result based on the determination information signal. In a gaming machine having an effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode, the main control means determines type information of the effect aspect determined by the effect mode determining means based on the determination result. It has a determination means and a determination information signal generation means that generates the determination information signal at least based on the determination result by the determination means and the type information determined by the type information determination means, and determines the effect mode. When the first condition is satisfied, the means determines the effect mode of 1 from the type of the effect mode corresponding to the type information specified by the determination information signal, and meets the first condition. When a different second condition is satisfied, the effect mode is determined from a specific type of effect mode different from the type of the effect mode corresponding to the type information specified by the determination information signal. A gaming machine M1 characterized by being a pachinko machine.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning command is transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. In such a gaming machine, reach information indicating the production mode of the special symbol variation effect corresponding to the winning command is set in the transmitted winning command, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning command is executed. In some cases, the variation effect is executed based on the reach information included in the winning command (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-233993). This reduces the control load of the effect control device.

In such a conventional gaming machine, since the effect control device determines the effect mode of the corresponding special symbol variation effect when the effect control device receives the prize command, the special pattern corresponding to the prize command is received after the prize command is received. Even if the game conditions are changed during the period until the symbol variation effect is executed, the effect mode of the special symbol variation effect cannot be changed, and the player is provided with a monotonous effect. There was a problem. The purpose is to solve the above-exemplified problems.

According to the gaming machine M1, when the first condition is satisfied, the effect mode is determined from the type of the effect mode instructed by the main control means, but the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. In this case, the effect mode is determined from the type of the specific effect mode different from the type of the effect mode instructed by the main control means. Therefore, when the second condition is satisfied, the main control means A different type of effect from the instruction will be executed, and the pattern of the effect to be executed can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored at an early stage.

In the gaming machine M2, the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring information determined by the determination means based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means. A pre-determination means that executes a determination before the determination condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied, and a pre-determination signal based on the determination result by the pre-determination means are sent to the slave control means. It is characterized in that it has a pre-determination signal output means for outputting, and the sub-control means has a condition determination means for determining the establishment of the second condition based on the received pre-determination signal. Game machine M2 to play.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the establishment of the second condition is determined based on the pre-determination signal before the determination by the determination means. By executing the effect corresponding to the type of the mode, there is an effect that the determination result notified by the effect executed after that can be notified in advance.

In the gaming machines M1 or M2, the effect mode includes at least a display effect of dynamically displaying identification information based on the determination result indicated by the determination information signal on the display means, and the identification information includes a plurality of the identification information. It is characterized in that it is composed of a plurality of symbol rows composed of different symbols, and the determination result is notified to the player by the symbol combination of the respective symbol rows stopped and displayed in a predetermined area of the display means. The gaming machine M3.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M1 or M2, in the effect based on the determination result, a display effect of dynamically displaying a plurality of symbol strings is executed, and the symbol strings are stopped and displayed. Since the determination result is notified by the combination of, it is possible to make the player more entertaining.

In the gaming machine M3, the type of the effect mode designated by the determination information signal is a type for at least two or more combinations of symbols stopped and displayed in a predetermined area of the display means. The gaming machine M4.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, a part of the combination is designated by the type of the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined area of the display means by the main control means, so that the symbol is displayed by the slave control means. It has the effect of facilitating the type selection of.

<Characteristic N group> (Continuous notice)
The information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the determination condition. The determination means for determining the above, the display means for displaying the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the display means specific to the display means. A player who executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information based on the determination result is displayed, and a game state after the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. In a gaming machine having a special gaming state determining means for determining whether to set a special gaming state that is advantageous to the above information, the identification information is a plurality of symbol sequences composed of a plurality of different symbols. The determination result by the determination means is notified by the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in the predetermined area of the display means, and the plurality of symbol rows are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. When the dynamic display is first stopped and displayed, the first stop symbol row and the symbol that is stopped after the first stop symbol row and stopped and displayed in the first stop symbol row are specified. The reach-forming symbol string that can be stopped and displayed in the reach display mode, which is a combination of symbols that can be the determination result of The gaming machine is composed of at least a specific result forming symbol sequence capable of forming a symbol combination for notifying the specific determination result corresponding to the symbol combination displayed in the reach display mode. Prior to the determination condition being satisfied, the pre-determination means for executing the determination of the information before the determination condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied, and at least the specific by the pre-determination means. The first stop symbol string when it is determined by the specific condition determination means for determining the establishment of the specific condition that is satisfied based on the determination result and the specific condition determination means that the specific condition is satisfied. A symbol display control means for controlling the first period from when is stopped and displayed until the reach forming symbol string is stopped and displayed so as to be a specific period across a plurality of times of dynamic display of the identification information. The gaming machine N1 characterized by having the above.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery executed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is configured to be hold-stored multiple times, and a hold symbol corresponding to the hold-stored number is displayed. There is something to do. As such a gaming machine, a determination is executed in advance for the information stored in the hold, and as an effect suggesting the determination result, a plurality of lottery until the lottery based on the hold memory determined in advance is executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-35555).

In such a conventional gaming machine, the player can be interested in the lottery in which the result is notified by using the continuous production, but other reserved symbols, that is, during the continuous production. There is a problem that the player's interest in the lottery to be executed is diminished, and the interest of the game is reduced. The purpose is to solve the above-exemplified problems.

According to the gaming machine N1, when a specific condition is satisfied based on the determination result by the pre-determination means, the first period from the stop of the first stop symbol sequence to the stop of the reach formation symbol sequence is a plurality of times. Since the identification information is dynamically displayed for a specific period, the player can be interested in the stop timing of the symbol row, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine N1 is characterized in that the specific period is such that the first period in the identification information a plurality of times is set in the same period.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the first period is set to the same period across the dynamic display of the identification information a plurality of times, so that the player can tell that the specific period is set. It has the effect of being able to inform you in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, when the symbol display control means sets the specific period by the symbol display control means, in the dynamic display of the identification information based on a determination result other than the specific determination result, the said The gaming machine N3 is characterized in that a second period from when the reach forming symbol string is stopped and displayed until the specific result forming symbol string is stopped and displayed is set as a special period.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1 or N2, a special period is set in the dynamic display of the identification information in which the specific determination result is not notified when the specific period is formed. There is an effect that the player can be made to recognize that the specific condition has been determined by the specific condition determination means in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine N3, the gaming machine N4 is characterized in that the special period is set in the same period as the specific period.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N3, the special period and the specific period are set in the same period, so that the player can better understand that the specific condition is determined by the specific condition determination means. It has the effect of being easily recognized.

<Characteristic O group> (Rank up production by design)
Based on the acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the determination condition. The determination means for executing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the display means. When the identification information based on a specific determination result is displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the game state as the game state after the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. In a gaming machine having a game state setting means for setting a special game state advantageous to a person based on the determination result, the identification information displayed on the display means is composed of a plurality of different symbols. The determination result is notified by a combination of the symbols which are composed of a plurality of symbol rows and are stopped and displayed in a predetermined area of the display means, and the special combination of the symbols for notifying the specific determination result. A specific symbol combination for notifying the player that the gaming state is given is set, and the dynamic display means is one of the plurality of symbol strings when the symbol sequence is dynamically displayed. It is possible to execute the first dynamic display mode in which the symbol string is stopped and displayed after the dynamic display is continued even after the other symbol rows are stopped and displayed, and the gaming machine is capable of executing the first dynamic display mode. The establishment of the specific condition is determined based on the pre-determination means that executes the determination based on the information before the determination condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied and the determination result by the pre-determination means. Of the specific condition determination means for determination and the symbol combination for notifying the specific determination result different from the specific symbol combination by the dynamic display means when the specific condition is determined by the specific condition determination means. The symbol sequence of 1 is different from the combination based on the specific determination result after the display is performed in the first dynamic display mode in which the symbols other than the symbol string of 1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol combination that gives the specific determination result. It has a symbol display control means for stopping and displaying a symbol and executing a specific dynamic display mode to be displayed in the first dynamic display mode which is the specific symbol combination in the dynamic display executed thereafter. The gaming machine O1 characterized by being.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning command is transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. In such a gaming machine, reach information indicating the production mode of the special symbol variation effect corresponding to the winning command is set in the transmitted winning command, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning command is executed. In some cases, the variation effect is executed based on the reach information included in the winning command (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-233993). This reduces the control load of the effect control device.

In such a conventional gaming machine, since the effect control device determines the effect mode of the corresponding special symbol variation effect when the effect control device receives the prize command, the special pattern corresponding to the prize command is received after the prize command is received. Even if the game conditions are changed during the period until the symbol variation effect is executed, the effect mode of the special symbol variation effect cannot be changed, and the player is provided with a monotonous effect. There was a problem. The purpose is to solve the above-exemplified problems.

According to the gaming machine O1, when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied based on the determination result of the pre-determination means, the specific dynamic display mode is displayed, so that the combination of symbols is not based on the specific determination result. In this case as well, there is an effect that the player can expect that the specific condition is satisfied based on the determination result of the pre-determination means.

In the gaming machine O1, the specific condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied based on the determination of the specific determination result by the prior determination means, and the symbol control means is the above. The identification information is dynamically displayed in the specific dynamic display mode until the dynamic display corresponding to the information determined as the specific determination result is displayed in the first dynamic display mode. A game machine O2 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, it is expected from the symbol displayed in the specific dynamic display mode that the specific determination result is the specific determination result to which the special gaming state is given. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machines O1 or O2, the pre-determining means can determine the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means after the privileged game when the specific determination result is based on the information. Yes, when it is determined by the pre-determination means that the special gaming state is not set as the specific determination result, and the establishment of the specific condition is determined by the specific condition determination means, the symbol display control means In the specific dynamic display mode, one symbol is dynamically displayed among the state in which one symbol in the specific symbol combination is dynamically displayed and the symbol combination based on the specific determination result other than the specific symbol combination. The gaming machine O3 is characterized in that a special dynamic display mode in which the displayed state is combined is displayed.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1 or O2, even when the specific dynamic display mode is displayed and then displayed as a symbol combination based on a specific determination result other than the specific symbol combination. Since combinations other than the specific symbol combination are also notified, there is an effect that the problem of extremely discouraging the player can be suppressed.

<Characteristic P group> (Mode change during hold notice)
The acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the determination condition are determined. A game when the determination means, the display means in which the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means is dynamically displayed, and the identification information based on the specific determination result are displayed on the display means. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the person, a symbol display means stored in the storage means, and displaying a symbol corresponding to each of the information before the determination condition is satisfied on the display means. The determination of the specific condition is determined based on the pre-determination means that executes the determination based on the information before the determination condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied and the determination result by the pre-determination means. A gaming machine having a specific condition determination means and a variable display means for changing the display mode of the symbol displayed by the symbol display means when the specific condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied. In the game state determination means for determining one game state from a plurality of game states, and a game information display means for displaying game information corresponding to the game state determined by the game state determination means on the display means. When the display mode of the symbol is variably displayed by the variable display means, and the game information is variably displayed in the game information corresponding to the game state in which the game information is different by the game information display means. The gaming machine P1 is characterized by having a specific symbol display means for variably setting the display mode of the symbol to a different specific symbol display mode.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a plurality of effect modes, and a mode switching effect that enables various effects to be provided by switching the effect modes and a game ball winning a prize at the start winning opening. The lottery executed based on the lottery is configured to be hold-stored multiple times, the judgment is executed in advance for the hold-stored information, and the effect of suggesting the judgment result is based on the hold-holding memory determined in advance. There is one that executes a look-ahead continuous effect that is executed using a period until the lottery is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-16167). According to this gaming machine, when the state in which the mode switching effect can be executed and the state in which the look-ahead continuous effect can be executed overlap, the effect is controlled so that only one of the effects is executed. , It suppresses the execution of uncomfortable production.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if the mode switching effect and the look-ahead continuous effect are executed in duplicate, the mode switching effect and the effect that the player feels uncomfortable are executed. It only executes the control that prohibits the execution of the look-ahead continuous effect in duplicate, and does not fundamentally solve the above-mentioned problem. In addition, since the control that does not execute the feasible effect is used, there is a problem that the effect becomes monotonous and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. The purpose is to solve the above-exemplified problems.

According to the gaming machine P1, when the gaming state is switched and the displayed game information is variably displayed in the corresponding game information, the symbol display mode is variably set to a different specific symbol display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the display mode of the symbol can be matched to the display mode corresponding to the game information that is variably displayed.

In the gaming machine P1, the gaming machine P2 is characterized in that the specific symbol display mode is a display mode before being changed by the variable display means.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P1, the specific symbol display mode is the display mode before the symbol is changed, so that the information in which the symbol is changed is displayed even when the gaming state is changed. There is no need to take over, and there is an effect that control processing can be facilitated.

The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that the gaming machine P2 has a determination control means for determining the establishment of the specific condition by the specific condition determination means based on the change to the specific symbol display mode.

According to the gaming machine P3, since the establishment of the specific condition is determined again by being changed to the specific symbol display mode, it is possible to give an opportunity to change the changed symbol to the specific symbol display mode again. effective.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, when the symbol is variably displayed in the specific symbol display mode, a suggestion display mode suggesting that the symbol has been changed to the specific symbol display mode is displayed at a predetermined timing. A gaming machine P4 having a suggestion display means.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, a suggestion display mode indicating that the specific symbol display mode has been changed is displayed. It has the effect of suppressing the trouble of being confused.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P4, the display before being changed to the specific symbol display mode is based on the fact that the determination condition of the information corresponding to the symbol displayed in the specific symbol display mode is satisfied. The gaming machine P5, characterized in that it has a notification means for notifying a notification mode based on the mode.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines P1 to P4, when the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the symbol displayed in the specific symbol display mode is started, it is changed to the specific symbol display mode. Since the notification mode based on the previous display mode is notified, the player can recognize the original display mode changed at the start of the dynamic display, and can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner. There is.

<Characteristic Q group> (Light emission control of Versa writer)
A decorative member having a support portion and having at least a first protruding region protruding from the support portion and a second protruding region protruding in a direction different from the first region, and a moving means for moving the decorative member. A plurality of light emitting means arranged in the first protruding region and the second protruding region of the decorative member, a movement control means for controlling the movement of the decorative member, and the plurality of light emitting means according to the movement control by the movement control means. The light emitting means is provided with a light emitting control means for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emitting pattern, and the light emitting controlling means is provided in a predetermined region of the moving region in which the decorative member is moved, in the first protruding region. It is characterized in that specific light emission control for controlling light emission in a predetermined period unit in the predetermined region can be executed by the light emission by the light emitting means and the light emission by the light emitting means in the second protruding region. Gaming machine Q1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. Further, the conventional gaming machine is provided with a display device (secondary display device) different from the display device (main display device) for displaying the variation display of the symbol, and is related to various effects displayed on the main display device. There is also a device that displays an auxiliary effect on a sub-display device. As the sub-display device, in addition to a display such as a liquid crystal display device, a versa writer or the like has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-51045).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when a versawriter is adopted as a sub-display device, the color and resolution of the image (afterimage) to be displayed may be limited due to the limitation of the light emitting unit. That is, there is a risk that it will be difficult to suitably perform the light emission effect by the versa writer.

According to the gaming machine Q1, the light emitting means in the first protruding region and the light emitting means in the second protruding region control the light emitting mode in a predetermined period unit, so that different light emitting modes are superimposed in a predetermined period. This is possible and has the effect of being able to emit light in a predetermined area in various modes.

In the gaming machine Q1, the movement control means is arranged in the light emitting means and the second protruding region arranged in the first protruding region corresponding to causing the predetermined region to emit light within the predetermined period. The gaming machine Q2 is characterized in that movement control is executed so that the light emitting means is moved to the predetermined area.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the light emitting means arranged in the first protruding region and the light emitting means arranged in the second protruding region are moved during a predetermined period. A predetermined region can be made to emit light in a light emitting mode by each light emitting means.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, afterimages are continuously displayed during the predetermined period when the light emitting means in the first protruding region or the light emitting means in the second protruding region is moved while emitting light in the predetermined region. A gaming machine Q3 characterized in that it is possible for a period of time.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the movement control means moves the decorative member within a predetermined movement range in a predetermined movement pattern as one cycle, and repeatedly executes the movement pattern for a predetermined period. A gaming machine Q4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, there is an effect that when a predetermined region is made to emit light, the light can be easily and continuously emitted.

The gaming machine Q4 is characterized in that the period in which the decorative member is moved by the movement control means in the movement pattern of the one cycle is shorter than the period corresponding to the time resolution of the human eye. Q5.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q4, since the light emitted by the light emitting means is recognized as an afterimage by a person, there is an effect that the light can be emitted in various light emitting modes.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the emission color of the plurality of light emitting means arranged in the first protruding region and the emission color of the plurality of light emitting means arranged in the second protruding region are different from each other. A gaming machine Q6 characterized by being capable of emitting light.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, there is an effect that the light emitting mode displayed in a predetermined area can be configured to be visible in various light emitting colors.

<Characteristic R group> (Problem countermeasures)
It is advantageous for the player when the display means for displaying the effect mode of the game, the effect mode determining means for determining the effect mode to be displayed on the display means, and the specific effect mode are displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game, a notification effect is executed to notify a player of game information during a period in which the effect mode is displayed on the display means. The movable effect having means and a movable effect executing means capable of executing a movable effect that hinders the visual recognition of the effect mode on the front side of the display area of the display means, and the movable effect executed by the movable effect executing means is The gaming machine R1 is characterized in that it is executed so as not to overlap with the period in which the notification effect is executed.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines are configured to be capable of performing various display effects by providing a plurality of display devices and moving some of them. Specifically, another display device is moved in front of one display device, and a plurality of display devices perform a complex display effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-185256).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when a part of the display device is movable, the display content of the display device on the back side may be obstructed by the display device on the front side. That is, there is a risk that the display content of the display device cannot be visually recognized normally.

According to the gaming machine R1, since the movable effect is executed so that the movable effect and the notification effect do not overlap with each other, it is possible to suppress a problem that the notification effect is hindered by the movable effect and the player cannot be notified normally. Therefore, there is an effect that the defect of the game can be suppressed.

In the game machine R1, based on the timekeeping means capable of measuring even when the power of the game machine is turned off, the acquisition means capable of acquiring the timekeeping data measured by the timekeeping means, and the timekeeping data acquired by the acquisition means. , The regulation discriminating means for determining whether the regulation condition for restricting the execution of the movable effect is satisfied, and the regulation discriminating means, when the regulation determination means is determined to satisfy the regulation condition, the movable effect executing means is used. The gaming machine R2 is characterized by having a regulatory means for regulating the execution of a movable effect.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R1, the execution of the movable effect is restricted based on the bulletin board data acquired from the timekeeping means, so the regulation conditions such as the number of executions are set for each time zone. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the movable effect from being excessively executed and the occurrence of a problem in the movable object by the movable effect.

The gaming machine R2 is characterized in that the regulation condition is such that the upper limit number of times of the movable effect is set at regular intervals.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2, since the upper limit number of times for each fixed period is set in the regulation condition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of bias in the production due to excessive execution of the specific effect. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the gaming machine R4 is characterized in that the notification effect is such that at least the notification effect display mode is displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines R1 to R3, the notification effect display mode is displayed on the display means as the notification effect, so that the game is visually recognized in the same position as when the movable effect is visually recognized. There is an effect that the player can play the game easily.

<Characteristic S group> (Mirror inside)
A decorative member having a support portion and having a protruding region protruding from the support portion, a plurality of light emitting means capable of irradiating the support portion side toward the protruding region, and the plurality of light emitting means are controlled to emit light. The decorative member corresponds to the plurality of light emitting means capable of guiding the irradiation light of each of the plurality of light emitting means arranged on the support portion to the protruding region. The gaming machine S1 is characterized in that a plurality of guide paths are formed, and the protruding region has a plurality of irradiation portions that irradiate the front side with irradiation light guided from each of the guide paths.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. Further, the conventional gaming machine is provided with a display device (secondary display device) different from the display device (main display device) for displaying the variation display of the symbol, and is related to various effects displayed on the main display device. There is also a device that displays an auxiliary effect on a sub-display device. As the sub-display device, in addition to a display such as a liquid crystal display device, a versa writer or the like has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-51045). Here, a general versa writer rotates a rod-shaped member containing a plurality of LEDs and switches the light emitting state of each LED according to the rotation position to obtain a predetermined image from the light locus of each LED. It can be displayed as an afterimage.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to continuously rotate an elongated rod-shaped member in which a large number of LEDs are arranged every time an effect using a versa writer is executed. There is a problem that a failure is likely to occur due to the action of force or the like.

According to the gaming machine S1, by emitting the irradiation light from the support portion to the protruding region, it is possible to emit light from each of the plurality of irradiation portions on the protruding region, so that the weight of the decorative member at a position away from the support portion is increased. It has the effect of reducing the increase in size and reducing the burden on the support portion.

In the gaming machine S1, the plurality of irradiation units are characterized in that adjacent irradiation units are arranged in close proximity to each other.

According to the gaming machine S2, since the plurality of irradiation units are arranged next to each other, there is an effect that various display modes can be formed by combining the light emission modes of the plurality of irradiation units.

The gaming machine S1 or S2 is characterized in that at least one of the plurality of irradiation units is provided with a light emitting display means capable of visually recognizing a predetermined symbol by emitting light. S3.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1 or S2, a predetermined symbol can be visually recognized by emitting light, so that the player can perform a novel display effect.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, moving the decorative portion within a predetermined moving range is a moving means, and moving control means for executing a moving control for moving the decorative member by the moving means in a predetermined moving pattern. The gaming machine S4, wherein the light emission control means controls light emission with a light emission pattern corresponding to the movement pattern.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the decorative member is moved and the light emitting means is controlled to emit light according to the movement pattern, so that various effects can be provided to the player. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine S4, the movement control means repeatedly moves the decorative member in a period shorter than the time resolution of the human eye, with the predetermined movement pattern as one cycle. ..

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S4, when the light emitting means emits light while the decorative member is moved, light emission by the decorative member moved in the next one cycle with the afterimage remaining. Is executed, there is an effect that various display modes can be provided to the player.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. The identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time, provided that the prize is won (or passed through the operating port). Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include light emitting members that perform light emitting operations and production members such as variable members that are variable by motors and the like. In such a conventional gaming machine, a wide variety of production operations can be realized by varying a plurality of production members (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).
However, with the diversification of the effect members, it may be difficult to appropriately set the effect operation.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately setting a production operation.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a support portion, a decorative member having a protruding region protruding from the support portion, and the support portion side can be irradiated in the direction of the protruding region. The decorative member has a plurality of light emitting means and a light emitting control means for controlling each of the plurality of light emitting means, and the decorative member receives the irradiation light of each of the plurality of light emitting means arranged on the support portion. A plurality of guide paths corresponding to the plurality of light emitting means capable of guiding to the protruding region are formed, and in the protruding region, a plurality of irradiation units that irradiate the front side with irradiation light guided from each of the guide paths. It has.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in which the plurality of irradiation units are arranged so that adjacent irradiation units are close to each other.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is a light emitting display means according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein a predetermined symbol can be visually recognized by emitting light from at least one of the plurality of irradiation units. Is arranged.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the moving means is to move the decorative portion within a predetermined moving range, and the decorative member is moved to a predetermined moving pattern. It has a movement control means for executing movement control to be moved by the movement means, and the light emission control means controls light emission with a light emission pattern corresponding to the movement pattern.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 4, wherein the movement control means repeats the decorative member in a period shorter than the time resolution of the human eye with the predetermined movement pattern as one cycle. Is to move.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the decorative member is provided with a protruding region protruding from the support portion. Light is emitted toward the projecting region by a plurality of light emitting means provided on the support portion side of the decorative member. Each of the plurality of light emitting means is controlled to emit light by the light emitting control means. The decorative member is formed with a plurality of taxiways corresponding to the plurality of light emitting means capable of guiding the irradiation light of each of the plurality of light emitting means arranged on the support portion to the protruding region. The protruding region is provided with a plurality of irradiation portions that irradiate the front side with the irradiation light guided from each taxiway.
This has the effect that the effect operation can be suitably set.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, since the plurality of irradiation units are arranged next to each other, the light emitting modes of the plurality of irradiation units are combined. There is an effect that various display modes can be formed.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2, a predetermined pattern can be visually recognized by emitting light, so that the player can see a novel display. There is an effect that the production can be executed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the decorative member is moved and the light emitting means is controlled to emit light according to the movement pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that various effects can be provided to the player.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, when the light emitting means emits light while the decorative member is moved, the following afterimage remains. Since light emission is executed by the decorative member moved in one cycle, there is an effect that various display modes can be provided to the player.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
S219 privilege game execution means
S405, S505 Discrimination means
S 602 , S610 Acquisition means S60 4, S612 Storage means S620 Preliminary determination means
S2206 Symbol display means
S3010 Specific condition determination means
S3151 variable display means

Claims (1)

An acquisition method for acquiring information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions,
A storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and
A discriminating means capable of discriminating the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and a discriminating means.
A display means that dynamically displays identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a display means.
When the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player, and the privilege game execution means.
A symbol display means for displaying on the display means a symbol corresponding to each of the information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied.
A pre-discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the information before the discrimination condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied.
Based on the result of the determination by the prior determination means, the specific condition determination means for determining the establishment of the specific condition and the specific condition determination means.
In a gaming machine having a variable display means for changing the display mode of the symbol displayed by the symbol display means when the specific condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied.
1. A background mode determining means for determining a background mode for determining a background aspect, and
A background mode display means for causing the display means to display a background mode corresponding to the background mode determined by the background mode determination means, and a background mode display means.
When the display mode of the symbol is variably displayed by the variable display means and variably displayed in the second background mode by the background mode display means, the display is variably displayed. A specific mode display means capable of displaying a specific mode in which information about a symbol can be identified, and a specific mode display means.
It has a means capable of displaying an identification mode in which a player can identify the number of information stored in the storage means during a period in which the second background mode in which the symbol is not displayed is displayed .
In the specific mode, the expectation information for showing the degree of expectation that the identification information corresponding to the symbol displayed in a variable manner is displayed in the mode for showing the specific discrimination result is identified. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be displayed in a possible manner .

Images